P126094 21 WL Om en Usc Digital

2021 GRAND CHEROKEE L
Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing what
steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you’ll find the app an important extension of
your Jeep® brand vehicle. Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly
202 1 G RA N D C H E R O K E E L
to the App Store® or Google Play® Store and enter the search keyword “JEEP” (U.S. residents only). OW NE R’ S M ANUAL
U. S. Canada
DOWNLOAD THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL,

RADIO AND WARRANTY BOOKS
mopar.com/om owners.mopar.ca
©2021 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés. Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC. Jeep est une Fifth Edition
marque déposée de FCA US LLC. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google. 21_WL_OM_EN_USC
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control,
vehicle. This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on resulting in an accident and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device
this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the or feature that may take their attention off the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios,
right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting
obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured. while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself unable to devote your full
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. attention to vehicle operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of
used in substitution therefore. cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Jeep® brand vehicle and to provide a convenient
Navigation/Uconnect manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover. reference source for common questions.
U.S. Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit mopar.com/om (U.S.), owners.mopar.ca
Booklet by calling 1-877-426-5337 or by contacting your dealer. Replacement kits can be purchased by visiting www.techauthority.com. (Canada) or your local Jeep® brand dealer.
Canadian Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the
Warranty Booklet or purchase a replacement kit by calling 1-800-387-1143 or by contacting your dealer.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a rideshare, a friend
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, or use public transportation.
phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust,
do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area WARNING
and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired
information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle. when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
21_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 INTRODUCTION .............................................................................................................................. 9 1
2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ................................................................................. 16 2
3 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ....................................................... 89 3
4 STARTING AND OPERATING ................................................................................................ 115 4
5 MULTIMEDIA ............................................................................................................................... 192 5
6 SAFETY ........................................................................................................................................ 222 6

7 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY .................................................................................................... 278 7
8 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE .......................................................................................301 8
9 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................................ 362
9
10 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE .....................................................................................................369
10
11 INDEX ............................................................................................................................................. 373
11
INTRODUCTION DOORS.....................................................................25 SEATS .................................................................... 34

Manual Door Locks ..........................................25 Manual Adjustment (Front Seats) —
SYMBOLS KEY........................................................ 10
Power Door Locks ...........................................26 If Equipped .......................................................34
ROLLOVER WARNING .......................................... 10 Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry ...........26 Manual Adjustment (Rear Seats)....................35
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS ......... 11 Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit......................29 Power Adjustment (Front Seats) —
SYMBOL GLOSSARY.............................................. 11 Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped ......................................................39
If Equipped........................................................29 Power Adjustment (Rear Seats) —
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Child-Protection Door Lock System — If Equipped .......................................................41
KEYS ....................................................................... 16 Rear Doors .......................................................29 Power Seatback Massage —
Key Fob .............................................................16 STEERING WHEEL ..................................................30 If Equipped .......................................................42
SENTRY KEY .......................................................... 20 Manual Tilt/Telescoping Steering Heated Seats — If Equipped ...........................43
IGNITION SWITCH ................................................. 20 Column — If Equipped .....................................30 Ventilated Seats — If Equipped .......................44
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition .........................20 Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Head Restraints ..............................................44
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED ......................... 21 Column — If Equipped .....................................30 MIRRORS ............................................................... 47
How To Use Remote Start................................22 Heated Steering Wheel — Inside Rearview Mirror.....................................47
To Exit Remote Start Mode .............................23 If Equipped .......................................................31 Illuminated Vanity Mirrors ..............................48
Remote Start Front Defrost Activation — UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK Outside Mirrors ................................................49
If Equipped........................................................23 TIPS — IF EQUIPPED .............................................31 Outside Automatic Dimming Mirrors —
Remote Start Comfort Systems — Introducing Voice Recognition.........................31 If Equipped .......................................................49
If Equipped........................................................23 Basic Voice Commands ...................................31 Power Mirrors ...................................................49
Remote Start Windshield Wiper De–Icer Get Started .......................................................32 Automatic Power Folding Mirrors —
Activation — If Equipped ..................................23 Additional Information .....................................32 If Equipped .......................................................50
Remote Start Abort Message ..........................24 DRIVER AND PASSENGER MEMORY Heated Mirrors — If Equipped ........................50
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED..... 24 SETTINGS — IF EQUIPPED ....................................32 Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse —
To Arm The System ..........................................24 Programming The Memory Feature ................33 If Equipped .......................................................50
To Disarm The System .....................................24 Linking And Unlinking The Key Fob To
Rearming Of The System .................................25 Memory .............................................................33
Security System Manual Override ...................25 Memory Position Recall ...................................34
Tamper Alert .....................................................25
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER Parking Lights And Panel Lights......................57 Electrical Power Outlets ..................................75
(HOMELINK®) — IF EQUIPPED ............................ 50 Headlights On Automatically With Wipers ......57 Power Inverter — If Equipped ..........................76
Before You Begin Programming Headlight Illumination On Approach ...............57 Wireless Charging Pad —
HomeLink®.......................................................51 Headlight Delay ................................................58 If Equipped ......................................................76
Erasing All The HomeLink® Channels ............51 Lights-On Reminder .........................................58 WINDOWS ............................................................. 77
Identifying Whether You Have A Rolling Fog Lights — If Equipped .................................58 Power Window Controls...................................77
Code Or Non-Rolling Code Device ...................51 Turn Signals......................................................59 Wind Buffeting .................................................79
Programming HomeLink® To A Garage Lane Change Assist — If Equipped..................59 POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED .................... 79
Door Opener .....................................................52 Automatic Headlight Leveling — Single Pane Power Sunroof —
Programming HomeLink® To A If Equipped........................................................59 If Equipped ......................................................79
Miscellaneous Device ......................................53 Battery Saver ....................................................59 Dual Pane Power Sunroof —
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® INTERIOR LIGHTS ..................................................59 If Equipped ......................................................80
Button ...............................................................53 Courtesy Lights.................................................59 HOOD ...................................................................... 82
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming .........53 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS ..............61 Opening The Hood ...........................................82
Security .............................................................54 Windshield Wiper Operation............................61 Closing The Hood .............................................83
Troubleshooting Tips........................................54 Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped ...............62 LIFTGATE................................................................. 83
EXTERIOR LIGHTS ................................................. 55 Rear Wiper And Washer ..................................63 To Unlock/Open The Liftgate ..........................83
Headlight Switch ..............................................55 Windshield Wiper De-Icer — To Lock/Close The Liftgate..............................84
Multifunction Lever ..........................................56 If Equipped .......................................................63 Adjustable Power Liftgate Height....................84
Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) — CLIMATE CONTROLS..............................................63 Hands-Free Liftgate — If Equipped .................85
If Equipped .......................................................56 Automatic Climate Control Descriptions Cargo Area Features ........................................86
High/Low Beam Switch....................................56 And Functions...................................................63 ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED ............. 87
Automatic High Beams — Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ...........69
If Equipped........................................................56 Climate Voice Recognition...............................70
Flash-To-Pass ...................................................57 Operating Tips .................................................70
Automatic Headlights ......................................57 INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT ...............72
Storage..............................................................72
Sun Screens — If Equipped..............................73
USB/AUX Control ............................................73
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR STARTING AND OPERATING Quadra-Trac II Operating Instructions/

INSTRUMENT PANEL Precautions —
STARTING THE ENGINE ..................................... 115
If Equipped .................................................... 128
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER ........................................ 89 Automatic Transmission ............................... 115
Shift Positions ............................................... 129
Instrument Cluster Descriptions .....................90 Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Ignition................... 115
Shifting Procedures....................................... 129
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER ........................................ 91 Normal Starting ........................................... 115
Quadra-Trac II System —
Instrument Cluster Descriptions .....................92 AutoPark ........................................................ 116
If Equipped .................................................... 130
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY ........................ 92 If Engine Fails To Start ................................. 117
SELEC-TERRAIN — IF EQUIPPED .......................130
Location And Controls......................................93 Cold Weather Operation
Selec-Terrain Mode Selection ...................... 130
Display And Messages .....................................95 (Below –22°F Or −30°C) ............................ 118
Instrument Cluster Display Messages......... 131
Engine Oil Life Reset .......................................95 After Starting ................................................. 118
QUADRA-LIFT — IF EQUIPPED ............................131
Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items ........96 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED ......... 118
Description .................................................... 131
HEADS-UP DISPLAY ....................................... 101 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS ........ 118
Air Suspension Modes .................................. 133
Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode PARKING BRAKE ................................................ 119
Instrument Cluster Display Messages......... 133
Message — Electrical Load Reduction Electric Park Brake (EPB) ............................ 119 Operation....................................................... 133
Actions — If Equipped ................................... 102 Auto Park Brake ............................................ 120 FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L ONLY —
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES .................104 SafeHold ........................................................ 121
IF EQUIPPED.........................................................134
Red Warning Lights ....................................... 104 Hold ‘N Go— If Equipped .............................. 121
POWER STEERING...............................................134
Yellow Warning Lights ................................... 107 Brake Maintenance Mode ............................ 121
STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED .............135
Yellow Indicator Lights .................................. 110 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ............................ 122
Autostop Mode .............................................. 135
Green Indicator Lights................................... 111 Ignition Park Interlock................................... 123
Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not
White Indicator Lights ................................... 112 Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock (BTSI)
Autostop......................................................... 135
Blue Indicator Lights ..................................... 113 System .......................................................... 123
To Start The Engine While In Autostop
Gray Indicator Lights ..................................... 113 8-Speed Automatic Transmission ............... 123
Mode .............................................................. 136
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II ......113 SPORT MODE — IF EQUIPPED ........................... 127
To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start
Onboard Diagnostic System FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION .................... 128
System ........................................................... 136
(OBD II) Cybersecurity ................................... 113 Quadra-Trac I Operating Instructions/
To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE Precautions —
System ........................................................... 136
PROGRAMS ........................................................114 If Equipped..................................................... 128
System Malfunction ...................................... 136
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS .............................136 PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST SURROUND VIEW CAMERA SYSTEM —
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ...................... 137 SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED..................................... 158 IF EQUIPPED .......................................................172
TRAFFIC SIGN ASSIST SYSTEM — Enabling And Disabling The ParkSense Zoom View ..................................................... 175
IF EQUIPPED.........................................................145 Active Park Assist System............................. 159 REFUELING THE VEHICLE ..................................175
Activation/Deactivation ................................ 146 Parallel/Perpendicular Parking Space VEHICLE LOADING .............................................176
Traffic Sign Assist Modes.............................. 146 Assistance Operation .................................... 160 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) ......... 176
Indications On The Display ........................... 146 Exiting The Parking Space ............................ 163 Payload .......................................................... 176
ACTIVE DRIVING ASSIST SYSTEM — ACTIVE LANE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM — Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)................ 176
IF EQUIPPED.........................................................147 IF EQUIPPED ....................................................... 163 Tire Size ......................................................... 176
Operation ....................................................... 147 Active Lane Management Operation ........... 163 Rim Size ......................................................... 176
Turning Active Driving Assist On Or Off ........ 148 Turning Active Lane Management On Inflation Pressure.......................................... 176
Indications On The Display ........................... 149 Or Off.............................................................. 164 Curb Weight................................................... 176
System Status................................................ 150 Active Lane Management Warning Loading .......................................................... 176
System Operation/Limitations ..................... 150 Message ........................................................ 164 TRAILER TOWING ...............................................177
PARKSENSE FRONT/REAR PARK ASSIST Changing Active Lane Management Common Towing Definitions......................... 177
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ....................................151 Status............................................................. 166 Trailer Hitch Classification............................ 179
ParkSense Sensors ....................................... 152 PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA............... 166 Trailer Towing Weights
ParkSense Display ........................................ 152 Zoom View ..................................................... 167 (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) .............. 180
ParkSense Warning Display.......................... 155 Viewing At Speed........................................... 168 Trailer Hitch Receiver Cover Removal —
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense .............. 155 TRAILCAM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ................ 168 If Equipped .................................................... 181
Service The ParkSense Park Assist FAMCAM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ................... 169 Trailer And Tongue Weight .......................... 181
System ........................................................... 155 NIGHT VISION CAMERA SYSTEM — Towing Requirements .................................. 182
Cleaning The ParkSense System ................. 156 IF EQUIPPED ....................................................... 169 Towing Tips ................................................... 184
ParkSense System Usage Precautions........ 156 Detection Range............................................ 171
Side Distance Warning System .................... 157 Service The Night Vision System.................. 172
Night Vision System Limitations................... 172
RECREATIONAL TOWING STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS ............. 220 SAFETY TIPS .......................................................275
(BEHIND MOTORHOME) .....................................185 Radio Operation ............................................ 221 Transporting Passengers.............................. 275
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Media Mode................................................... 221 Transporting Pets ........................................ 275
Vehicle............................................................ 185 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE Safety Checks You Should Make
Recreational Towing — Two Wheel PHONES ............................................................... 221 Inside The Vehicle ........................................ 275
Drive Models.................................................. 186 Regulatory And Safety Information .............. 221 Periodic Safety Checks You Should
Recreational Towing — Quadra-Trac I Make Outside The Vehicle............................ 276
(Single-Speed Transfer Case without SAFETY Exhaust Gas ................................................. 277
4WD LOW Range) Four-Wheel Drive Carbon Monoxide Warnings ........................ 277
SAFETY FEATURES.............................................. 222
Models ........................................................... 186
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ..................... 222
Recreational Towing — Quadra–Trac II IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Drowsy Driver Detection (DDD) —
with 4WD LOW Range ................................... 186 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS .........................278
If Equipped..................................................... 223
DRIVING TIPS ......................................................189 ASSIST AND SOS SYSTEM— IF EQUIPPED .......278
Rear Seat Reminder Alert (RSRA) ................ 224
On-Road Driving Tips..................................... 189 Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System ....... 224 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING ........................281
Off-Road Driving Tips..................................... 189 AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS.......................... 230 Preparations For Jacking ............................. 282
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) ........................ 230 Jack Location................................................. 282
MULTIMEDIA Spare Tire Stowage....................................... 283
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With
UCONNECT SYSTEMS ..........................................192 Mitigation....................................................... 233 Spare Tire Removal....................................... 284
CYBERSECURITY .................................................192 Tire Pressure Monitoring System Jacking Instructions ..................................... 285
UCONNECT SETTINGS .......................................193 (TPMS)............................................................ 236 JUMP STARTING .................................................290
Customer Programmable Features ............. 193 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ................... 241 Preparations For Jump Start ........................ 290
3RD PARTY APPS ...............................................217 Occupant Restraint Systems Features ....... 241 Jump Starting Procedure .............................. 291
OFF-ROAD PAGES — IF EQUIPPED ....................218 Important Safety Precautions ...................... 241 REFUELING IN EMERGENCY –
Off-Road Pages Status Bar .......................... 218 Seat Belt Systems ........................................ 242 IF EQUIPPED ........................................................292
Vehicle Dynamics ......................................... 219 Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) ...... 249 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS ...........................293
Accessory Gauges ........................................ 219 Child Restraints ............................................ 262 MANUAL PARK RELEASE ..................................293
Pitch & Roll ................................................... 219
Selec-Terrain — If Equipped ......................... 220
Suspension ................................................... 220
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE ..............................295 VEHICLE MAINTENANCE..................................... 308 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION

TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE .........................295 Engine Oil ...................................................... 308 UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES ....................358
Rear Wheel Drive Models ............................. 297 Engine Oil Filter ............................................ 309 Treadwear...................................................... 358
All Wheel Drive Models ................................. 297 Engine Air Cleaner Filter .............................. 309 Traction Grades............................................. 358
Emergency Tow Hooks — Air Conditioner Maintenance ...................... 310 Temperature Grades..................................... 358
If Equipped..................................................... 298 Accessory Drive Belt Inspection ................... 312 STORING THE VEHICLE .....................................359
Tow Eye Usage — If Equipped ...................... 298 Body Lubrication .......................................... 312 BODYWORK..........................................................359
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM Windshield Wiper Blades ............................. 313 Protection From Atmospheric Agents ......... 359
(EARS) ..................................................................300 Exhaust System ............................................ 315 Body And Underbody Maintenance ............. 359
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR).........................300 Cooling System.............................................. 316 Preserving The Bodywork ............................. 359
Brake System ............................................... 319 INTERIORS ...........................................................360
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Automatic Transmission ............................... 320 Seats And Fabric Parts ................................. 360
Front/Rear Axle Fluid ................................... 321 Plastic And Coated Parts .............................. 360
SCHEDULED SERVICING ....................................301
Transfer Case ............................................... 321 Leather Surfaces........................................... 361
Maintenance Plan ......................................... 302 Fuses.............................................................. 322
ENGINE COMPARTMENT ...................................305 Glass Surfaces ............................................. 361
Bulb Replacement ........................................ 340
3.6L Engine.................................................... 305 TIRES..................................................................... 341 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
5.7L Engine.................................................... 306 Tire Safety Information ............................... 341
Checking Oil Level ...................................... 307 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) ........362
Tires — General Information ........................ 348
Adding Washer Fluid .................................... 307 BRAKE SYSTEM ...................................................362
Tire Types....................................................... 352
Maintenance-Free Battery ........................... 307 Spare Tires — If Equipped ........................... 352 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
Pressure Washing ......................................... 308 Wheel And Wheel Trim Care ....................... 354 SPECIFICATIONS .................................................362
Snow Traction Devices ................................. 355 Torque Specifications ................................... 362
Tire Rotation Recommendations ................ 357
FUEL REQUIREMENTS ........................................363 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE WARRANTY INFORMATION................................371

3.6L Engine .................................................. 363 MOPAR® PARTS .................................................371
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
5.7L Engine.................................................... 363 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ..........................371
YOUR VEHICLE .................................................... 369
Reformulated Gasoline .............................. 363 In The 50 United States And
Prepare For The Appointment ...................... 369
Materials Added To Fuel .............................. 364 Washington, D.C............................................ 371
Prepare A List ................................................ 369
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ........................ 364 In Canada ...................................................... 371
Be Reasonable With Requests..................... 369
Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS ..........................372
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ................................ 369
Vehicles.......................................................... 364 GENERAL INFORMATION....................................372
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications ...... 365 FCA US LLC Customer Center....................... 369
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center............... 369
Tricarbonyl (MMT) In Gasoline...................... 365 Mexico............................................................ 370
Fuel System Cautions ................................... 365 Puerto Rico And US Virgin Islands................ 370
FLUID CAPACITIES .............................................366 Customer Assistance For The Hearing
Or Speech Impaired
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ...................367
(TDD/TTY) ...................................................... 370
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ................368
Service Contract ........................................... 370
INTRODUCTION
1
Dear Customer,
Congratulations on the purchase of your new Jeep® vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality. The all-new
Jeep® Grand Cherokee L continues to build on its proud legacy as the most celebrated SUV ever, while raising the bar in luxury and performance. With legendary
4x4 capability, this vehicle breaks new ground in exceptional performance, comfort, and functionality. We have improved on-road refinement and premium
styling and craftsmanship inside and out. With an unsurpassed blend of refined sophistication, dynamic performance, cutting edge technologies and levels of
elegance, the new Jeep® Grand Cherokee L carries an attractive presence and capability that is uncommon in its class, unquestionably Jeep® brand, and
unmistakably world class.
The Grand Cherokee L is a specialized utility vehicle and can go places and perform tasks that are not intended for conventional passenger vehicles. It handles
and maneuvers differently from many passenger vehicles both on-road and off-road, so take time to become familiar with your vehicle. If equipped, the two-wheel
drive version of this vehicle was designed for on-road use only. It is not intended for off-road driving or use in other severe conditions suited for a four-wheel drive
vehicle. Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls, particularly those used for braking, steering, transmission, and transfer case shifting. Always observe
federal, state, provincial and local laws wherever you drive. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control
or a collision Ú page 189.
Please take the time to read all of these publications carefully before driving your vehicle for the first time. Following the instructions, recommendations, tips,
and important warnings in this manual will help ensure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
This Owner's Manual describes all versions of this vehicle. Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or versions are not expressly indicated in the
text. Therefore, you should only consider the information that is related to the trim level, engine, and version that you have purchased. Any content introduced
throughout the Owner's Information, which may or may not be applicable to your vehicle, will be identified with the wording “If Equipped”. All data contained in
this publication are intended to help you use your vehicle in the best possible way. FCA US LLC aims at a constant improvement of the vehicles produced. For
this reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model described for technical and/or commercial reasons. For further information, contact an authorized
dealer.
When it comes to service, remember that authorized dealers know your Jeep® best, have factory-trained technicians, genuine Mopar® parts, and care about
your satisfaction.
10
SYMBOLS KEY ROLLOVER WARNING

These statements are against operating Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of
WARNING! procedures that could result in a collision, bodily vehicles. This vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center of
injury and/or death. gravity than many passenger vehicles. It is capable of performing better in a
These statements are against procedures that wide variety of off-road applications. Driven in an unsafe manner, all vehicles
CAUTION! can go out of control. Because of the higher center of gravity, if this vehicle is
could result in damage to your vehicle.
out of control, it may roll over while some other vehicles may not.
A suggestion which will improve installation,
Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other unsafe driving actions
NOTE: operation, and reliability. If not followed, may
that can cause loss of vehicle control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may
result in damage.
result in a collision, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal injury. Drive
General ideas/solutions/suggestions on easier carefully.
TIP:
use of the product or functionality.
PAGE REFERENCE
ARROW
Follow this reference for additional information on
a particular feature.
FOOTNOTE
Supplementary and relevant information
pertaining to the topic.
Rollover Warning Label

If you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss important Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts provided is a major cause of
information. Observe all Cautions and Warnings. severe or fatal injury. In fact, the US government notes that the universal use
of existing seat belts could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or more each
year and could reduce disabling injuries by two million annually. In a rollover
crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person
wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up.
11
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS Red Warning Lights

WARNING! Door Open Warning Light 1
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its Ú page 105
roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious
injury or death. Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault Warning Light
Ú page 105
SYMBOL GLOSSARY
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
Some car components have colored labels with symbols indicating
precautions to be observed when using this component. It is important to Ú page 105
follow all warnings when operating your vehicle. See below for the definition of
each symbol Ú page 104. Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light
NOTE: Ú page 105
Warning and Indicator lights are different based upon equipment options and
current vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and may not appear. Hood Open Warning Light
Red Warning Lights Ú page 106
Air Bag Warning Light Liftgate Open Warning Light

Ú page 104 Ú page 106
Brake Warning Light Night Vision Animal Detected Warning Light

Battery Charge Warning Light Night Vision Pedestrian Detected Warning Light
12
Red Warning Lights Yellow Warning Lights
Oil Pressure Warning Light Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
Oil Temperature Warning Light Electronic Park Brake Warning Light

Rear Seat Belt Reminder Indicator Light Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active Warning Light
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Warning Light
Transmission Temperature Warning Light Service Active Lane Management Warning Light
Vehicle Security Warning Light Active Lane Management Warning Light

13
Yellow Warning Lights Yellow Warning Lights
Low Fuel Warning Light Service Stop/Start System Warning Light 1

Low Washer Fluid Warning Light Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light
Night Vision Animal Detected Warning Light

Ú page 108 Yellow Indicator Lights
4WD Low Indicator Light

Night Vision Pedestrian Detected Warning Light
Ú page 110
Ú page 108
Air Suspension Active Indicator Light
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning Light (MIL)
Ú page 110
Ú page 108
Air Suspension Aerodynamic Height Indicator Light
Service 4WD Warning Light
Ú page 110
Ú page 109
Air Suspension Entry/Exit Indicator Light
Service Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Warning Light
Ú page 110
Ú page 109
Air Suspension Off-Road 1 Indicator Light
Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Light
Ú page 110
Ú page 109
14
Yellow Indicator Lights Green Indicator Lights
Air Suspension Off-Road 2 Indicator Light Cruise Control SET Indicator Light
Auto HOLD! Fault Indicator Light Front Fog Indicator Light

Forward Collision Warning (FCW) OFF Indicator Light Active Lane Management Indicator Light
NEUTRAL Indicator Light Night Vision Active Indicator Light

Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light

Green Indicator Lights Ú page 111
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Target Light
Rear Seat Belt Fastened Indicator Light
Ú page 111
Ú page 112
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With No Target Detected
Indicator Light Sport Mode Indicator Light
Auto HOLD Indicator Light
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light
Ú page 111
Ú page 112
15
Green Indicator Lights White Indicator Lights
Turn Signal Indicator Lights Active Lane Management Indicator Light 1

Rear Seat Unoccupied Indicator Light

White Indicator Lights Ú page 112
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light
Selec-Speed Control Indicator Light
Ú page 112
Ú page 113
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
Ú page 112
Blue Indicator Lights
Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator Light High Beam Indicator Light
Gray Indicator Lights
Night Vision Suppressed Indicator Light

Ú page 113
16
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

KEYS NOTE:
 The key fob’s wireless signal may be blocked if
KEY F OB the key fob is located next to a mobile phone,
laptop, or other electronic device. This may
Your vehicle is equipped with a key fob which result in poor performance.
supports Passive Entry, Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE), Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ (if equipped), Remote  If your vehicle is equipped with a Wireless
Start (if equipped), and remote power liftgate Charging Pad, the key fob may not be detected
(if equipped) operation. The key fob allows you to if it is placed within 6 inches (15 cm) of the pad
lock or unlock all doors and liftgate, as well as Ú page 76.
activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to  With the ignition in the ON position and the
approximately 66 ft (20 m). The key fob does not vehicle moving at 2 mph (4 km/h), all RKE
need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the commands are disabled.
system. The key fob also contains an emergency
key, which is stored in the rear of the key fob. Key Fob
NOTE: 1 — LED Indicator
In vehicles equipped with Remote Start, the key
2 — Unlock
fob will operate at distances up to 328 ft (100 m).
3 — Lock
4 — Remote Start
5 — Power Liftgate
6 — Panic
7 — Emergency Key
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17
In case the ignition switch does not change NOTE: Replacing The Battery In The Key Fob
positions with the push of a button, the key fob  If the vehicle is unlocked with the key fob, and The replacement battery model is one CR2450
may have a low or fully depleted battery. A low key no door is opened within 60 seconds, the battery.
fob battery can be verified by referring to the vehicle will relock and the Vehicle Security
instrument cluster, which will display directions to NOTE:
system will arm (if equipped).
follow.
 If one or more doors are open, or the liftgate is
 Customers are recommended to use a battery 2
For more information on ignition positions, see obtained from Mopar®. Aftermarket coin
open, the doors will lock. The doors will unlock battery specifications may not meet the original
Ú page 20 again automatically if the key is left inside the OEM coin battery specifications.
NOTE: passenger compartment, otherwise the doors
will stay locked.  Perchlorate Material — special handling may
A low key fob battery condition may be indicated by
a message in the instrument cluster display, or by apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazard-
All doors can be programmed to unlock on the first
the LED light on the key fob. If the LED key fob light ouswaste/perchlorate for further information.
push of the unlock button through Uconnect
no longer illuminates after a key fob button is Settings Ú page 193.  Do not touch the battery terminals that are on
pushed, then the key fob battery requires the back housing or the printed circuit board.
replacement Ú page 372. Using The Key Fob To Open Vehicle
 Do not replace the coin battery if the LED on the
Windows — If Equipped
To Lock/Unlock The Doors And Liftgate key fob above the top row buttons blinks when
From outside of the vehicle, push and release the a button is pressed. The coin battery should last
Push and release the unlock button on the key fob
unlock button on the key fob, and within five a minimum of three years with normal vehicle
once to unlock the driver’s door, or twice within five
seconds push and hold the unlock button for up to usage.
seconds to unlock all the doors and the liftgate. To
seven seconds. All vehicle door windows will open.
lock all the doors and the liftgate, push the lock 1. Remove the emergency key (2) by pushing
button once. NOTE: the emergency key release button (1) on the
If enabled within the Uconnect system, the turn  This feature is enabled through Uconnect side of the key fob, and pulling the emergency
signals will flash and the illuminated entry system Settings Ú page 193. key out with the other hand.
will be activated when the doors are unlocked.  Vehicle must be equipped with front and rear
When the doors are locked, the turn signals will auto up/down windows.
flash and the horn will chirp.
18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
2. Hold the key fob with the button side facing

down, and locate the small rectangular gap on
the left side between the housing and the back
cover of the key fob. Use a small flat-bladed
tool, or coin, to pry apart the two halves of the
key fob. Make sure not to damage the seal
during removal.
Emergency Key Removal Key Fob Battery Location

1 — Emergency Key Release Button NOTE:
2 — Emergency Key You can also insert a screwdriver or similar tool
into the battery removal pocket to pry the battery
out.
Pry Apart Key Fob Halves

3. Next, locate the gap on the right side of the key
fob, which is positioned farther to the edge
than the left side gap. Pry open the right side,
and remove the back cover.
4. Remove the battery by using your thumb to
slide the battery downward and back toward
Emergency Key Removed the key ring.
Battery Removal Pocket
NOTE: NOTE:  Only key fobs that are programmed to the

When replacing the battery, ensure the (+) sign on The key fob battery should only be replaced by vehicle electronics can be used to start and
the battery is facing upward. Avoid touching the qualified technicians. If the battery requires operate the vehicle. Once a key fob is
new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause replacement, see an authorized dealer. programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean programmed to any other vehicle.
it with rubbing alcohol. WARNING! 2
5. Replace the battery by using your thumb to  The integrated key fob contains a coin cell
WARNING!
push down and slide the battery under the battery. Do not ingest the battery; there is a  Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle
small lip on the top edge of the opening. chemical burn hazard. If the coin cell battery is and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle
swallowed, it can cause severe internal burns unattended.
in just two hours and can lead to death.
 Always remember to place the Keyless
 If you think a battery may have been swal- Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in the OFF position.
lowed or placed inside any part of the body,
seek immediate medical attention.
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an
 Keep new and used batteries away from chil- authorized dealer. This procedure consists of
dren. If the battery compartment does not programming a blank key fob to the vehicle
close securely, stop using the product and electronics. A blank key fob is one that has never
keep it away from children. been programmed.
NOTE:
Key Fob Battery Replacement
Programming And Requesting Additional  When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer system
6. To assemble the key fob case, line up the top Key Fobs serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an
edge of the back cover with the top of the fob, authorized dealer.
Programming the key fob may be performed by an
and press the edges into the interlocking authorized dealer.  Keys must be ordered to the correct key cut to
hinges until all edges snap together with no match the vehicle locks.
large visual gaps. NOTE:
7. Reinsert the emergency key until it locks into  Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
place. cannot be repurposed and reprogrammed to
another vehicle.
SENTRY KEY If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal

vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents 10 seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the
unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the electronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle
engine. The system does not need to be armed or serviced as soon as possible by an authorized
activated. Operation is automatic, regardless of dealer.
whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.
The system uses a key fob, keyless push button CAUTION!
ignition and a Radio Frequency (RF) receiver to The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not
prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore, compatible with some aftermarket remote
only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle starting systems. Use of these systems may START/STOP Ignition Button
can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The result in vehicle starting problems and loss of
system cannot reprogram a key fob obtained from 1 — OFF
security protection.
another vehicle. 2 — ON/RUN
After placing the ignition in the ON/RUN position, All of the key fobs provided with your new vehicle
the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three have been programmed to the vehicle electronics The push button ignition can be placed in the
seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on Ú page 372. following modes:
after the bulb check, it indicates that there is a OFF
problem with the electronics. In addition, if the light
begins to flash after the bulb check, it indicates
IGNITION SWITCH  The engine is stopped
that someone attempted to start the engine with  Some electrical devices
an invalid key fob. In the event that a valid key fob
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ IGNITION (e.g. power locks, alarm, etc.) are still available
is used to start the engine but there is an issue This feature allows the driver to operate the ON/RUN
with the vehicle electronics, the engine will start ignition switch with the push of a button as long as
 Driving position
and shut off after two seconds. the key fob is in the passenger compartment.
 All electrical devices are available
The START/STOP ignition button has several
(e.g. climate controls, heated seats, etc.)
operating modes that are labeled and will
illuminate when in position. These modes are OFF, START
ON/RUN, and START.  The engine will start
(when foot is on the brake pedal)
NOTE: NOTE:
WARNING!
 If the ignition position does not change with a  The key fob may not be detected by the vehicle
push of the ignition button, and the instrument  When exiting the vehicle, always place the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ system if it is located next
cluster displays a message such as “Key Fob ignition in the OFF position, remove the key to a mobile phone, laptop or other electronic
Not Detected”, the key fob may have a low or fob from the vehicle, and lock your vehicle. device, or in the cupholders near aluminum
depleted battery. In this situation, a back up  Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with cans; these objects may block the key fob’s 2
method can be used to operate the ignition access to an unlocked vehicle. wireless signal and prevent the Keyless
switch. Put the nose side of the key fob (side Enter ‘n Go™ system from starting the vehicle.
opposite of the emergency key) against the  Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended
 For more information on the engine starting
START/STOP ignition button and push to is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
procedure, see Ú page 115.
operate the ignition switch. or others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the  When opening the driver's door and the ignition
 Replacement of the key fob battery is recom- is in the ON/RUN position (engine not running),
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
mended. a chime will sound to remind you to place the
selector.
ignition in the OFF position. In addition to the
 Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
chime, the message “Ignition ON” will display in
or in a location accessible to children, and do the cluster.
not leave Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in the
ON/RUN position. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED
 Do not leave children or animals inside parked
This system uses the key fob to start the
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup engine conveniently from outside the
may cause serious injury or death. vehicle while still maintaining security.
The system has a range of approximately
328 ft (100 m).
Depleted Key Fob Battery Procedure CAUTION! Remote Start is used to defrost windows in cold
weather, and to reach a comfortable climate in all
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for thieves. ambient conditions before the driver enters the
Always remove key fob from the vehicle and lock vehicle.
all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
NOTE: NOTE:  Liftgate closed

Obstructions between the vehicle and key fob may  If the Remote Start button on the key fob is  Hazard switch off
reduce this range Ú page 372. pushed too rapidly during activation, the vehicle  Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
may not start.
WARNING!  Battery at an acceptable charge level
 With Remote Start, the engine will only run for
 Do not start or run an engine in a closed 15 minutes.  System not disabled from previous Remote
garage or confined area. Exhaust gas contains Start event
 Remote Start can only be used twice.
Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and  Vehicle Security Light is flashing
colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and  If an engine fault is present or fuel level is
low, the vehicle will start and then shut down in  Ignition in OFF position
can cause serious injury or death when
inhaled. 10 seconds.  PANIC button is not pushed
 The parking lights will turn on and remain on  Fuel level meets minimum requirement
 Keep key fobs away from children. Operation
of the Remote Start system, windows, door during Remote Start mode.  Vehicle Security system is not signaling an
locks or other controls could cause serious  Headlight animation (if equipped) will occur intrusion
injury or death. when Remote Start is activated, if “Headlight  Malfunction Indicator Light is not illuminated
Illumination On Approach” is enabled within
Uconnect Settings. WARNING!
HOW TO U SE R EMOTE S TART
 For security, power window and power sunroof
 Do not start or run an engine in a closed
Push and release the Remote Start button on the operation (if equipped) are disabled when the garage or confined area. Exhaust gas contains
key fob twice within five seconds. The vehicle vehicle is in the Remote Start mode. Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and
doors will lock, the parking lights will flash, and the  The ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN posi- colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and
horn will chirp twice (if programmed). Then, the tion before the Remote Start sequence can be can cause serious injury or death when
engine will start, and the vehicle will remain in the repeated for a third cycle. inhaled.
Remote Start mode for a 15 minute cycle. Pushing
the Remote Start button a third time shuts the All of the following conditions must be met before  Keep key fobs away from children. Operation
engine off. the engine will remote start: of the Remote Start system, windows, door
 Gear selector in PARK locks or other controls could cause serious
 Doors closed
injury or death.
 Hood closed
TO EXIT R EMOTE START MODE REMOTE START F RONT DEFROST Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
To drive the vehicle after starting the Remote Start ACTIVATION — IF E QUIPPED The climate controls will automatically adjust to
the optimal temperature and mode settings
system, either push and release the unlock button When Remote Start is active, and the outside depending on the outside ambient temperature.
on the key fob to unlock the doors, or unlock the ambient temperature is 40°F (4.5°C) or below, the This will occur until the ignition is placed in the
vehicle using Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry system will automatically activate front defrost for ON/RUN position where the climate controls will 2
via the door handles, and disarm the Vehicle 15 minutes or less. The time is dependent on the resume their previous settings.
Security system (if equipped). Then, prior to the ambient temperature. Once the timer expires, the
end of the 15 minute cycle, push and release the For more information on ATC and climate control
system will automatically adjust the settings
START/STOP ignition button. settings, see Ú page 63.
depending on ambient conditions. See “Remote
The Remote Start system will turn the engine off Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped” in the next NOTE:
with another push and release of the Remote Start section for detailed operation. These features will stay on through the duration of
button on the key fob, or if the engine is allowed to Remote Start until the ignition is placed in the
run for the entire 15 minute cycle. Once the REMOTE START C OMFORT SYSTEMS — ON/RUN position. The climate control setting will
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position, the I F E QUIPPED change, and exit automatic operation, if manually
climate controls will resume the previously set adjusted by the driver while the vehicle is in
operations (temperature, blower control, etc.). When Remote Start is activated, the front and rear Remote Start mode. This includes the OFF button
defrost will automatically turn on in cold weather. on the climate controls, which will turn the system
NOTE: The heated steering wheel and driver heated seat off.
 To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system feature will turn on if selected in the comfort menu
will disable for two seconds after receiving a screen within Uconnect Settings Ú page 193. In REMOTE START WINDSHIELD W IPER
valid Remote Start request. warm weather, the driver vented seat feature will DE–ICER A CTIVATION — I F EQUIPPED
 For vehicles equipped with the Keyless automatically turn on when Remote Start is
Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry feature, the activated, if programmed in the comfort menu When Remote Start is active and the outside
message “Remote Start Active — Push Start screen. The vehicle will adjust the climate control ambient temperature is less than 33°F (0.6°C),
Button” will display in the instrument cluster settings depending on the outside ambient the Windshield Wiper De-Icer will activate. Exiting
display until you push the START/STOP ignition temperature. Remote Start will resume its previous operation. If
button. the Windshield Wiper De-Icer was active, the timer
and operation will continue Ú page 193.
REMOTE START A BORT M ESSAGE  The turn signals will flash NOTE:
 The Vehicle Security Light in the instrument If the system is armed by pushing the lock button
The following messages will display in the on the interior door panel, the Vehicle Security
cluster will flash
instrument cluster display if the vehicle fails to Light will flash rapidly for about 15 seconds once
remote start or exits Remote Start prematurely: TO ARM THE SYSTEM the door is closed, then slow down to every two
 Remote Start Cancelled — Door Open seconds.
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security
 Remote Start Cancelled — Hood Open system: TO DISARM T HE S YSTEM
 Remote Start Cancelled — Liftgate Open 1. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is placed in
The Vehicle Security system can be disarmed using
 Remote Start Cancelled — Fuel Low the OFF position.
any of the following methods:
 Remote Start Cancelled — Too Cold  Make sure the vehicle’s keyless ignition
 Push the unlock button on the key fob.
system is OFF.
 Remote Start Cancelled — Time Expired  Grab the Passive Entry door handle to unlock
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock
 Remote Start Cancelled — System Fault the door Ú page 26.
the vehicle:
 Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle to Reset  Cycle the ignition out of the OFF position to
 Push lock on the interior power door lock
The instrument cluster display message stays disarm the system.
switch with the driver and/or passenger
active until the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN door open. NOTE:
position.  The driver's door key cylinder cannot arm or
 Push the lock button on the exterior Passive
Entry door handle with a valid key fob avail- disarm the Vehicle Security system. Use of the
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED able in the same exterior zone Ú page 26. door key cylinder when the alarm is armed will
sound the alarm when the door is opened.
The Vehicle Security system monitors the vehicle  Push the lock button on the key fob.
doors, hood, liftgate, and the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™  The Vehicle Security system remains armed
3. If any doors are open, close them. when the power liftgate is opened using the lift-
Ignition for unauthorized operation. While the
Vehicle Security system is armed, interior switches gate button on the key fob. If someone enters
When the Vehicle Security system is armed, the
for door locks and liftgate release handle are the vehicle through the liftgate and opens any
Vehicle Security Light (located in the lower right
disabled. If something triggers the alarm, the door from the inside, the alarm will sound.
portion of the instrument cluster display) will begin
Vehicle Security system will provide the following to flash every two seconds until it is disarmed.
audible and visible signals:
 The horn will pulse
 If Passive Entry (if equipped) is used to unlock SECURITY S YSTEM MANUAL O VERRIDE
the liftgate, the Vehicle Security system is
disarmed and the rest of the vehicle doors will The Vehicle Security system will not arm if you lock
remain locked unless all doors are set to unlock the doors using the emergency lock lever
on first press within Uconnect Settings. Ú page 25.
 When the Vehicle Security system is armed, the TAMPER A LERT 2
interior power door lock switches will not unlock
the doors. If something has triggered the Vehicle Security
system in your absence, the horn will sound three
The Vehicle Security system is designed to protect
times and the exterior lights will blink three times
your vehicle. However, you can create conditions
when you disarm the Vehicle Security system. Emergency Lock Lever (Driver’s Door Shown)
where the system will give you a false alarm. If one
of the previously described arming sequences has
occurred, the Vehicle Security system will arm DOORS NOTE:
 The emergency lock lever is only accessible
regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not.
If you remain in the vehicle and open a door, the
MANUAL D OOR L OCKS when the door is open.
alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the Vehicle The front doors can be manually unlocked with a  Manually locking the vehicle will not arm the
Security system. single pull of the inside door handle. The driver’s Vehicle Security system.
If the Vehicle Security system is armed and the door can also be manually unlocked by inserting
the emergency key into the lock cylinder on the WARNING!
battery becomes disconnected, the Vehicle
Security system will remain armed when the outside door handle.  For personal security and safety in the event
battery is reconnected; the exterior lights will flash, The rear doors can be manually unlocked with a of a collision, lock the vehicle doors before you
and the horn will sound. If this occurs, disarm the double pull of the inside door handle. drive as well as when you park and leave the
Vehicle Security system. Each door can be manually locked by inserting the vehicle.
REARMING O F T HE SYSTEM emergency key into the emergency lock lever and  When exiting the vehicle, always make sure
sliding the lever upward. The emergency lock lever the ignition is in the OFF position, remove the
If something triggers the alarm and no action is is located on the door latch face of each door. key fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
taken to disarm it, the Vehicle Security system will
(Continued)
turn the horn off after a 29 second cycle (with five
seconds between cycles and up to eight cycles if
the trigger remains active) and then rearm itself.
Rear Passenger Power Door Locks

WARNING!
Power door lock buttons are located on each rear
 Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with door trim panel. Push the lock button to lock all
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil- doors and liftgate, and the unlock button to unlock
dren to be in a vehicle unattended is all doors and liftgate.
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ — PASSIVE
Children should be warned not to touch the E NTRY
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector. The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to
the vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system
 Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, Power Door Lock Switches
and a feature of Keyless Enter ‘n Go™. This feature
or in a location accessible to children, and do The driver’s door will unlock automatically if the allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s)
not leave the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in keys are detected inside the vehicle when the door without having to push the key fob lock or unlock
the ON/RUN position. A child could operate lock button on the front door panel is used to lock buttons.
power windows, other controls, or move the the door. This will occur for two attempts. On the If equipped, the rear doors will also have Passive
vehicle. third attempt, the doors will lock even if the key is Entry capabilities.
inside.
NOTE:
POWER D OOR L OCKS NOTE:
 Passive Entry may be programmed on/off
If the key fob is located next to a mobile phone,
The power door lock buttons are located on each through Uconnect Settings Ú page 193.
laptop, or other electronic device, the wireless
front door panel. Push the lock button to lock all
signal may get blocked, and the driver’s door may  The key fob may not be detected by the vehicle
doors and liftgate, or the unlock button to unlock
not unlock automatically. Passive Entry system if it is located next to a
all doors and liftgate.
If the door lock button is pushed while the ignition mobile phone, laptop or other electronic device;
When the doors are locked, an indicator light in the these devices may block the key fob's wireless
is in the ON/RUN position and the driver's door is
lock button will illuminate. signal and prevent the passive entry handle
open, the doors will not lock.
from locking/unlocking the vehicle.
 Passive Entry unlock initiates illuminated To Unlock From The Driver Or Passenger Side NOTE:
approach (low beams, license plate lamp, With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft  Either the driver door only or all doors will unlock
parking lights, door handle pocket lights [if (1.5 m) of the door handle, grab the handle to when you grab hold of the front driver’s door
equipped]) for whichever time duration is set unlock the vehicle. Grabbing the driver’s door handle, depending on the selected setting in the
between 0, 30, 60 or 90 seconds. Passive Entry handle will unlock the driver door automatically. Uconnect system Ú page 193.
unlock also initiates two flashes of the turn Grabbing the front passenger door handle (or a  All doors will unlock when the front passenger
2
signal lamps. rear handle when equipped with four-door Passive (or a rear door when equipped with four door
 If wearing gloves, or if it has been raining/ Entry) will unlock all doors and the liftgate Passive Entry) door handle is grabbed regard-
snowing on the Passive Entry door handle, the automatically. less of the driver’s door unlock preference
unlock and lock sensitivity can be affected, setting.
resulting in a slower response time.
Frequency Operated Button Integrated Key
 The doors may lock and unlock when water is (FOBIK-Safe)
sprayed on the Passive Entry door handles, if
the key fob is located outside of the vehicle To minimize the possibility of unintentionally
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the handle. locking a Passive Entry key fob inside your vehicle,
the Passive Entry system is equipped with an
 Passive Entry lock initiates one horn chirp and automatic door unlock feature which will function if
one flash of turn signal lights. These settings the ignition switch is in the OFF position.
can be programmed on/off within Uconnect
Settings Ú page 193. There are five situations that trigger a FOBIK-Safe
search in any passive entry vehicle:
 If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
 A lock request is made by a valid Passive Entry
no door is opened within 60 seconds, the
vehicle will relock and will rearm the Vehicle key fob while a door is open.
Security system (if equipped).  A lock request is made by the Passive Entry door
handle while a door is open.
 A lock request is made by the door panel switch To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors And Liftgate
while the door is open. With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs
 When the Vehicle Security system is in pre-arm within 5 ft (1.5 m) of a Passive Entry door handle,
or armed status and the liftgate transitions from touch the lock icon on the door handle to lock all
opened to closed. four doors and liftgate.
 When the liftgate transitions from open to
closed and Remote Start is active.
When any of these situations occur, after all open
doors are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will be
executed. If it detects a Passive Entry key fob Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
inside the vehicle, the vehicle will unlock and alert
the customer. NOTE:
NOTE:  After touching the door handle lock icon, you
The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a valid must wait two seconds before you can lock or
Passive Entry key fob is detected inside the unlock the doors using any Passive Entry door
vehicle. The vehicle will not unlock the doors when Touch The Door Handle Lock Icon To Lock handle. This is done to allow you to check if the
any of the following conditions are true: vehicle is locked by pulling the door handle,
 The doors are manually locked using the emer-
NOTE: without the vehicle unlocking.
Do NOT grab the door handle when touching the
gency lock lever.  If Passive Entry is disabled using the Uconnect
lock icon. This could unlock the door(s).
 Three attempts are made to lock the doors Settings, the key protection described in
using the door panel switch and then the doors "Frequency Operated Button Integrated Key
are closed. (FOBIK-Safe)" remains active/functional.
 There is a valid Passive Entry key fob outside the  The Passive Entry system will not operate if the
vehicle within 5 ft (1.5 m) of a Passive Entry key fob battery is depleted.
door handle.
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate NOTE: CHILD-P ROTECTION DOOR LOCK

The liftgate Passive Entry lock button will lock all
The liftgate Passive Entry unlock feature is built
doors and the liftgate Ú page 372.
SYSTEM — R EAR DOORS
into the electronic liftgate release button. With a
valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the To provide a safer environment for small children
liftgate, push the electronic liftgate release button
AUTOMATIC UNLOCK D OORS ON E XIT riding in the rear seats, the rear doors are
for a power open on vehicles equipped with Power The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles equipped with a Child-Protection Door Lock 2
Liftgate. Pull the electronic liftgate handle and lift with power door locks after the following sequence system.
for Manual Liftgate vehicles. of actions: To use the system, open each rear door, use a flat
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is blade screwdriver (or emergency key) and rotate
enabled within Uconnect Settings the dial to the lock or unlock position. When the
Ú page 193. system on a door is engaged, that door can only be
opened by using the outside door handle even if
2. All doors are closed.
the inside door lock is in the unlocked position.
3. The gear selector was not in PARK, then is
placed in PARK.
4. Any door is opened.
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS —

Electronic Liftgate Handle I F E QUIPPED
1 — Passive Entry Lock Button The auto door lock feature default condition is
enabled. When enabled, the door locks will lock
2 — Electronic Liftgate Release Button
automatically when the vehicle's speed exceeds
15 mph (24 km/h). The auto door lock feature can
To Lock The Liftgate be enabled or disabled by an authorized dealer per Child-Protection Door Lock Function
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft written request of the customer. Please see an
(1.5 m) of the liftgate, push the Passive Entry lock authorized dealer for service.
button located on the outside liftgate door handle.
NOTE: STEERING WHEEL WARNING!

 When the Child-Protection Door Lock system is
engaged, the door can be opened only by using MANUAL T ILT/TELESCOPING STEERING Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
the outside door handle even though the inside Adjusting the steering column while driving or
door lock is in the unlocked position.
C OLUMN — IF E QUIPPED driving with the steering column unlocked, could
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
 After disengaging the Child-Protection Door
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen Failure to follow this warning may result in
Lock system, always test the door from the
or shorten the steering column. The tilt/ serious injury or death.
inside to make certain it is in the unlocked posi-
tion. telescoping lever is located below the steering
wheel at the end of the steering column.
 After engaging the Child-Protection Door Lock POWER T ILT/T ELESCOPING STEERING
system, always test the door from the inside to COLUMN — IF E QUIPPED
make certain it is in the locked position.
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
WARNING! upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen
or shorten the steering column. The power tilt/
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision. telescoping steering column lever is located below
Remember that the rear doors can only be the multifunction lever on the steering column.
opened from the outside with the
Child-Protection locks engaged (locked).
NOTE:
Always use this device when carrying children. Manual Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column Handle
After engaging the child lock on both rear doors, To unlock the steering column, push the lever
check for effective engagement by trying to open a downward (toward the floor). To tilt the steering
door with the internal handle. Once the column, move the steering wheel upward or
Child-Protection Door Lock system is engaged, it is downward as desired. To lengthen or shorten the
impossible to open the doors from inside the steering column, pull the steering wheel outward
vehicle. Before getting out of the vehicle, be sure to or push it inward as desired. To lock the steering
check that there is no one left inside. column in position, push the lever upward until Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Control Location
fully engaged.
Use the four-way control to adjust the steering

column.
The heated steering wheel button is located on the
center of the instrument panel below the radio
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS
NOTE: screen, and within the climate or controls screen of — IF EQUIPPED
For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory the touchscreen.
Settings, you can use your key fob or the memory  Push the heated steering wheel button once to I NTRODUCING V OICE RECOGNITION
switch on the driver's door trim panel to return the turn the heating element on. Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these 2
tilt/telescopic steering column to saved positions  Push the heated steering wheel button a second helpful quick tips. This section provides Voice
Ú page 32. time to turn the heating element off. Commands and tips you need to know to control
NOTE: your vehicle’s Voice Recognition (VR) system.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
The engine must be running for the heated BASIC VOICE COMMANDS
steering wheel to operate.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or The basic Voice Commands below can be given at
For information on use with the Remote Start
driving with the steering column unlocked, could any point while using your Uconnect system.
system, see Ú page 23.
cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
Failure to follow this warning may result in Push the VR button , and after the beep, say a
WARNING! command. You can also say the system “Wake Up”
serious injury or death.
 Persons who are unable to feel pain to the word and then say a command:
skin because of advanced age, chronic illness,  “Cancel” to stop a current voice session.
HEATED S TEERING WHEEL — diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication,  “Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice
I F EQUIPPED alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical Commands.
conditions must exercise care when using the
The steering wheel contains a heating  “Repeat” to listen to the system prompts again.
steering wheel heater. It may cause burns
element that helps warm your hands in even at low temperatures, especially if used Notice the visual cues that inform you of your Voice
cold weather. The heated steering wheel for long periods. Recognition system’s status.
has only one temperature setting. Once
the heated steering wheel has been turned on, it  Do not place anything on the steering wheel
will stay on until the operator turns it off. The that insulates against heat, such as a blanket
heated steering wheel may not turn on when it is or steering wheel covers of any type and mate-
already warm. rial. This may cause the steering wheel heater
to overheat.
GET S TARTED For Uconnect system support, call

1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day 7 days a week)
The VR button is used to activate/deactivate or visit DriveUconnect.com (US) or
your Voice Recognition system. You can also use DriveUconnect.ca (Canada).
the system’s “Wake Up” word to activate voice
recognition. The “Wake Up” word can be set DRIVER AND PASSENGER MEMORY
through the Uconnect Settings Ú page 193.
Helpful hints for using Voice Recognition:
SETTINGS — IF EQUIPPED
 Reduce background noise. Wind noise and This feature allows the driver, and if equipped, also
passenger conversations are examples of noise the front passenger to save up to two different
that may impact recognition. Uconnect Voice Command Buttons memory profiles for easy recall through a memory
switch. Each memory profile saves desired position
 Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume 1 — Push The Voice Recognition Button To Begin
settings for the following features:
while facing straight ahead. Radio, Media, Navigation, Climate, Start Or An-
swer A Phone Call, And Send Or Receive A Text Driver’s Side
 Each time you give a Voice Command, first push
2 — Push To Access Tile Mode  Seat position
the VR button or say the “Wake Up” word,
wait until after the beep, then say your Voice 3 — Push The Hang Up Button To End A Call Cur-  Easy Entry/Exit seat (if equipped)
Command. rently In Progress  Side mirrors
 You can interrupt the help message or system  Power tilt and telescopic steering column
prompts by pushing the VR button and saying a ADDITIONAL I NFORMATION (if equipped)
Voice Command from the current category.
© 2021 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and  A set of desired radio station presets
 You can also interrupt the help message or
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar
system prompts by speaking. This feature is
Owner Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC.
called “barge-in” and can be set through the
Android™ is a trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM®
Uconnect Settings Ú page 193. and all related marks and logos are trademarks of
SiriusXM® Radio Inc. Ú page 372.
Passenger’s Side (If Equipped) PROGRAMMING T HE M EMORY FEATURE LINKING A ND U NLINKING T HE KEY FOB
 Seat Position
To create a new memory profile, perform the T O MEMORY
The memory settings switches are located on the following: Your key fobs can be programmed to recall one of
front door panels, next to the door handle, and
NOTE: two saved driver’s side memory profiles.
consists of three buttons:
Saving a new memory profile will erase the NOTE: 2
 The set (S) button, which is used to activate the selected profile from memory.
memory save function. Before programming your key fobs you must select
1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the ON/RUN the “Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob” feature
 The (1) and (2) buttons which are used to recall position (do not start the engine). through the Uconnect Settings Ú page 193.
either of two saved memory profiles. 2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired To program your key fobs, perform the following:
preferences (i.e., seat, side mirror, power
1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF
tilt/telescopic steering column [if equipped],
position.
and radio station presets).
2. Select a desired driver’s side memory profile,
3. Push and release the set (S) button on the
1 or 2.
memory switch.
3. Once the profile has been recalled, push and
4. Within five seconds, push and release either of
release the set (S) button on the memory
the memory buttons (1) or (2). The instrument
switch.
cluster display will display which memory
position has been set. 4. Within five seconds, push and release button
(1) or (2) accordingly. “Memory Profile Set”
Memory Setting Buttons NOTE: (1 or 2) will display in the instrument cluster.
Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in 5. Push and release the lock button on the key
NOTE: PARK, but the vehicle must be below 5 mph fob within 10 seconds.
 Your vehicle is equipped with two key fobs, each (8 km/h) to recall a memory profile.
can be linked to either driver’s side memory NOTE:
position 1 or 2. Your key fobs can be unlinked from your driver’s
 Front passenger memory settings cannot be side memory settings by pushing the set (S) button,
linked to a key fob. and within 10 seconds, pushing the unlock button
on the key fob.
MEMORY POSITION R ECALL WARNING! WARNING!

NOTE:  It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside  Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
Memory Recall is available when not in PARK, if the or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people the shoulder belt is no longer resting against
vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h). riding in these areas are more likely to be seri- your chest. In a collision you could slide under
 To recall a memory settings profile using the ously injured or killed. the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally
memory switches, push memory button (1) or injured. Use the recliner only when the vehicle
 Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
(2) on the memory switch. is parked.
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and
 To recall the driver’s side memory settings using seat belts. In a collision, people riding in these
the key fob, push the unlock button on the key areas are more likely to be seriously injured or Manual Front Passenger Seat Forward/
fob linked to memory position 1 or 2. killed. Rearward Adjustment
A recall can be canceled by pushing any of the
 Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat Some models may be equipped with a manual
memory buttons during a recall (S, 1, or 2), or by
and using a seat belt properly. front passenger seat. The passenger seat can be
pushing any of the seat adjustment switches.
adjusted forward or rearward by using a bar
When a recall is canceled, the seat and power
located by the front of the seat cushion, near the
tilt/telescopic steering column (if equipped) will MANUAL A DJUSTMENT (FRONT SEATS) floor.
stop moving. A delay of one second will occur — IF EQUIPPED
before another recall can be selected.
WARNING!
SEATS
 Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint system dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat
of the vehicle. could cause you to lose control. The seat belt
might not be adjusted properly and you could
be injured. Adjust the seat only while the
vehicle is parked.
(Continued)
Adjustment Bar
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar located NOTE:

under the seat cushion and move the seat forward You may experience deformation in the seat
or rearward. Release the bar once you have cushion from the seat belt buckles if the seats are
reached the desired position. Then, using body left folded for an extended period of time. This is
pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat normal and by simply unfolding the seats to the
to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched. open position, over time the seat cushion will 2
return to its normal shape.
WARNING! Second Row Bench Seat — If Equipped
 Adjusting a seat while driving may be
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could SECOND ROW BENCH SEAT FORWARD/REAR-
result in loss of control which could cause a Recline Lever WARD ADJUSTMENT
collision and serious injury or death. Lift up on the adjusting bar located at the front of
 Seats should be adjusted before fastening the WARNING! the seat near the floor and release it when the seat
seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that is at the desired position. Then, using body
Serious injury or death could result from a the shoulder belt is no longer resting against pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat
poorly adjusted seat belt. your chest. In a collision you could slide under to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched.
the seat belt, which could result in serious injury
Manual Front Passenger Seatback or death.
Adjustment — Recline
To recline, lean forward slightly and lift the lever MANUAL A DJUSTMENT (REAR SEATS)
located on the outboard side of the seat. Then,
push the seat rearward to the desired position and WARNING!
release the lever. To return the seatback to its Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top
normal position, lean forward and lift the lever. To of the seatback. This could impair visibility or
ensure the seatback is latched, use body pressure become a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop
to lean forward and rearward. or collision.
Rear Seat Adjustment Bar
SECOND ROW BENCH SEAT RECLINE ADJUST- SECOND ROW BENCH FOLD FLAT SEAT
WARNING!
MENT To provide additional storage area, each rear seat
can be folded flat. This allows for extended cargo Be certain that the seatback is securely locked
To recline, lean forward slightly and lift the lever
space and still maintains some rear seating room. into position. If the seatback is not securely
located on the outboard side of the seat. Then,
locked into position the seat will not provide the
push the seat rearward to the desired position and NOTE: proper stability for child seats and/or
release the lever. To return the seatback to its Prior to folding the rear seat, it may be necessary passengers. An improperly latched seat could
normal position, lean forward and lift the lever. To to position the front seat to its mid-track position. cause serious injury.
ensure the seatback is latched, use body pressure Also, be sure that the front seats are fully upright
to lean forward and rearward. and positioned forward. This will allow the rear seat
to fold down easily. EASY ACCESS FOR THIRD ROW
To lower the seatback, pull upward on the recline The second row seats can tip forward to allow
lever located on the outboard side of the seat, and passengers to easily access the third row seats.
let the seatback fold forward automatically. Pull upward on the easy entry lever located on the
outboard side of the seatback, then tip and slide
the entire seat forward.
Rear Seat Recline Lever
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against Second Row Bench Seat Folded Flat
your chest. In a collision you could slide under To raise the seatback, fold the seatback up into its
the seat belt, which could result in serious injury original position and lock it into place. Easy Entry Lever Location
or death.
Access To Third Row Seats Rear Seat Adjustment Bar Rear Seat Recline Lever
To return the seat to a sitting position, unfold the SECOND ROW CAPTAIN’S CHAIRS RECLINE
seatback upright until it locks and push the seat WARNING!
ADJUSTMENT
rearward until the track locks. Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
To recline, lean forward slightly and lift the lever the shoulder belt is no longer resting against
Second Row Captain’s Chairs — located on the outboard side of the seat. Then, your chest. In a collision you could slide under
If Equipped push the seat rearward to the desired position and the seat belt, which could result in serious injury
release the lever. To return the seatback to its or death.
SECOND ROW CAPTAIN’S CHAIRS FORWARD/ normal position, lean forward and lift the lever. To
REARWARD ADJUSTMENT ensure the seatback is latched, use body pressure
Lift up on the adjusting bar located at the front of to lean forward and rearward. SECOND ROW CAPTAIN’S CHAIRS FOLD FLAT
the seat near the floor and release it when the seat SEATS
is at the desired position. Then, using body The second row seatbacks can be folded flat to
pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat carry cargo.
to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched. Pull upward on the recline lever located on the
outboard side of each second row seat, and guide
the seatback down into the folded position.
Pull upward on the easy entry lever located on the To return the seat to a sitting position, unfold the
outboard side of the seatback, then tip and slide seatback upright until it locks and push the seat
the entire seat forward. rearward until the track locks.
Manual Folding Third Row — If Equipped
Both third row seats can be folded forward to
increase the cargo area. To lower either seat, pull
on the release handle located on the back of the
seat and lower the seat using the pull strap located
next to the release handle.
Second Row Captain’s Chairs Folded Flat NOTE:
The second row seats must be in their full upright
To Raise The Rear Seats position or folded flat when folding the third row
Fold the seatbacks upward to their original seats.
position, and lock them into place. Easy Entry Lever Location
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked
into position. If the seatback is not securely
proper stability for child seats and/or
passengers. An improperly latched seat could
cause serious injury.
EASY ACCESS FOR THIRD ROW Release Handles

The second row seats can tip forward to allow Access To Third Row Seats
passengers to easily access the third row seats.
POWER ADJUSTMENT (F RONT SEATS) — Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward

I F E QUIPPED The seat can be adjusted both forward and
rearward. Push the seat switch forward or
Some models may be equipped with 12-way power rearward. The seat will move in the direction of the
driver and front passenger seats. The power seat switch. Release the switch when the desired
switches are located on the outboard side of the position has been reached. 2
seat. There are three switches that control the
movement of the seat cushion and the seatback. Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or
down. Pull upward or push downward on the rear of
Third Row Folded seat switch, the seat will move in the direction of
the switch. Release the switch when the desired
To raise the seat, pull the seat toward you using position has been reached.
the strap located on the back of the seat.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
WARNING! The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in
two directions. Pull upward or push downward on
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked
the front of the seat switch, the front of the seat
into position. If the seatback is not securely
cushion will move in the direction of the switch.
Power Seat Switches Release the switch when the desired position has
proper stability for child seats and/or
been reached.
passengers. An improperly latched seat could
1 — Cushion Extender Switch
cause serious injury. Reclining The Seatback
2 — Seat Switch
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward
3 — Seatback And Bolster Adjustment Switch
or rearward. Push the seatback switch forward or
rearward, the seat will move in the direction of the
switch. Release the switch when the desired
position is reached.
Seatback Bolster Adjustment Cushion Extender

WARNING!
The front driver and passenger seatback bolsters The cushion can be extended forward a few inches
 Adjusting a seat while driving may be can be extended outward, or retracted inward by (centimeters) to increase thigh support. Push the
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could pushing the bolster adjustment button located in cushion extender switch forward or rearward to
result in loss of control which could cause a the center of the seatback switch. extend or retract the cushion. Release the switch
collision and serious injury or death. when the desired position has been reached.
Push the top of the button to extend the bolsters,
 Seats should be adjusted before fastening the or push the bottom of the button to retract the Power Lumbar — If Equipped
seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. bolsters.
Serious injury or death could result from a Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger
poorly adjusted seat belt. seats may also be equipped with power lumbar.
The power lumbar switch is located on the
 Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that outboard side of the power seat. Push the switch
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against forward to increase the lumbar support. Push the
your chest. In a collision you could slide under switch rearward to decrease the lumbar support.
the seat belt, which could result in serious Pushing upward or downward on the switch will
injury or death. raise and lower the position of the support.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or Seatback Bolster Adjustment Button
impede its ability to move as it may cause
damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may 1 — Extend Seatback Bolsters
become limited if movement is stopped by an 2 — Retract Seatback Bolsters
obstruction in the seat's path.
Power Lumbar Switch

Easy Entry/Exit Seat — If Equipped POWER A DJUSTMENT (R EAR SEATS) — CAUTION!

This feature provides automatic driver seat I F E QUIPPED Do not place any article under a power seat or
positioning to enhance driver mobility when
entering and exiting the vehicle. impede its ability to move as it may cause
WARNING! damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may
The distance the driver seat moves depends on
where you have the driver seat positioned when
 Adjusting a seat while driving may be become limited if movement is stopped by an 2
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could obstruction in the seat's path.
you place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF position.
result in loss of control which could cause a
 When you place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF collision and serious injury or death.
position, the driver seat will move about Rear Seat Power Folding Seatbacks —
2.4 inches (60 mm) rearward if the driver seat  Seats should be adjusted before fastening the If Equipped
position is greater than or equal to 2.7 inches seat belts and while the vehicle is parked.
A one-touch power folding seat switch is located in
(67.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. The seat will Serious injury or death could result from a
the right rear trim panel inside the cargo area, as
return to its previously set position when you poorly adjusted seat belt.
part of a switch bank.
place the vehicle’s ignition in the ON/RUN posi-  Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that NOTE:
tion. the shoulder belt is no longer resting against The third row seat belts may interfere with the
 The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled your chest. In a collision you could slide under power folding of the seat. Place the seat belt
when the driver seat position is less than 0.9 of the seat belt, which could result in serious webbing behind the stow clip before stowing or
an inch (22.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. At injury or death. opening the seat. When the seat is in the desired
this position, there is no benefit to the driver by  Do not place the seat belt webbing behind the position, remove the webbing from the stow clip so
moving the seat for Easy Exit or Easy Entry. third row stow clip when using the seat belt to that it is ready for use. Never leave the seat belt in
When enabled in Uconnect Settings, Easy Entry restrain an occupant. The seat belt will not be the stow clip when it is used to restrain an
and Easy Exit positions are stored in each memory positioned properly on the occupant and they occupant.
setting profile Ú page 32. could be more seriously injured in an accident NOTE:
NOTE: as a result. The head restraints will lower automatically as
The Easy Entry/Exit feature is enabled or disabled necessary when the power seat begins to move
within the Uconnect system Ú page 193. when the vehicle is in PARK, and a rear door or the
liftgate is open.
The rear switch bank allows multiple power folding There are also power folding switches for the third The massage feature can be turned on/off through
positions for the second and third row seats. The row seats located on the C-pillar (just behind the the massage button located on the door panel
second row seats can be folded using these rear doors on the trim panels). near the handle, or through the Comfort screen on
switches, while the third row can be folded or the radio.
unfolded.
C-Pillar Power Folding Switches (Left Side Shown)

Door Panel Massage Button
Rear Panel Power Switch Bank 1 — Third Row Left Side Fold/Unfold
2 — Third Row Right Side Fold/Unfold Once activated by either method, the massage
1 — Second Row Left Side Fold controls screen will display on the radio screen,
2 — Second Row Right Side Fold and “Massage Type” and “Intensity Level” can be
3 — Third Row Left Side Fold/Unfold
POWER S EATBACK M ASSAGE — selected for the activated seat.
4 — Third Row Right Side Fold/Unfold I F E QUIPPED
The driver’s and front passenger’s seatbacks may
be equipped with power massage.
There are four intensity levels and five massage HEATED S EATS — IF E QUIPPED  Push the heated seat switch a second time to
types that can be selected. turn the MED setting on.
Intensity Levels: WARNING!  Push the heated seat switch a third time to turn
 High the LO setting on.
 Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic illness,  Push the heated seat switch a fourth time to
 Med
turn the heating elements off. 2
 Low
diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication,
alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical NOTE:
 Off condition must exercise care when using the  Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
Massage Types: seat heater. It may cause burns even at low within two to five minutes.
 Waterfall temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time.  The engine must be running for the heated
 Lower Back seats to operate.
 Do not place anything on the seat or seatback
 Extend  The level of heat selected will stay on until the
that insulates against heat, such as a blanket
 Low Extend operator changes it.
or cushion. This may cause the seat heater to
 Shoulder overheat. Sitting in a seat that has been over- For information on use with the Remote Start
heated could cause serious burns due to the system, see Ú page 23.
The selected settings will save in the system’s
increased surface temperature of the seat. Rear Heated Seats — If Equipped
memory when turned off, and will resume the next
time the system is turned on. The two second row outboard seats may
NOTE: Front Heated Seats be equipped with heated seats. There
The front heated seats control buttons are two heated seat switches that allow
 Power seatback massage is only available with
are located on the center stack below the the rear passengers to operate the seats
the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
radio screen or within the Uconnect independently. The heated seat switches for each
 The massage feature will turn off after heater are located on the rear of the center
system. You can gain access to the
20 minutes of use. However, if the massage console.
control buttons through the climate screen and the
type or intensity level is changed, the timer then
controls screen. You can choose from HI, MED, LO, or OFF heat
resets.
 Push the heated seat switch once to turn the HI settings. Indicator lights in each switch illuminate
setting on. indicating the level of heat in use.
 Push the heated seat switch once to turn the HI  Press the ventilated seat switch once to choose  Press the ventilated seat switch a third time to
setting on. HI. choose LO.
 Push the heated seat switch a second time to  Press the ventilated seat switch a second time  Press the ventilated seat switch a fourth time to
turn the MED setting on. to choose MED. turn the ventilation off.
 Push the heated seat switch a third time to turn  Press the ventilated seat switch a third time to NOTE:
the LO setting on. choose LO. The engine must be running for the ventilated
 Push the heated seat switch a fourth time to  Press the ventilated seat switch a fourth time to seats to operate.
turn the heating elements off. turn the ventilation off. HEAD R ESTRAINTS
The level of heat selected will stay on until the NOTE:
operator changes it. Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of
The engine must be running for the ventilated
injury by restricting head movement in the event of
NOTE: seats to operate.
a rear impact. Head restraints should be adjusted
The engine must be running for the heated seats to For information on use with the Remote Start so that the top of the head restraint is located
operate. system, see Ú page 23. above the top of your ear.
VENTILATED S EATS — I F E QUIPPED Rear Ventilated Seats — If Equipped
WARNING!
The two second row outboard seats may
Located in the seat cushion and seatback are fans
be equipped with ventilated seats. The  All occupants, including the driver, should not
that draw the air from the passenger compartment
rear ventilated seat control switches are operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until
and move air through fine perforations in the seat
located on the rear of the center console the head restraints are placed in their proper
cover to help keep the occupant cooler in higher
and allow the rear passengers to operate the seats positions in order to minimize the risk of neck
ambient temperatures.
independently. The fans operate at three speeds: injury in the event of a crash.
Front Ventilated Seats HI, MED, and LO. Push the ventilated seat switches
 Head restraints should never be adjusted
The ventilated seats control buttons are to toggle through the speeds, or to turn the feature
while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle
located on the center stack below the off.
with the head restraints improperly adjusted
radio screen or within the Uconnect There are two ventilated seat switches or removed could cause serious injury or
system. The fans operate at three  Press the ventilated seat switch once to choose death in the event of a collision.
speeds, HI, MED and LO. HI.
 Press the ventilated seat switch a second time
to choose MED.
Front Head Restraints To adjust the head restraint forward, pull the top of
the head restraint toward the front of the vehicle WARNING!
Your vehicle is equipped with front four-way driver
as desired and release. To adjust the head  All occupants, including the driver, should not
and passenger head restraints.
restraint rearward, pull the top of the head operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the restraint to the forward most position and release. the head restraints are placed in their proper
head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push
the adjustment button, located at the base of the
The head restraint will return to the rear most positions in order to minimize the risk of neck 2
position. injury in the event of a crash.
head restraint, and push downward on the head
restraint.  Head restraints should never be adjusted
NOTE:
The head restraints should only be removed by
or removed could cause serious injury or
qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If
death in the event of a collision.
either of the head restraints require removal, see
an authorized dealer.
Head Restraints — Second Row Captain’s
Chairs
If the second row is equipped with Captain’s
chairs, the head restraints are not adjustable or
Upright Position
removable. They automatically fold forward when
the seatback is folded, and do not return to their
normal position when the seatback is raised. After
returning the seatback to its upright position after
a folding operation, raise the head restraint until it
locks in place.
Head Restraint Adjustment Button
Forward Adjustment
NOTE:
WARNING! The center head restraint is not removable. WARNING!
 All occupants, including the driver, should not  Head restraints should never be adjusted
operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle
the head restraints are placed in their proper with the head restraints improperly adjusted
positions in order to minimize the risk of neck or removed could cause serious injury or
injury in the event of a crash. death in the event of a collision.
while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle Third Row Head Restraints
with the head restraints improperly adjusted The third row head restraints are not adjustable or
or removed could cause serious injury or removable, but can be folded for improved visibility
death in the event of a collision. when the vehicle is in REVERSE, and there are no
Center Seat Head Restraint Adjustment Button occupants in the seats.
Head Restraints — Second Row Bench Press the “Headrest Fold” button within
NOTE: the Controls menu of the Uconnect
If the second row is equipped with a bench seat, For information on child restraint tethering, see
the head restraints on the outboard seats are not system to power fold the third row head
Ú page 241. restraints.
adjustable or removable. They automatically fold
forward when the seatback is folded, and do not WARNING! The head restraints will also automatically fold
return to their normal position when the seatback when the seatbacks are folded forward using the
is raised. After returning the seatback to its upright  All occupants, including the driver, should not release handles on the backs of the seats from the
position after a folding operation, raise the head operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until cargo area.
restraint until it locks in place. the head restraints are placed in their proper
positions in order to minimize the risk of neck NOTE:
The center head restraint has one adjustment  The head restraints must be raised manually
injury in the event of a crash.
position, and can be adjusted up or down when the when occupying the third row.
seat is occupied. Pull up on the head restraint to (Continued)
raise it. To lower the head restraint, push the  Do not fold if there are passengers seated in the
adjustment button located on the base of the head third row seats.
restraint, and push downward on the head
restraint until it locks into place.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be NOTE:

WARNING! reduced by moving the small control under the The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is disabled
 All occupants, including the driver, should not mirror to the night position (toward the rear of the when the vehicle is in REVERSE to improve the
operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted while set in driver’s view.
the head restraints are placed in their proper the day position (small control forward toward the You can turn the feature on or off through the
positions in order to minimize the risk of neck windshield). Uconnect system Ú page 193. 2
injury in the event of a crash.
or removed could cause serious injury or
death in the event of a collision.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
MIRRORS Digital Rearview Mirror — If Equipped
I NSIDE REARVIEW M IRROR Adjusting Rearview Mirror The Digital Rearview Mirror provides a high
definition, wide and unobstructed view of the road
Manual Mirror — If Equipped Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped behind while driving.
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, Position the mirror in the regular Automatic
and right. The mirror should be adjusted to center and right. The mirror should be adjusted to center Dimming Mirror mode, then activate the Digital
on the view through the rear window. on the view through the rear window. Rearview Mirror mode.
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight To activate the Digital Rearview Mirror, pull the
glare from vehicles behind you. on/off control lever on the bottom of the mirror
rearward toward the driver.
NOTE:
 The Digital Rearview Mirror is not as effective
during nighttime driving in low light applications
due to low ambient light levels. In the event that
it provides the user with less than expected
vision, the mirror can be reverted to a normal
reflective Automatic Dimming Mirror by pushing
Digital Rearview Mirror the control/toggle forward in the vehicle.
 When the rear window washer is activated by
1 — On/Off Control/Toggle pushing the windshield wiper/washer lever
2 — Menu Button forward, the rear backup camera and digital Lift Cover On Vanity Mirror
3 — Left Scroll Button rearview (if equipped) mirror cameras are also
Sun Visor “Slide-On-Rod” Feature —
4 — Right Scroll Button washed. For more information, see Ú page 63.
If Equipped
I LLUMINATED VANITY MIRRORS The sun visor “Slide-On-Rod” feature allows for
Push the menu button next to the on/off control/
To access an illuminated vanity mirror, flip down additional flexibility in positioning the sun visor to
toggle to access the following mirror options:
one of the visors. block out the sun.
 Brightness
Lift the cover to reveal the mirror. The light will turn 1. Fold down the sun visor.
 Tilt
on automatically. 2. Unclip the visor from the center clip.
Use the left and right buttons to scroll through
3. Pivot the sun visor toward the side window.
menu options.
4. Extend the sun visor blade for additional sun
When not in use, push the on/off control forward
blockage.
toward the windshield to return the mirror to the
regular Automatic Dimming Mirror. NOTE:
The sun visor blade can also be extended while the
sun visor is against the windshield for additional
sun blockage through the front of the vehicle.
OUTSIDE MIRRORS OUTSIDE AUTOMATIC DIMMING

To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside MIRRORS — IF E QUIPPED
mirror(s) to center on the adjacent lane of traffic The outside mirrors will automatically adjust for
with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the glare from vehicles behind you. This feature is
inside mirror. controlled by the inside automatic dimming mirror. 2
The mirrors will automatically adjust for headlight
WARNING! glare when the inside mirror adjusts.
Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away POWER M IRRORS
than they really are. Relying too much on side The power mirror control switch is located on the
convex mirrors could cause you to collide with driver's side door trim panel.
another vehicle or other object. Use your inside
To adjust a mirror, rotate the control switch to the
mirror when judging the size or distance of a
mirror you want to adjust (L) or (R). Then push the
vehicle seen in a side convex mirror. Power Mirror Switch
switch in the direction that you want the mirror to
move. 1 — Neutral Position
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature 2 — Left Mirror
All outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved 3 — Control Switch
either forward or rearward to resist damage. The 4 — Right Mirror
hinges have three detent positions: 5 — Power Folding Position
 Full forward position
 Full rearward position NOTE:
 Normal position Once adjustment is complete, rotate the knob to
the neutral position to prevent accidental move-
ments.
Power Folding Power mirror position can be saved as part of the Outside mirrors will move slightly downward from
To fold the door mirrors in using the Power Folding Driver Memory Settings (if equipped) Ú page 32. the present position when the vehicle is shifted
Mirror function, rotate the control switch to the into REVERSE. Outside mirrors will then return to
AUTOMATIC POWER F OLDING MIRRORS the original position when the vehicle is shifted out
power folding position. Rotating the control to the
left, right, or neutral position will return the mirrors — IF EQUIPPED of REVERSE position. Each stored memory setting
to the driving position. will have an associated Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse
When enabled within Uconnect Settings position.
If the power mirror control switch is moved again Ú page 193, the exterior mirrors will automatically
during door mirror folding (from closed to open fold when the ignition is placed in the OFF position NOTE:
position and vice versa), the movement direction is while all doors are still closed and locked. The Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse feature can be
reversed. turned on and off using the Uconnect system
If the exterior mirrors were folded automatically, Ú page 193.
Resetting The Power Folding Outside Mirrors they will unfold when the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN position.
You may need to reset the power folding mirrors if
the following occurs:
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
NOTE:
 The mirrors are accidentally blocked while If the mirrors were folded manually, by using the (HOMELINK®) — IF EQUIPPED
folding. power folding mirror switch on the driver’s door
panel, they will not automatically unfold.
 The mirrors are accidentally manually folded/
unfolded (by hand or by pushing the power HEATED M IRRORS — I F EQUIPPED
folding mirror switch).
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or
 The mirrors come out of the unfolded position. ice. This feature will be activated
 The mirrors shake and vibrate at normal driving whenever you turn on the rear window
speeds. defroster (if equipped) Ú page 63.
To reset the power folding mirrors: Fold and unfold
them by turning the switch (this may require
TILT SIDE MIRRORS IN REVERSE —
multiple switch activations to synchronize the I F E QUIPPED
driver and passenger mirror). This resets them to HomeLink® Buttons And Indicator Light
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse provides automatic
their normal position. outside mirror positioning which will aid the
driver’s view of the ground rearward of the front
doors.
Use this QR code to access your being programmed to the HomeLink® system. I DENTIFYING WHETHER YOU HAVE A
digital experience. Make sure your hand-held transmitter is
programmed to activate the device you are trying R OLLING C ODE O R N ON-R OLLING C ODE
 HomeLink® replaces up to
three hand-held transmitters to program your HomeLink® button to. DEVICE
that operate devices such as Ensure that your vehicle is parked outside of the Before programming a device to one of your
garage door openers, motor- garage before you begin programming. HomeLink® buttons, you must determine whether 2
ized gates, lighting or home It is recommended that you erase all the channels the device has a rolling code or non-rolling code.
security systems. The HomeLink® unit is of your HomeLink® before you use it for the first Rolling Code Devices
powered by your vehicle’s 12 Volt battery. time.
To determine if your device has a rolling code, a
 The HomeLink® buttons that are located in the
overhead console or sunvisor designate the ERASING ALL THE HOMELINK® good indicator is its manufacturing date. Typically,
devices manufactured after 1995 have rolling
three different HomeLink® channels. C HANNELS codes. A device with a rolling code will also have a
 To operate HomeLink®, push and release any To erase the channels, follow this procedure: “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located where the
of the programmed HomeLink® buttons. These antenna is attached to the device. The button may
buttons will activate the devices they are 1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN
position. not be immediately visible when looking at the
programmed to with each press of the corre- device. The name and color of the button may vary
sponding HomeLink® button. 2. Push and hold the two outside HomeLink® slightly by manufacturer.
buttons (I and III) for up to 20 seconds, or until
 The HomeLink® indicator light is located above NOTE:
the HomeLink® indicator light flashes.
the center button Ú page 372. The “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button is not the button
you normally use to operate the device.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN PROGRAMMING NOTE:
Erasing all channels should only be performed Non-rolling Code Devices
HOMELINK® when programming HomeLink® for the first time. Most devices manufactured before 1995 will not
For efficient programming and accurate Do not erase channels when programming addi- have a rolling code. These devices will also not
transmission of the Radio Frequency (RF) signal, it tional buttons. have a “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button.
is recommended that a new battery be placed in
the hand-held transmitter of the device that is
PROGRAMMING H OMELINK® TO A NOTE: Non-Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps
Make sure the garage door opener motor is
GARAGE DOOR OPENER plugged in before moving on to the rolling code/
1. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink®
button and observe the HomeLink® indicator
To program any of the HomeLink® buttons to non-rolling code final steps. light. If the HomeLink® indicator light stays
activate your garage door opener motor, follow the Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps on constantly, programming is complete.
steps below:
NOTE: 2. Push the programmed HomeLink® button to
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate rolling confirm that the garage door opener motor
All HomeLink® buttons are programmed using this code final step 2, after completing rolling code operates. If the garage door opener motor
procedure. You do not need to erase all channels final step 1. does not operate, repeat the steps from the
when programming additional buttons. 1. At the garage door opener motor (in the beginning.
1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN garage), locate the “LEARN” or “TRAIN”
position. button. This can usually be found where the WARNING!
2. Place the garage door opener transmitter hanging antenna wire is attached to the
garage door opener motor. Firmly push and  Your motorized door or gate will open and
1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the
release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button. close while you are programming the universal
HomeLink® button you wish to program, while
transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if
keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in view. 2. Return to the vehicle and push the
people or pets are in the path of the door or
3. Push and hold the HomeLink® button you programmed HomeLink® button three times
gate.
want to program while you push and hold the (holding the button for two seconds each
garage door opener transmitter button you are time). If the garage door opener motor  Do not run your vehicle in a closed garage or
trying to replicate. operates, programming is complete. confined area while programming the trans-
3. Push the programmed HomeLink® button to ceiver. Exhaust gas from your vehicle contains
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and
HomeLink® indicator light. The HomeLink® confirm that the garage door opener motor
operates. If the garage door opener motor colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous
indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly. when inhaled and can cause you and others to
Once this happens, release both buttons. does not operate, repeat the final steps for the
rolling code procedure. be severely injured or killed.
PROGRAMMING H OMELINK® TO A 1. Place the ignition to the ON/RUN position, 1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
without starting the engine.
MISCELLANEOUS D EVICE NOTE:
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™,
Refer to “Programming HomeLink® To A Garage until the HomeLink® indicator light begins to place the ignition in the ON/RUN position. Make
Door Opener” in this section for the procedure on flash after 20 seconds. Do not release the sure while programming HomeLink® with the
how to program HomeLink® to a miscellaneous button. engine on that your vehicle is outside of your 2
device, as it follows the same procedure. Be sure garage, or that the garage door remains open at all
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
to determine if the device has a rolling code, or times.
Step 2 in “Programming HomeLink® To A
non-rolling code before beginning the 2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches
Garage Door Opener” and follow all remaining
programming process. (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button
steps.
NOTE: you wish to program while keeping the
Canadian Radio Frequency (RF) laws require trans- CANADIAN/GATE OPERATOR HomeLink® indicator light in view.
mitter signals to time-out (or quit) after several
seconds of transmission, which may not be long
P ROGRAMMING 3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink®
button while you push and release (cycle) your
enough for HomeLink® to pick up the signal during For programming transmitters in Canada/United hand-held transmitter every two seconds until
programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some States that require the transmitter signals to HomeLink® has successfully accepted the
U.S. gate operators are designed to time-out in the “time-out” after several seconds of transmission: frequency signal. The indicator light will flash
same manner. The procedure may need to be slowly and then rapidly when fully trained.
Canadian Radio Frequency (RF) laws require
performed multiple times to successfully pair the
transmitter signals to time-out (or quit) after 4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to change
device to your HomeLink® buttons.
several seconds of transmission, which may not be flash rates. When it changes, it is
REPROGRAMMING A S INGLE long enough for HomeLink® to pick up the signal programmed. It may take up to 30 seconds or
during programming. Similar to this Canadian law, longer in rare cases. The garage door may
HOMELINK® BUTTON some U.S. gate operators are designed to time-out open and close while you are programming.
To reprogram a single HomeLink® button that has in the same manner.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink®
been previously trained, without erasing all the It may be helpful to unplug the device during the button and observe the indicator light.
channels, follow the procedure below. Be sure to cycling process to prevent possible overheating of
determine whether the new device you want to the garage door or gate motor.
program the HomeLink® button to has a rolling
code, or non-rolling code.
NOTE: SECURITY If you have any problems, or require assistance,

 If the indicator light stays on constantly, please call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or Internet at HomeLink.com for information or
programming is complete and the garage
turn in your vehicle. assistance.
door/device should activate when the
HomeLink® button is pushed. To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons
for 20 seconds until the indicator flashes. Note WARNING!
 To program the two remaining HomeLink®
that all channels will be erased. Individual  Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a
buttons, repeat each step for each
channels cannot be erased. dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the
remaining button. DO NOT erase the chan-
nels. The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is disabled garage while programming the transceiver.
when the Vehicle Security system is active. Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device
for programming, plug it back in at this time. TROUBLESHOOTING TIPS  Your motorized door or gate will open and
close while you are programming the universal
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button If you are having trouble programming transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if
(Canadian/Gate Operator) HomeLink®, here are some of the most common people, pets or other objects are in the path of
To reprogram a channel that has been previously solutions: the door or gate. Only use this transceiver with
trained, follow these steps:  Replace the battery in the garage door opener a garage door opener that has a “stop and
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position. hand-held transmitter. reverse” feature as required by Federal safety
 Push the LEARN button on the garage door standards. This includes most garage door
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button opener models manufactured after 1982. Do
until the indicator light begins to flash after opener to complete the training for a rolling
code. not use a garage door opener without these
20 seconds. Do not release the button. safety features.
 Did you unplug the device for programming and
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” Step remember to plug it back in?
2 and follow all remaining steps.
EXTERIOR LIGHTS For vehicles sold in Canada, rotate the headlight

switch clockwise from the parking lights and
HEADLIGHT SWITCH instrument panel lights position to the AUTO
position for automatic headlights. Rotate to the
The headlight switch is located on the left side of second detent to turn on headlights, parking lights,
the instrument panel, next to the steering wheel. and instrument panel lights operation. 2
The headlight switch controls the operation of the
NOTE:
headlights, parking lights, instrument panel lights,
and fog lights (if equipped).  Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlight
and fog light (if equipped) lenses that are lighter
and less susceptible to stone breakage than
Headlight Switch (Vehicles Sold In Canada Only) glass lights. Plastic is not as scratch resistant as
1 — Rotate Headlight Control glass and therefore different lens cleaning
procedures must be followed.
2 — Push Front Fog Light Control
3 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control  To minimize the possibility of scratching the
lenses and reducing light output, avoid wiping
4 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
with a dry cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with
a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.
NOTE:
Vehicles sold in Canada are equipped with a head- CAUTION!
Headlight Switch light switch without the OFF position. In order to
Do not use abrasive cleaning components,
turn the exterior lights off, the headlight switch
1 — Rotate Headlight Control solvents, steel wool or other abrasive materials
must be rotated to AUTO position.
to clean the lenses.
2 — Push Front Fog Light Control To turn on the headlights, rotate the headlight
3 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control switch clockwise. When the headlight switch is on,
4 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control the parking lights, taillights, license plate light and
instrument panel lights are also turned on. To turn
off the headlights, rotate the headlight switch back
to the O (off) position.
MULTIFUNCTION L EVER NOTE: This camera detects vehicle specific light and
 For vehicles sold in Canada, the Daytime automatically switches from high beams to low
The multifunction lever is located on the left side of beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view.
Running Lights will automatically deactivate
the steering column.
when the front fog lights are turned on. NOTE:
 If allowed by law in the country in which the  The Automatic High Beam Headlight system can
vehicle was purchased the Daytime Running be turned on or off by selecting or deselecting
Lights can be turned on and off using the “Auto High Beam” within Uconnect Settings
Uconnect system Ú page 193. Ú page 193.
 On some vehicles, the Daytime Running Lights  The headlight switch must also be turned to the
may deactivate, or reduce intensity, on one side AUTO position after Automatic High Beams is
of the vehicle (when a turn signal is activated on enabled within Uconnect Settings for the
that side), or on both sides of the vehicle (when feature to activate.
the hazard warning lights are activated).  Automatic High Beams will only activate when
HIGH/LOW B EAM SWITCH the vehicle speed is above 22 mph (35 km/h).
Multifunction Lever
 Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and
Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument
DAYTIME RUNNING L IGHTS (DRLS) — panel to switch the headlights to high beams.
taillights of vehicles in the field of view will
cause headlights to remain on longer (closer to
I F EQUIPPED Pulling the multifunction back toward the steering the vehicle). Also, dirt, film, and other obstruc-
wheel will turn the low beams back on, or shut the tions on the windshield or camera lens will
The Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) come on
high beams off. cause the system to function improperly.
whenever the engine is running, and the low
beams are not on. The lights will remain on until AUTOMATIC HIGH B EAMS — If the windshield or Automatic High Beam
the ignition is placed in the OFF or ON/RUN
position, or the parking brake is engaged. The low
I F E QUIPPED Headlight Control mirror is replaced, the mirror
must be re-aimed to ensure proper performance.
beams must be used for normal nighttime driving. The Automatic High Beam Headlight system See a local authorized dealer.
provides increased forward lighting at night by
automating high beam control through the use of a
digital camera mounted on the inside rearview
mirror.
FLASH-TO-P ASS HEADLIGHTS O N A UTOMATICALLY W ITH Proximity Wake-Up — If Equipped
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights WIPERS This feature is enabled/disabled within the
Uconnect system, and is activated when the
by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. If your vehicle is equipped with Automatic operator approaches the driver’s door,
This will cause the high beam headlights to turn on, Headlights, it also has this passenger’s door, or liftgate with a valid key fob on
and remain on, until the lever is released. customer-programmable feature. When your their person. Some exterior and interior lights will 2
AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS headlights are in the automatic mode and the illuminate in order to provide an increased sense
engine is running, they will automatically turn on of welcome and security as the operator
This system automatically turns the headlights on when the wiper system is on. This feature is approaches the vehicle in the dark. “Headlight
or off according to ambient light levels. To turn the programmable through the Uconnect system Illumination On Approach” must be selected and
system on, rotate the headlight switch Ú page 193. set to a time value other than zero within Uconnect
counterclockwise to the AUTO position. When the Settings for Proximity Wake-Up to activate.
system is on, the headlight time delay feature is
NOTE:
also on. This means the headlights will stay on for When your headlights come on during the daytime, The doors may be locked or unlocked for this
up to 90 seconds after you place the ignition into the vehicle will monitor outside brightness and feature to activate, as long as the ignition is in the
the OFF position. The headlight time delay can be decide if the instrument panel needs to be dimmed OFF position, or during a Remote Start event. It will
programmed 0/30/60/90 seconds within the or not Ú page 59. not activate if the doors are locked and the ignition
was placed in the ON/RUN position.
Uconnect system Ú page 193. HEADLIGHT ILLUMINATION ON
NOTE:
To turn the automatic system off, move the APPROACH Proximity Wake-Up may not activate under the
headlight switch out of the AUTO position.
When enabled, the headlights, exterior door following conditions:
NOTE:
handle pocket lights (if equipped), and interior  After numerous consecutive activations, in
The engine must be running before the headlights
lights will illuminate when the unlock button on the order to conserve the vehicle’s battery
will come on in the automatic mode.
key fob is pushed as the operator is approaching  After the vehicle’s engine has been off for
PARKING LIGHTS AND PANEL L IGHTS the vehicle. This feature can be turned on/off, and several days
the length of time the headlights stay on can be
To turn on the parking lights and instrument panel programmed for up to 90 seconds within Uconnect
lights, rotate the headlight switch clockwise. To Settings Ú page 193.
turn off the parking lights, rotate the headlight
switch back to the O (off) position.
Headlight Animation — If Equipped NOTE:

When “Headlight Illumination On Approach” is The headlight delay time is programmable through
turned on, and set to a time value above zero, the Uconnect Settings Ú page 193.
exterior lights illuminate in a theatrical manner
during approach to the vehicle. This feature is
LIGHTS-O N R EMINDER
activated in the following situations: If the headlights or parking lights are left on after
 Proximity Wake-Up (if equipped) is activated the ignition is placed in the OFF position, a chime
will sound when the driver’s door is opened.
 Remote Start is activated
 The unlock button on the key fob is pushed FOG LIGHTS — I F EQUIPPED
NOTE: To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking Fog Light Button (Vehicles Sold In Canada Only)
For Headlight Animation to activate with Remote lights or the low beam headlights, and push the fog The fog lights will operate only when the parking
Start or with the push of the unlock button, light button on the headlight switch. lights are on, or when the vehicle headlights are on
“Greeting Lights” must also be selected within the low beam. An indicator light located in the
Uconnect system. instrument cluster display will illuminate when the
HEADLIGHT DELAY fog lights are on. The fog lights will turn off when
the button is pushed a second time, when the
To aid in your exit, your vehicle is equipped with a headlight switch is rotated to the off position, or
headlight delay that will leave the headlights on for the high beam is selected.
approximately 90 seconds. This delay is initiated Cornering Lights
when the ignition is placed in the OFF position
while the headlight switch is on, and then the The cornering lights are a feature that improves
headlight switch is cycled off. Headlight delay can visibility at night while turning the vehicle. When
be canceled by either turning the headlight switch activated, a light incorporated in the front fog light
on then off, or by placing the ignition in the Fog Light Button will illuminate on the side of the vehicle the
ON/RUN position. steering wheel is rotated toward or the turn signal
indicator is on. It can be programmed through the
Uconnect system Ú page 193.
TURN SIGNALS If the ignition is placed in the OFF position and any Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped
door is left ajar for 10 minutes or the overhead
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the The overhead console lights can also be operated
console Dome On switch is left on for 10 minutes,
arrows on each side of the instrument cluster will individually as reading lights by pushing the
the interior lights will automatically turn off.
flash to show proper operation of the front and rear corresponding buttons.
turn signal lights.
NOTE:
Battery saver mode is canceled if the ignition is in 2
NOTE: the ON/RUN position.
If either light remains on and does not flash, or If the headlights remain on while the ignition is
there is a very fast cluster turn indicator flash rate, placed in the OFF position, the exterior lights will
check for a defective outside light bulb. automatically turn off after eight minutes. If the
LANE CHANGE ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED headlights are turned on and left on for eight
minutes while the ignition is in the OFF position,
Tap the multifunction lever up or down once, the exterior lights will automatically turn off.
without moving beyond the detent, and the turn
signal (right or left) will flash three times then
automatically turn off.
INTERIOR LIGHTS
Front Courtesy/Reading Lights
AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHT LEVELING — COURTESY LIGHTS 1 — Reading Light On/Off Buttons
IF EQUIPPED Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the 2 — Dome Defeat Button
front doors are opened or the Dome ON button is 3 — Ambient Light
This feature prevents the headlights from pushed on the overhead console. If your vehicle is
interfering with the vision of oncoming drivers. 4 — Dome ON Button
equipped with Remote Keyless Entry and the
Headlight leveling automatically adjusts the height unlock button is pushed on the key fob, the
of the headlight beam in reaction to changes in courtesy and dome lights will turn on. When a door Rear Courtesy/Reading Lights
vehicle pitch. is open and the interior lights are on, pressing the Located above the rear passenger seating in both
BATTERY SAVER Dome Defeat button on the overhead console will second and third rows, along the trim, are
cause all of the interior lights to turn off. courtesy/reading lights. The courtesy lights turn on
To protect the life of your vehicle’s battery, load when a door or the liftgate is opened. The lights will
shedding is provided for both the interior and also turn on when the unlock button on the key fob
exterior lights. is pushed.
The courtesy lights also function as reading lights. Multicolor Ambient Lighting — If Equipped
Push the reading light button to turn these lights
The color of certain ambient lighting inside of the
on while inside the vehicle. Push the reading light
vehicle can be selected within the Apps menu on
button a second time to turn each light off.
the radio screen, or within Uconnect Settings
Dimmer Controls Ú page 193. Brightness is adjusted using the
The dimmer controls are inboard and adjacent to ambient light dimmer control on the headlight
the headlight switch located on the left side of the switch.
instrument panel. Five colors can be selected for the following two
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating zones inside of the vehicle:
the right dimmer control upward will increase the Dimmer Controls (Vehicles Sold In Canada Only)  Zone 1:
brightness of the instrument cluster lights.  Instrument panel decorative ambient lights
Rotating the left dimmer control will adjust the 1 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control
interior light levels of the ambient lighting on the 2 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control  Door panel decorative ambient lights
instrument panel and doors. Certain ambient lights  Zone 2:
may be color customizable Ú page 60.  Front seat footwell areas below the instru-
NOTE:
 Multicolor ambient lighting for first and second
ment panel
rows, and overhead white ambient lighting in  Lighting below the second row seats
the second and third row seating areas, may not  Map pocket lighting on all four door panels
be equipped in the vehicle.
These areas can be set to different colors, or if the
 The dimming of lighting linked to the headlight SYNC button is selected within the settings menu,
status (i.e. radio screen brightness) is program- all colored lights will be set to the same color
mable through the Uconnect system automatically.
Ú page 193.
NOTE:
All other ambient lighting inside of the vehicle will
remain white. The ambient light dimmer control
Dimmer Controls
switch will adjust all ambient lighting at the same
1 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control time.
2 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS WINDSHIELD WIPER O PERATION 36 seconds between cycles. The delay intervals
will double in duration when the vehicle speed is
The windshield wiper/washer lever is located on The wipers and washers are operated by a switch 10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
the right side of the steering column. The front within the wiper lever. Rotate the switch at the end
of the lever upward, to the first detent past the
NOTE:
wipers are operated by rotating a switch, located
intermittent settings for low-speed wiper If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph
on the end of the lever. 2
operation. Rotate the switch at the end of the lever (16 km/h), delay times will be doubled.
upward to the second detent past the intermittent Windshield Washer Operation
settings for high-speed wiper operation. To turn the To use the washer, pull the lever rearward toward
windshield wipers off, rotate the switch within the you and hold. If the lever is pulled while on the
lever all the way down to OFF. intermittent setting, the wipers will turn on and
operate for several wipe cycles after the lever is
CAUTION! released, and then resume the intermittent
Always remove any buildup of snow that interval previously selected. If the lever is pulled
prevents the windshield wiper blades from while the wipers are in the off position, the wipers
returning to the “park” position. If the windshield will operate several cycles, then turn off.
wiper switch is turned off, and the blades cannot NOTE:
Windshield Wiper Operation return to the “park” position, damage to the  As a protective measure, the pump will stop if
wiper motor may occur. the switch is held for more than 20 seconds.
1 — Pull For Front Washer
2 — Rotate For Rear Wiper Operation Once the switch is released the pump will
3 — Rotate For Front Wiper Operation Intermittent Wiper System resume normal operation.
4 — Push Forward For Rear Washer Use the intermittent wiper when weather  If the front window washer feature is activated,
5 — Push Up For Mist conditions make a single wiping cycle with a all of the front cameras (if equipped) on the
variable pause between cycles desirable. Rotate vehicle will be washed as well.
the switch at the end of the wiper lever to the first
detent position, and then turn the switch at the end
of the lever to select the desired delay interval.
There are four delay settings, which allow you to
regulate the wipe interval from a minimum of one
cycle every second to a maximum of approximately
WARNING! RAIN S ENSING WIPERS — IF EQUIPPED The Rain Sensing system has protective features
for the wiper blades and arms. It will not operate
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield This feature senses rain or snowfall on the under the following conditions:
could lead to a collision. You might not see other windshield and automatically activates the wipers.
 Low Temperature Wipe Inhibit — The Rain
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden Rotate the end of the windshield wiper lever to one
Sensing feature will not operate when the igni-
icing of the windshield during freezing weather, of the four detent positions to activate this feature.
tion is first placed in the ON/RUN position, when
warm the windshield with the defroster before The sensitivity of the system is adjustable from the the vehicle is stationary and the outside
and during windshield washer use. windshield wiper lever. Wiper sensitivity position 1 temperature is below 32°F (0°C), unless the
is the least sensitive, and wiper sensitivity position wiper control on the windshield wiper lever is
4 is the most sensitive. moved, the vehicle speed becomes greater than
Mist
NOTE: 3 mph (5 km/h) or the outside temperature
Use the Mist feature when weather conditions rises above freezing.
make occasional usage of the wipers necessary.  The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when
Push the lever upward to the MIST position and the wiper switch is in the low, high, or OFF posi-  Neutral Wipe Inhibit — The Rain Sensing feature
release for a single wiping cycle. tion. Only in one of the intermittent positions. will not operate when the ignition is placed in
 The Rain Sensing feature may not function prop-
the ON/RUN position, when the transmission
NOTE: gear selector is in the NEUTRAL position and the
The Mist feature does not activate the washer erly when ice or dried saltwater is present on the
windshield. vehicle speed is less than 3 mph (5 km/h),
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on unless the wiper control on the windshield wiper
the windshield. The wash function must be used in  Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or sili- lever is moved, the vehicle speed is greater than
order to spray the windshield with washer fluid. cone may reduce rain sensor performance. 3 mph (5 km/h) or the gear selector is moved
For information on wiper care and replacement,  The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and out of the NEUTRAL position.
see Ú page 313. off through the Uconnect system Ú page 193.  Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles
equipped with the Remote Start system, Rain
Sensing wipers are not operational when the
vehicle is in the Remote Start mode. Once the
operator is in the vehicle and has placed the
ignition switch in the ON/RUN position, rain
sensing wiper operation can resume, if it has
been selected, and no other inhibit conditions
(mentioned previously) exist.
REAR WIPER AND WASHER WINDSHIELD WIPER D E-ICER — AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL
The rear wiper/washer is operated by rotating a I F E QUIPPED DESCRIPTIONS AND F UNCTIONS
switch, located at the middle of the lever. Your vehicle may be equipped with a Windshield
Rotate the center portion of the lever Wiper De-Icer feature that may be activated under
upward to the first detent for intermittent the following conditions: 2
operation and to the second detent for  Activation By Front Defrost — The Windshield
continuous rear wiper operation. Wiper De-Icer shall be activated automatically in
Rear Window Washer Operation the case of a cold weather manual start with full
Pushing the windshield wiper lever front defrost, and when the ambient tempera-
forward activates the rear window ture is below 33°F (0.6°C).
washer. If the lever is pushed while on  Activation By Rear Defrost — The Windshield
the intermittent setting, the wipers will Wiper De-Icer shall be activated automatically
turn on and operate for several wipe cycles after when the rear defrost is turned on and when the Uconnect 5 NAV With 10.1–inch Display
the lever is released, and then resume the ambient temperature is below 33°F (0.6°C). Temperature Controls
intermittent interval previously selected. If the  Activation By Remote Start Operation — When
lever is pushed while the wipers are in the off Remote Start is active and the outside ambient
position, the wipers will operate several wipe temperature is less than 33°F (0.6°C), the
cycles, then turn off. Windshield Wiper De-Icer will activate. Exiting
NOTE: Remote Start will resume its previous operation.
If equipped with a backup camera washer, when If the Windshield Wiper De-Icer was active, the
the rear window washer is activated, the rear timer and operation will continue.
backup camera and digital rearview mirror
(if equipped) cameras are also washed. CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Climate Control system allows you to regulate
the temperature, air flow, and direction of air Uconnect 5/5 NAV With 8.4–inch Display
circulating throughout the vehicle. The controls are
Temperature Controls
located on the touchscreen and on the instrument
panel below the radio.
Max A/C Button The A/C can be deselected manually without MAX Defrost Button
disturbing the mode control selection. Continuous
Press and release to change the current Push the MAX Defrost button to change
use of Recirculation mode may make the inside air
setting. The MAX A/C indicator the current airflow setting to Defrost
stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended
illuminates when MAX A/C is ON. mode. The indicator illuminates when
use of this mode if not recommended.
Performing this function again will cause this feature is on. Performing this
Recirculation mode may automatically adjust to
the MAX A/C operation to switch into manual mode function will cause the automatic climate controls
optimize customer experience for warming,
and the MAX A/C indicator will turn off. Pressing to change to manual mode, and the following
cooling, dehumidification, etc.
other setting buttons will also cause the MAX A/C settings will occur:
to turn off. In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may
 The blower speed increases to full (all LEDs on)
lead to excessive window fogging. The
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling  The rear blower is off
Recirculation feature may be unavailable if
performance.
conditions exist that could create fogging on the  The air conditioning compressor is turned on
NOTE: inside of the windshield. (A/C LED off)
The MAX A/C button is only available on the
touchscreen. AUTO Button  Both driver and passenger temperature controls
The AUTO button automatically controls are set to HI
A/C Button
the interior cabin temperature by  Defrost mode is selected (LED on)
Press and release to change the current adjusting distribution and amount of  Rear defroster is turned on (LED on)
setting. The A/C indicator illuminates airflow. Air Conditioning (A/C) may be
when A/C is on.  The air recirculation is turned off (LED off)
active during AUTO operation to improve
performance. Performing this function will cause If MAX Defrost mode is turned off, the Climate
Recirculation Button the system to switch between manual mode and Control system will return to the previous setting.
Press and release the Recirculation automatic modes Ú page 69. AUTO mode is highly MAX Defrost automatically turns off after
button to change the system between recommended for efficiency. 20 minutes.
recirculation mode and outside air mode.
Recirculation can be used when outside
conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high
humidity are present. Recirculation can be used in
all modes. Recirculation may be unavailable if
conditions exist that could create fogging on the
inside of the windshield.
Rear Defrost Button Rear Climate Control Button blower settings. Changing the front passenger
temperature or rear passenger temperature,
Press and release the button on the Press and release this button on the
mode, and blower settings while in SYNC will
touchscreen, or push and release the climate control touchscreen to access
automatically exit this feature.
button on the faceplate, to turn on the the rear climate controls. The Rear
rear window defroster and the heated Climate indicator will illuminate when the NOTE:
outside mirrors (if equipped). The Rear Defrost rear climate controls are ON. The SYNC setting is only available on the touch- 2
indicator illuminates when the rear window screen.
Driver And Passenger Temperature
defroster is on. The rear window defroster Blower Control
automatically turns off after 10 minutes. Switches
These switches provide the driver and passenger Blower Control is used to regulate the
CAUTION! with independent temperature control. amount of air forced through the Climate
Control system. There are several blower
Failure to follow these cautions can cause Lift the driver’s or passenger’s side speeds available.
damage to the heating elements: toggle switch on the faceplate upward, or
press and slide the temperature bar Blower speed can be controlled by lifting blower
 Use care when washing the inside of the rear towards the red arrow button on the toggle on the instrument panel to increase blower
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners touchscreen for warmer temperature settings. speed, or depress the toggle for lower blower
on the interior surface of the window. Use a speed.
soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping Depress the driver’s or passenger’s side
toggle switch on the faceplate downward, The speed can also be selected using the blower
parallel to the heating elements. Labels can control buttons on the touchscreen. Use the small
be peeled off after soaking with warm water. or press and slide the temperature bar
towards the blue arrow button on the blower icon to reduce the blower setting and the
 Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or touchscreen for cooler temperature settings. large blower icon to increase the blower setting.
abrasive window cleaners on the interior Blower speed can also be selected by pressing the
surface of the window. SYNC Button blower bar area between the icons on the
Press the SYNC button on the touchscreen.
 Keep all objects a safe distance from the
touchscreen to toggle the SYNC feature
window.
on/off. The SYNC indicator illuminates
when SYNC is on. SYNC is used to
synchronize the front passenger temperature and
rear passenger temperature, mode, and blower
settings with the driver temperature, mode, and
Mode Control Floor Mode Dual Level Combination

Select Mode by pressing one of the Mode Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight Front Defrost and Panel Mode
buttons on the touchscreen, or the amount of air is directed through the Tri-Level Combination
faceplate, to change the airflow defrost and side window demister
Front Defrost, Panel Mode, and Floor Mode
distribution mode. The airflow outlets.
distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes
Mix Mode Climate Control OFF Button
from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, Press and release this button to turn the
defrost outlets and demist outlets. Air is directed through the floor, defrost,
Climate Control ON/OFF.
and side window demister outlets. This
Panel Mode setting works best in cold or snowy
Air comes from the outlets in the conditions that require extra heat to the
instrument panel. Each of these outlets windshield. This setting is good for maintaining
Controlling The Rear Climate Controls
can be individually adjusted to direct the comfort while reducing moisture on the From The Front ATC Panel
flow of air. The air vanes of the center windshield.
outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and
Combine Modes
down or side to side to regulate airflow direction.
There is a shut-off wheel located next to the air
vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow The driver or front passenger can
from these outlets. combine two or three of the modes
Bi-Level Mode described below by selecting them
individually on their side of climate
Air comes from the instrument panel
control screen. Combine modes by
outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount
pressing each icon on the
of air is directed through the defrost and
touchscreen.
side window demister outlets. Front ATC Panel Uconnect 5 NAV With 10.1–inch Display
NOTE: Rear Controls
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort condi-
tions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets
and warmer air from the floor outlets.
REAR AUTO BUTTON SYNC BUTTON

Press and release this button on the Press the SYNC button on the
touchscreen to change the current touchscreen to toggle the SYNC feature
setting. The REAR AUTO indicator will on/off. The SYNC indicator will illuminate
illuminate when REAR AUTO is on. This when SYNC is on. SYNC is used to
feature automatically controls the rear interior synchronize the front passenger temperature and 2
cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution rear passenger temperature, mode, and blower
and amount. Toggling this function will cause the settings with the driver temperature, mode, and
rear system to switch between manual mode and blower settings. Changing the front passenger
automatic modes Ú page 69. temperature or rear passenger temperature,
Front ATC Panel Uconnect 5/5 NAV With 8.4–inch Display mode, or blower settings while in SYNC will
Rear Controls REAR LOCK BUTTON automatically exit this feature.
The Three-Zone and Four-Zone ATC system allows Press and release this button to lock out NOTE:
for adjustment of the rear climate controls from the rear manual temperature controls The SYNC setting is only available on the touch-
the front ATC panel. from adjusting the rear temperature and screen.
blower settings. The LOCK REAR
To change the rear system settings: indicator will illuminate when LOCK REAR is on. REAR BLOWER CONTROL
 Press the “Rear Climate” button on the touch- Rear Blower Control is used to regulate
screen to display the rear climate controls. The FRONT CLIMATE BUTTON
the amount of air forced through the rear
control functions now operate the rear system. Press and release to return to the Front climate system. There are several blower
 Press the “Front Climate” button on the touch- Climate Control Screen. speeds available. The speeds can be
screen to return to the front climate controls. selected using the buttons on the touchscreen.
NOTE: Use the small blower icon (or blower icon with the
If equipped with a Four-Zone ATC system, the left downward arrow) to reduce the blower setting, and
and right sides of the rear passenger zones can be the large blower icon (or blower icon with the
adjusted separately from the front or rear ATC upward arrow) to increase the blower setting.
panel. Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower
bar area between the icons.
REAR MODE CONTROL Rear Automatic Temperature Control AUTO BUTTON

The rear airflow distribution mode can be The AUTO button automatically controls
adjusted so air comes from the headliner the interior cabin temperature by
outlets, the floor outlets or both. adjusting distribution and amount of
airflow. Performing this function will
BI-LEVEL MODE cause the system to switch between manual mode
Press this button on the touchscreen to and automatic modes Ú page 69.
change the air distribution mode to
Bi-Level Mode. In Bi-Level Mode, air REAR TEMPERATURE CONTROL
comes from both the headliner outlets These buttons provide the left and right side of the
and the floor outlets. rear seating area with independent temperature
NOTE: control.
Rear Automatic Climate Controls
In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level mode Push the Up button on the faceplate for
is designed to provide cooler air out of the head- The rear ATC system has floor air outlets at the rear warmer temperature settings.
liner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets. right side of the third row seats and overhead
outlets at each outboard rear seating position. The Push the Down button on the faceplate
FLOOR MODE system provides heated air through the floor for cooler temperature settings.
Press this button on the touchscreen to outlets or cool, dehumidified air through the
change the air distribution mode to Floor headliner outlets.
Mode. In Floor Mode, air comes from the The rear system temperature control buttons are REAR BLOWER CONTROL
floor outlets. located on rear of the front center console. Use the blower button with the “down”
REAR CLIMATE CONTROL OFF BUTTON NOTE: arrow to reduce the blower setting, and
If equipped with a Four-Zone ATC system, the left the blower button with the “up” arrow to
To manually set the rear blower controls and right sides of the rear passenger zones can be increase the blower setting. The rear
to off, press the Rear Climate Control/ adjusted separately from the front or rear ATC blower setting is shown in the display.
Blower Off button. panel.
REAR MODE CONTROL REAR TEMPERATURE LOCK Once the desired temperature is shown on the rear
display, the ATC System will automatically achieve
Push the rear mode button to adjust The Rear Temperature Lock symbol on
and maintain that comfort level. When the system
airflow distribution. The rear mode the rear display is illuminated when the
is set up for your comfort level, it is not necessary
settings are shown in the rear display. rear controls are locked by the front
to change the settings. You will experience the
The rear airflow distribution mode can be system.
adjusted so air comes from the headliner outlets,
greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to 2
Rear Lock function automatically.
the floor outlets, or both.
Pressing the Rear Temperature Lock button on the
PANEL MODE Uconnect touchscreen will illuminate a lock symbol
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE C ONTROL
Air comes from the outlets in the
in the rear display. The rear temperature and air (ATC)
source are then controlled from the front Uconnect
headliner. Each of these outlets can be
system.
Automatic Operation
individually adjusted to direct the flow of
1. Push the AUTO button on the front Automatic
air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets to Rear seat occupants can only adjust the rear ATC
Temperature Control (ATC) Panel and the
one side will shut off the airflow. control when the Rear Temperature Lock button is
word “AUTO” will illuminate in the front ATC
turned off.
BI-LEVEL MODE display, along with two temperatures for the
The rear ATC is located on the rear of the front driver and front passenger. The system will
Air comes from both the headliner outlets center console. then automatically regulate the amount of
and the floor outlets.  Press the Rear Temperature Lock button on the airflow.
front Uconnect touchscreen a second time to 2. Adjust the temperature you would like the
turn the Rear Temperature Lock icon off in the system to maintain, by adjusting the driver,
NOTE: rear display.
In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level mode passenger, and rear temperatures. Once the
is designed to provide cooler air out of the head-  Push a rear blower button, adjust the tempera- desired temperature is displayed, the system
liner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets. ture using the rear up and down arrows, and will achieve and automatically maintain that
select a control mode to suit the rear occupant’s comfort level.
FLOOR MODE needs.
Air comes from the floor outlets.  ATC is selected by pushing the AUTO button on
the rear climate control faceplate.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort CLIMATE VOICE RECOGNITION NOTE:
level, it is not necessary to change the Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
settings. You will experience the greatest Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free and keep suggested control settings for various weather
efficiency by simply allowing the system to everyone comfortable while you keep moving conditions.
function automatically. ahead. (If vehicle is equipped with climate control.)
Summer Operation
Push the VR button . After the beep, say one of The engine cooling system must be protected with
NOTE:
the following commands: a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper
It is not necessary to move the temperature
settings. The system automatically adjusts the  “Set the driver temperature to 70 degrees” corrosion protection and to protect against engine
temperature, mode and fan speed to provide  “Set the passenger temperature to 70 degrees” overheating. OAT coolant (conforming to
comfort as quickly as possible. MS.90032) is recommended. For more
Did You Know: Voice Command for Climate may
To provide you with maximum comfort in the information, see Ú page 367.
only be used to adjust the interior temperature of
automatic mode, during cold start-ups, the blower your vehicle. Voice Command will not work to Winter Operation
fan will remain on low until the engine warms up. adjust the heated seats or steering wheel if To ensure the best possible heater and defroster
The fan will engage immediately if the Defrost equipped. performance, make sure the engine cooling
mode is selected, or by changing the front blower system is functioning properly and the proper
knob setting. OPERATING T IPS amount, type, and concentration of coolant is
Manual Operation Override used. Use of the Air Recirculation mode during
CAUTION! Winter months is not recommended, because it
This system offers a full complement of manual
override features. The AUTO symbol in the front Interior air enters the Rear Automatic may cause window fogging.
ATC display will be turned off when the system is Temperature Control system through an intake Vacation/Storage
being used in the manual mode. grille, located in the right side trim panel behind
the third row seats. The heater outlets are For information on maintaining the Climate Control
NOTE: located in the right side trim panel, just behind system when the vehicle is being stored for an
The system will not automatically sense the the rear doors. Do not block or place objects extended period of time, see Ú page 359.
presence of fog, mist or ice on the windshield. directly in front of the inlet grille or heater
Defrost mode must be manually selected to clear outlets. The electrical system cold overload
the windshield and side glass. causing damage to the blower motor.
Window Fogging Windshield Wiper De-Icer — If Equipped Operating Tips Chart

Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild, The windshield wiper de-icer is a heating element
WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS
rainy, and/or humid weather. To clear the located at the base of the windshield.
windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and increase Set the mode control to
It operates automatically once the following
the front blower speed. Do not use the conditions are met: (Panel Mode),
Recirculation mode without A/C for long periods, (MAX A/C) on, and 2
as fogging may occur.  Activation By Front Defrost
Hot Weather And blower on high. Roll
The wiper de-icer activates automatically during Vehicle Interior Is Very down the windows for a
Outside Air Intake
a cold weather manual start with full defrost, Hot minute to flush out the
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of and when the ambient temperature is below hot air. Adjust the
the windshield, is free of obstructions, such as 33°F (0.6°C). controls as needed to
leaves. Leaves collected in the air intake may achieve comfort.
 Activation By Rear Defrost
reduce airflow, and if they enter the air distribution
box, they could plug the water drains. In Winter The wiper de-icer activates automatically when Turn (A/C) on and
months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice, the Rear Defrost is operating and the ambient Warm Weather set the mode control to
slush, and snow. temperature is below 33°F (0.6°C).
(Panel Mode).
 Activation By Remote Start Operation
Cabin Air Filter Operate in (Bi-Level
When the Remote Start is activated and the Cool Sunny
The Climate Control system filters out dust and Mode).
outside ambient temperature is less than 33°F
pollen from the air. Contact an authorized dealer to
(0.6°C) the windshield wiper de-icer will acti- Set the mode control to
service your cabin air filter, and to have it replaced
vate. Exiting Remote Start will resume its Cool & Humid (Floor Mode) and
when needed.
previous operation. If the Windshield Wiper Conditions turn (A/C) on to
Stop/Start System — If Equipped De-Icer was active, the timer and operation will keep windows clear.
While in an Autostop, the Climate Control system continue.
Set the mode control to
may automatically adjust airflow to maintain cabin
comfort. Customer settings will be maintained (Floor Mode). If
upon return to an engine running condition. windshield fogging
Cold Weather
starts to occur, move
the control to (Mix
Mode).
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT To open the upper storage compartment, pull the
upper paddle release lever.
STORAGE To open the lower storage compartment, pull the
lower paddle release lever.
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the
passenger side of the instrument panel.
Sunglasses Bin Door
Rear Full Center Console — If Equipped

The rear full center console contains both an upper
and a lower storage area.
Storage Compartment Release Levers
1 — Upper Compartment Release Lever
Glove Compartment Release Handle 2 — Lower Compartment Release Lever
To open the glove compartment, pull the release

Lift upward on the larger of the release levers to
handle.
access the lower storage compartment.
Front Center Console
Sunglasses Bin Door
The front center console contains both an upper
and a lower storage area. At the front of the console a compartment is
provided for the storage of a pair of sunglasses.
The storage compartment access is a “push/push” Rear Center Console
design. Push the chrome pad on the door to open.
Push the chrome pad on the door to close. 1 — Console Cupholders
2 — Open Lower Storage Area
3 — Covered Storage Compartment
To open the covered storage compartment, pull SUN S CREENS — IF E QUIPPED USB/AUX C ONTROL
the upper paddle release lever on the front of the
lid. Sun screens are available for the second row This feature allows an external USB device to be
seating windows. The screens store in the sill trim plugged into one of the USB ports, located in the
The storage compartment may also be lifted
panels, and the tops of the windows are equipped center stack of the instrument panel.
forward. Pull the paddle release lever located on
with hooks that the sun screens attach to when
the back of the console lid. Plugging in a smartphone device to a USB port will 2
pulled up. activate Android Auto™ or Apple CarPlay®
Gently pull up on the tab to raise the sun screen. features, if equipped. For further information, refer
Continue pulling the sun screen until the tab is to “Android Auto™” or “Apple CarPlay®” in the
near the top of the window. Owner’s Manual Supplement.
Once the screen is completely to the top of the NOTE:
window, extend the top bar of the sun screen over Two devices can be plugged in at the same time,
the two hooks attached to the top of the window. and both ports will provide charging capabilities.
Only one port can transfer data to the system at a
time.
For example, if a device is plugged into the Type A
USB port and another device is plugged into the
Rear Paddle Release Lever Type C USB port, a message will appear and allow
When the second row seats are folded flat, lifting you to select which device to use.
the console forward provides a flat load floor Different scenarios are listed below when a
surface from the cargo area. There is also access non-phone device is plugged into the smaller and
to the storage compartment from the third row. larger USB ports, and when a phone device is
plugged into the smaller and larger USB ports:
CAUTION!  “A new device is now connected. Previous
Sun Screen Extended
Remove any items stored in the console connection was lost”.
cupholders or devices with cords routing through To lower the sun screen, gently lift the tab upward
 “(Phone Name) now connected. Previous
upper storage area. Damage may occur to upper to disengage the hooks, and feed the screen back
connection was lost”.
console lid and device cables when upper into the base sill.
storage compartment is lifted forward.
 “Another device is in use through the same USB Once a device is connected to the USB port, it will By using an auxiliary cable to connect an external
port. Please disconnect the first device to use begin charging and is ready for use with the device:
the second device”. system. Type C and Type A charge-only USB ports  The audio device can be played on the vehicle’s
Plugging in a phone or another USB device may can be used at the same time but cannot be used sound system. The Uconnect system will not
cause the connection to a previous device to be simultaneously while playing media. When both display information related to the artist, track
lost. Type C and Type A charge-only USB ports are in use title, and album information.
they will be charged at a reduced rate.
Connecting AUX Or The External USB NOTE:
NOTE: When using the AUX port, the external device
Device If the device’s battery completely discharges, it cannot be controlled using the radio buttons. The
Use a connection cable to connect an external USB may not communicate with the Uconnect system device will not charge.
device to the vehicle’s USB port, or use an auxiliary until a minimum charge is attained. Leaving the
cable to connect a device to the vehicle’s AUX port. For further information, refer to the Uconnect
device connected to the USB port may charge it to
Both are located below the climate controls. Owner’s Manual Supplement.
the required level.
Using This Feature Second And Third Row USB Ports
By using a USB cable to connect an external The second row USB ports can be used to charge
device: an external device.
 The device can be played on the vehicle’s sound

system, providing the artist, track title, and
album information on the radio display.
 The device can be controlled using the radio
buttons to play, and browse the contents of the
device.
 The audio device battery charges when plugged
USB/AUX Ports
into the USB port.
1 — USB C Port
2 — USB A Port (Standard USB)
Center Console Rear USB Ports
3 — AUX Port
In the third row, a set of two USB ports can be used NOTE: The rear cargo power outlet is located in the right
to charge a device. These ports are charge only.  All accessories connected to the “battery” rear cargo area.
powered outlets should be removed or turned
off when the vehicle is not in use to protect the
battery against discharge.
 Do not exceed the maximum power of 1 2
60 Watts (13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt
(13 Amp) power rating is exceeded the fuse
protecting the system needs to be replaced.
 Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not insert any other object in the power
outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow
Third Row USB Ports the fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can Rear Cargo Power Outlet
cause damage not covered by your New Vehicle
1 — Charge Only Type C USB Port Limited Warranty. NOTE:
2 — Charge Only Type A USB Port The front power outlet is located inside the storage The rear cargo power outlet can be changed from
area on the center stack of the instrument panel, battery powered to powered by ignition in the
below the climate controls. ON/RUN position by switching the cargo area
ELECTRICAL P OWER OUTLETS power outlet fuse from F44B to F44A in the rear
Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (13 Amp) power distribution center Ú page 322.
power outlets that can be used to power cellular
phones, small electronics and other low powered
WARNING!
electrical accessories. The power outlets are To avoid serious injury or death:
labeled with either a “key” or a “battery” symbol to
 Only devices designed for use in this type of
indicate how the outlet is powered. Power outlets
outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt
labeled with a “key” are powered when the ignition
outlet.
switch is in the ON/RUN position, while the outlets
labeled with a “battery” are connected directly to  Do not touch with wet hands.
the battery and powered at all times. (Continued)
Front Power Outlet
WARNING!
POWER I NVERTER — IF E QUIPPED WARNING!
 Close the lid when not in use and while driving There is a 115 Volt, 150 Watt inverter outlet To avoid serious injury or death:
the vehicle. located on the back of the center console to
convert DC current to AC current. This outlet can  Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
 If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an power cellular phones, electronics and other low  Do not touch with wet hands.
electric shock and failure. power devices requiring power up to 150 Watts.
Certain video game consoles exceed this power  Close the lid when not in use.
limit, as will most power tools.  If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
CAUTION! electric shock and failure.
 Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle's battery, even when
not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventu- WIRELESS C HARGING PAD —
ally, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle's I F E QUIPPED
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade
battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
 Accessories that draw higher power
(i.e., coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will
degrade the battery even more quickly. Only Power Inverter
use these intermittently and with greater
caution. The power inverter is designed with built-in
overload protection. If the power rating of 150
 After the use of high power draw accessories,
Watts is exceeded, the power inverter
or long periods of the vehicle not being started
automatically shuts down. Once the electrical
(with accessories still plugged in), the vehicle Wireless Charging Pad
device has been removed from the outlet the
must be driven a sufficient length of time to
inverter should automatically reset. To avoid
allow the generator to recharge the vehicle's
overloading the circuit, check the power ratings on
battery.
electrical devices prior to using the inverter.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a 15W 3A Qi  If the phone moves on the pad causing the red
wireless charging pad located inside of the storage light to illuminate, the phone will have to be
area below the climate controls. This charging pad picked up and placed back on the charging pad
is designed to wirelessly charge your Qi enabled to resume charging.
mobile phone. Qi is a standard that allows wireless
charging of your mobile phone. CAUTION! 2
Your mobile phone must be designed for Qi The key fob should not be placed on the
wireless charging. If the phone is not equipped charging pad or within 6 inches (15 cm) of it.
with Qi wireless charging functionality, an Doing so can cause excessive heat buildup and
aftermarket sleeve or a specialized back plate can damage to the fob. Placing the fob in close
be purchased from your mobile phone provider or proximity of the charging pad blocks the fob from Driver’s Door Power Window Switches
a local electronics retailer. Please see your being detected by the vehicle and prevents the
phone’s Owner’s Manual for further information. vehicle from starting.
NOTE:
 The power window switches remain active for up
The wireless charging pad is equipped with an
anti-slip mat to hold your mobile phone in place, to 10 minutes after the ignition has been placed
and an LED indicator light. WINDOWS in the OFF position. Opening a vehicle front door
will cancel this feature.
LED Indicator Status: POWER W INDOW CONTROLS  The window controls will operate only when
 No Light: Charging pad is idle or searching for a the vehicle’s ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
The power window controls, located on the driver's
device. position.
door trim panel, operate the window movement for
 Blue Light: Device is detected and is charging. all four power windows.  The power windows may be operated from
 Red Light/Flashing: Internal error or foreign There is a single switch on the front passenger outside of the vehicle by using the key fob. For
object is detected. door and rear passenger doors which operate the more information, see Ú page 17.
NOTE: windows for only that door.
 All vehicle doors must be closed for the wireless
charging pad to operate.
 Using a phone case may interfere with wireless
charging.
Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection Reset Auto-Up

WARNING!
For windows equipped with the AUTO feature, lift Should the Auto-Up feature stop working, the
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, the window switch up to the second detent, and window may need to be reset. To reset Auto-Up:
and do not let children play with power windows. release; the window will go up automatically.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or Front Doors
To stop the window from going all the way up
in a location accessible to children, and do not 1. Pull the window switch up to close the window
during the Auto-Up operation, push down on the
leave the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in the completely and continue to hold the switch up
switch briefly.
ON/RUN position. Occupants, particularly for an additional two seconds after the
unattended children, can become entrapped by To close the window part way, lift the window window is closed.
the windows while operating the power window switch briefly and release it when you want the
Rear Doors
switches. Such entrapment may result in serious window to stop.
injury or death. 1. Pull the window switch up to close the window
If the window runs into any obstacle during
completely and continue to hold the switch up
auto-closure, it will reverse direction and then go
for an additional two seconds after the
Automatic Window Features back down. Remove the obstacle and use the
window is closed.
window switch again to close the window.
Both the driver and front passenger windows, and 2. Release the window switch, and within five
if equipped, both rear windows, may have NOTE: seconds, pull the window switch up again for
Auto-Down and Auto-Up operations. Any impact due to rough road conditions may an additional two seconds.
trigger the auto-reverse function unexpectedly
Auto-Down Feature during auto-closure. If this happens, pull the switch
For windows equipped with the AUTO feature, push lightly and hold to close the window manually.
the window switch down to the second detent,
release, and the window will go down WARNING!
automatically. There is no anti-pinch protection when the
To stop the window from going all the way down window is almost closed. To avoid personal
during the Auto-Down operation, pull up or push injury be sure to clear your arms, hands, fingers
down on the switch briefly. and all objects from the window path before
closing.
Window Lockout Switch windows open, open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting WARNING!
The window lockout switch on the driver's door trim
occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof  Never leave children unattended in a vehicle,
panel allows you to disable the window controls on
opening to minimize the buffeting or open any or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never
the rear passenger doors. To disable the window
window. leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a
controls, push and release the window lockout
button (the indicator light on the button will turn location accessible to children. Do not leave 2
on). To enable the window controls, push and POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in the
release the window lockout button again (the ON/RUN position. Occupants, particularly
indicator light on the button will turn off). SINGLE P ANE POWER S UNROOF — unattended children, can become entrapped
I F E QUIPPED by the power sunroof while operating the
power sunroof switch. Such entrapment may
The power sunroof switches are located on the result in serious injury or death.
overhead console between the courtesy/reading
 In a collision, there is a greater risk of being
lights.
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof.
You could also be seriously injured or killed.
Always fasten your seat belt properly and
make sure all passengers are also properly
secured.
 Do not allow small children to operate the
sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other body
Power Window Lockout Switch
parts, or any object, to project through the
WIND B UFFETING sunroof opening. Injury may result.
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception

of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound Opening And Closing The Sunroof
Power Sunroof Switches
in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting Express Open/Close
with the windows down, or the sunroof (if 1 — Opening/Closing Sunroof
Push the switch rearward and release it within
equipped) in certain open or partially open 2 — Venting Sunroof one-half second and the sunroof will open
positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be automatically from any position. The sunroof will
minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear open fully and stop automatically.
Push the switch forward and release it within Pinch Protect Feature Sunroof Maintenance
one-half second and the sunroof will close
This feature will detect an obstruction in the Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to
automatically from any position. The sunroof will
opening of the sunroof during Express Close clean the glass panel. Periodically check for and
close fully and stop automatically.
operation. If an obstruction in the path of the clear out any debris that may have collected in the
During Express Open or Express Close operation, sunroof is detected, the sunroof will automatically tracks.
any other movement of the sunroof switch will stop retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs.
the sunroof. DUAL P ANE POWER S UNROOF —
NOTE:
Manual Open/Close If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result I F E QUIPPED
To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch in Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect will The power sunroof switches are located on the
rearward to full open. disable and the sunroof must be closed in Manual overhead console between the courtesy/reading
Mode. lights.
To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch in
the forward position. Sunshade Operation
Any release of the switch during open or close The sunshade can be opened manually. However,
operation will stop the sunroof movement. The the sunshade will open automatically as the
sunroof will remain in a partially opened position sunroof opens.
until the switch is operated and held again. NOTE:
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
If the sunshade is in the closed position when open.
Express or Manual Open operation is initiated the Ignition Off Operation
sunshade will automatically open to the half open
The power sunroof switch will remain active for up
position prior to the sunroof opening.
to approximately 10 minutes after the ignition
Venting The Sunroof switch is placed in the OFF position. Opening either Power Sunroof Switches
Push and release the Vent button within one half front door will cancel this feature. 1 — Opening/Closing Sunroof
second and the sunroof will open to the vent NOTE: 2 — Venting Sunroof
position. This is called “Express Vent”, and it will Ignition Off time is programmable through the
occur regardless of sunroof position. During 3 — Opening/Closing Sunshade
Express Vent operation, any other actuation of the
switch will stop the sunroof.
Express Open/Close NOTE:

WARNING! If the sunshade is in the closed position when
Push the switch rearward and release it within
 Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, one-half second and the sunroof will open Express or Manual Open operation is initiated the
or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never automatically to the comfort stop position. Push sunshade will automatically open to the half open
leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a the switch rearward and release it again to position prior to the sunroof opening.
location accessible to children. Do not leave continue to the full open position. Venting The Sunroof 2
the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in the ON/
Push the switch forward and release it within Push and release the Vent button within one half
RUN position. Occupants, particularly unat-
one-half second and the sunroof will close second and the sunroof will open to the vent
tended children, can become entrapped by
automatically from any position. The sunroof will position. This is called “Express Vent” and it will
the power sunroof while operating the power
close fully and stop automatically. occur regardless of sunroof position. During
sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result
During Express Open or Express Close operation, Express Vent operation, any movement of the
in serious injury or death.
any other movement of the sunroof switch will stop switch will stop the sunroof.
 In a collision, there is a greater risk of being the sunroof. NOTE:
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. If the sunshade was not already open, it will auto-
You could also be seriously injured or killed. Manual Open/Close
matically open prior to the roof opening to the vent
Always fasten your seat belt properly and To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch position.
make sure all passengers are also properly rearward to open to the comfort stop position.
secured. Push and hold the switch rearward again to Opening And Closing The Power Sunshade
continue to open to full open. The sunshade has two programmed positions: half
 Do not allow small children to operate the
To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch in open and full open positions. When operating the
sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other body
the forward position. sunshade from the closed position, the sunshade
parts, or any object, to project through the
will always stop at the half open position
sunroof opening. Injury may result. Any release of the switch during open or close regardless of express or manual open operation.
operation will stop the sunroof movement. The The switch must be pushed again to continue on to
Opening And Closing The Sunroof sunroof will remain in a partially opened position full open position.
until the switch is operated and held again.
The sunroof has two programmed automatic stops
for the sunroof open position; a comfort stop
position and a full open position. The comfort stop
position will minimize wind buffeting in the interior.
If the sunroof is open or vented, the sunshade Push and hold the switch forward and the Sunroof Maintenance
cannot be closed beyond the half open position. sunshade will close and stop at full closed position.
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to
Pushing the sunshade close switch when the Releasing the switch while the sunshade is in clean the glass panel. Periodically check for and
sunroof is open/vented and the sunshade is at half motion will stop the sunshade in a partially open clear out any debris that may have collected in the
open position will first automatically close the position. tracks.
sunroof prior to the sunshade closing.
Pinch Protect Feature
Express Open/Close
This feature will detect an obstruction in the
HOOD
Push the sunshade switch rearward and release it
opening of the sunroof during Express Close
within one-half second, the sunshade will open to
operation. If an obstruction in the path of the
OPENING T HE HOOD
the half open position and stop automatically.
sunroof is detected, the sunroof will automatically To open the hood, two latches must be released.
Push and release the switch again from the half
retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs. 1. Pull the release lever located underneath the
open position and the sunshade will open to the
full open position and stop automatically. NOTE: driver’s side of the instrument panel.
If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result
Push the sunshade switch forward and release it
in Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect will
within one-half second and the sunshade will close
disable and the sunroof must be closed in Manual
automatically.
Mode.
During Express Open or Express Close operation,
Ignition Off Operation
any other actuation of the sunroof switches will
stop the sunshade in a partially open position. The power sunroof switch will remain active for up
to approximately 10 minutes after the ignition
Manual Open/Close
switch is placed in the OFF position. Opening either
Push and hold the sunshade switch rearward, the front door will cancel this feature.
sunshade will open to the half open position and
NOTE:
stop automatically. Push and hold the sunshade
Ignition Off time is programmable through the Hood Release
switch again and the sunshade will open to the full
open position.
2. Reach under the hood from the front of the

vehicle, move the safety latch to the left and CAUTION!
lift the hood. To prevent possible damage, do not slam the
hood to close it. Lower hood to approximately
12 inches (30 cm) and drop the hood to close.
Make sure hood is fully closed for both latches. 2
Never drive vehicle unless hood is fully closed,
with both latches engaged.
LIFTGATE Liftgate Entry

TO UNLOCK/O PEN THE LIFTGATE 1 — Passive Entry Button
The power liftgate may be opened by 2 — Electronic Liftgate Release Button
Safety Latch Location pushing the liftgate button on the key fob
or by pushing the electronic liftgate NOTE:
CLOSING THE H OOD release button. When you push the electronic liftgate release
Push the liftgate button on the key fob twice within button, either only the liftgate will unlock, or all the
WARNING! five seconds to open the power liftgate. Once the doors and the liftgate will unlock, depending on the
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving liftgate is open, pushing the button twice within selected setting in the Uconnect system
your vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it five seconds a second time will close the liftgate. Ú page 193.
could open when the vehicle is in motion and With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft NOTE:
block your vision. Failure to follow this warning (1.5 m) of the liftgate, push the Passive Entry  Use the power door lock switch on either front
could result in serious injury or death. button located to the left of the electronic liftgate door trim panel or the key fob to lock and unlock
release button to lock the liftgate and doors. the liftgate.
 The driver's door lock cylinder will not lock or
unlock the liftgate.
WARNING!
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft ADJUSTABLE POWER LIFTGATE HEIGHT
(1.5 m) of the liftgate, pushing the Passive Entry
Driving with the liftgate open can allow button located to the left of the electronic liftgate The maximum height that the liftgate will open can
poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You release button, will lock the vehicle only. be adjusted and saved so that the liftgate will only
and your passengers could be injured by these open to the desired height. To set a desired height,
If the liftgate is fully open, the liftgate can be closed
fumes. Keep the liftgate closed when you are proceed as follows:
by pushing the liftgate close button located in the
operating the vehicle. cargo area on the left rear trim panel, near the 1. Open the liftgate fully, then manually pull
liftgate opening. If the liftgate is in motion, pushing down on the liftgate to the desired height.
NOTE: the liftgate close button a second time will reverse 2. Push and hold the liftgate close button,
The liftgate can also be opened manually by the liftgate operation. located on the left side trim panel inside the
pushing the electronic liftgate release button and cargo area, for three seconds. An audible
pulling upward in one fluid motion. chime will be heard to let you know the height
has been saved.
TO LOCK/CLOSE THE LIFTGATE
To set the saved height setting to a new setting,
There are several different ways to close the
proceed as follows:
liftgate:
1. Open the liftgate, then manually push the
 Manually (grab the liftgate closing handle and
liftgate upward to its full open position.
pull in a downward motion)
2. Manually pull the liftgate down to the new
 Key fob
desired height and hold the liftgate close
 Hands-free (if equipped) button for three seconds until the audible
Liftgate Close Button chime is heard.
 Liftgate close button in the cargo area
Power Liftgate Malfunction Procedure: HANDS-FREE L IFTGATE — IF E QUIPPED When a valid kicking motion is completed, the
1. In the event of a power malfunction to the liftgate will chime, the hazard lights will flash and
liftgate, the liftgate can be released by the liftgate will open after approximately one
accessing the service release feature in the second, or close after approximately three
latch. This can be done using a 3 mm seconds. These settings can be enabled or
diameter screwdriver. disabled through Uconnect Settings Ú page 193. 2
NOTE:
 Opening or closing the Hands-Free Liftgate
requires a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the liftgate handle. If a valid Passive
Entry key fob is not within 5 ft (1.5 m), the lift-
gate will not respond to any kicks.
Hands-Free Liftgate Activation Zone
 The Hands-Free Liftgate feature may be turned
To open or close the liftgate using hands-free on or off through the Uconnect system
activation, use a straight in and out kicking motion Ú page 193.
under the vehicle activation zone in the general  The Hands-Free Liftgate feature should be
Liftgate Service Release location below the rear license plate. The turned off during jacking, tire changing, manual
activation zone is about 1.8 ft (0.5 m) from side to car wash, and vehicle service.
2. From inside the gate, an eyelet can be seen. side. Do not move your foot sideways or in a
 The Hands-Free Liftgate feature can be acti-
Place the screwdriver in the eyelet. sweeping motion or the sensors may not detect the
vated by any metallic object making a similar
3. Rotate the screwdriver handle to actuate the motion.
in-and-out motion under the rear fascia/
lever and release the latch. NOTE: bumper, such as cleaning using a metal broom.
4. If liftgate is left open for an extended period of The activation zone is the same for vehicles
time, the liftgate may need to be closed equipped with or without a trailer tow package.
manually to reset power liftgate functionality.
 The Hands-Free Liftgate will only operate when

WARNING!
CARGO A REA FEATURES
the transmission is in PARK.
 If anything obstructs the Hands-Free Liftgate  Driving with the liftgate open can allow Cargo Storage
while it is opening or closing, the liftgate will poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle. The load floor is designed for a maximum load of
automatically reverse to the closed/open posi- You and your passengers could be injured by 300 lb (136kg).
tion, provided it meets sufficient resistance. these fumes. Keep the liftgate closed when There is a removable storage bin located on the
you are operating the vehicle. left side of the rear cargo area.
 There are pinch sensors attached to the side of
the liftgate opening. Light pressure anywhere  If you are required to drive with the liftgate Additional storage can be found under the storage
along these strips will cause the liftgate to open, make sure that all windows are closed, lid. To access the lower storage, lift the handle and
return to the open position. and the climate control blower switch is set at raise the storage lid.
 If the power liftgate encounters multiple high speed. Do not use the recirculation
obstructions within the same cycle, the system mode.
will automatically stop. If this occurs, the liftgate
must be operated manually. Gas props support the liftgate in the open position.
 The power liftgate will release, but not power However, because the gas pressure drops with
open, in temperatures below −12°F (−24°C). temperature, it may be necessary to assist the
Be sure to remove any buildup of snow or ice props when opening the liftgate in cold weather.
from the liftgate before opening the liftgate. NOTE:
 If the liftgate is left open for an extended period Allow the power system to open the liftgate.
of time (approximately one hour), the liftgate Manually pushing or pulling the liftgate may
may need to be closed manually to reset power activate the liftgate obstacle detection feature and
stop the power operation or reverse its direction. Lift Storage Lid Handle
liftgate functionality.
WARNING!
During power operation, personal injury or cargo
damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate travel
path is clear. Make sure the liftgate is closed
and latched before driving away.
Cargo Tie-Down Hooks

WARNING! WARNING!
The cargo tie-downs, located on the cargo area
sides, should be used to safely secure loads when  Cargo tie-downs are not safe anchors for a  Place as much cargo as possible in front of the
the vehicle is moving. child seat tether strap. In a sudden stop or rear axle. Too much weight or improperly
accident, a tie-down could pull loose and allow placed weight over or behind the rear axle can
NOTE: the child seat to come loose. A child could be cause the vehicle to sway. 2
The cargo tie-downs are designed for a maximum badly injured. Use only the anchors provided
load of 300 lb (136 kg).  Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the
for child seat tethers.
top of the seatback. This could impair visibility
 To help protect against personal injury, or become a dangerous projectile in a sudden
passengers should not be seated in the rear stop or accident.
cargo area. The rear cargo space is intended
for load carrying purposes only, not for
passengers, who should sit in seats and use ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
seat belts. The crossbars and siderails are designed to carry
The weight and position of cargo and loads on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack.
passengers can change the vehicle center of The load must not exceed 150 lb (68 kg), and
gravity and vehicle handling. To avoid loss of should be uniformly distributed over the luggage
control resulting in personal injury, follow these rack crossbars.
Tie-Down Hooks guidelines for loading your vehicle: NOTE:
 Do not carry loads that exceed the load limits See an authorized dealer to order and install
described on the label attached to the left Mopar® crossbars built specifically for this roof
door or left door center pillar. rack system.
 Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor.

Put heavier objects as low and as far forward
as possible.
(Continued)
Distribute cargo weight evenly on the roof rack

crossbars. The roof rack does not increase the WARNING! CAUTION!
total load carrying capacity of the vehicle. Be sure Cargo must be securely tied down before driving  Long loads which extend over the windshield,
the total load of cargo inside the vehicle plus that your vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off such as wood panels or surfboards, or loads
on the external rack does not exceed the maximum the vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting with large frontal area should be secured to
vehicle load capacity. Place one crossbar in the in personal injury or property damage. Follow both the front and rear of the vehicle.
forward position. Place the rear crossbar in one of the roof rack cautions when carrying cargo on
the two rear optional positions based on the load  Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners
your roof rack.
being secured. carefully when carrying large or heavy loads
on the roof rack. Wind forces, due to natural
To move the crossbars, loosen the attachments, causes or nearby truck traffic, can add sudden
located at the upper edge of each crossbar, CAUTION!
upward lift to a load. This is especially true on
approximately eight turns using the anti-theft  To prevent damage to the roof of your vehicle, large flat loads and may result in damage to
wrench provided with the Mopar® crossbars. do not carry any loads on the roof rack without the cargo or your vehicle.
Then, move the crossbar to the desired position, the crossbars installed. The load should be
keeping the crossbars parallel to the rack frame.  The use of vehicle systems that would adjust
secured and placed on top of the crossbars,
Once the crossbar is in the desired position, the ride heights (such as Select-Terrain modes
not directly on the roof. If it is necessary to
re-tighten with the wrench to lock the crossbar into Rock or Mud) is not recommended when using
place the load on the roof, place a blanket or
position. the Roof Luggage Rack to carry a load.
some other protection between the load and
NOTE: the roof surface.
If any cargo (or any metallic object) is placed over
 To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle,
the satellite radio antenna (if equipped), you may
do not exceed the maximum roof rack load
experience interruption of satellite radio reception.
capacity of 150 lb (68 kg). Always distribute
For improved satellite radio reception, place the
heavy loads as evenly as possible and secure
rear crossbar in the forward of the two rear
the load appropriately.
crossbar positions.
(Continued)
89
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Holding the OK button on the Instrument Cluster Display controls located on the steering wheel will allow you to change your display from Digital to Analog.
90 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
I NSTRUMENT CLUSTER D ESCRIPTIONS WARNING!

3. Tachometer
 Indicates the engine speed in revolutions
1. Speedometer A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or per minute (RPM x 1000).
 Indicates vehicle speed. others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
4. Fuel Gauge
2. Temperature Gauge coolant. It is recommended to call an authorized
dealer for service if your vehicle overheats  The pointer shows the level of fuel in the
 The temperature gauge shows engine fuel tank when the Keyless Push Button
Ú page 316.
coolant temperature. Any reading within the Ignition is in the ON/RUN position.
normal range indicates that the engine
 The fuel pump symbol points to
cooling system is operating satisfactorily. CAUTION! the side of the vehicle where the
 The pointer will likely indicate a higher fuel door is located.
temperature when driving in hot weather, Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
up mountain grades, or when towing a damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge
NOTE:
trailer. It should not be allowed to exceed reads “H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the
The Instrument Cluster Warning Indicators will illu-
the upper limits of the normal operating vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until
minate briefly for a bulb check when the ignition is
range. the pointer drops back into the normal range. If
first cycled.
the pointer remains on the “H”, turn the engine
off immediately and call an authorized dealer for
service.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 91
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Holding the OK button on the Instrument Cluster Display controls located on the steering wheel will allow you to change your display from Digital to Analog.
I NSTRUMENT CLUSTER D ESCRIPTIONS WARNING!

NOTE:
The Instrument Cluster Warning Indicators will illu-
1. Tachometer A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or minate briefly for a bulb check when the ignition is
 Indicates the engine speed in revolutions others could be badly burned by steam or boiling first cycled.
per minute (RPM x 1000). coolant. It is recommended to call an authorized
2. Speedometer dealer for service if your vehicle overheats INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
Ú page 316.
 Indicates vehicle speed. Your vehicle will be equipped with an instrument
3. Temperature Gauge cluster display, which offers useful information to
the driver. With the ignition in the OFF mode,
 The temperature gauge shows engine CAUTION! opening/closing of a door will activate the display
coolant temperature. Any reading within the for viewing, and display the total miles, or
normal range indicates that the engine Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
kilometers, in the odometer. Your instrument
cooling system is operating satisfactorily. damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge
cluster display is designed to display important
reads “H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the
 The pointer will likely indicate a higher information about your vehicle’s systems and
vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until
temperature when driving in hot weather, features. Using a driver interactive display located
the pointer drops back into the normal range. If
up mountain grades, or when towing a on the instrument panel, your instrument cluster
the pointer remains on the “H”, turn the engine
trailer. It should not be allowed to exceed display can show you how systems are working and
off immediately and call an authorized dealer for
the upper limits of the normal operating give you warnings when they are not. The steering
service.
range. wheel mounted controls allow you to scroll through
the main menus and submenus. You can access
4. Fuel Gauge the specific information you want and make
 The pointer shows the level of fuel in the selections and adjustments.
fuel tank when the Keyless Push Button
Ignition is in the ON/RUN position.
 The fuel pump symbol points to
the side of the vehicle where the
fuel door is located.
LOCATION AND CONTROLS The system allows the driver to select information 2. OK Button
by pushing the following buttons mounted on the Push the OK button to access/select the in-
steering wheel:
formation screens or submenu screens of a
main menu item. Push and hold the OK but-
ton for one second to reset displayed/se-
lected features that can be reset.
3. MENU Button 3
Push the MENU button to access/select the
information screens or submenu screens of
the Home Screen display. Push and hold the
Instrument Cluster Display/Controls Location OK button to enter edit mode.
1 – Instrument Cluster Display Screen Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons 4. Left Arrow Button
2 – Instrument Cluster Display Controls Push the left arrow button to return to the
1 — Up Arrow Button
main menu from an info screen or submenu
2 — OK Button
The Main Menu items consists of the following: item.
3 — Menu Button
 Main Menu 4 — Left Arrow Button 5. Down Arrow Button
 Vehicle Info 5 — Down Arrow Button Push and release the down arrow button
 Trip 6 — Right Arrow Button to scroll downward through the main menu.
 Navigation — If Equipped 6. Right Arrow Button
 Off Road 1. Up Arrow Button
Push and release the right arrow button
 Trailer Tow — If Equipped Push and release the up arrow button to to access the information screens or sub-
scroll upward through the main menu. menu screens of a main menu item.
 Audio
 Stored Messages
 Settings
Display Options  Navigate Left or Right to highlight desired The instrument cluster display will normally display
Holding OK will also allow you to change your Tile the main menu or the screens of a selected feature
display to Digital or Analog. of the main menu. The main display area also
 Press OK to select the tile and navigate to the
displays pop-up messages that consist of
 Digital theme will be the default theme selected submenu and press OK again to add
approximately 60 possible warning or information
 Menu screen times out after 10 seconds. Press
your selection to your tile view
messages. These pop-up messages fall into
OK to reactivate  The main menu options are Main Menu, Vehicle several categories:
 Speedometer must always be present
Info, Navigation, Audio, and Off Road
 Five Second Stored Messages
 Relevant warning notifications and other pop-up
The instrument cluster display is located in the
When the appropriate conditions occur, this
info will still be displayed in the main screen center portion of the cluster and consist of multiple
type of message takes control of the main
area (In this case the speed moves to the top) sections:
display area for five seconds and then returns to
 Main Screen — The inner ring of the display will the previous screen. Most of the messages of
Custom Tile Configuration
illuminate in black under normal conditions, this type are then stored (as long as the condi-
To customize the instrument cluster further, you yellow for non critical warnings and red for crit- tion that activated it remains active) and can be
are able to select up to five tiles to display ical warnings reviewed from the “Messages” main menu item.
information based on your needs. Examples of this message type are “Right Front
 Submenu Dots — Whenever there are
 Press the MENU button for the Home Screen submenus available, the position within the Turn Signal Lamp Out” and “Low Tire Pressure.”
display submenus is shown here  Unstored Messages
 Reconfigurable Telltales/Information This message type is displayed indefinitely or
 Gear Selector Status (PRND) until the condition that activated the message is
cleared. Examples of this message type are
 Driver Interactive Display (Compass, Temp,
“Turn Signal On” (if a turn signal is left on) and
Range to Empty, Trip A, Trip B, Average Fuel “Lights On” (if driver leaves the vehicle with the
Economy, Current Fuel Economy and Time) lights on).
 Air Suspension Status — If Equipped
 Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Status — If Equipped
Menu Button
 Unstored Messages Until RUN  Cruise Off  Service Air Bag Warning Light
These messages deal primarily with the Remote  Cruise Ready  Door Open
Start feature. This message type is displayed  ACC Override  Doors Open
until the ignition is in the RUN state. Examples of
this message type are “Remote Start Canceled -  Cruise Set To XXX mph or km/h  Liftgate Open
Door Ajar” and “Press Brake Pedal and Push  Tire Pressure Screen With Low Tire(s)  Hood Open
Button to Start.”  Service Tire Pressure System  Shift Not Allowed
 Five Second Unstored Messages  Parking Brake Engaged  Vehicle Speed Too High To Shift to D 3
When the appropriate conditions occur, this  Brake Fluid Low  Vehicle Speed is Too High to Shift to R
type of message takes control of the main
display area for five seconds and then returns to  Engine Temperature Hot  Vehicle Speed is Too High to Shift to P
the previous screen. An example of this  Lights On  Service Transmission
message type is “Automatic High Beams On.”  Right Front Turn Signal Light Out  Service Shifter
DISPLAY A ND MESSAGES  Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into
 Left Front Turn Signal Light Out the white or yellow telltales area on the left, and
Includes the following, but not limited to: the green or red telltales area on the right.
 Front Seat Belts Unbuckled  Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out
 Driver Seat Belt Unbuckled  Ignition or Accessory On ENGINE OIL LIFE RESET
 Passenger Seat Belt Unbuckled  Vehicle Not In Park Oil Change Required
 Traction Control Off  Remote Start Active Push Start Button Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
 Remote Start Canceled Fuel Low
indicator system. The “Oil Change Required”
 Washer Fluid Low message will display in the instrument cluster
 Oil Pressure Low  Remote Start Canceled Door Open display for five seconds after a single chime has
 Oil Change Due  Remote Start Canceled Hood Open sounded, to indicate the next scheduled oil change
 Remote Start Canceled Liftgate Open interval. The engine oil change indicator system is
 Fuel Low
duty cycle based, which means the engine oil
 Service Anti-lock Brake System  Remote Start Canceled Time Expired change interval may fluctuate, dependent upon
 Service Electronic Throttle Control  Remote Start Disabled Start To Reset your personal driving style.
 Service Power Steering  Service Air Bag System
Unless reset, this message will continue to display 5. Push and release the up or down arrow I NSTRUMENT C LUSTER D ISPLAY MENU
each time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN button to exit the submenu screen.
position. To turn off the message temporarily, push I TEMS
and release the OK or arrow buttons. To reset the NOTE: The instrument cluster display can be used to view
oil change indicator system (after performing the If the indicator message illuminates when you start the main menu items for several features. Use the
scheduled maintenance), refer to the following the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not up and down arrow buttons to scroll through
procedure. reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure. the driver interactive display menu options until
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter ‘N Go™ — Secondary Method Of Resetting Engine Oil Life the desired menu is reached.
Ignition 1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the NOTE:
Use the steering wheel instrument cluster display ENGINE START/STOP button and place the Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature
controls for the following procedure(s): ignition to the ON/RUN position (do not start settings may vary.
the engine).
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the Home Screen
ENGINE START/STOP button and place the 2. Fully press the accelerator pedal, slowly, three
Press the Menu button to display the Home
ignition in the ON/RUN position (do not start times within 10 seconds.
Screen.
the engine). 3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the
ENGINE START/STOP button once to return the Push and release the left or right arrow
2. Push and release the down arrow button to
ignition to the OFF position. button to highlight the desired selection. Push and
scroll downward through the main menu to
“Vehicle Info.” release the OK button to select. Press the up or
NOTE: down arrow button to select a different screen
3. Push and release the right arrow button to If the indicator message illuminates when you start within the selected category. If the Menu button is
access the “Oil Life” screen. the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not pressed in this view, the instrument cluster will
4. Push and hold the OK button to reset oil life. If reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure. return to the previously displayed screen.
conditions are met, the gauge and numeric
display will update to show 100%. If conditions
are not met a pop-up message of “To reset oil
life engine must be off with ignition in run” will
be displayed (for five seconds), and the user
will remain at the Oil Life screen.
Home Screen Options  Stored Messages Driver Assist — If Equipped

 Main Menu  Messages While viewing the Speedometer menu title, push
 Speedometer  Settings and release the left or right arrow button
 Driver Assist — If Equipped  Screen Setup
until the Driver Assist menu title is displayed in the
instrument cluster display. The Driver Assist
 Night Vision  Head-Up Display — If Equipped screen indicates the current status of ACC, Active
 Vehicle Info Lane Management and Active Driving Assist/
MAIN MENU
 Fuel Economy Assist+/Pilot. Push and release the OK button 3
Push and release the up or down arrow again to change between Zoomed In and Zoomed
 Gauge Summary Out view (“Press OK to Zoom In” will display when
button until the Drive menu title is displayed in the
 Oil Life instrument cluster display. in Zoomed Out view/“Press OK to Zoom Out” will
 Tire Pressure Speedometer — If Equipped display when in Zoomed In view) Ú page 148.
 Stop/Start Push and release the up or down arrow VEHICLE INFO
 Trip button until the Speedometer menu title is
Push and release the up or down arrow
 Trip Info displayed in the instrument cluster display. Push
button until the Vehicle Info title is highlighted in
and release the OK button to toggle units (mph or
 Navigation the instrument cluster display. Push the left or
km/h) of the speedometer. Hold the OK button to
 Navigation Info toggle between Analog and Digital speedometer. right arrow button to scroll through the
 Off Road Night Vision — If Equipped information submenus.
 Terrain Status — If Equipped While viewing the Speedometer menu Fuel Economy
 Vehicle Dynamics title, push and release the left or  Average Fuel Economy
 Pitch & Roll right arrow button until the Night  Current Fuel Economy
 Trailer Tow — If Equipped

Vision menu title is displayed in the instrument  Range To Empty
cluster display. Arrow buttons and submenu
 Trailer Trip  Press the OK button to reset the average fuel
indicators disappear after five seconds of menu
economy
 Trailer Brake navigation inactivity. Pedestrian/Animal icons will
be displayed in the top left location Ú page 169. NOTE:
 Audio
The Range feature is not able to be reset through
 Audio Info the instrument cluster display controls.
Gauge Summary  If the Tire Pressure system requires service, NAVIGATION — IF EQUIPPED
 Coolant Temperature — If Equipped “Service Tire Pressure System” is displayed.
Displays the current temperature of the coolant. Tire Pressure is an information only function, and button until the Navigation display title is
cannot be reset Ú page 236. highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
 Transmission Temperature
Stop/Start Status
Displays the actual transmission temperature. OFF ROAD
 Display current status of Stop/Start system.
 Oil Temperature
Displays the actual oil temperature. TRIP button until the Off Road Menu title is highlighted.
 Oil Pressure
Push and release the up or down arrow Push the left or right arrow button to scroll
Displays the actual oil pressure. button until the Trip menu title is displayed in the the submenus.
 Battery Voltage instrument cluster display. Toggle the left or  Terrain Status — If Equipped
Displays the current voltage level of the battery. right arrow button to select Trip A or Trip B. The  Selec-Terrain Status
Oil Life Trip information will display the following:  Air Suspension Status
 Displays the current oil life of the vehicle.  Distance – Shows the total distance (mi or km)  Vehicle Dynamics
Tire Pressure Monitor System traveled for Trip A or Trip B since the last reset.
 Wheel Articulation
 Average Fuel Economy – Shows the average
 If tire pressure is OK for all tires a vehicle icon is  Transfer Case Status — If Equipped
displayed with tire pressure values in each fuel economy (MPG or L/100 km or km/L) of
corner of the icon. Trip A or Trip B since the last reset.  Steering Angle
 Elapsed Time – Shows the total elapsed time of  Pitch And Roll
 If one or more tires have low pressure, “Inflate
Tire To XX” is displayed with the vehicle icon and travel since Trip A or Trip B has been reset.  Vehicle Pitch
the tire pressure values in each corner of the Hold the OK button to reset feature information.  Vehicle Roll
icon with the pressure value of the low tire are
displayed in a different color than the other tire
pressure value.
TRAILER TOW — IF EQUIPPED AUDIO SETTINGS

Push and release the up or down arrow Push and release the up or down arrow NOTE:
button until the Trailer Tow Menu icon/title is button until the Audio Menu title is highlighted in The Head-Up Display (HUD) – If Equipped feature
highlighted in the instrument cluster display. Push the instrument cluster display. This menu will Settings are available at any vehicle speed
and release the left or right arrow button to display the audio source information, including the Ú page 101.
select Trailer Trip or Trailer Brake. Song name, Artist name, and audio source with an Screen Setup
accompanying graphic.
Trailer Trip will display the following: Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Settings Menu title is highlighted in
3
 Distance STORED MESSAGES
the instrument cluster display. Push and release
NOTE: Push and release the up or down arrow the OK button to enter the submenus and follow
Press and hold the OK button to reset all the infor- button until the Messages Menu item is the prompts on the screen as needed. The Settings
mation. highlighted. This feature shows the number of feature allows you to change what information is
Trailer Brake will display the following: stored warning messages. Pushing the left or displayed in the instrument cluster as well as the
 Output right arrow button will allow you to see what the location that information is displayed.
 Type stored messages are.
 Gain
Upper Left
None Compass
Outside Temp Time
Range To Empty (RTE) Fuel Economy Average
Fuel Economy Current Trip A Distance
Trip B Distance
Upper Right
None Compass
Outside Temp Time
Range To Empty (RTE) Fuel Economy Average
Fuel Economy Current Trip A Distance
Trip B Distance
Current Gear Tachometer — Digital Theme Only Odometer

 On  Show with Digital Theme  Show
 Off  Hide with Digital Theme  Hide
Favorite Menus
Main Menu Vehicle Info
Trip (Show/Hide) Navigation (Show/Hide)
Off Road (Show/Hide) Audio (Show/Hide)
Messages Settings
NOTE: Push and release the up or down arrow

3
Menus with (show/hide) can push the OK button to button until the Settings Menu icon/title is
choose whether to show or hide this menu on the highlighted in the instrument cluster display. Push
instrument cluster display. and release the left or right arrow button
Defaults (Restores All Settings To Default Settings) until the HUD Menu icon/title is highlighted in the
 Restore instrument cluster display. Push and release the
 Cancel OK button to enter HUD. Use the up or
down arrow button to select a setting, then
HEADS-UP DISPLAY push and release the OK button to adjust the
Heads-Up Display (HUD) – If Equipped setting.
HUD ON/OFF
NOTE:  ON/OFF
The HUD feature Settings are available at any
vehicle speed.
When “Display On” is selected, the HUD will NOTE:

display on the windshield. When it is not  The HUD basic settings (Brightness, Display
selected, no display on the windshield. Height and Non Custom layouts), are controlled
 Content and Layout through the Settings Screen in the Instrument
 Simple: Speed, Speed Limit Cluster Ú page 92.
 Standard: Speed, Speed Limit, Navigation NOTE:
If current theme is set to Digital, tachometer will
not display while in the Settings menu.
BATTERY SAVER O N/BATTERY S AVER
Advanced Mode MODE MESSAGE — ELECTRICAL L OAD
When “Advanced” mode is selected, the HUD REDUCTION ACTIONS — I F EQUIPPED
displays the vehicle speed, turn-by-turn naviga-
tion, speed limit, driver assist function(s), and This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Battery
current gear. Sensor (IBS) to perform additional monitoring of
the electrical system and status of the vehicle
 Custom 1: Speed, Speed Limit
battery.
 Custom 2: Speed, Speed Limit, Navigation
Standard Mode In cases when the IBS detects charging system
 Custom 3: Speed, Speed Limit, Navigation, failure, or the vehicle battery conditions are
When “Standard” mode is selected, the HUD Driver Assist (ACC/Cruise, Active Lane deteriorating, electrical load reduction actions will
image is split into thirds with the speed limit Management, Active Driving Assist) take place to extend the driving time and distance
indicator shown to the left, vehicle speed in the of the vehicle. This is done by reducing power to or
 Custom 4: Speed, Speed Limit, Navigation,
center, and turn-by-turn navigation to the right. turning off non-essential electrical loads.
Driver Assist (ACC/Cruise, Active Lane
 Advanced: Speed, Speed Limit, Navigation, Management, Active Driving Assist), Gear Load reduction is only active when the engine is
Driver Assist (ACC/Cruise, Active Lane
 Display Height running. It will display a message if there is a risk
Management, Active Driving Assist), Gear
of battery depletion to the point where the vehicle
 Brightness
may stall due to lack of electrical supply, or will not
restart after the current drive cycle.
When load reduction is activated, the message Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or What to do when an electrical load reduction
“Battery Saver On” or “Battery Saver Mode” will more of the following conditions: action message is present (“Battery Saver On” or
appear in the instrument cluster.  The charging system cannot deliver enough “Battery Saver Mode”)
These messages indicate the vehicle battery has a electrical power to the vehicle system because During a trip:
low state of charge and continues to lose electrical the electrical loads are larger than the capability  Reduce power to unnecessary loads if possible:
charge at a rate that the charging system cannot of the charging system. The charging system is
sustain. still functioning properly.  Turn off redundant lights (interior or exte-
rior)
NOTE:  Turning on all possible vehicle electrical loads
 Check what may be plugged in to power
3
 The charging system is independent from load (e.g. HVAC to max settings, exterior and interior
lights, overloaded power outlets +12 Volt, outlets +12 Volt, 115 Volt AC, USB ports
reduction. The charging system performs a
diagnostic on the charging system continuously. 115 Volt AC, USB ports) during certain driving  Check HVAC settings (blower, temperature)
conditions (city driving, towing, frequent stop-  Check the audio settings (volume)
 If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it may
ping, etc.).
indicate a problem with the charging system After a trip:
Ú page 105.  Installing options like additional lights, upfitter
 Check if any aftermarket equipment was
electrical accessories, audio systems, alarms
The electrical loads that may be switched off and similar devices. installed (additional lights, upfitter electrical
(if equipped), and vehicle functions which can be accessories, audio systems, alarms) and review
affected by load reduction:  Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated by specifications if any (load and Ignition Off Draw
long parking periods). currents).
 Heated Seat/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel
 The vehicle was parked for an extended period  Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance,
 Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors of time (weeks, months). driving time and parking time).
 HVAC System  The battery was recently replaced and was not  The vehicle should have service performed if
 115 Volt AC Power Inverter System charged completely. the message is still present during consecutive
 Audio and Telematics System  The battery was discharged by an electrical load trips, and if the evaluation and driving pattern of
left on when the vehicle was parked. the vehicle did not help to identify the cause.
 The battery was used for an extended period
with the engine not running to supply radio,
lights, chargers, +12 Volt portable appliances
like vacuum cleaners, game consoles and
similar devices.
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES Brake Warning Light NOTE:

The light may flash momentarily during sharp
This warning light monitors various brake
The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in the cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level
functions, including brake fluid level and
instrument panel together with a dedicated conditions. The vehicle should have service
parking brake application. If the brake
message and/or acoustic signal when applicable. performed, and the brake fluid level checked.
light turns on it may indicate that the
These indications are indicative and precautionary If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is
parking brake is applied, that the brake fluid level
and as such must not be considered as exhaustive necessary.
is low, or that there is a problem with the Anti-Lock
and/or alternative to the information contained in
Brake System reservoir.
the Owner’s Manual, which you are advised to read WARNING!
carefully in all cases. Always refer to the If the light remains on when the parking brake has
information in this chapter in the event of a failure been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
indication. All active telltales will display first if mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates dangerous. Part of the brake system may have
applicable. The system check menu may appear a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or failed. It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You
different based upon equipment options and that a problem with the Brake Booster has been could have a collision. Have the vehicle checked
current vehicle status. Some telltales are optional detected by the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) / immediately.
and may not appear. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this
case, the light will remain on until the condition has Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
RED WARNING LIGHTS been corrected. If the problem is related to the (ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake
brake booster, the ABS pump will run when
Air Bag Warning Light Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD
applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn on along
This warning light will illuminate to may be felt during each stop. with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to the ABS
indicate a fault with the air bag, and will
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking system is required.
turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb
capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be
check when the ignition is placed in the
hydraulic system. A leak in either half of the dual checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF
ON/RUN position. This light will illuminate with a
brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning position to the ON/RUN position. The light should
single chime when a fault with the air bag has been
Light, which will turn on when the brake fluid level illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light
detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If
in the master cylinder has dropped below a should then turn off unless the parking brake is
the light is either not on during startup, stays on, or
specified level. applied or a brake fault is detected. If the light does
turns on while driving, have the system inspected
at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. The light will remain on until the cause is corrected. not illuminate, have the light inspected by an
authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is
is applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN Warning Light running, immediate service is required and you
position. may experience reduced performance, an
This warning light will turn on when elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your
NOTE: there's a fault with the EPS system
This light shows only that the parking brake is vehicle may require towing. The light will come on
Ú page 134. when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position
applied. It does not show the degree of brake appli-
cation. and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light
WARNING! does not come on during starting, have the system
Battery Charge Warning Light checked by an authorized dealer. 3
This warning light will illuminate when the Continued operation with reduced assist could
pose a safety risk to yourself and others. Service Engine Coolant Temperature Warning
battery is not charging properly. If it stays
on while the engine is running, there may should be obtained as soon as possible. Light
be a malfunction with the charging This warning light warns of an
system. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as overheated engine condition. If the
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning
possible. engine coolant temperature is too high,
Light this indicator will illuminate and a single
This indicates a possible problem with the
electrical system or a related component. This warning light will illuminate to chime will sound. If the temperature reaches the
indicate a problem with the ETC system. upper limit, a continuous chime will sound for four
Door Open Warning Light If a problem is detected while the vehicle minutes or until the engine is able to cool;
This indicator will illuminate when a door is running, the light will either stay on or whichever comes first.
is ajar/open and not fully closed. flash depending on the nature of the problem. If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over
Cycle the ignition when the vehicle is safely and and stop the vehicle. If the Air Conditioning (A/C)
completely stopped and the transmission is placed system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission
NOTE: in the PARK position. The light should turn off. If into NEUTRAL (N) and idle the vehicle. If the
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single the light remains on with the vehicle running, your temperature reading does not return to normal,
chime. vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an turn the engine off immediately and call for service
authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. Ú page 293.
NOTE:
This light may turn on if the accelerator and brake
pedals are pressed at the same time.
Hood Open Warning Light Night Vision Pedestrian Detected Warning Rear Seat Belt Reminder Indicator Light —
This warning light will illuminate when the Light If Equipped
hood is left open and not fully closed. The Night Vision Pedestrian Warning This light indicates when a rear seat belt
Light will illuminate in red when a is unbuckled in the second row. When
pedestrian is detected directly in the the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN
NOTE:
vehicle’s path, near the headlights, and a position, and if a seat belt in the second
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single
collision is possible. row is unbuckled, a light corresponding to the
chime.
If enabled, a chime will sound and a video pop-up specific seat will turn on in the upper right portion
Liftgate Open Warning Light may display when a detection occurs. of the instrument cluster display, momentarily
This warning light will illuminate when the replacing the configurable corner information. If a
liftgate is open. Oil Pressure Warning Light second row seat belt that was buckled at the start
This warning light will illuminate to of the trip is unbuckled, the Rear Seat Belt
indicate low engine oil pressure. If the Reminder Light will change from the buckled to the
NOTE: light turns on while driving, stop the unbuckled symbol, and a chime will sound
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single vehicle, shut off the engine as soon as Ú page 241.
chime. possible, and contact an authorized dealer. A
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
Night Vision Animal Detected Warning chime will sound when this light turns on.
This warning light indicates when the
Light Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is
driver or passenger seat belt is
corrected. This light does not indicate how much oil
The Night Vision Animal Warning Light unbuckled. When the ignition is first
is in the engine. The engine oil level must be
will illuminate in red when an animal is placed in the ON/RUN position and if the
checked under the hood.
detected directly in the vehicle’s path, driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound
near the headlights, and a collision is Oil Temperature Warning Light and the light will turn on. When driving, if the driver
possible. This warning light will illuminate to or front passenger seat belt remains unbuckled,
indicate the engine oil temperature is the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on
If enabled, a chime will sound and a video pop-up
high. If the light turns on while driving, continuously and a chime will sound Ú page 241.
may display when a detection occurs.
stop the vehicle and shut off the engine
as soon as possible. Wait for oil temperature to
return to normal levels.
Transmission Temperature Warning Light Vehicle Security Warning Light — Electronic Park Brake Warning Light
— If Equipped If Equipped This warning light will illuminate to
This warning light will illuminate to warn This light will flash at a fast rate for indicate the Electronic Park Brake is not
of a high transmission fluid temperature. approximately 15 seconds when the functioning properly and service is
This may occur with strenuous usage vehicle security system is arming, and required. Contact an authorized dealer.
such as trailer towing. If this light turns then will flash slowly until the vehicle is Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active
on, stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle or disarmed.
Warning Light — If Equipped
slightly faster, with the transmission in PARK (P) or
YELLOW WARNING LIGHTS 3
NEUTRAL (N), until the light turns off. Once the light This warning light will indicate when the
turns off, you may continue to drive normally. ESC system is Active. The ESC Indicator
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light in the instrument cluster will come
WARNING! Light on when the ignition is placed in the
This warning light monitors the ABS. The ON/RUN position, and when ESC is activated. It
If you continue operating the vehicle when the light will turn on when the ignition is should go out with the engine running. If the ESC
Transmission Temperature Warning Light is placed in the ON/RUN or position and Indicator Light comes on continuously with the
illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil over, may stay on for as long as four seconds. engine running, a malfunction has been detected
come in contact with hot engine or exhaust in the ESC system. If this warning light remains on
components and cause a fire. If the ABS light remains on or turns on while
after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has
driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake
been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds
system is not functioning and service is required as
greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized
CAUTION! soon as possible. However, the conventional brake
dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
system will continue to operate normally,
Continuous driving with the Transmission diagnosed and corrected.
assuming the Brake Warning Light is not also on.
Temperature Warning Light illuminated will  The ESC OFF Indicator Light and the ESC Indi-
If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition
eventually cause severe transmission damage cator Light come on momentarily each time the
is placed in the ON/RUN position, have the brake
or transmission failure. ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
system inspected by an authorized dealer.
 The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive.
 This light will come on when the vehicle is in an
ESC event.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Low Fuel Warning Light Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator
Warning Light — If Equipped When the fuel level reaches Warning Light (MIL)
This warning light indicates the ESC is off. approximately 2 gal (7.5 L), this light will The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator
Each time the ignition is turned to turn on and a chime will sound. The light Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard
ON/RUN, the ESC system will be on, even will remain on until fuel is added. Diagnostic System called OBD II that
if it was turned off previously. Low Washer Fluid Warning Light — monitors engine and automatic
Service Active Lane Management Warning transmission control systems. This warning light
If Equipped
will illuminate when the ignition is in the ON/RUN
Light — If Equipped This warning light will illuminate when the position before engine start. If the bulb does not
This warning light will illuminate when the windshield washer fluid is low come on when turning the ignition switch from OFF
Active Lane Management system is not Ú page 307. to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
operating and requires service. Please
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas
see an authorized dealer. Night Vision Animal Detected Warning
cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the light
Active Lane Management Warning Light — Light after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if
If Equipped The Night Vision Animal Warning Light the light stays on through several typical driving
will illuminate in yellow when an animal is styles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive
The Active Lane Management Warning
approaching or is in the vehicles path normally and will not require towing.
Light will be solid yellow when the vehicle
Ú page 169. When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to
is approaching a lane marker. The
warning light will flash when the vehicle is Night Vision Pedestrian Detected Warning alert serious conditions that could lead to
crossing the lane marker Ú page 163. Light immediate loss of power or severe catalytic
converter damage. The vehicle should be serviced
The Night Vision Pedestrian Warning by an authorized dealer as soon as possible if this
Light will illuminate in yellow when a occurs.
pedestrian is approaching or is in the
vehicles path Ú page 169.
Service Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Should one or more tires be in the condition
WARNING! mentioned above, the display will show the
Warning Light
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as indications corresponding to each tire.
This light will turn on when the ACC is not
referenced above, can reach higher
operating and needs service CAUTION!
temperatures than in normal operating
conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive
Ú page 137.
Do not continue driving with one or more flat
slowly or park over flammable substances such tires as handling may be compromised. Stop the
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could
Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steering. If a 3
result in death or serious injury to the driver, Light — If Equipped
tire puncture occurs, repair immediately using
occupants or others. This warning light will illuminate to the dedicated tire repair kit and contact an
indicate a fault in the Forward Collision authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Warning System. Contact an authorized
CAUTION! dealer for service Ú page 233.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator Service Stop/Start System Warning Light — be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the If Equipped inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle
vehicle control system. It also could affect fuel manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire
This warning light will illuminate when the
economy and driveability. If the MIL is flashing, inflation pressure label. If your vehicle has tires of
Stop/Start system is not functioning
severe catalytic converter damage and power a different size than the size indicated on the
properly and service is required. Contact
loss will soon occur. Immediate service is vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
an authorized dealer for service.
required. should determine the proper tire inflation pressure
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) for those tires.
Service 4WD Warning Light — If Equipped Warning Light As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
This warning light will illuminate to signal The warning light switches on and a equipped with a TPMS that illuminates a low tire
a fault with the 4WD system. If the light message is displayed to indicate that the pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is
stays on or comes on during driving, it tire pressure is lower than the significantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the
means that the 4WD system is not recommended value and/or that slow low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should
functioning properly and that service is required. pressure loss is occurring. In these cases, optimal stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and
We recommend you drive to the nearest service tire duration and fuel consumption may not be inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a
center and have the vehicle serviced immediately. guaranteed. significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire Air Suspension Active Indicator Light —
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling CAUTION!
If Equipped
and stopping ability. The TPMS has been optimized for the original
This light will illuminate when the air
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures
suspension system is actively adjusting
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s and warning have been established for the tire
the ride height Ú page 131.
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable
even if underinflation has not reached the level to system operation or sensor damage may result
when using replacement equipment that is not
Air Suspension Aerodynamic Height
trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure
telltale. of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket Indicator Light— If Equipped
wheels can cause sensor damage. Using This light will illuminate when the air
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire suspension system is set to the
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to Aerodynamic setting Ú page 131.
is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction
become inoperable. After using an aftermarket
indicator is combined with the low tire pressure
telltale. When the system detects a malfunction,
tire sealant it is recommended that you take Air Suspension Entry/Exit Indicator Light—
your vehicle to an authorized dealer to have your If Equipped
the telltale will flash for approximately one minute
sensor function checked.
and then remain continuously illuminated. This This light will illuminate when the vehicle
sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle is automatically lowered from ride height
start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When YELLOW INDICATOR LIGHTS position downward for easy entry and exit
the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the of the vehicle.
system may not be able to detect or signal low tire 4WD Low Indicator Light — If Equipped
Air Suspension Off-Road 1 Indicator Light
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may This light alerts the driver that the vehicle
occur for a variety of reasons, including the is in the 4WD Low mode. The front and — If Equipped
installation of replacement or alternate tires or rear driveshafts are mechanically locked This light will illuminate when the air
wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from together forcing the front and rear suspension system is set to the Off-Road
functioning properly. Always check the TPMS wheels to rotate at the same speed. Low range 1 setting Ú page 131.
malfunction telltale after replacing one or more provides a greater gear reduction ratio to provide
tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the increased torque at the wheels Ú page 128.
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow
the TPMS to continue to function properly.
Air Suspension Off-Road 2 Indicator Light GREEN INDICATOR L IGHTS Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
— If Equipped This indicator light will illuminate when
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With
This light will illuminate when the air the front fog lights are on Ú page 55.
Target Light — If Equipped
suspension system is set to the Off-Road
2 setting Ú page 131. This will display when the ACC is set and
the vehicle in front is detected Active Lane Management Indicator Light —
Auto HOLD! Fault Indicator Light — Ú page 137. If Equipped
If Equipped The Active Lane Management indicator 3
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With No light illuminates solid green when both
The Auto HOLD! Fault Indicator light will
Target Detected Indicator Light — If lane markings have been detected and
illuminate if a fault is detected, it will be
indicated by a yellow ‘HOLD!’ indicator Equipped the system is “armed” and ready to
light that will stay on as long as the fault This will display when the ACC is set and provide visual and torque warnings if an
condition exists. the vehicle in front is not detected unintentional lane departure occurs Ú page 163.
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Off Ú page 137. Night Vision Active Indicator Light —
Indicator Light — If Equipped If Equipped
Auto HOLD Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light illuminates to indicate This light alerts the driver that the Night
Auto HOLD keeps your vehicle at a Vision Warning System status is Active
that FCW is off Ú page 233. complete stop without you having to keep Ú page 169.
your foot on the brake pedal. Once
engaged a green “HOLD” indicator will Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light
NEUTRAL Indicator Light — If Equipped
appear in the Instrument Cluster Display.
This light alerts the driver that the 4WD This indicator light will illuminate when
power transfer case is in the NEUTRAL Cruise Control SET Indicator Light — the parking lights or headlights are
mode and the front and rear driveshafts If Equipped turned on Ú page 55.
are disengaged from the powertrain. This indicator light will illuminate when
the cruise control is set to the desired
speed Ú page 136.
Rear Seat Belt Fastened Indicator Light — NOTE: Active Lane Management Indicator Light —
If Equipped  A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is If Equipped
This light indicates when a rear seat belt driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either When the Active Lane Management
has been buckled in the second row. A turn signal on. system is ON, but not armed, the Active
telltale will display in the upper right  Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if Lane Management indicator light
corner of the instrument cluster display either indicator flashes at a rapid rate. illuminates solid white. This occurs when
to correspond to the specific seating position once only left, right, or neither lane line has been
the seat belt has been buckled Ú page 241.
WHITE INDICATOR L IGHTS detected. If a single lane line is detected, the
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light system is ready to provide only visual warnings if
Sport Mode Indicator Light
an unintentional lane departure occurs on the
This light will turn on when Sport Mode is — If Equipped
detected lane line Ú page 163.
active. This light will turn on when ACC has been
turned on, but is not set Ú page 137. Rear Seat Unoccupied Indicator Light —
If Equipped
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light — This light indicates when the rear
If Equipped Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light passenger seats are unoccupied, and will
This indicator light will illuminate when This indicator light will illuminate when illuminate in the upper right portion of
the Stop/Start function is in “Autostop” the cruise control is ready, but not set the instrument cluster display,
mode Ú page 135. Ú page 136. momentarily replacing the configurable corner
information.
Turn Signal Indicator Lights Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator Light
When the left or right turn signal is — If Equipped
activated, the turn signal indicator will This indicator shows when the HDC
flash independently and the feature is turned on. The lamp will be on
corresponding exterior turn signal lamps solid when HDC is armed. HDC can only
will flash. Turn signals can be activated when the be armed when the transfer case is in the
multifunction lever is moved down (left) or up 4WD Low position and the vehicle speed is less
(right). then 30 mph (48 km/h). If these conditions are not
met while attempting to use the HDC feature, the
HDC indicator light will flash on/off.
Selec-Speed Control Indicator Light — GRAY I NDICATOR L IGHTS CAUTION!

If Equipped
Night Vision Suppressed Indicator Light —  Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
This light will turn on when Selec-Speed
If Equipped further damage to the emission control
Control is activated.
This light alerts the driver that the Night system. It could also affect fuel economy and
Vision Warning System status is driveability. The vehicle must be serviced
To activate Selec-Speed Control, assure the Suppressed Ú page 169. before any emissions tests can be performed.
vehicle is 4WD Low and push the button on the  If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is 3
Instrument Panel. ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II running, severe catalytic converter damage
NOTE: and power loss will soon occur. Immediate
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated
If the vehicle is not in 4WD Low, “To Enter service is required.
Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II. This
Selec-Speed Shift to 4WD Low” will appear in the system monitors the performance of the
instrument cluster display. emissions, engine, and transmission control ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC S YSTEM
BLUE INDICATOR L IGHTS systems. When these systems are operating
(OBD II) CYBERSECURITY
properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
High Beam Indicator Light performance and fuel economy, as well as engine Your vehicle is required to have OBD II and a
This indicator light will illuminate to emissions well within current government connection port to allow access to information
indicate that the high beam headlights regulations. related to the performance of your emissions
are on. With the low beams activated, If any of these systems require service, the OBD II controls. Authorized service technicians may need
push the multifunction lever forward system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light to access this information to assist with the
(toward the front of the vehicle) to turn on the high (MIL). It will also store diagnostic codes and other diagnosis and service of your vehicle and
beams. Pull the multifunction lever rearward information to assist your service technician in emissions system Ú page 192.
(toward the rear of the vehicle) to turn off the high making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually
beams. If the high beams are off, pull the lever be driveable and not need towing, see an
toward you for a temporary high beam on, “flash to authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
pass” scenario.
For states that require an Inspection and 3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two
WARNING! Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies things will happen:
 ONLY an authorized service technician should the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is  The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and
connect equipment to the OBD II connection functioning and is not on when the then return to being fully illuminated until
port in order to read the VIN, diagnose, or engine is running, and that the OBD II system is you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine.
service your vehicle. ready for testing. This means that your vehicle's OBD II
 If unauthorized equipment is connected to the Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD system is not ready and you should not
OBD II connection port, such as a II system may not be ready if your vehicle was proceed to the I/M station.
driver-behavior tracking device, it may: recently serviced, recently had a depleted battery  The MIL will not flash at all and will remain
or a battery replacement. If the OBD II system fully illuminated until you place the ignition
 Be possible that vehicle systems, should be determined not ready for the I/M test, in the off position or start the engine. This
including safety related systems, could be your vehicle may fail the test. means that your vehicle's OBD II system is
impaired or a loss of vehicle control could
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, ready and you can proceed to the I/M
occur that may result in an accident
which you can use prior to going to the test station. station.
involving serious injury or death.
To check if your vehicle's OBD II system is ready,
 Access, or allow others to access, infor- you must do the following: If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see
mation stored in your vehicle systems, an authorized dealer or repair facility. If your
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position,
including personal information. vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery
but do not crank or start the engine.
failure or replacement, you may need to do nothing
NOTE: more than drive your vehicle as you normally would
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND If you crank or start the engine, you will have to in order for your OBD II system to update. A
start this test over.
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS 2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the
recheck with the above test routine may then
indicate that the system is now ready.
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to ON position, you will see the Malfunction Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II system
pass an inspection of your vehicle's emissions Indicator Light (MIL) symbol come on as part of is ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during
control system. Failure to pass could prevent a normal bulb check. normal vehicle operation you should have your
vehicle registration. vehicle serviced before going to the I/M station.
The I/M station can fail your vehicle because the
MIL is on with the engine running.
115
STARTING AND OPERATING

STARTING THE ENGINE WARNING! CAUTION!
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat,  Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,  Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has
adjust the inside and outside mirrors, fasten your or in a location accessible to children, and do come to a complete stop.
seat belt, and if present, instruct all other not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped
occupants to buckle their seat belts.  Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the
with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ in the ON/RUN
vehicle has come to a complete stop and the
mode. A child could operate power windows,
WARNING! engine is at idle speed. 4
other controls, or move the vehicle.
 Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a  Before shifting into any gear, make sure your
complete stop, then shift the automatic trans- foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up
mission into PARK and apply the parking may cause serious injury or death.
brake. KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ — IGNITION
 Always make sure the keyless ignition node is AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION This feature allows the driver to operate the
in the OFF mode, key fob is removed from the ignition switch with the push of a button, as long as
vehicle and vehicle is locked. The gear selector must be in the NEUTRAL (N) or
the Remote Start/Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ key fob is
PARK (P) position before you can start the engine.
 Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with in the passenger compartment.
Apply the brakes before shifting into any driving
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving chil-
dren in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for
gear. NORMAL STARTING
a number of reasons. A child or others could CAUTION! To Turn On The Engine Using The ENGINE START/
be seriously or fatally injured. Children should STOP Button
be warned not to touch the parking brake, Damage to the transmission may occur if the
1. The transmission must be in PARK (P).
brake pedal or the gear selector. following precautions are not observed:
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing
(Continued)  Do not shift from REVERSE (R), PARK, or
the ENGINE START/STOP button once.
NEUTRAL into any forward gear when the
engine is above idle speed.
(Continued)
116 STARTING AND OPERATING
3. The system takes over and attempts to start NOTE: AUTOPARK

the vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the If the gear selector is not in PARK, and the ENGINE
starter will disengage automatically after START/STOP button is pushed once with the AutoPark is a supplemental feature to assist in
10 seconds. vehicle speed below 5 mph (8 km/h), the engine placing the vehicle in PARK (P) should the
will shut off and the ignition will remain in the situations on the following pages occur. It is a
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine
ON/RUN position. If vehicle speed drops below back-up system and should not be relied upon as
prior to the engine starting, push the ENGINE
1.2 mph (1.9 km/h), the vehicle may AutoPark the primary method by which the driver shifts the
START/STOP button again.
Ú page 116. vehicle into PARK.
To Turn Off The Engine Using The ENGINE ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With The conditions under which AutoPark will engage
START/STOP Button Driver’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or are outlined on the following pages.
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push NEUTRAL Position)
and release the ENGINE START/STOP button.
WARNING!
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar
2. The ignition will return to the OFF mode. to an ignition switch. It has three modes: OFF,  Driver inattention could lead to failure to place
ON/RUN, and START. To change the ignition the vehicle in PARK. ALWAYS DO A VISUAL
3. If the gear selector is not in PARK, the ENGINE
modes without starting the vehicle and use the CHECK that your vehicle is in PARK by verifying
START/STOP button must be held for two
accessories, follow these directions: that a solid (not blinking) “P” is indicated in
seconds or three short pushes in a row with
1. Start with the ignition in the OFF mode. the instrument cluster display and on the gear
the vehicle speed above 5 mph (8 km/h)
selector. If the "P" indicator is blinking, your
before the engine will shut off. The ignition will 2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to vehicle is not in PARK. As an added precau-
remain in the ON/RUN position until the gear place the ignition in the ON/RUN position. tion, always apply the parking brake when
selector is in PARK and the button is pushed
3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a exiting the vehicle.
twice to the OFF mode.
second time to return the ignition to the OFF
 AutoPark is a supplemental feature. It is not
4. If the gear selector is not in PARK and the mode.
ENGINE START/STOP button is pushed once designed to replace the need to shift your
vehicle into PARK. It is a back up system and
with the vehicle speed above 5 mph (8 km/h), NOTE:
the instrument cluster will display a “Vehicle should not be relied upon as the primary
Only press one pedal at a time while driving the
Not In Park” message and the engine will method by which the driver shifts the vehicle
vehicle. Torque performance of the vehicle could
remain running. Never leave a vehicle out of into PARK.
be reduced if both pedals are pressed at the same
the PARK position, or it could roll. time. If pressure is detected on both pedals simul-
taneously, a warning message will display in the
instrument cluster Ú page 89.
STARTING AND OPERATING 117
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver turns off The message “AutoPark Engaged Shift to P then Additional customer warnings will be given when
the engine, the vehicle may AutoPark. Shift to Gear” will display in the instrument cluster. both of these conditions are met:
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions NOTE:  Vehicle is not in PARK
are met: In some cases the ParkSense graphic will be  Driver’s door is ajar
 Vehicle is equipped with an 8-speed displayed in the instrument cluster. In these cases,
the gear selector must be returned to “P” to select The message “AutoPark Not Engaged” will be
transmission displayed in the instrument cluster. A warning
desired gear.
 Vehicle is not in PARK chime will continue until you shift the vehicle into
If the driver shifts into PARK while moving, the PARK or the driver’s door is closed.
 Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less vehicle may AutoPark.
NOTE: ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK that your vehicle is in
AutoPark will engage ONLY when vehicle speed is
For Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ equipped vehicles, the 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less.
PARK by looking for the "P" in the instrument 4
engine will turn off and the ignition switch will cluster display and on the gear selector. As an
The message “Vehicle Speed is Too High to Shift to added precaution, always apply the parking brake
change to the ON/RUN position. After 30 minutes
P” will be displayed in the instrument cluster if when exiting the vehicle.
the ignition switches to OFF automatically, unless
vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h).
the driver turns the ignition switch OFF. I F E NGINE F AILS T O S TART
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver exits the WARNING!
vehicle with the engine running, the vehicle may If the engine fails to start after you have followed
AutoPark. If vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h), the "Normal Starting" procedure and has not
the transmission will default to NEUTRAL experienced an extended park condition (i.e.,
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions parked for more than 30 days), it may be flooded.
until the vehicle speed drops below 1.2 mph
are met: Push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor
(1.9 km/h). A vehicle left in the NEUTRAL
 Vehicle is equipped with an 8-speed position can roll. As an added precaution, always and hold it there while the engine is cranking. This
transmission apply the parking brake when exiting the vehicle. should clear any excess fuel in case the engine is
 Vehicle is not in PARK flooded. The starter motor will engage
automatically, run for 10 seconds, and then
 Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less 4WD LOW — If Equipped
disengage. Once this occurs, release the
 Driver’s seat belt is unbuckled AutoPark will be disabled when operating the accelerator pedal and brake pedal, wait 10 to
 Driver’s door is ajar
vehicle in 4WD LOW. 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting”
The message “AutoPark Disabled” will be procedure.
 Brake pedal is not pressed
displayed in the instrument cluster.
WARNING! COLD WEATHER OPERATION ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS

 Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into
(B ELOW –22°F OR −30°C) A long break-in period is not required for the engine
the throttle body air inlet opening in an To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, and drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your
attempt to start the vehicle. This could result use of an externally powered electric engine block vehicle.
in flash fire causing serious personal injury. heater (available from an authorized dealer) is Drive moderately during the first 300 miles
recommended. (500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds
 Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to
up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
get it started. Vehicles equipped with an auto- AFTER S TARTING
matic transmission cannot be started this Brief full-throttle acceleration within the limits of
way. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic The idle speed is controlled automatically, and it local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
converter and once the engine has started, will decrease as the engine warms up. Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be
ignite and damage the converter and vehicle. detrimental and should be avoided.
 If the vehicle has a discharged battery,
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is
booster cables may be used to obtain a start The engine block heater warms the engine, and a high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
from a booster battery or the battery in permits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the changes should be consistent with anticipated
another vehicle. This type of start can be cord to a standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical climate conditions under which vehicle operations
dangerous if done improperly Ú page 291. outlet with a grounded, three-wire extension cord. will occur Ú page 308.
The engine block heater must be plugged in at
CAUTION!
least one hour to have an adequate warming effect
CAUTION! on the engine. Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral
To prevent damage to the starter, do not The engine block heater cord is coiled and Oil in the engine or damage may result.
continuously crank the engine for more than strapped right behind the engine air cleaner filter
10 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to 15 seconds assembly from the manufacturer. NOTE:
before trying again. A new engine may consume some oil during its first
WARNING! few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
Remember to disconnect the engine block should be considered a normal part of the break-in
heater cord before driving. Damage to the and not interpreted as a problem. Please check your
110-115 Volt electrical cord could cause oil level with the engine oil indicator often during the
electrocution. break-in period. Add oil as required.
PARKING BRAKE If the Auto Park Brake feature is enabled, the

parking brake will automatically engage whenever
ELECTRIC P ARK B RAKE (EPB) the transmission is placed into PARK. If your foot is
on the brake pedal, you may notice a small amount
Your vehicle is equipped with an EPB that offers of brake pedal movement while the parking brake
simple operation, and some additional features is engaging.
that make the parking brake more convenient and The parking brake will release automatically when
useful. the ignition is ON, the transmission is in DRIVE or
The parking brake is primarily intended to prevent REVERSE, the driver seat belt is buckled, and an
the vehicle from rolling while parked. Before attempt is made to drive away.
leaving the vehicle, make sure the parking brake is Electric Park Brake Switch To release the parking brake manually, the ignition 4
applied. Also, be certain to leave the transmission switch must be in the ON/RUN position. Put your
in PARK. To apply the parking brake manually, pull up on the
switch momentarily. You may hear a sound from foot on the brake pedal, then push the EPB switch
You can engage the parking brake in two ways: the back of the vehicle while the parking brake down momentarily. You may hear a sound from the
 Manually, by applying the parking brake switch. engages. Once the parking brake is fully engaged, back of the vehicle while the parking brake
the BRAKE telltale light in the instrument cluster disengages. You may also notice a small amount of
 Automatically, by enabling the Auto Park Brake
and an indicator on the switch will illuminate. If movement in the brake pedal. Once the parking
feature in the Customer Programmable
your foot is on the brake pedal while you apply the brake is fully disengaged, the BRAKE telltale light
Features section of the Uconnect settings.
parking brake, you may notice a small amount of in the instrument cluster and the LED indicator on
The parking brake switch is located on the the switch will extinguish.
brake pedal movement. The parking brake can be
instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel
applied even when the ignition switch is OFF but NOTE:
(below the headlamp switch).
the BRAKE telltale light will not illuminate, When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the
however, it can only be released when the ignition front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade
is in the ON/RUN mode. and away from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply
NOTE: the parking brake before placing the gear selector
The EPB fault light will illuminate if the EPB switch in PARK, otherwise the load on the transmission
is held for longer than 20 seconds in either the locking mechanism may make it difficult to move
released or applied position. The light will extin- the gear selector out of PARK.
guish upon releasing the switch.
WARNING! WARNING! WARNING!

 Never use the PARK position as a substitute  Always fully apply the parking brake when Driving the vehicle with the parking brake
for the parking brake. Always apply the leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause engaged, or repeated use of the parking brake
parking brake fully when parked to guard damage or injury. Also be certain to leave the to slow the vehicle may cause serious damage to
against vehicle movement and possible injury transmission in PARK. Failure to do so may the brake system. Be sure the parking brake is
or damage. allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage or fully disengaged before driving; failure to do so
injury. can lead to brake failure and a collision.
 When exiting the vehicle, always turn the igni-
tion OFF, secure the key fob, and lock your
vehicle. In the unlikely event of a malfunction of the EPB
CAUTION! system, a yellow EPB fault light will illuminate. This
 Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on may be accompanied by the BRAKE telltale light
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil-
with the parking brake released, a brake system flashing. In this event, urgent service of the EPB
dren to be in a vehicle unattended is
malfunction is indicated. Have the brake system system is required. Do not rely on the parking
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
serviced by an authorized dealer immediately. brake to hold the vehicle stationary.
others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the AUTO PARK BRAKE
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear If exceptional circumstances should make it
selector. necessary to engage the parking brake while the The EPB can be programmed to be applied
vehicle is in motion, maintain upward pressure on automatically whenever the vehicle is at a
 Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, standstill and the transmission is placed in PARK.
the EPB switch for as long as engagement is
or in a location accessible to children, and do Auto Park Brake is enabled and disabled by
desired. The BRAKE telltale light will illuminate,
not leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless customer selection through the customer
and a continuous chime will sound. The rear stop
Enter ‘n Go™ in the ON/RUN position. A child programmable features section of the Uconnect
lamps will also be illuminated automatically while
could operate power windows, other controls, Settings Ú page 208.
the vehicle remains in motion.
or move the vehicle.
To disengage the parking brake while the vehicle is Any single Auto Park Brake application can be
 Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged in motion, release the switch. If the vehicle is bypassed by pushing the EPB switch to the release
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brought to a complete stop using the parking position while the transmission is placed in PARK.
brake failure and a collision. brake, when the vehicle reaches approximately
(Continued) 3 mph, (5 km/h) the parking brake will remain
engaged.
SAFEHOLD stop until the driver applies the accelerator pedal. BRAKE MAINTENANCE M ODE
Hold ‘N Go can be activated or deactivated by
SafeHold is a safety feature of the EPB system that pushing the HOLD button located on the switch We recommend having your brakes serviced by an
will place the transmission in PARK, and engage bank. authorized dealer. You should only make repairs
the parking brake automatically if the vehicle is left for which you have the knowledge and the right
unsecured while the ignition is in ON/RUN. equipment. You should only enter Brake
The parking brake will automatically engage if all of Maintenance Mode during brake service.
the following conditions are met: When servicing your rear brakes, it may be
 The vehicle is at a standstill. necessary for you or your technician to push the
rear piston into the rear caliper bore. With the EPB
 There is no attempt to press the brake pedal or
accelerator pedal.
system, this can only be done after retracting the 4
EPB actuator. Fortunately, actuator retraction can
 The seat belt is unbuckled. be done easily by entering the Brake Maintenance
 The driver door is open. Mode through the Uconnect Settings in your
vehicle. This menu-based system will guide you
SafeHold can be temporarily bypassed by pushing through the steps necessary to retract the EPB
HOLD Switch
the EPB switch while the driver door is open. Once actuator in order to perform rear brake service.
manually bypassed, SafeHold will be enabled The following conditions must be met for Hold ‘N
again once the vehicle reaches 12 mph (20 km/h) Go to activate: Maintenance Mode has requirements that must be
or the ignition is turned to the OFF position and met in order to be activated:
 Driver’s door closed
back to ON again.  The vehicle must be at a standstill.
 Driver's seat belt fastened
HOLD ‘N G O— IF EQUIPPED  Vehicle is at a standstill
 The parking brake must be unapplied.
 The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
Hold ‘N Go is a comfort feature that allows the  Forward gear is selected
driver to remove their foot from the brake pedal While in Maintenance Mode, the EPB fault lamp
 ACC is not engaged
once the vehicle has come to a stop. The vehicle will flash continuously while the ignition is ON.
must be held at a standstill for a predetermined  EPB is not applied
amount of time by hydraulic braking. The EPB will  ParkSense Active Park Assist System auto
then engage and continue to hold the vehicle at a parking maneuver is not activated
When brake maintenance work is complete, the

following steps must be followed to reset the WARNING! WARNING!
parking brake system to normal operation:  Your vehicle could move and injure you and  Unintended movement of a vehicle could
 Ensure the vehicle is at a standstill. others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all
move the transmission gear selector out of vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while
 Press the brake pedal with moderate force.
PARK with the brake pedal released. Make the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle,
 Apply the EPB Switch. sure the transmission is in PARK before always come to a complete stop, then apply
exiting the vehicle. the parking brake, shift the transmission into
WARNING! PARK, and turn the ignition OFF. When the
 The transmission may not engage PARK if the
You can be badly injured working on or around a ignition is in the OFF mode, the transmission
vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against
complete stop before shifting to PARK, and
which you have the knowledge and the right unwanted movement.
verify that the transmission gear position indi-
equipment. If you have any doubt about your cator solidly indicates PARK without blinking.  When exiting the vehicle, always make sure
ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle Ensure that the vehicle is completely stopped, the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the
to a competent mechanic. and the PARK position is properly indicated, key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
before exiting the vehicle.
 Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION  It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil-
NEUTRAL (N) if the engine speed is higher dren to be in a vehicle unattended is
You must press and hold the brake pedal while than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
shifting out of PARK. pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could others could be seriously or fatally injured.
accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You Children should be warned not to touch the
WARNING!
could lose control of the vehicle and hit parking brake, brake pedal or the transmis-
 Never use the PARK (P) position as a substi- someone or something. Only shift into gear sion gear selector.
tute for the parking brake. Always apply the when the engine is idling normally and your
 Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle
parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle to foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
(or in a location accessible to children), and do
guard against vehicle movement and possible (Continued) not leave the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
injury or damage.
A child could operate power windows, other
(Continued) controls, or move the vehicle.
CAUTION! BRAKE/TRANSMISSION SHIFT NOTE:

In the event of a mismatch between the gear
Damage to the transmission may occur if the
I NTERLOCK (BTSI) S YSTEM selector position and the actual transmission gear
following precautions are not observed: This vehicle is equipped with a BTSI system that (for example, driver selects PARK while driving),
holds the transmission gear selector in PARK the position indicator will blink continuously until
 Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE (R) only
unless the brakes are applied. To shift the the selector is returned to the proper position, or
after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
transmission out of PARK, the engine must be the requested shift can be completed.
 Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, running and the brake pedal must be pressed. The The electronically controlled transmission adapts
NEUTRAL, or DRIVE (D) when the engine is brake pedal must also be pressed to shift from its shift schedule based on driver inputs, along
above idle speed. NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle with environmental and road conditions. The
 Before shifting into any gear, make sure your
is stopped or moving at low speeds. transmission electronics are self-calibrating; 4
therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle may
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. 8-SPEED A UTOMATIC T RANSMISSION be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition,
The transmission is controlled using a rotary and precision shifts will develop within a few
I GNITION PARK INTERLOCK electronic gear selector located on the center hundred miles (kilometers).
This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park console. The transmission gear range (PRND) is Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when
Interlock which requires the transmission to be in displayed both above the gear selector and in the the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is
PARK (P) before the ignition can be turned to the instrument cluster. To select a gear range, simply stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake
OFF mode. This helps the driver avoid inadvertently rotate the gear selector. You must press the brake pedal when shifting between these gears.
leaving the vehicle without placing the pedal to shift the transmission out of PARK (or
The transmission gear selector has only PARK,
transmission in PARK. This system also locks the NEUTRAL, when the vehicle is stopped or moving at
REVERSE, NEUTRAL, and DRIVE positions. Manual
transmission in PARK whenever the ignition is in low speeds). To shift past multiple gear ranges at
downshifts can be made using the steering wheel
the OFF mode. once (such as PARK to DRIVE), simply rotate the
mounted paddle shifters. Pulling the -/+ switches
gear selector to the appropriate detent. Select the
NOTE: (on the steering wheel) while in the DRIVE position
DRIVE range for normal driving.
The transmission is NOT locked in PARK when the will select the highest available transmission gear,
ignition is in the ON/RUN position (even though the and will display that gear limit in the instrument
engine will be off). Ensure that the transmission is cluster as 1, 2, 3, etc. Some models will display
in PARK, and the ignition is OFF (not in the ON/RUN both the selected gear limit, and the actual current
position) before exiting the vehicle. gear, while in AutoStick mode.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake

before shifting the transmission to PARK. As an WARNING!
added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the  The transmission may not engage PARK if the
curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a
on an uphill grade. complete stop before shifting to PARK, and
When exiting the vehicle, always: verify that the transmission gear position indi-
cator solidly indicates PARK without blinking.
 Apply the parking brake.
Ensure that the vehicle is completely stopped,
 Shift the transmission into PARK. and the PARK position is properly indicated,
 Turn the ignition OFF. before exiting the vehicle.
Transmission Gear Selector  Remove the key fob from the vehicle.  It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
Gear Ranges NOTE: NEUTRAL (N) if the engine speed is higher
On four-wheel drive vehicles be sure that the than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly
Do not press the accelerator pedal when shifting pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could
from PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) into another gear transfer case is in a drive position.
accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You
range. WARNING! could lose control of the vehicle and hit
NOTE: someone or something. Only shift into gear
 Never use the PARK (P) position as a substi- when the engine is idling normally and your
After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
tute for the parking brake. Always apply the foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
allow the selected gear to engage before acceler-
parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle to
ating. This is especially important when the engine  Unintended movement of a vehicle could
guard against vehicle movement and possible
is cold. injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all
injury or damage.
PARK (P) vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while
 Your vehicle could move and injure you and the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle,
This range supplements the parking brake by others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to always come to a complete stop, then apply
locking the transmission. The engine can be move the transmission gear selector out of the parking brake, shift the transmission into
started in this range. Never attempt to use PARK PARK with the brake pedal released. Make PARK, and turn the ignition OFF. When the
while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the parking sure the transmission is in PARK before ignition is in the OFF mode, the transmission
brake when exiting the vehicle in this range. exiting the vehicle. is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against
(Continued) unwanted movement.
(Continued)
The following indicators should be used to ensure

WARNING! that you have properly engaged the transmission CAUTION!
 When exiting the vehicle, always make sure into the PARK position: Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any
the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the  When shifting into PARK, rotate the shifter all other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL
key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle. the way counterclockwise until the indicator can cause severe transmission damage.
 Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with displays PARK. For Recreational Towing see Ú page 185.
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil-  Look at the transmission gear position display
For Towing A Disabled Vehicle see Ú page 295.
dren to be in a vehicle unattended is and verify that it indicates the PARK position (P),
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or and is not blinking.
others could be seriously or fatally injured.  With the brake pedal released, verify that the DRIVE (D)
Children should be warned not to touch the 4
gear selector will not move out of PARK. This range should be used for most city and
parking brake, brake pedal or the transmis- highway driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts
sion gear selector. REVERSE (R) and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The
 Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle This range is for moving the vehicle backward. transmission automatically upshifts through all
(or in a location accessible to children), and do Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come forward gears.
not leave the ignition in the ON/RUN position. to a complete stop. When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such
A child could operate power windows, other as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading
controls, or move the vehicle. NEUTRAL (N) conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for head winds, or while towing a heavy trailer), use
prolonged periods with the engine running. Apply the AutoStick shift control to select a lower gear
CAUTION! the parking brake and shift the transmission into Ú page 126. Under these conditions, using a lower
 Before moving the transmission gear selector PARK (P) if you must exit the vehicle. gear will improve performance and extend
out of PARK, you must start the engine, and transmission life by reducing excessive shifting
also press the brake pedal. Otherwise, WARNING! and heat build-up.
damage to the gear selector could result. Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
 DO NOT race the engine when shifting from ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as practices that limit your response to changing
this can damage the drivetrain. traffic or road conditions. You might lose control
of the vehicle and have a collision.
During cold temperatures, transmission operation NOTE: AutoStick — If Equipped

may be modified depending on engine and In cases where the instrument cluster message AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission
transmission temperature as well as vehicle indicates the transmission may not re-engage after feature providing manual shift control, giving you
speed. This feature improves warm up time of the engine shutdown, perform this procedure only in a more control of the vehicle. AutoStick allows you to
engine and transmission to achieve maximum desired location (preferably, at an authorized maximize engine braking, eliminate undesirable
efficiency. Engagement of the torque converter dealer). upshifts and downshifts, and improve overall
clutch is inhibited until the transmission fluid is 1. Stop the vehicle. vehicle performance. This system can also provide
warm. Normal operation will resume once the
2. Shift the transmission into PARK (P), if you with more control during passing, city driving,
transmission temperature has risen to a suitable
possible. If not, shift the transmission to cold slippery conditions, mountain driving, trailer
level.
NEUTRAL (N). towing, and many other situations.
Transmission Limp Home Mode 3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the
Transmission function is monitored electronically engine turns off.
for abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
that could result in transmission damage,
Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated. In this 5. Restart the engine.
mode, the transmission may operate only in 6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the
certain gears, or may not shift at all. Vehicle problem is no longer detected, the
performance may be severely degraded and the transmission will return to normal operation.
engine may stall. In some situations, the
transmission may not re-engage if the engine is NOTE:
turned off and restarted. The Malfunction Indicator Even if the transmission can be reset, we
Light (MIL) may be illuminated. A message in the recommend that you visit an authorized dealer at AutoStick Shift Paddles
instrument cluster will inform the driver of the your earliest possible convenience. An authorized
more serious conditions, and indicate what actions dealer has diagnostic equipment to assess the
may be necessary. condition of your transmission.
In the event of a momentary problem, the If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized
transmission can be reset to regain all forward dealer service is required.
gears by performing the following steps:
Operation  You can start out, from a stop, in FIRST or

SECOND gear. Tapping (+) at a stop will allow
SPORT MODE — IF EQUIPPED
To activate AutoStick mode, tap one of the shift
paddles on the steering wheel. Tapping the (-) shift starting in SECOND gear. Starting out in
paddle to enter AutoStick mode will downshift the SECOND gear can be helpful in snowy or icy
transmission to the next lower gear, while tapping conditions.
(+) to enter AutoStick mode will retain the current  If a requested downshift would cause the
gear. The current transmission gear will be engine to over-speed, that shift will not occur.
displayed in the instrument cluster. In AutoStick  The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too
mode, you can use the shift paddles, to manually low of a vehicle speed.
shift the transmission. Tapping the (-) shift paddle,
 Holding the (-) paddle pressed, will downshift
will downshift the transmission to the next lower 4
gear. Tapping the (+) shift paddle, will upshift the the transmission to the lowest gear possible at
transmission to the next highest gear. the current speed.
SPORT Mode
 Transmission shifting will be more noticeable
NOTE:
when AutoStick is enabled. Your vehicle is equipped with a Sport Mode
The shift paddles (if equipped) may be disabled
(or re-enabled, as desired) using the Uconnect  The system may revert to automatic shift mode feature. The engine and transmission are both set
Personal Settings. if a fault or overheat condition is detected. to their SPORT settings. Sport Mode will provide
improved throttle response and modified
In AutoStick mode, the transmission will shift up or To disengage AutoStick mode, push and hold the
transmission shift points for an enhanced driving
down when (+/-) is manually selected by the driver, (+) shift paddle until "D" is once again indicated in
experience. This mode may be activated and
unless an engine lugging or overspeed condition the instrument cluster. You can shift in or out of
deactivated by pushing the SPORT ON button on
would result. It will remain in the selected gear AutoStick mode at any time without taking your
the instrument panel switch bank. When Sport
until another upshift or downshift is chosen, except foot off the accelerator pedal.
Mode has been activated an indicator light will
as described below.
WARNING! illuminate in the instrument cluster.
 The transmission will automatically downshift
as the vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) Do not downshift for additional engine braking
and will display the current gear. on a slippery surface. The drive wheels could
 The transmission will automatically downshift to lose their grip and the vehicle could skid,
FIRST gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, causing a collision or personal injury.
the driver should manually upshift (+) the trans-
mission as the vehicle is accelerated.
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION NOTE:

The Quadra-Trac I system is not appropriate for
When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the
engine speed is approximately three times that of
The driveline is equipped with a Front Axle conditions where 4WD LOW range is recom- the normal 4WD HI position at a given road speed.
Disconnect (FAD) for the one-speed and two-speed mended Ú page 189. Take care not to overspeed the engine and do not
driveline. The FAD operation is fully automated and exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
controlled by the Drivetrain Control Module QUADRA-T RAC II O PERATING Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles
(DTCM). It does not require any customer input to INSTRUCTIONS/PRECAUTIONS — depends on tires of equal size, type, and
engage. The FAD is set to connect, disconnect and
provide 4WD function based on certain set I F E QUIPPED circumference on each wheel. Any difference will
adversely affect performance and function of the
conditions detected by the DTCM, including but not The Quadra-Trac II system comes equipped with a transfer case.
limited to the following: customer-selectable electronically operated
Because four-wheel drive provides improved
 Ambient temperature on-demand transfer case with active torque
traction, there is a tendency to exceed safe turning
management in all driveable ranges. This transfer
 Wipers and stopping speeds. Do not go faster than road
case provides the following operating range
 Selec-Terrain Mode selection conditions permit.
positions:
 Wheel-slip detection  4WD HI WARNING!
The FAD is actuated only in 4WD HI range and  N (NEUTRAL)
stays connected for 4WD LOW. You or others could be injured or killed if you
 4WD LOW leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer
QUADRA-T RAC I OPERATING When additional tractive effort and torque are case in the N (NEUTRAL) position without first
fully engaging the parking brake. The transfer
I NSTRUCTIONS/PRECAUTIONS — required, the 4WD LOW position can be used. The
case N (NEUTRAL) position disengages both the
4WD LOW position is intended for loose, slippery
I F EQUIPPED road surfaces only. Driving in the 4WD LOW front and rear drive shafts from the powertrain
The Quadra-Trac I is a single-speed (HI range only) position on dry, hard-surfaced roads may cause and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the
transfer case, which enables on-demand increased tire wear and damage to driveline transmission is in PARK. The parking brake
four-wheel drive with active torque management. components. should always be applied when the driver is not
No driver interaction is required. The Brake in the vehicle.
Traction Control (BTC) system, which combines
standard ABS and Traction Control, provides
resistance to any wheel that is slipping to allow
additional torque transfer to wheels with traction.
SHIFT POSITIONS 4WD LOW NOTE:

This range is for low speed four-wheel drive. It If shift conditions/interlocks are not met, a “For
For additional information on the appropriate use 4x4 Low Slow Below 3 mph (5 km/h) Put Trans in
of each four-wheel drive system mode position, provides an additional gear reduction which allows
for increased torque to be delivered to both the NEUTRAL (N) Push 4WD LOW” message will flash
see the information below: from the instrument cluster display Ú page 92.
front and rear wheels while providing maximum
4WD HI pulling power for loose, slippery road surfaces only. 4WD LOW To 4WD HI
This is the default operating range for daily use. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h). With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph
N (NEUTRAL) SHIFTING P ROCEDURES (0 to 5 km/h), the ignition switch in the ON position
or the engine running, shift the transmission into
This range disengages the driveline from the
4WD HI To 4WD LOW NEUTRAL (N), push and hold the 4WD LOW button
powertrain. It is used for towing your vehicle
until the 4WD LOW indicator light begins to flash in 4
behind another vehicle Ú page 185. With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph
(0 to 5 km/h), the ignition switch in the ON/RUN the instrument cluster. When the shift is complete,
position and the engine running, shift the the 4WD LOW indicator light will remain off.
WARNING!
transmission into NEUTRAL (N), push and hold the NOTE:
You or others could be injured or killed if you 4WD LOW button until the 4WD LOW indicator light  If shift conditions/interlocks are not met — "4WD
leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer begins to flash in the instrument cluster. When the
case in the N (NEUTRAL) position without first Shift Cancelled" or "4WD Shift Aborted/ Retry
shift is complete, the 4WD LOW indicator light will Shift" message will be displayed on the instru-
fully engaging the parking brake. The transfer remain on solid.
case N (NEUTRAL) position disengages both the ment cluster. To re-attempt shift, put the trans-
front and rear drive shafts from the powertrain mission in NEUTRAL (N) and push and hold the
and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the 4WD LOW button.
transmission is in PARK. The parking brake  Shifting into or out of 4WD LOW is possible with
should always be applied when the driver is not the vehicle completely stopped; however, diffi-
in the vehicle. culty may occur due to the mating clutch teeth not
being properly aligned. Several attempts may be
required for clutch teeth alignment and shift
completion to occur. The preferred method is with
the vehicle rolling 0 to 3 mph (0 to 5 km/h). If the
vehicle is moving faster than 3 mph (5 km/h), the
transfer case will not allow the shift.
4WD LOW Button
QUADRA-T RAC II S YSTEM —  SAND – Off-road calibration for use on low trac-
tion surfaces such as sand or wet grass. Drive-
I F EQUIPPED line is maximized for traction. Some binding may
The Quadra-Trac II System features two torque be felt on less forgiving surfaces. The electronic
transfer couplings. The couplings include an brake controls are set to limit traction control
Electronic Limited-Slip Differential (ELSD) rear axle management of throttle and wheel spin. If
and the Quadra-Trac II transfer case. The ELSD equipped with air suspension, the default ride
axle is fully automatic and requires no driver input height for SAND is Normal Ride Height (NRH).
to operate. Under normal driving conditions, the  MUD – Off-road calibration for use on low trac-
unit functions as a standard axle, balancing torque tion surfaces such as mud. Driveline is maxi-
evenly between left and right wheels. With a Selec-Terrain mized for traction. Some binding may be felt on
traction difference between left and right wheels, less forgiving surfaces. The electronic brake
the coupling will sense a speed difference. As one 1 — Selec-Terrain Positions controls are set to limit traction control manage-
wheel begins to spin faster than the other, torque 2 — Selec-Terrain Toggle ment of throttle and wheel spin. If equipped with
will automatically transfer from the wheel that has air suspension, the level will change to OR1.
less traction, to the wheel that has traction. While Selec-Terrain consists of the following positions:  SNOW – Tuning set for additional stability in
the transfer case and axle coupling differ in design,
 ROCK – Off-road calibration is only available in inclement weather. Use on and off-road on
their operation is similar.
4WD LOW. The vehicle is raised (if equipped loose traction surfaces such as snow. When in
SNOW mode (depending on certain operating
SELEC-TERRAIN — IF EQUIPPED with air suspension) for improved ground clear-
ance. Traction-based tuning with improved conditions), the transmission may use SECOND
steerability for use on high traction off-road gear (rather than FIRST gear) during launches,
SELEC-TERRAIN MODE S ELECTION to minimize wheel slippage. If equipped with air
surfaces. Use for low speed obstacles such as
Selec-Terrain combines the capabilities of the large rocks, deep ruts, etc. If equipped with air suspension, the default ride height for SNOW is
vehicle control systems, along with driver input, to suspension, the vehicle level will change to Normal Ride Height (NRH).
provide the best performance for all terrains. Tap Off-Road 2. If the Selec-Terrain switch is in  AUTO – Fully automatic full-time four-wheel
the toggle up or down to cycle through the ROCK mode, and the transfer case is switched drive operation can be used on and off-road.
positions. from 4WD LOW to 4WD HI, the Selec-Terrain Balances traction with seamless steering feel to
system will return to AUTO. provide improved handling and acceleration
over two-wheel drive vehicles.
NOTE: The buttons near the terrain switch in the center  Off-Road 2 (OR2) (Non-TrailHawk raises the
If equipped with air suspension, the level will only console area can be used to set preferred ride vehicle approximately 2.4 inches (60 mm))
raise to Normal Ride Height (NRH) in the AUTO height to match the appropriate conditions. (TrailHawk raises the vehicle approximately
mode. If the vehicle is in OR1 or OR2 the height will 3.0 inches (75 mm)) – This position is intended
not lower automatically. for off-roading use only where maximum ground
 SPORT – This mode is only available in 4WD HI, clearance is required. To enter OR2, push the
and alters the transmission's automatic shift UP button twice from the NRH position or once
schedule for sportier driving. Upshift speeds are from the OR1 position while vehicle speed is
increased to make full use of available engine below 20 mph (32 km/h). While in OR2, if the
power. If equipped with air suspension, the vehicle speed exceeds 25 mph (40 km/h) the
settings are optimized to provide better vehicle height will be automatically lowered to 4
handling performance. OR1 Ú page 189.
 Off-Road 1 (OR1) (Raises the vehicle approxi-
I NSTRUMENT CLUSTER D ISPLAY mately 1.6 inches (40 mm)) – This is the
MESSAGES Quadra-Lift Switch primary position for all off-road driving until OR2
1 — Off-Road 2 Indicator Lamp is needed. Push the UP button once from the
When the appropriate conditions exist, a message
(Customer Selectable) NRH position while the vehicle speed is below
will appear in the instrument cluster Ú page 92.
38 mph (61 km/h). When in the OR1 position, if
2 — Off-Road 1 Indicator Lamp the vehicle speed remains between 40 mph
QUADRA-LIFT — IF EQUIPPED (Customer Selectable) (64 km/h) and 50 mph (80 km/h) for greater
3 — Normal Ride Height Indicator Lamp than 20 seconds or if the vehicle speed exceeds
DESCRIPTION (Customer Selectable) 50 mph (80 km/h), the vehicle will be automat-
The Quadra-Lift air suspension system provides 4 — Aero Height Indicator Lamp ically lowered to NRH Ú page 189.
full time load leveling capability along with the (Customer Selectable)  Normal Ride Height (NRH) 0.0 inches (0 mm) –
benefit of vehicle height adjustment by a toggle 5 — Entry/Exit Height Indicator Lamp This is the standard position of the suspension
switch. The vehicle will automatically raise and (Customer Selectable) and is meant for normal driving.
lower the ride height to adapt to the appropriate 6 — Toggle Switch
driving conditions. At higher speeds, the vehicle
will lower to an aerodynamic ride height and when
operating in off-road modes, the vehicle will raise
the ride height accordingly.
 Aero Height (Lowers the vehicle approximately change will be canceled. To exit Entry/Exit time while the vehicle is lowering the change will
-0.8 inches (-21 mm) Front and -1.0 inches Mode, push the UP button twice while in Entry/ not be completed until the open door(s) is/are
(-25 mm) Rear) – This position provides Exit Height or drive the vehicle over 15 mph closed.
improved aerodynamics by lowering the vehicle. (24 km/h). The Quadra-Lift air suspension system uses a
The vehicle will automatically enter Aero Height NOTE: lifting and lowering pattern which keeps the
when the vehicle speed remains between Automatic lowering of the vehicle into Entry/Exit headlights from incorrectly shining into oncoming
62 mph (100 km/h) and 66 mph (106 km/h) Mode can be enabled through the Uconnect traffic. When raising the vehicle, the rear of the
for greater than 20 seconds or if the vehicle Touchscreen Radio. If this feature is enabled, the vehicle will move up first and then the front. When
speed exceeds 66 mph (106 km/h). The vehicle vehicle will only lower if the gear selector is in lowering the vehicle, the front will move down first
will return to NRH from Aero Height if the vehicle PARK, the terrain switch is in AUTO, the transfer and then the rear.
speed remains between 30 mph (48 km/h) and case is in AUTO and the vehicle level should be
35 mph (56 km/h) for greater than 20 seconds After the engine is turned off, it may be noticed that
either in Normal or Aero Height. The vehicle will not the air suspension system operates briefly; this is
or if the vehicle speed falls below 30 mph automatically lower if the air suspension level is in
(48 km/h). The vehicle will enter Aero Height, normal. The system is correcting the position of the
OR2 or OR1. If the vehicle is equipped with vehicle to ensure a proper appearance.
regardless of vehicle speed if the vehicle is in Intrusion Theft Module (ITM), the lowering will be
SPORT mode. To assist with changing a spare tire, the
suppressed when the ignition is switched OFF and
 Entry/Exit Height (Lowers the vehicle approxi-
Quadra-Lift air suspension system has a feature
the door is open to prevent setting the alarm off.
mately -1.8 inches (-46 mm) Front and which allows the automatic leveling to be disabled
When towing, the automatic Entry/Exit mode may
-2.0 inches (-50 mm) Rear) – This position be disabled through Uconnect to prevent vehicle Ú page 193.
lowers the vehicle for easier passenger entry and trailer movement when the gear selector is NOTE:
and exit as well as lowering the rear of the moved to PARK. If equipped with a touchscreen radio, all enabling/
vehicle for easier loading and unloading of The Selec-Terrain switch will automatically change disabling of air suspension features must be done
cargo. To enter Entry/Exit Mode, push the the vehicle to the proper height based on the through the radio Ú page 193.
DOWN button twice from NRH while the vehicle position of the Selec-Terrain switch. The height can
speed is below 25 mph (40 km/h). Once the be changed from the default Selec-Terrain setting WARNING!
vehicle speed goes below 15 mph (24 km/h) by normal use of the air suspension buttons The air suspension system uses a high pressure
the vehicle height will begin to lower. If the Ú page 130. volume of air to operate the system. To avoid
vehicle speed remains between 15 mph
The system requires that the engine be running for personal injury or damage to the system, see an
(24 km/h) and 25 mph (40 km/h) for greater
all changes. When lowering the vehicle all of the authorized dealer for service.
than 20 seconds, or the vehicle speed exceeds
25 mph (40 km/h), the Entry/Exit Height doors must be closed. If a door is opened at any
AIR SUSPENSION MODES NOTE: OPERATION

This mode is intended to be enabled with ignition
The Air Suspension system has multiple modes to on. The indicator lamps 1 through 5 will illuminate to
protect the system in unique situations: show the current position of the vehicle. Flashing
Suspension Display Messages Mode
Tire/Jack Mode indicator lamps will show a position which the
The “Suspension Display Messages” setting allows system is working to achieve. When raising, if
To assist with changing a spare tire, the air you to only display suspension warnings multiple indicator lamps are flashing while raising,
suspension system has a feature which allows the Ú page 193. the highest flashing indicator lamp is the position
automatic leveling to be disabled Ú page 193. the system is working to achieve. When lowering, if
NOTE:
NOTE: This mode is intended to be enabled with the multiple indicators are flashing while lowering, the
This mode is intended to be enabled with the ignition on. lowest solid indicator lamp is the position the
ignition on. system is working to achieve. 4
Wheel Alignment Mode
Auto Entry/Exit Mode Toggle up once will move the suspension one
Before performing a wheel alignment this mode
To assist in entering and exiting the vehicle, the air position higher from the current position,
must be enabled Ú page 193.
suspension system has a feature which assuming all conditions are met (i.e. ignition on,
automatically lowers the vehicle to entry/exit ride
NOTE: speed below threshold, etc). Toggle up can be
This mode is intended to be enabled with the pushed multiple times. Each toggle up will raise
height Ú page 193. When towing, the automatic
ignition on. the requested level by one position up to a
Entry/Exit mode may be disabled through
Uconnect to prevent vehicle and trailer movement If equipped with a touchscreen radio, all enabling/ maximum position of OR2 or the highest position
when the gear selector is moved to PARK. disabling of air suspension features must be done allowed based on current conditions (i.e. vehicle
through the radio Ú page 193. speed, etc).
NOTE:
Toggle down once will move the suspension one
This mode is intended to be enabled with the I NSTRUMENT C LUSTER D ISPLAY position lower from the current level, assuming all
ignition on.
MESSAGES conditions are met (i.e. ignition on, doors closed,
Transport Mode speed below threshold, etc). Toggle down can be
When the appropriate conditions exist, a message
To assist with flat bed towing, the air suspension pushed multiple times. Each toggle down will lower
will appear in the instrument cluster Ú page 92.
system has a feature which will put the vehicle into the requested level by one position down to a
Entry/Exit height and disable the automatic load minimum of Entry/Exit Mode or the lowest position
leveling system Ú page 193. allowed based on current conditions (i.e. vehicle
speed, etc.)
Automatic height changes will occur based on

vehicle speed and the current vehicle height. The
FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L ONLY — Alternate electric power steering efforts can be
selected through the Uconnect System
indicator lamps and instrument cluster display IF EQUIPPED Ú page 193.
messages will operate the same for automatic If the Electric Power Steering warning
changes and user requested changes. This feature offers improved fuel economy by
shutting off four of the engine's eight cylinders icon is displayed and the “SERVICE
 Off-Road 2 (OR2) – Indicator lamps 1 through 5 during light load and cruise conditions. The system POWER STEERING” or the “POWER
will be illuminated. is automatic with no driver inputs or additional STEERING ASSIST OFF – SERVICE
 Off-Road 1 (OR1) – Indicator lamps 2 through 5 driving skills required. SYSTEM” message is displayed within the
will be illuminated. instrument cluster display, this indicates the
NOTE: vehicle needs to be taken to an authorized dealer
 Normal Ride Height (NRH) – Indicator lamps 3 This system may take some time to return to full
for service Ú page 104.
through 5 will be illuminated. functionality after a battery disconnect.
NOTE:
 Aero Height – Indicator lamps 4 and 5 will be
illuminated. POWER STEERING  Even if the power steering assistance is no
longer operational, it is still possible to steer the
 Entry/Exit Height – Indicator lamp 5 will be illu- The electric power steering system provides vehicle. Under these conditions there will be a
minated. increased vehicle response and ease of substantial increase in steering effort, espe-
 Transport Mode – Indicator lamp 5 will be illumi- maneuverability. The power steering system cially at low speeds and during parking maneu-
nated. Driving or deselecting setting in the radio adapts to different driving conditions. If the electric vers.
will disable Transport Mode. power steering system experiences a fault that
prevents it from providing assist, you will still have  If the condition persists, see an authorized
 Tire/Jack Mode – Indicator lamps 3 through 5 the ability to steer the vehicle manually. dealer for service.
will be illuminated. Driving or deselecting setting If the Steering icon is displayed and the “POWER
in the radio will disable Tire/Jack Mode. WARNING! STEERING SYSTEM OVER TEMP” message is
 Wheel Alignment Mode – Indicator lamps 3 displayed on the instrument cluster screen, they
Continued operation with reduced assist could
through 5 will be illuminated. Driving or dese- indicate that extreme steering maneuvers may
pose a safety risk to yourself and others. Service
lecting setting in the radio will disable Wheel have occurred which caused an over temperature
should be obtained as soon as possible.
Alignment Mode. condition in the electric power steering system.
Once driving conditions are safe, pull over and let
the vehicle idle for a few moments until the icon
and message turn off.
STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED The engine will shut down, the tachometer will
move to the zero position and the Stop/Start
 Engine has not reached normal operating
temperature.
The Stop/Start function is developed to reduce telltale will illuminate indicating you are in  The transmission is not in a forward gear.
fuel consumption. The system will stop the engine Autostop. Customer settings will be maintained
automatically during a vehicle stop if the required upon return to an engine running condition.  Hood is open.
conditions are met. Releasing the brake pedal or  Part-Time 4WD, 4WD Lock, 4WD LOW, or
pressing the accelerator pedal will automatically POSSIBLE R EASONS T HE E NGINE D OES an off-road Selec-Terrain mode is selected
restart the engine. N OT AUTOSTOP (if equipped).
This vehicle has been upgraded with a heavy-duty Prior to engine shut down, the system will check  Brake pedal is not pressed with sufficient pres-
starter, enhanced battery, and other upgraded many safety and comfort conditions to see if they sure.
engine parts, to handle the additional engine are fulfilled. Detailed information about the  Accelerator pedal input. 4
starts. operation of the Stop/Start system may be viewed  Engine temperature is too high.
AUTOSTOP MODE in the instrument cluster display Stop/Start
 5 mph (8 km/h) threshold has not been
Screen. In the following situations, the engine will
The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every not stop: achieved from previous Autostop.
normal customer engine start. At that time, the  Steering angle is beyond threshold.
 Driver’s seat belt is not buckled.
system will go into STOP/START READY and if all
 Driver’s door is not closed.
It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven
other conditions are met, can go into a STOP/
several times without the Stop/Start system going
START AUTOSTOP ACTIVE Autostop mode.  Battery temperature is too warm or cold. into a STOP/START READY state under more
To Activate The Autostop Mode, The Following  Battery charge is low. extreme conditions of the items listed above.
Must Occur:
 The vehicle is on a steep grade.
 The system must be in STOP/START READY
 Cabin heating or cooling is in process and an
state. A STOP/START READY message will be acceptable cabin temperature has not been
displayed in the instrument cluster display achieved.
within the Stop/Start section Ú page 92.
 HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a high blower
 The vehicle must be completely stopped. speed.
 The gear selector must be in a forward gear and
 HVAC is set to MAX A/C.
the brake pedal pressed.
TO START T HE E NGINE WHILE IN TO MANUALLY TURN OFF T HE S TOP/ TO MANUALLY TURN ON THE S TOP/
AUTOSTOP MODE S TART S YSTEM S TART S YSTEM
While in a forward gear, the engine will start when Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the
the brake pedal is released or the throttle pedal is switch bank). The light on the switch will turn off.
pressed. The transmission will automatically
re-engage upon engine restart. SYSTEM M ALFUNCTION
Conditions That Will Cause The Engine To Start If there is a malfunction in the Stop/Start system,
Automatically While In Autostop Mode: the system will not shut down the engine. A
“SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM” message and a
 The transmission selector is moved out of
yellow Stop/Start telltale will appear in the
DRIVE.
instrument cluster display Ú page 92.
 To maintain cabin temperature comfort.
If the “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM” message
 HVAC is set to full defrost mode. appears in the instrument cluster display, have the
Stop/Start OFF Switch
 HVAC system temperature or fan speed is system checked by an authorized dealer.
manually adjusted. Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the
 Battery voltage drops too low.
switch bank). The light on the switch will illuminate.
The “STOP/START OFF” message will appear in the
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS
 Stop/Start OFF switch is pushed. instrument cluster display and the Autostop mode Your vehicle is equipped with the Adaptive Cruise
 A Stop/Start system error occurs. will be disabled Ú page 92. Control (ACC) system which will adjust the vehicle
speed up to the preset speed to maintain a
 Part-Time 4WD, 4WD Lock, 4WD LOW, or an NOTE:
distance with the vehicle ahead.
off-road Selec-Terrain mode is selected (if The Stop/Start system will reset itself back to the
equipped). ON mode every time the ignition is turned OFF and NOTE:
back ON. In vehicles NOT equipped with the Active Driving
 Steering angle is beyond threshold.
Assist (ADA) system:
 Fixed Speed Cruise Control can be used when
ACC is not enabled, and functions as normal
cruise control.
 Fixed Speed Cruise Control (ACC not enabled)  Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifica-
will not detect vehicles directly ahead of you. tions to the vehicle will affect the performance WARNING!
Always be aware of the feature selected. of the Adaptive Cruise Control and Forward Colli-  The ACC system:
 Only one Cruise Control feature can operate at a sion Warning system.
 Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming
time. For example, if Fixed Speed Cruise Control  In vehicles NOT equipped with the Active Driving vehicles, and stationary objects (e.g., a
is enabled, Adaptive Cruise Control will be Assist system, Fixed Speed Cruise Control (ACC stationary vehicle in a traffic jam or a
unavailable, and vice versa. not enabled) will not detect vehicles directly disabled vehicle).
ahead of you. Always be aware of the feature
ADAPTIVE CRUISE C ONTROL (ACC) selected Ú page 372.  Cannot take street, traffic, and weather
conditions into account, and may be
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving
convenience provided by Cruise Control while WARNING! limited upon adverse sight distance condi- 4
tions.
traveling on highways and major roadways.  Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a conve-
However, it is not a safety system and not designed nience system. It is not a substitute for active  Does not always fully recognize complex
to prevent collisions. driver involvement. It is always the driver’s driving conditions, which can result in
ACC will allow you to keep Cruise Control engaged responsibility to be attentive of road, traffic, wrong or missing distance warnings.
in light to moderate traffic conditions without the and weather conditions, vehicle speed,  Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop
constant need to reset your Cruise Control. ACC distance to the vehicle ahead and, most and hold the vehicle in the stop position
utilizes a radar sensor and a forward facing importantly, brake operation to ensure safe for approximately 10 minutes when
camera designed to detect a vehicle directly ahead operation of the vehicle under all road condi- following a vehicle ahead. If the vehicle
of you. tions. Your complete attention is always ahead does not start moving within
NOTE: required while driving to maintain safe control 10 minutes, the parking brake will be acti-
of your vehicle. Failure to follow these warn- vated, and the ACC system will be
 If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC ings can result in a collision and death or
will apply limited braking or acceleration (not to cancelled.
serious personal injury.
exceed the original set speed) automatically to (Continued)
maintain a preset following distance, while (Continued)
matching the speed of the vehicle ahead.
Pushing the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) buttons

WARNING! will display one of the following messages in the
 You should switch off the ACC system: instrument cluster display:
 When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
snow, sleet, heavy traffic, and complex When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed
driving situations (i.e., in highway setting has not been selected, the display will read
construction zones). “Adaptive Cruise Control Ready.”
 When entering a turn lane or highway off Adaptive Cruise Control Set
ramp; when driving on roads that are When the SET (+) or the SET (-) button is pushed,
winding, icy, snow-covered, slippery, or Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons the display will read “ACC: XX mph (km/h)”.
have steep uphill or downhill slopes.
1 — Distance Increase Button When ACC is set, the set speed will show in the
 When towing a trailer up or down steep instrument cluster display.
2 — Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off
slopes. The ACC screen may display once again if any of
3 — CANC/Cancel
 When circumstances do not allow safe the following ACC activity occurs:
4 — Distance Decrease Button
driving at a constant speed.  System Cancel
5 — SET (+)/Accel
6 — Fixed Speed Cruise Control On/Off (If  Driver Override
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation Equipped)  System Off
The buttons on the right side of the steering wheel 7 — RES/Resume  ACC Proximity Warning
operate the ACC system. 8 — SET (-)/Decel  ACC Unavailable Warning
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
Driving Assist Menu When ACC is deactivated, the display will read
The instrument cluster display will show the “Adaptive Cruise Control Off”.
current system settings for Adaptive Cruise Control
The instrument cluster display will return to the last
(ACC), Active Lane Management (ALM), and the
display selected after five seconds of no ACC
Active Driving Assist (ADA) systems. The
display activity.
information it displays depends on ACC, ALM, and
ADA system statuses.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) To Activate/Deactivate Then, turn on Fixed Speed Cruise Control by
pushing the Fixed Speed Cruise Control on/off
The minimum set speed for the ACC system is Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control
button.
20 mph (32 km/h). (ACC) on/off button. The ACC menu in the
When the system is turned on and in the ready instrument cluster displays “ACC Ready.” WARNING!
state, the instrument cluster display will read “ACC To turn the system off, push and release the
Ready.” Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button again. In Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode, the system
At this time, the system will turn off and the will not react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the
When the system is off, the instrument cluster proximity warning does not activate and no
display will read “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) instrument cluster displays “Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) Off.” alarm will sound even if you are too close to the
Off.” vehicle ahead since neither the presence of the
NOTE: WARNING! vehicle ahead nor the vehicle-to-vehicle distance 4
You cannot engage ACC under the following condi- is detected. Be sure to maintain a safe distance
tions: Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead.
system on when not in use is dangerous. You Always be aware which mode is selected.
 When in 4WD Low
could accidentally set the system or cause it to
 When the brakes are applied go faster than you want. You could lose control
If ACC is set when the vehicle speed is below
 When the parking brake is applied and have a collision. Always leave the system off
20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed will default to
when you are not using it.
 When the transmission is in PARK, REVERSE or 20 mph (32 km/h).
NEUTRAL
NOTE:
 When the brakes are overheated To Set A Desired Speed Fixed Speed Cruise Control cannot be set below
 When the driver’s door is open at low speeds When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push 20 mph (32 km/h).
the SET (+) button or the SET (-) button and If either system is set when the vehicle speed is
 When the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled at low
release. The instrument cluster display will show above 20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall be
speeds
the set speed. the current speed of the vehicle.
 When there is a stationary vehicle in front of
NOTE:
your vehicle in close proximity
Fixed Speed Cruise Control (if equipped) is used
 When Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Full Off without ACC enabled. To change between Adaptive
mode is active Cruise Control (ACC) and Fixed Speed Cruise
Control features, first turn off ACC by pushing the
ACC on/off button.
NOTE: The following conditions will only cancel the ACC NOTE:
 Keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal can system:  While in ACC mode, when the vehicle comes to
cause the vehicle to continue to accelerate  Driver seat belt is unbuckled at low speeds a complete stop longer than two seconds, the
beyond the set speed. If this occurs, the  Driver door is opened at low speeds
driver will either have to push the RES (resume)
message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will display in the button or press the accelerator pedal to reen-
instrument cluster display. To Turn Off gage the ACC system.
 If you continue to accelerate beyond the set The system will turn off and erase the set speed in  ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary
speed while ACC is enabled, the system will not memory if: vehicle in front of your vehicle in close proximity.
be controlling the distance between your vehicle  The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button
and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle speed will is pushed WARNING!
only be determined by the position of the accel-
 Fixed Speed Cruise Control on/off button is The Resume function should only be used if
erator pedal.
pushed traffic and road conditions permit. Resuming a
To Cancel  The ignition is placed in the OFF position set speed that is too high or too low for
The following conditions cancel the ACC or Fixed prevailing traffic and road conditions could
 4WD Low is engaged cause the vehicle to accelerate or decelerate too
Speed Cruise Control systems:
To Resume sharply for safe operation. Failure to follow these
 The brake pedal is applied warnings can result in a collision and death or
If there is a set speed in memory, push the RES
 The CANC (cancel) button is pushed serious personal injury.
(resume) button and remove your foot from the
 The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) activates accelerator pedal. The instrument cluster display
 The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE will show the last set speed. To Vary The Speed Setting
position Resume can be used at any speed above 19 mph To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
 The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control (30 km/h) when only Fixed Speed Cruise Control is
After setting a speed, you can increase the set
System (ESC/TCS) activates being used.
speed by pushing the SET (+) button, or decrease
 The vehicle parking brake is applied Resume can be used at any speed above 0 mph speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
(0 km/h) when ACC is active.
 The Trailer Sway Control (TSC) activates
 The driver switches ESC to Full Off mode
 The braking temperature exceeds normal range
(overheated)
U.S. Speed (mph) When ACC Is Active Setting The Following Distance In ACC
 Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once will  When you use the SET (-) button to decelerate, if The specified following distance for ACC can be set
result in a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each the engine’s braking power does not slow the by varying the distance setting between four bars
subsequent tap of the button results in an vehicle sufficiently to reach the set speed, the (longest), three bars (long), two bars (medium) and
adjustment of 1 mph. brake system will automatically slow the one bar (short). Using this distance setting and the
 If the button is continually pushed, the set vehicle. vehicle speed, ACC calculates and sets the
speed will continue to adjust in 5 mph incre-  The ACC system decelerates the vehicle to a full distance to the vehicle ahead. This distance
ments until the button is released. The new set stop when following the vehicle in front. If your setting appears in the instrument cluster display.
speed is reflected in the instrument cluster vehicle follows the vehicle in front to a standstill,
display. after two seconds the driver will either have to
push the RES (resume) button, or apply the 4
Metric Speed (km/h)
accelerator pedal to reengage the ACC to the
 Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once will existing set speed.
result in a 1 km/h speed adjustment. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in an  The ACC system maintains set speed when
adjustment of 1 km/h. driving uphill and downhill. However, a slight
speed change on moderate hills is normal. In
 If the button is continually pushed, the set addition, downshifting may occur while climbing
speed will continue to adjust in 10 km/h incre- uphill or descending downhill. This is normal
ments until the button is released. The new set operation and necessary to maintain set speed.
speed is reflected in the instrument cluster When driving uphill and downhill, the ACC Distance Settings
display. system will cancel if the braking temperature 1 — Longest Distance Setting (Four Bars)
NOTE: exceeds normal range (overheated). 2 — Medium Distance Setting (Two Bars)
When you override and push the SET (+) button or
3 — Long Distance Setting (Three Bars)
SET (-) button, the new set speed will be the current
speed of the vehicle. 4 — Short Distance Setting (One Bar)
To increase the distance setting, push the NOTE: the vehicle ahead starts moving within two
Distance Increase button and release. Each time The brake lights will illuminate whenever the ACC seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill.
the button is pushed, the distance setting system applies the brakes. If the vehicle in front does not start moving within
increases by one bar (longer). A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC two seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill,
To decrease the distance setting, push the predicts that its maximum braking level is not the driver will either have to push the RES (resume)
Distance Decrease button and release. Each time sufficient to maintain the set distance. If this button, or apply the accelerator pedal to reengage
the button is pushed, the distance setting occurs, a visual alert “BRAKE!” will flash in the the ACC to the existing set speed.
decreases by one bar (shorter). instrument cluster display and a chime will sound NOTE:
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking
capacity.  If your vehicle is at a standstill for longer than
maintain the set speed. If a slower moving vehicle two seconds, the system will hold brake pres-
is detected in the same lane, the instrument NOTE: sure for up to 10 minutes. If no driver action is
cluster display will show the ACC Set With Target The “BRAKE!” screen in the instrument cluster taken after the 10 minutes, the Electric Park
Detected Indicator Light, and the system will adjust display is a warning for the driver to take action Brake will be applied and the ACC system will
the vehicle speed automatically to maintain the and does not necessarily mean that the Forward cancel.
distance setting, regardless of the set speed. Collision Warning system is applying the brakes
 While ACC is holding your vehicle at a standstill
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance autonomously.
(or the vehicle is traveling below 3 mph (5 km/
until: Overtake Aid h), and the driver seat belt is unbuckled or the
 The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above When driving with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) driver door is opened, the Electric Park Brake
the set speed. engaged and following a vehicle, the system will will be applied and the ACC system will cancel.
 The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or provide an additional acceleration up to the ACC
view of the sensor. set speed to assist in passing the vehicle. This WARNING!
additional acceleration is triggered when the driver When the ACC system is resumed, the driver
 The distance setting is changed. utilizes the left turn signal and will only be active must ensure that there are no pedestrians,
 The system disengages Ú page 139. when passing on the left hand side. vehicles or objects in the path of the vehicle.
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; ACC Operation At Stop Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
however, the driver can always apply the brakes collision and death or serious personal injury.
If the ACC system brings your vehicle to a standstill
manually, if necessary.
while following a vehicle ahead, your vehicle will
resume motion, without any driver interaction, if
Display Warnings And Maintenance To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is  Installing a snow plow, front-end protector, an
important to note the following maintenance aftermarket grille or modifying the grille is not
“WIPE FRONT RADAR SENSOR IN FRONT OF items: recommended. Doing so may block the sensor
VEHICLE” WARNING  Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the and inhibit ACC operation.
The “ACC Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor” sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to
“CLEAN FRONT WINDSHIELD” WARNING
warning will display and a chime will sound when damage the sensor lens.
conditions temporarily limit system performance. The “ACC Limited Functionality Clean Front
 Do not remove any screws from the sensor.
Windshield” warning will display, and a chime will
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, Doing so could cause an ACC system malfunc-
sound when conditions temporarily limit system
such as in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may tion or failure and require a sensor realignment.
performance. This most often occurs at times of
also become temporarily blinded due to  If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is
obstructions, such as mud, dirt or ice. In these
poor visibility, such as in snow or heavy rain and 4
damaged due to a collision, see your authorized fog. The ACC system may also become temporarily
cases, the instrument cluster display will display dealer for service. blinded due to obstructions, such as mud, dirt, or
the above message and the system will deactivate. ice on windshield and fog on the inside of glass. In
 Do not attach or install any accessories near the
This message can sometimes be displayed while sensor, including transparent material or after- these cases, the instrument cluster display will
driving in highly reflective areas (i.e. ice and snow, market grilles. Doing so could cause an ACC read “ACC Limited Functionality Clean Front
or tunnels with reflective tiles). The ACC system will system failure or malfunction. Windshield” and the system will have degraded
recover after the vehicle has left these areas. performance.
When the condition that deactivated the system is
Under rare conditions, when the radar is not This message can sometimes be displayed while
no longer present, the system will return to the
tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this driving in adverse weather conditions. The ACC
“Adaptive Cruise Control Off” state and will resume
warning may temporarily occur. system will recover after the vehicle has left these
function by simply reactivating it.
NOTE: areas. Under rare conditions, when the camera is
NOTE:
If the “ACC Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor” not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this
warning is active, Fixed Speed Cruise Control is still  If the “ACC Unavailable Wipe Front Radar warning may temporarily occur.
available. Sensor” message occurs frequently (e.g. more
than once on every trip) without any snow, rain, If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should examine the windshield and the camera
mud, or other obstruction, have the radar
should examine the sensor. It may require cleaning located on the back side of the inside rearview
sensor realigned at an authorized dealer.
or removal of an obstruction. The sensor is located mirror. They may require cleaning or removal of an
in the center of the vehicle behind the lower grille. obstruction.
When the condition that created limited TOWING A TRAILER TURNS AND BENDS
functionality is no longer present, the system will
Towing a trailer is not recommended when using When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the
return to full functionality.
ACC. system may decrease the vehicle speed and
NOTE: acceleration for stability reasons, with no vehicle in
If the “ACC Limited Functionality Clean Front Wind- OFFSET DRIVING front detected. Once the vehicle is out of the curve
shield” message occurs frequently (e.g. more than ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that the system will resume your original set speed.
once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or is offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle This is a part of normal ACC system functionality.
other obstruction, have the windshield and forward merging in from a side lane. There may not be NOTE:
facing camera inspected at an authorized dealer. sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead. The offset On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.
vehicle may move in and out of the line of travel,
SERVICE ACC WARNING which can cause your vehicle to brake or USING ACC ON HILLS
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster accelerate unexpectedly. When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle
display reads “ACC Unavailable Service Required” in your lane. Depending on the speed, vehicle load,
or “Cruise Unavailable Service Required”, there traffic conditions, and the steepness of the hills,
may be an internal system fault or a temporary ACC performance may be limited.
malfunction that limits ACC functionality. Although
the vehicle is still drivable under normal
conditions, ACC will be temporarily unavailable. If
this occurs, try activating ACC again later, following
an ignition cycle. If the problem persists, see an
authorized dealer.
Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have
Offset Driving Condition Example
detection issues. In these cases, ACC may brake
late or unexpectedly. The driver needs to stay alert
and may need to intervene. The following are
examples of these types of situations: ACC Hill Example
LANE CHANGING NARROW VEHICLES

ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer
in the lane in which you are traveling. In the lane edges of the lane or edging into the lane are not
changing example below, ACC has not yet detected detected until they have moved fully into the lane.
the vehicle changing lanes and it may not detect There may not be sufficient distance to the vehicle
the vehicle until it is too late for the ACC system to ahead.
take action. ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is
completely in the lane. There may not be sufficient
distance to the lane-changing vehicle. Always be
attentive and ready to apply the brakes if
necessary. Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example 4
TRAFFIC SIGN ASSIST SYSTEM —

IF EQUIPPED
The Traffic Sign Assist (TSA) system uses a camera
mounted on the windshield, as well as map data
Narrow Vehicle Example when the vehicle is equipped with Navigation, to
detect recognizable road signs such as:
STATIONARY OBJECTS AND VEHICLES
 Speed limits
ACC does not react to stationary objects or
 School zones
vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in
Lane Changing Example situations where the vehicle you are following exits  No passing zones
your lane and the vehicle ahead is stopped in your
lane. It will consider this stopped vehicle a
stationary object as it did not previously detect
movement from it. Always be attentive and ready
to apply the brakes if necessary.
NOTE: Visual When a newly detected speed limit is higher than

 The TSA system will automatically display the When Visual is selected, the system will alert the the current speed limit, the display will update
detected road sign, using the unit of measure- driver when the current speed of the vehicle along with an “up” arrow.
ment (mph or km/h) selected within Uconnect exceeds the detected speed limit by showing a When a newly detected speed limit is lower than
Settings or within the instrument cluster display. graphic in the instrument cluster display. the current speed limit, the display will update
 If no speed limit signs are detected, the system Visual + Chime along with a “down” arrow.
will revert to the speed limit signs that are When Visual + Chime is selected, the system will NOTE:
stored in the Navigation system. alert the driver when the current speed of the Up or down arrows will be displayed for up to five
 The system always checks the traffic signs indi- vehicle exceeds the detected speed limit by seconds.
cating the current speed limit. The system is showing a graphic in the instrument cluster
able to recognize and display up to two different display, and by sounding an audible alert. The
road signs in the instrument cluster display. audible alert will last for 10 seconds, and the
These road signs can be found on the Driver visual alert will remain on as long as the vehicle is
Assist page. exceeding the speed limit.
ACTIVATION/DEACTIVATION TSA Off
When the TSA system is turned off, the system will
The TSA System can be enabled/disabled within
not show any traffic signs (unless selected in the
the Uconnect system through the Safety/Driver
HOME screen, which will show detected speed
Assistance menu. System ON is signaled by road
limit signs), and no alerts will be issued to the
signs shown on the instrument cluster display.
driver. Traffic Signs Recognized
NOTE:
Even if the system is OFF, the speed limit sign will I NDICATIONS ON THE D ISPLAY 1 — Current Speed Limit With Supplemental
be displayed when the driver selects it in the HOME Detected traffic signs are shown in the instrument Information (School Zone)
screen. cluster display, and can display any combination of 2 — Next Speed Limit Detected
TRAFFIC SIGN ASSIST MODES signs at one time (e.g. speed limit, speed limit and 3 — No Passing Zone Detected
supplemental info, and “Do Not Pass” signs)
TSA has three selectable modes of operation that depending on what information is available.
are available through the Uconnect system
Ú page 193.
Supplemental Information ADA uses sensors within the steering wheel to

CAUTION! monitor driver attentiveness. ADA requires the
Supplemental information may be displayed along
with a newly detected speed limit indicating  The area surrounding the sensor must not be driver’s hands on the steering wheel at all times.
special circumstances the driver should be aware covered with stickers or any other object.
of. Available supplemental information includes: WARNING!
 Do not tamper or perform any operations in
 School the area of the windshield glass directly The Active Driving Assist (ADA) system is a
surrounding the sensor. convenience system. It is not a substitute for
 Construction
active driver involvement. It is always the driver’s
 Rain  Clean foreign matters such as bird droppings, responsibility to be attentive of road traffic,
insects, snow or ice on the windshield. Use weather conditions, vehicle speed, distance to
 Snow
 Fog
specific detergents and clean cloths to avoid the vehicle ahead, position in the lane compared 4
scratching the windshield. to other vehicles, and brake operation to ensure
NOTE: safe operation of the vehicle under all road
Supplemental information will not be displayed
when the vehicle is ONLY equipped with GPS. ACTIVE DRIVING ASSIST SYSTEM — conditions. Your complete attention is always
required while driving to maintain safe control of
Speed Limit Exceeded IF EQUIPPED your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can
When the vehicle’s speed exceeds the displayed result in a collision and death or serious
speed limit by 3 mph (5 km/h), the speed limit sign OPERATION personal injury.
on the instrument cluster display will show a red The Active Driving Assist (ADA) system is combined You should turn off the Active Driving Assist
outline to alert the driver. with the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system, and system:
centers the vehicle in the driving lane while  When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow,
CAUTION! traveling at speeds up to 90 mph (145 km/h). sleet, and complex driving situations (i.e., in
 Functionality may be limited or the system Just like ACC, ADA will maintain a set speed as long construction zones).
may not work if the sensor is obstructed. as the set distance between your vehicle and the
 When entering a highway off ramp, when
 The system may have limited operation or not
vehicle in front is maintained. ADA will also keep
driving on roads that are icy, snow covered, or
work at all in weather conditions such as your vehicle centered between the lane lines, and
slippery.
heavy rain, hail, and thick fog. Strong light monitor for other vehicles in adjacent lanes by
contrasts can influence the recognition capa- utilizing the Blind Spot Monitoring sensors.  When circumstances do not allow safe driving.
bility of the sensor.
(Continued)
TURNING ACTIVE DRIVING ASSIST O N 2. If ACC was active and engaged before pushing NOTE:
the ADA on/off button, ACC will remain Along with the color change of the steering wheel
OR OFF engaged and ADA will become enabled and image, the “glow” effect of the instrument cluster
then engaged (once all other conditions are display will also change to green when ADA is
met). engaged.
3. If ACC was not active before pushing the ADA System Engagement Conditions
on/off button, push the SET (+) button or the The following conditions must be met before the
SET (-) button and release when the desired system will engage:
driving speed is shown in the instrument
 Active Driving Assist system is enabled
cluster display.
 ACC is engaged
4. If desired, adjust the ACC distance setting by
pushing the Distance Increase or Distance  Driver seat belt is buckled
Decrease buttons.  System detects visible lane markings
Active Driving Assist On/Off Button  Vehicle is traveling below 90 mph (145 km/h)
When all system conditions are met as described
To enable the Active Driving Assist system, in “System Engagement Conditions” in the next  Vehicle is centered in lane
proceed as follows: section, the system will engage and the steering  Turn signal is not activated
1. Push the Active Driving Assist on/off button wheel image in the display will change to green.
 Vehicle is not in a tight curve
located on the right side of the steering
wheel. The steering wheel image will display  Trailer is not connected
white in the instrument cluster display until  Driver has hands on steering wheel
the system is engaged. If ACC was previously
disabled, pushing this button will activate
BOTH ACC and Active Driving Assist systems.
Active Driving Assist Engaged (Steering Wheel Green)

NOTE:  If the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled  When the system is deactivated, the system
For the system to detect the driver’s hands on the  If the Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system status indicator lights will turn off, Active Lane
steering wheel, the wheel must be gripped on the becomes active and is providing warnings/ Management will return to its previous state,
outside. Gripping the inside areas of the steering braking and ACC will disable.
wheel will not satisfy the hands-on condition to
engage the system.  If the ACC system is deactivated I NDICATIONS ON THE D ISPLAY
 If the vehicle speed exceeds 90 mph The Active Driving Assist system status can always
(145 km/h) be viewed in the instrument cluster display, and
 If a turn signal is used (unless a target is in the status changes are shown by changes in color of
blind spot zone on the same side the turn signal the system’s indicator lights.
is being applied) As the system detects driver inattentiveness as 4
 If lane markings are no longer detected previously described Ú page 147, the system
 If the system has detected driver inattentive- status indicator lights will change from green, to
ness, and has gone through all escalation warn- yellow, to red, while the steering wheel icon on the
ings after hands are no longer detected on the display moves up the screen to the center. The
steering wheel following indicators will change in color as
warnings to the driver escalate:
Do Not Grip Inside Of Steering Wheel NOTE:
 Active Driving Assist Indicator (steering wheel
System Deactivation  ADA will not enable if the system detects a
icon in the instrument cluster display)
trailer is connected to the vehicle.
The system will be deactivated in any of the  Glow effect of the instrument cluster display
following situations:  Pushing the Active Driving Assist on/off button
will turn the system off. All other deactivation
 If the Active Driving Assist on/off button is
conditions will place the system back into the
pushed again (ADA will turn off) “enabled” state with the steering wheel indi-
 If the driver applies torque to the steering wheel cator displayed in white until all engagement
conditions are met again.
If driver attention is not returned, the system will SYSTEM O PERATION/LIMITATIONS

deactivate.
Active Driving Assist Indicators Are Off WARNING!
 ADA is not turned on/enabled by the driver. To prevent serious injury or death:
Active Driving Assist Indicators Are White
 Always remain alert and be ready to take
 ADA is turned on/enabled by the driver, but the control of the vehicle in the event that the
system is not actively providing steering to the Active Driving Assist system disables.
vehicle.
 Always keep your hands on the steering wheel
Active Driving Assist Indicators Are Green when the Active Driving Assist system is acti-
Active Driving Assist Cancelled Message
 System is actively steering the vehicle and the vated.
system detects driver is attentive. SYSTEM S TATUS  Maintain a safe distance from other vehicles
Active Driving Assist Indicators Are Yellow and pay attention to traffic conditions.
Along with changes in the system’s indicator lights
 Driver inattentiveness has been detected, (green, yellow, and red), the system can also issue  Do not place any objects on the steering wheel
warning the driver to place hands on the a steering wheel vibration to accompany these (e.g. steering wheel covers) which could inter-
steering wheel. warnings. The vibration warning (if enabled) will fere with the hand detection sensors.
Active Driving Assist Indicators Are Red occur if the vehicle crosses a lane marker, for
example, when driving on a tight curve. This
 Driver inattentiveness is still being detected, The Active Driving Assist system DOES NOT:
feature can be turned on or off within the Uconnect
warning the driver to place hands on the  Warn or prevent collisions with other vehicles
steering wheel. system Ú page 193.
 Steer your vehicle around stopped vehicles,
NOTE: slower vehicles, construction equipment,
The driver MUST replace hands on the steering pedestrians, or animals
wheel and take control of the vehicle when the
system is deactivated.  Respond to traffic lights or stop signs
 Merge onto highways or exit off ramps
 Turn your vehicle
 Change lanes
 React to cross traffic
The Active Driving Assist system may have limited NOTE:  The automatic braking function may not be
or reduced functionality when one of the following  The driver can disable the automatic braking applied fast enough for obstacles that move
conditions occur: function by turning ParkSense off via the Park- toward the rear of the vehicle from the left
 The vehicle’s radar sensors and/or forward Sense switch. The driver can also override auto- and/or right sides.
facing camera is damaged, covered, or matic braking by changing the gear or by  The automatic braking function can be
obstructed (e.g. by mud, ice, snow, etc.) pressing the gas pedal over 90% of its capacity enabled/disabled from the Customer Program-
 Driving near highway toll booths
during the braking event. mable Features section of the Uconnect system.
 Automatic brakes are not available if the vehicle  ParkSense will retain its last known configura-
NOTE:
is in 4WD Low. tion state for the automatic braking function
If damage to the windshield occurs, have the wind-
shield replaced by an authorized dealer as soon as  Automatic brakes will not be available if there is through ignition cycles.
a faulted condition detected with the ParkSense
4
possible. The automatic braking function is intended to
Park Assist system or the Braking System assist the driver in avoiding possible collisions with
PARKSENSE FRONT/REAR PARK ASSIST Module. detected obstacles when backing up in REVERSE
 The automatic braking function may only be gear.
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED applied if the vehicle deceleration is not enough NOTE:
The ParkSense Park Assist system provides visual to avoid colliding with a detected obstacle.  The system is designed to assist the driver and
and audible indications of the distance between not to substitute the driver.
the rear, and if equipped, the front fascia/bumper
 The driver must stay in full control of the
and a detected obstacle when backing up or
vehicle's acceleration and braking and is
moving forward (e.g. during a parking maneuver).
responsible for the vehicle's movements.
The vehicle brakes may be automatically applied
and released when performing a reverse parking
maneuver if the system detects a possible collision
with an obstacle.
For limitations of this system and PARKSENSE SENSORS PARKSENSE DISPLAY

recommendations, see Ú page 158.
The four ParkSense sensors located in the rear The warning display will turn on indicating the
ParkSense will retain the last system state fascia/bumper, and the six ParkSense sensors system status when the vehicle is in REVERSE or
(enabled or disabled) from the last ignition cycle located in the front fascia/bumper, monitor the when the vehicle is in DRIVE and an obstacle has
when the ignition is changed to the ON/RUN area in front and behind the vehicle that is within been detected.
position. the sensors’ field of view. The front sensors detect The system will indicate a detected obstacle by
ParkSense can be active only when the gear obstacles from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) showing a single arc in the left and/or right front or
selector is in REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense is up to 47 inches (120 cm) from the front fascia/ rear regions based on the object’s distance and
enabled at one of these gear selector positions, bumper. The rear sensors can detect obstacles location relative to the vehicle.
the system will remain active until the vehicle from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to
speed is increased to approximately 7 mph 79 inches (200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper. If an object is detected in the left and/or right rear
(11 km/h) or above. The system will become active These distances depend on the location, type and region, the display will show a single arc in the left
again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds orientation of the obstacle in the horizontal and/or right rear region and the system will
less than approximately 6 mph (9 km/h). A display direction. produce a tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the
warning will appear in the instrument cluster object, the display will show the single arc moving
NOTE: closer to the vehicle and the tone will change from
display if the vehicle is in REVERSE and the speed
If the vehicle is equipped with ParkSense Active a single 1/2 second tone to slow, to fast, to
exceeds 7 mph (11 km/h).
Park Assist, there will be six ParkSense sensors continuous.
located in the rear fascia/bumper.
Front/Rear/Side ParkSense Arcs

1 — No Tone/Solid Arc 7 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
2 — No Tone/Flashing Arc 8 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
3 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 9 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
4 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 10 — Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
5 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 11 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arcs
6 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 12 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arcs
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the instrument cluster display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the
warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
WARNING ALERTS FOR REAR

Greater than Less than
Rear Distance 79-59 inches 59-47 inches 47-39 inches 39-25 inches 25-12 inches
79 inches 12 inches
(inches/cm) (200-150 cm) (150-120 cm) (120-100 cm) (100-65 cm) (65-30 cm)
(200 cm) (30 cm)
Audible Alert Single 1/2
None Slow Slow Fast Fast Continuous
Chime Second Tone
Arcs-Left None None None None None 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Arcs-Center None 10th Solid 9th Solid 8th Solid 7th Flashing 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Arcs-Right None None None None None 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Radio Volume
No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Reduced
WARNING ALERTS FOR FRONT

Front Distance Greater than 47 inches 47-39 inches 39-25 inches 25-12 inches Less than 12 inches
(inches/cm) (120 cm) (120-100 cm) (100-65 cm) (65-30 cm) (30 cm)
Audible Alert Chime None None None Fast Continuous
Arcs-Left None None None 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Arcs-Center None 1st Solid 2nd Flashing 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Arcs-Right None None None 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Radio Volume Reduced No No No Yes Yes
NOTE: When the ParkSense switch is pushed to enable Possible fault messages are "PARKSENSE
ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if the system, the instrument cluster will display the UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS",
on, when the system is sounding an audio tone. system state. "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT
Front Park Assist Audible Alerts When the ParkSense switch is pushed to disable SENSORS", or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
the system, the instrument cluster will display the SERVICE REQUIRED.” The pop-up message will
ParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist display for five seconds.
audible alert (chime) after approximately three “PARKSENSE OFF” message for approximately two
seconds when an obstacle has been detected, and seconds. When the gear selector is moved to When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE and
the vehicle is stationary. REVERSE and the system is disabled, the the system has detected a faulted condition, the
instrument cluster display will display the instrument cluster display will display a
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
Front and rear chime volume settings can be vehicle is in REVERSE. SENSORS", "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE 4
selected from the Uconnect system Ú page 193. FRONT SENSORS" or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
NOTE:
The chime volume settings include low, medium, When ParkSense is disabled and the gear selector SERVICE REQUIRED" pop-up message for five
and high. is moved to the DRIVE position, no warning seconds. After five seconds, a vehicle graphic will
message will be displayed. be displayed with "UNAVAILABLE" at either the
ParkSense will retain its last known configuration front or rear sensor location depending on where
state through ignition cycles. The ParkSense switch LED will be on when the fault is detected. The system will continue to
ParkSense is disabled or requires service. The
PARKSENSE WARNING DISPLAY ParkSense switch LED will be off when the system
provide arc alerts for the side that is functioning
properly. These arc alerts will interrupt the
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within is enabled. If the ParkSense switch is pushed, and "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
the instrument cluster display Ú page 92. It the system requires service, the ParkSense switch SENSORS", "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
provides visual warnings to indicate the distance LED will blink momentarily, and then the LED will FRONT SENSORS", or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
between the rear fascia/bumper and/or front be on. SERVICE REQUIRED" messages if an object is
fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle. SERVICE THE PARKSENSE PARK ASSIST detected within the five second pop-up duration.
The vehicle graphic will remain displayed for as
ENABLING A ND DISABLING P ARKSENSE SYSTEM long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled During vehicle start-up, when the ParkSense
with the ParkSense switch located on the System has detected a faulted condition, the
switch back above the Uconnect display. instrument cluster will actuate a single chime,
once per ignition cycle, and it will display a pop-up.
The pop-up will include up to two faults.
If "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR  When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument  ParkSense should be disabled when the liftgate
SENSORS" or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE cluster will display “PARKSENSE OFF.” Once you is in the open position. An opened liftgate could
FRONT SENSORS" appears in the instrument turn ParkSense off, it remains off until you turn provide a false indication that an obstacle is
cluster display make sure the outer surface and it on again, even if you cycle the ignition. behind the vehicle.
the underside of the rear fascia/bumper and/or  When you move the gear selector to the
front fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow, REVERSE position and ParkSense is turned off, WARNING!
ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then cycle the instrument cluster will display “PARKSENSE  Drivers must be careful when backing up even
the ignition. If the message continues to appear OFF” for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. when using ParkSense. Always check carefully
see an authorized dealer.
 ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be
If the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE the radio when it is sounding a tone. sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
REQUIRED" message appears in the instrument vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before
cluster display, see an authorized dealer.  Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking
backing up. You are responsible for safety and
care not to scratch or damage them. The
must continue to pay attention to your
CLEANING THE PARKSENSE SYSTEM sensors must not be covered with ice, snow,
surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do so can
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash serious injury or death.
result in the system not working properly. The
soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard ParkSense system might not detect an obstacle  Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recom-
cloths. Do not scratch or poke the sensors. behind or in front of the fascia/bumper, or it mended that the ball mount and hitch ball
PARKSENSE SYSTEM U SAGE could provide a false indication that an obstacle assembly be disconnected from the vehicle
is behind or in front of the fascia/bumper. when the vehicle is not used for towing.
PRECAUTIONS Failure to do so can result in injury or damage
 Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense
NOTE: system off if objects such as bicycle carriers, to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball
trailer hitches, etc. are placed within 12 inches will be much closer to the obstacle than the
 Ensure that the front and rear bumper are free
(30 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper. Failure to rear fascia when the vehicle sounds the
of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the
do so can result in the system misinterpreting a continuous tone. Also, the sensors could
ParkSense system operating properly.
close object as a sensor problem, causing the detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly,
 Jackhammers, large trucks, and other depending on its size and shape, giving a false
“PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
vibrations could affect the performance of indication that an obstacle is behind the
REQUIRED” message to be displayed in the
ParkSense. vehicle.
instrument cluster.
When the vehicle is in DRIVE, the Side Distance Activation/Deactivation

CAUTION! Warning volume/chime will match the Front
The system can operate only after driving a short
 ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is ParkSense volume and chime type.
distance and if the vehicle speed is between 0 and
unable to recognize every obstacle, including When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the Side Distance 7 mph (0 and 11 km/h). The system can be
small obstacles. Parking curbs might be Warning volume/chime will match the Rear activated/deactivated via the "Settings" menu of
temporarily detected or not detected at all. ParkSense volume and chime type. the Uconnect system. If the ParkSense System is
Obstacles located above or below the sensors deactivated via the ParkSense Hard switch then
will not be detected when they are in close WARNING ALERTS the Side Distance Warning system will
proximity. automatically be deactivated.
Less than
Distance 12 – 24 inches
 The vehicle must be driven slowly when using 12 inches Message on the display for Side Distance Warning
(inches/cm) (30–60 cm) 4
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time (30 cm) feature:
when an obstacle is detected. It is recom- Arcs-Left Flashing Flashing “Wipe Sensors” — This message is displayed in the
mended that the driver looks over his/her
Arcs-Right Flashing Flashing case of a failure of the Side Distance Warning
shoulder when using ParkSense.
system sensors. Free the bumpers of any
Fast audible obstacles, ensure that the front and rear fascia/
chime as the
SIDE DISTANCE WARNING S YSTEM Audible Alert
Continuous objects get
bumper are free of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris
Chime to keep the ParkSense system operating properly.
The Side Distance Warning system detects the close to the
vehicle “System Not Available” — This message is
presence of side obstacles near the vehicle using
displayed if the Side Distance Warning system is
the parking sensors located in the front and rear Radio Volume
Yes Yes not available. The failed operation of the system
fascia/bumpers. Reduced might be due to the insufficient voltage from the
Side Distance Warning Display battery or other failures on the electrical system.
The Side Distance Warning screen will only be NOTE: Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible
displayed if this feature is enabled within Uconnect Parksense will reduce the volume of the radio if on to have the electrical system checked.
Settings Ú page 193. when the system is sounding an audible tone. An
audible tone will only sound if a collision is
The system warns the driver with an acoustic
possible.
signal and, when enabled, with visual indications
on the instrument panel display.
ParkSense Usage Precautions Before using the ParkSense system, it is recom-

mended to remove the removable tow hook ball CAUTION!
Some conditions may influence the performance
assembly and any attachments from the vehicle  ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is
of the Side Distance Warning system:
when it is not used for towing operations. unable to recognize every obstacle, including
NOTE: small obstacles. Parking curbs might be
 Ensure that the front and rear fascia/bumper WARNING! temporarily detected or not detected at all.
are free of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to Obstacles located above or below the sensors
 Drivers must be careful when backing up even
keep the ParkSense system operating properly. will not be detected when they are in close
when using ParkSense. Always check carefully
 Construction equipment, large trucks, and other behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be proximity.
vibrations could affect the performance of sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other  The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense. vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time
 When you turn ParkSense off, the message to backing up. You are responsible for safety and when an obstacle is detected. It is recom-
appear in the instrument cluster display will must continue to pay attention to your mended that the driver looks over his/her
read “PARKSENSE OFF.” Furthermore, once you surroundings. Failure to do so can result in shoulder when using ParkSense.
turn ParkSense off, it remains off until you turn serious injury or death.
it on again, even if you cycle the ignition key.
 ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of
 Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recom-
mended that the ball mount and hitch ball
PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM
the radio when it is sounding a tone. assembly be disconnected from the vehicle — IF EQUIPPED
 Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking
when the vehicle is not used for towing.
Failure to do so can result in injury or damage The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is
care not to scratch or damage them. The intended to assist the driver during parallel and
sensors must not be covered with ice, snow, to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball
will be much closer to the obstacle than the perpendicular parking maneuvers by identifying a
slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do so can proper parking space, providing audible/visual
result in the system not working properly. The rear fascia when the vehicle sounds the
continuous tone. Also, the sensors could instructions, and controlling the steering wheel.
ParkSense system might not detect an obstacle The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is
behind or in front of the fascia/bumper, or it detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly,
depending on its size and shape, giving a false defined as “semi-automatic” since the driver
could provide a false indication that an obstacle maintains control of the accelerator, gear selector
is behind or in front of the fascia/bumper. indication that an obstacle is behind the
vehicle. and brakes.
 The presence of a tow hook without a trailer may
interfere with the correct operation of the
parking sensors.
Depending on the driver's parking maneuver dynamic vehicle calibration to account for differ-  Steering wheel is touched during active steering
selection, the ParkSense Active Park Assist system ences such as over or under inflated tires and guidance into the parking space
is capable of maneuvering a vehicle into a parallel new tires.  ParkSense Front and Rear Park Assist switch is
or a perpendicular parking space on either side pushed
(i.e., driver side or passenger side). ENABLING A ND D ISABLING T HE
 Driver's door is opened
NOTE: PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST
 Rear liftgate is opened
 The driver is always responsible for controlling SYSTEM
the vehicle, responsible for any surrounding  Electronic Stability Control/Anti-Lock Braking
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system System intervention
objects, and must intervene as required. can be enabled and disabled with the
 The system is designed to assist the driver and ParkSense Active Park Assist switch, The ParkSense Active Park Assist system allows a
not to substitute the driver. maximum number of shifts between DRIVE and 4
located on the switch panel above the
Uconnect display. REVERSE. If the maneuver cannot be completed
 During a semi-automatic maneuver, if the driver within the maximum amount of shifts, the system
touches the steering wheel after being To enable or disable the ParkSense Active Park will cancel and the instrument cluster display will
instructed to remove their hands from the Assist system, push the ParkSense Active Park instruct the driver to complete the maneuver
steering wheel, the system will cancel, and the Assist switch once (LED turns on). Pushing the manually.
driver will be required to manually complete the switch a second time will disable the system (LED
parking maneuver. turns off). The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will only
operate and search for a parking space when the
 The system may not work in all conditions The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will turn following conditions are present:
(e.g. environmental conditions such as heavy off automatically for any of the following
rain, snow, etc., or if searching for a parking conditions:  Gear selector is in DRIVE
space that has surfaces that will absorb the  Parking maneuver is completed  Ignition is in the RUN position
ultrasonic sensor waves).  ParkSense Active Park Assist switch is activated
 Vehicle speed is greater than 18 mph
 New vehicles from the dealership must have at (30 km/h) when searching for a parking space  Driver's door is closed
least 30 miles (48 km) accumulated before the
ParkSense Active Park Assist system is fully cali-  Vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (7 km/h)  Rear liftgate is closed
brated and performs accurately. This is due to during active steering guidance into the parking  Vehicle speed is less than 15 mph (25 km/h)
the system’s dynamic vehicle calibration to space
improve the performance of the feature. The
system will also continuously perform the
NOTE: PARALLEL/PERPENDICULAR PARKING  The driver needs to make sure that the selected
If the vehicle is driven above approximately parking space for the maneuver remains free
15 mph (25 km/h), the instrument cluster display
S PACE ASSISTANCE OPERATION and clear of any obstructions (e.g. pedestrians,
will instruct the driver to slow down. If the vehicle When the ParkSense Active Park Assist system is bicycles, etc.).
is driven above approximately 18 mph (30 km/h), enabled, you can select between Parallel,  The driver is responsible to ensure that the
the system will cancel. The driver must then reac- Perpendicular, and Parallel Park Exit maneuvers in selected parking space is suitable for the
tivate the system by pushing the ParkSense Active the Uconnect system. maneuver and free/clear of anything that may
Park Assist switch. be overhanging or protruding into the parking
 The outer surface and the underside of the front space (e.g., ladders, tailgates, etc. from
and rear fascias/bumpers are clean and clear surrounding objects/vehicles).
of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction.  When searching for a parking space, the driver
When pushed, the LED on the ParkSense Active should drive as parallel or perpendicular
Park Assist switch will blink momentarily, and then (depending on the type of maneuver) to other
the LED will turn off if any of the above conditions vehicles as possible.
are not present.  The feature will only indicate the last detected
If the vehicle is in any other gear than DRIVE, and parking space (example: if passing multiple
an objected is detected, the system will default to available parking spaces, the system will only
Parallel Park Exit. A prompt will appear in the radio indicate the last detected parking space for the
Choose Parking Maneuver Below
screen, and the driver will need to select “Yes” or maneuver).
“No” for a Parallel Park Exit maneuver. Any other NOTE:  While the vehicle is in DRIVE, there will be a full
conditions will result in a default to a Parallel  When searching for a parking space, use the screen image in the Uconnect display. If the
Parking maneuver. turn signal indicator to select which side of the driver shifts to REVERSE while searching for a
vehicle you want to perform the parking parking space, a camera image will appear in
maneuver. The ParkSense Active Park Assist the Uconnect display with a “Shift To Drive”
system will automatically search for a parking message.
space on the passenger's side of the vehicle if
the turn signal is not activated.
When an available parking space has been found, Once the vehicle is in position, you will be The system may then instruct the driver to wait for
and the vehicle is not in position, you will be instructed to stop the vehicle’s movement and steering to complete before then instructing to
instructed to move forward to position the vehicle remove your hands from the steering wheel. When check the vehicle’s surroundings, and move
for a perpendicular or parallel parking sequence the vehicle comes to a standstill (your hands still backward.
(depending on the type of maneuver being removed from the steering wheel), you will be Several more gear shifts (DRIVE and REVERSE)
performed). instructed to place the gear selector into the while keeping hands off of the steering wheel will
Once active steering begins, a camera image will REVERSE position. be instructed to the driver while checking the
display in the Uconnect display with prompts that vehicle’s surroundings before completing the
will display for the duration of the maneuver. parking maneuver.
When the vehicle is in the parking position, the
maneuver is complete and the driver will be 4
instructed to check the vehicle's parking position,
then shift the vehicle into PARK. The message
“Active ParkSense Complete - Check Parking
Position” will be displayed momentarily.
NOTE:
 It is the driver's responsibility to use the brake
Shift To Reverse — Parallel Parking Space and stop the vehicle. The driver should check
their surroundings and be prepared to stop the
Parking Space Found — Keep Moving Forward vehicle either when instructed to, or when driver
intervention is required.
 It is the driver’s responsibility to use the brake
and accelerator during the semi-automatic
parking maneuver.
Shift To Reverse — Perpendicular Parking Space

 When the system instructs the driver to remove

their hands from the steering wheel, the driver WARNING! CAUTION!
should check their surroundings and begin to  Drivers must be careful when performing  The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is
back up slowly. parallel or perpendicular parking maneuvers only a parking aid and it is unable to recognize
 The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will even when using the ParkSense Active Park every obstacle, including small obstacles.
allow a maximum of eight shifts between DRIVE Assist system. Always check carefully behind Parking curbs might be temporarily detected
and REVERSE. If the maneuver cannot be and in front of your vehicle, look behind and in or not detected at all. Obstacles located above
completed within eight shifts, the system will front of you, and be sure to check for pedes- or below the sensors will not be detected
cancel and the instrument cluster display will trians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, when they are in close proximity.
instruct the driver to complete the maneuver and blind spots before backing up and moving
 The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
manually. forward. You are responsible for safety and
the ParkSense Active Park Assist system in
must continue to pay attention to your
 The system will cancel the maneuver if the order to be able to stop in time when an
surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
vehicle speed exceeds 5 mph (7 km/h) during obstacle is detected. It is recommended that
active steering guidance into the parking space. the driver looks over his/her shoulder when
The system will provide a warning to the driver  Before using the ParkSense Active Park Assist using the ParkSense Active Park Assist
at 3 mph (5 km/h) that tells them to slow down. system, it is strongly recommended that the system.
The driver is then responsible for completing the ball mount and hitch ball assembly be discon-
maneuver if the system is canceled. nected from the vehicle when the vehicle is
 If the system is canceled during the maneuver
not used for towing. Failure to do so can result
for any reason, the driver must take control of in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles
the vehicle. because the hitch ball will be much closer to
the obstacle than the rear fascia when the
vehicle sounds the continuous tone. Also, the
sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch
ball assembly, depending on its size and
shape, giving a false indication that an
obstacle is behind the vehicle.
EXITING THE PARKING S PACE ACTIVE LANE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM —

NOTE:
The function does not work for exiting a perpen-
IF EQUIPPED
dicular parking space, but only exiting parallel ACTIVE LANE M ANAGEMENT OPERATION
parking spaces.
The Active Lane Management (ALM) system uses a
Activation
forward facing camera to detect lane markings or
To activate this function, push the Active road edges and to measure vehicle position within
ParkSense switch once. After selection, the system the lane boundaries. It also uses the Blind Spot
activates and warns the driver on the instrument Monitoring sensors to detect vehicles in adjacent
panel display about the operations that have to be Shift To Reverse Then Move Backward lanes while the driver is preparing to change lanes. 4
carried out to perform the maneuver correctly.
The system is operational at speeds above 37 mph
Selection Of The Maneuver Side (60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h).
Use the direction indicators to choose the direction When both lane markings are detected, and the
that you want to perform the maneuver. Use the vehicle approaches the lane marker (no turn signal
right arrow indicator to perform the maneuver to applied), the Active Lane Management system
the right side and use the left arrow indicator to provides a visual warning in the instrument cluster,
perform the maneuver to the left. as well as a steering assist torque (if configured in
During the maneuver, the system instructs the Uconnect Settings), to prompt the driver to remain
driver to shift to REVERSE, and operate the turn within the lane boundaries. If the driver continues
signal in the direction you want to exit. Let go of the to drift out of the lane, the system provides a
steering wheel and use the brake or accelerator Shift To Drive Then Move Forward flashing visual warning through the instrument
pedals as instructed, while the system handles the cluster display as well as a haptic steering wheel
steering automatically for exiting the parking End Of Maneuver vibration (if configured in Uconnect Settings) when
space. If the driver continues to carry out a The semi-automatic maneuver ends when the the vehicle crosses the lane boundary.
voluntary or involuntary action on the steering display shows the message of a completed The warning will be in the form of a vibration in the
wheel during the exit maneuver (touching or maneuver. At the end of the maneuver, the system steering wheel, and/or automatic steering
holding the steering wheel to prevent its gives back the vehicle control to the driver. assistance to direct the vehicle back toward the
movement), the maneuver will be interrupted. center of the lane.
When both lane markings are detected, and the If the driver continues to drift out of the lane, the NOTE:
driver uses the turn signal to indicate a lane system provides a flashing visual warning through The Active Lane Management system will retain
change while the system detects another vehicle in the instrument cluster display as well as a haptic the last system state on or off from the last ignition
the Blind Spot Monitoring zone on that side of the steering wheel vibration (if configured in Uconnect cycle when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
vehicle, the Active Lane Management system Settings) when the vehicle crosses the lane position.
provides a warning in the form of steering assist boundary.
and/or steering vibration (depending on radio ACTIVE LANE MANAGEMENT WARNING
NOTE:
settings) to guide the vehicle back to the center of When operating conditions have been met, the MESSAGE
the lane. Active Lane Management system will monitor if the The Active Lane Management system will indicate
Depending on the type of warning selected, the driver’s hands are on the steering wheel and the current lane drift condition through the
system will either guide the vehicle back to the provides an audible and visual warning to the instrument cluster display.
center of the lane, provide a vibration in the driver if removed. The system will cancel if the
steering wheel, or both. driver does not return their hands to the wheel. When the system is on, the lane lines are gray
when both of the lane boundaries have not been
NOTE: TURNING ACTIVE LANE MANAGEMENT detected.
For an event where the Active Lane Management
system is reacting to a target vehicle in the ON O R O FF
adjacent lane, the Blind Spot Monitoring indicator The Active Lane Management button is
LED on the mirror will flash, and the steering wheel located on the switch panel above the
torque will be greater than for a normal lane Uconnect display.
departure (no vehicle in adjacent lane).
To turn the system on, push the Active Lane
The driver may manually override the steering Management button (LED turns off). A message is
assist warning by applying force into the steering shown in the instrument cluster display.
wheel at any time.
To turn the system off, push the button again
When only a single lane marking is detected and (LED turns on).
the driver drifts across the lane marking (no turn
signal applied), the Active Lane Management System On (Gray Lines)
system provides a visual warning in the instrument
cluster, as well as a steering assist torque
(if configured in Uconnect Settings), to prompt the
driver to remain within the lane boundaries.
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected NOTE:  When the system senses a lane drift situation,
 When the system is on and only the left lane The Active Lane Management system operates the left lane line turns solid yellow. At this time,
marking has been detected, and the system is with similar behavior for a right lane departure steering assist warning is applied to the steering
ready to provide visual warnings in the instru- when only the right lane marking has been wheel in the opposite direction of the lane
ment cluster display and a vibration and/or detected. boundary.
steering assist warning in the steering wheel if a Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected For example: If approaching the left side of the
lane departure occurs, the left lane line will be  When the system is on, the lane lines turn from lane the steering wheel will turn to the right.
green. gray to green to indicate that both of the lane
 When the system senses the lane line has been markings have been detected. When both lane
approached (but not crossed), the left lane line markings have been detected, the system is
will change to solid yellow and the system will ready to provide visual warnings in the instru- 4
provide a haptic steering wheel vibration and/or ment cluster display and a vibration and/or
steering assist torque (if programmed in Ucon- steering assist warning in the steering wheel if a
nect Settings). lane departure occurs.
 When the system senses the lane line is being
crossed, the left lane line will change to flashing
yellow.
Lane Drift (Solid Yellow Line)
 When the system senses the lane line is being
crossed, the left lane line changes from solid
yellow to flashing yellow (on/off). At this time,
vibration is applied to the steering wheel.
Lanes Sensed (Green Lines)
Lane Crossed (Flashing Yellow Line)

For example: If approaching the left side of the

lane the steering wheel will turn to the right.
CHANGING A CTIVE L ANE M ANAGEMENT PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA
S TATUS Your vehicle is equipped with the ParkView Rear
Configurable settings for the Active Lane Back Up Camera that allows you to see an
Management system are available within the on-screen image of the rear surroundings of your
Uconnect system Ú page 193. vehicle whenever the gear selector is put into
REVERSE. The image will be displayed on the
Selectable Warning Types: Uconnect display screen along with a caution note
 Vibration Only to “Check Entire Surroundings” across the top of
 Steering Assist Only the screen. After five seconds this note will
disappear. The ParkView camera is located on the
 Vibration And Steering Assist
rear of the vehicle above the rear license plate.
Other configurable settings for this system are for When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with
Lane Crossed (Flashing Yellow Line) the intensity of the vibration (high/med/low), camera delay turned off), the rear camera mode is
steering assist warning (hi/med/low), and the exited and the previous screen appears.
NOTE: warning zone sensitivity (early/medium/late).
Manual Activation Of The Backup Camera
 The Active Lane Management system operates NOTE:
with similar behavior for a right lane departure. 1. Press the “Controls” button located on the
 The system will not apply vibration and/or
bottom of the Uconnect display.
 If the turn signal is activated, and the vehicle steering assist to the steering wheel whenever a
begins to depart the lane at the same time the safety system engages (Anti-Lock Brakes, Trac- 2. Press the “Backup Camera” button to turn the
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system detects tion Control System, Electronic Stability Control, Rear View Camera system on.
another vehicle in the BSM zones, the system Forward Collision Warning, etc.).
will provide a haptic steering wheel vibration NOTE:
 The Blind Spot Monitoring system will be forced The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has program-
and/or steering assist torque (if programmed in on when the ALM system is enabled.
Uconnect Settings). mable modes of operation that may be selected
 The ALM system will be suppressed when the through the Uconnect system Ú page 193.
Active Driving Assist system (if equipped) is
engaged.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with Rear Camera Washer (If Equipped)
camera delay turned off), the rear camera mode is WARNING!
When the rear window washer is activated by
exited and the previous screen appears. When the Drivers must be careful when backing up even pushing the windshield wiper/washer lever
vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera when using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. forward, the rear backup camera and digital
delay turned on), the camera image will continue to Always check carefully behind your vehicle, and rearview mirror (if equipped) cameras are also
be displayed for up to 10 seconds unless the be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other washed. For more information, see Ú page 63.
following conditions occur: the vehicle speed vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before
exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted backing up. You are responsible for the safety of ZOOM VIEW
into PARK, the vehicle’s ignition is placed in the your surroundings and must continue to pay
OFF position, or the touchscreen button “X” to When the Rear View Camera image is
attention while backing up. Failure to do so can
disable the display of the Rear View Camera is being displayed, and the vehicle speed is
result in serious injury or death.
below 8 mph (13 km/h) while in any gear 4
pressed.
selector position, Zoom View is available.
When enabled, active guidelines are overlaid on By pressing the “magnifying glass” icon in the
the image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and CAUTION! upper left of the display screen, the image will
its projected backup path based on the steering  To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should zoom in to four times the standard view. Pressing
wheel position. A dashed center line overlay only be used as a parking aid. The ParkView the icon a second time will return the view to the
indicates the center of the vehicle to assist with camera is unable to view every obstacle or standard Backup Camera display.
parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver. Different object in your drive path.
colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of When Zoom View is selected while the vehicle is in
the vehicle.  To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be REVERSE, then shifted to DRIVE, the camera delay
driven slowly when using ParkView to be able view will display the standard Backup Camera
The following table shows the approximate view. If the vehicle is then returned to REVERSE
to stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is
distances for each zone: gear from DRIVE, the Zoom View selection will
recommended that the driver look frequently
Distance To The Rear Of The over his/her shoulder when using ParkView. automatically resume.
Zone
Vehicle Shifting to NEUTRAL from any gear will maintain
0 - 1 ft NOTE: the selected view (Zoom or Standard) as long as
Red the vehicle is below 8 mph (13 km/h).
(0 - 30 cm) If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds
Yellow 1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m) up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with If the vehicle is in PARK, Zoom View is available
water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the until the gear selector is placed in DRIVE or
6.5 ft or greater lens. REVERSE and speeds are at or above 8 mph
Green
(2 m or greater) (13 km/h).
NOTE: The TrailCam view can also be activated by

 If the vehicle is in DRIVE, NEUTRAL, or REVERSE, pressing the icon on the Backup Camera view.
and speed is greater than or equal to 8 mph The Backup Camera view can also be activated by
(13 km/h), Zoom View is unavailable and the pressing the icon on the TrailCam view.
icon will appear grey.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE
 While in Zoom View, the guidelines will not be (with Camera Delay turned off) and TrailCam view
visible. is active, the TrailCam mode is exited and the
previous screen appears again.
VIEWING A T SPEED
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with
When the vehicle is in PARK, NEUTRAL or Camera Delay turned on) and the TrailCam view is
Front View Camera
DRIVE, the Rear View Camera can be active, the TrailCam image will be displayed for up
activated with the “Backup Camera” NOTE: to 10 seconds unless the vehicle speed exceeds
button in the Controls menu. This feature The system will stay active while in 4WD Low. 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into
allows the customer to monitor the area directly The TrailCam system has programmable settings PARK, the ignition is placed in the OFF position, or
behind the vehicle (or trailer, if equipped) for up to that may be selected through the Uconnect system the touchscreen button “X” to disable display of
10 seconds while driving. If the vehicle speed the TrailCam view is pressed.
Ú page 193.
remains below 8 mph (13 km/h), the Rear View
Camera image will be displayed continuously until Manual Activation Of The TrailCam NOTE:
deactivated via the “X” button on the touchscreen. TrailCam view can be activated via the below  If the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph
methods: (13 km/h) while in 2WD or 4WD High, the
TRAILCAM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED  Press the “FWD Camera” button on the controls
TrailCam image will be displayed continuously
until deactivated via the touchscreen button
The TrailCam system allows you to you see an screen.
“X”, the transmission is shifted into PARK, or the
on-screen image of the front view of your vehicle.  Press the “Forward Facing Camera” button on ignition is placed in the OFF position.
The image will be displayed on the Uconnect the apps menu.
 The touchscreen button “X” to disable the
display along with a caution note “Check Entire  Press the “TrailCam” button on the Off-Road display of the camera image is made available
Surroundings” across the top of the screen. Pages. ONLY when the vehicle is not in REVERSE.
 Select “Auto Launch Off Road+” (if equipped)  The TrailCam view will stay active regardless of
under camera settings while the “Off Road+” the vehicle speed and time while in 4WD Low.
button is pushed.
Cleaning The TrailCam To activate the feature, press the The display will appear in color in well-lit conditions
Press and hold the Clean Camera soft button “FamCam” button in the Controls tab of and will appear black and white in low light
located on the TrailCam view to wash the TrailCam. the Vehicle menu. The FamCam feature conditions.
Washer fluid will stop when the button is released. can also be accessed from the App If the driver shifts into REVERSE or presses the “X”
The camera can be washed up to 20 seconds at a Drawer, or the status bar at the top of the Uconnect on the screen, the view will close. Otherwise, the
time while holding the button. display. FamCam view will remain on the display.
NOTE: The display will show the entire view inside the NOTE:
vehicle on the left side of the screen, and will show When FamCam is turned off, the selected seat in
 Pressing the Clean Camera soft button will also
a zoomed in view of the selected seat on the right the zoomed in view on the right side of the display
wash the Night Vision camera (if equipped). side of the screen. will be retained. The next time the feature is acti-
 If the front window washer feature is activated,
vated, the same seat will be shown in the zoomed 4
all of the front cameras on the vehicle will be
in view.
washed as well. The front camera washers will
not operate when the low washer fluid warning
is displayed. NIGHT VISION CAMERA SYSTEM —
When enabled, active dynamic Tire Lines are IF EQUIPPED
projected on the ground plane of the TrailCam view
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Night Vision
based on the steering wheel position.
Camera system which uses an infrared camera to
view the area ahead of the vehicle, beyond the
FAMCAM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED headlights, to detect people and large animals
The FamCam system consists of an interior when it is dark outside.
FamCam Display Example (7 Passenger Vehicle Shown)
monitoring camera mounted on the headliner that The system detects pedestrians or large animals
allows the driver to view cargo/passengers in the To change the seat shown in the zoomed in view, by measuring the temperature difference between
rear interior of the vehicle through the Uconnect press a different seat location on the left side of the object and the surrounding area.
screen. the display. The zoomed in view will then show the
new seat location. By default, the second row The thermal objects detected by the camera can
driver’s side seat will be displayed in the zoomed in be displayed in the instrument cluster display.
view. Scroll to the Night Vision page in the instrument
cluster display menu Ú page 97 to display the
Night Vision screen.
Warm objects (e.g. animals) will appear lighter on The two categories of Night Vision warnings are  The pedestrian/animal is directly in the vehicle
the display while cold objects (e.g. traffic signs) will Pedestrian Warnings and Animal Warnings. path, close to the headlight area
appear darker. Pedestrian Warning Telltale  A video pop-up will display when there is a target
NOTE: detected and the instrument cluster display is
 Night Vision only shows objects of interest that not showing the Night Vision page
are warmer or colder than the surroundings. Animal Warning Telltale  A chime will sound for a Level 2 Warning
 Adjust the instrument cluster dimmer control detection event
brightness to make the image appear brighter Only one telltale can be displayed at a time based
or dimmer. A Pedestrian or Animal Warning is considered upon priority.
To exit out of the Night Vision screen, select a either Level 1 or Level 2. Level 1 warnings are The priority order of the warnings from highest to
different menu in the instrument cluster display. yellow, and Level 2 warnings are red. The colors lowest is:
are not configurable.
A yellow or red border and box highlight will appear 1. Pedestrian Warning Level 2
around objects of interest. More than one object of Level 1 Warnings:
2. Animal Warning Level 2
interest may be highlighted.  Yellow telltale in the instrument cluster display
3. Pedestrian Warning Level 1
 Yellow highlights around the detected pedes-
trian/animal 4. Animal Warning Level 1
 Occurs when the vehicle is moving at speeds Level 2 Warnings may display in the Head-Up
greater than 8 mph (13 km/h) and the target is Display (if equipped).
in or approaching the vehicle path
NOTE:
Level 2 Warnings: If the vehicle is stopped, or slowing down, all Level
 Red telltale in the instrument cluster display 2 warnings become Level 1 warnings.
 Red highlights around the detected pedestrian/ You can enable or disable the warnings within the
animal Uconnect system Ú page 193.
Highlight Around Objects Of Interest  Occurs when the vehicle is moving at speeds
greater than 8 mph (13 km/h) and a collision
The highlighting of the object(s) of interest will with the detected pedestrian/animal is possible
update in real time based upon the current Night
Vision assessment.
If the warnings are off, the telltales, chimes, and The system may not be able to detect pedestrians
warning messages will all be off. Pedestrians and WARNING! or animals in the following situations:
animals can still be detected by the system, but  The Night Vision system only provides alerts to  Pedestrian/animal is outside of the detection
there will be no warnings. objects of interest and cannot serve as a range
The Night Vision alert status telltale will substitute for the driver’s personal judgment.
 Pedestrian/animal is fully or partially covered
be gray when the warnings are The warnings are meant to direct your atten-
suppressed. The telltale will also turn tion to the detected objects, but the Night  Pedestrian/animal does not reach the minimum
gray to indicate that the alerts are Vision system does not automatically brake detection height
suppressed due to environmental factors (e.g. the vehicle and may not provide a warning NOTE:
daylight hours, external temperature is greater with enough time to help avoid a crash. Other objects on the road that meet the height/
than 86°F (30°C)) or if the gear selector is in  Warnings are only provided if a pedestrian or shape/temperature (e.g. sun exposure) of pedes- 4
REVERSE. When the Night Vision alerts are active, large animal is detected by the system. trians/animals may be detected and classified as
the telltale will be green Ú page 104. targets.
 It is always the driver’s responsibility to be
WARNING! attentive of road, traffic, and weather condi- WARNING!
tions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle
 Do not jerk the steering wheel in response to  Night Vision can only detect pedestrians and
ahead; and, most importantly, brake opera-
a warning. animals located within the range of the
tion to ensure safe operation of the vehicle
infrared camera.
 Never attempt to swerve around animals if under all road conditions. Your complete
doing so would endanger you or other drivers attention is always required while driving to  Night Vision may not detect pedestrians or
on the road. maintain safe control of your vehicle. animals and highlight them if:
 Do not stare at the image while driving. You  They are not in an upright position, for
could crash and you or others could be DETECTION R ANGE example if they are sitting or lying down, or
injured. if the pedestrian is riding a bicycle
The system can detect people 4 ft (1.25 m) tall or
(Continued) greater in the upright position. The system can also  The figure in the display appears incom-
detect animals that are four-legged and 3 ft (1 m) plete, for example because the pedes-
tall or greater in the upright position. trian or animal is partially behind a vehicle
The detection distance for the system is between  The pedestrian/animal is not directly
26 ft (8 m) and 328 ft (100 m) from the front of the ahead in the coverage area
vehicle. (Continued)
If “Night Vision Temporarily Unavailable” or “Night The system may not be fully functional in the
WARNING! Vision Unavailable Service Required" appears in following situations:
 The pedestrian/animal is part of a group the instrument cluster display after cycling the  On steep hills
ignition, see an authorized dealer.
 The pedestrian is wearing certain types of  On tight curves of the road
clothing The camera must be properly aligned to work
correctly. If the camera needs adjustment, see an  If the camera/sensor is damaged or blocked by
 The pedestrian/animal is moving too authorized dealer. Do not attempt to adjust the dirt, snow, ice, or other debris
quickly through the field of view camera yourself.  In poor visibility conditions such as heavy fog,
 The sensor is blocked by dirt, rain, snow, NOTE: rain, snow, or other weather conditions
or ice Alignment and performance of the Night Vision  If the vehicle has been modified with after-
may be affected by aftermarket modifications. market parts and/or accessories
Mopar® parts should be used to get the optimal
SERVICE THE NIGHT V ISION S YSTEM performance of this system.
NOTE:
If any of these conditions are present, the system
When service conditions are present, the following does not need service.
fault messages may appear in the instrument NIGHT V ISION S YSTEM LIMITATIONS
cluster display when the vehicle is placed in the ON
position.
The Night Vision display is deactivated under the SURROUND VIEW CAMERA SYSTEM —
following conditions:
If "Night Vision Unavailable Sensor Blocked"  Vehicle is shifted into REVERSE
IF EQUIPPED
appears in the instrument cluster display, make Your vehicle may be equipped with the Surround
 The ignition is not in the ON/RUN position
sure the camera is clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or View Camera system that allows you to see an
other debris. The camera is located in the upper  The headlights are off and the vehicle speed is
on-screen image of the surroundings and Top View
fascia/bumper, inside the driver side grille slot. greater than 8 mph (13 km/h) of your vehicle whenever the gear selector is put
Clean the camera using a soft wet cloth or by The Night Vision display warnings are suppressed into REVERSE or a different view is selected
pressing the Clean Camera soft button in the under the following conditions: through the touchscreen soft buttons. The Top
Uconnect system. If the message continues to View of the vehicle will show which doors are open.
 Daylight hours
appear after cycling the ignition, see an authorized The image will be displayed on the Uconnect
dealer.  Temperatures above 86°F (30°C)
display along with a caution note “Check Entire
Surroundings” across the top of the screen. After
five seconds, this note will disappear.
The Surround View Camera system is comprised of Different colored zones indicate the distance to
four sequential cameras located in the front grille, the rear of the vehicle.
rear liftgate and side mirrors. The following table shows the approximate
NOTE: distances for each zone:
The Surround View Camera system has program-
Distance To The Rear Of
mable settings that may be selected through the Zone
The Vehicle
Press this button on the touchscreen to 0 - 1 ft
Red
enter the Surround View Camera menu in (0 - 30 cm)
the Uconnect system. 1 ft - 6.5 ft
Yellow
(30 cm - 2 m) Surround View Camera View 4
When the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE, the Rear
View or Top View is the default view of the system. 6.5 ft or greater NOTE:
Green
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (2 m or greater)  Front tires will be in image when the tires are
(with camera delay turned on), the camera turned.
image will continue to be displayed for up to Modes Of Operation  Due to wide angle cameras in the mirrors, the
10 seconds unless the vehicle speed exceeds image may appear distorted.
Manual activation of the Surround View Camera is
8 mph (13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into PARK
selected by pressing the Surround View Camera  Top View will show which doors are open.
or the ignition is placed in the OFF position. There
soft key located in the Controls menu within the
is a touchscreen button “X” to disable the display  Open front doors and/or liftgate will cancel
Uconnect system.
of the camera image. outside image.
Top View
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with Rear View Plus Top View
camera delay turned off), the Surround View The Top View will show in the Uconnect system with
This is the default view of the system in
Camera mode is exited and the last known screen Rear View orFrontViewin a split screen display.
REVERSE and is always paired with the
appears again. There is integrated ParkSensearcsin theimage at
Top View of the vehicle with optional
the front, rear, and if equipped, the sidesof
When enabled, active guidelines are overlaid on active guidelines for the projected path
thevehicle. Thearcs will change color from yellow to
the image to illustrate the width of the vehicle, when enabled.
red correspondingtothe distancezones to the
including the side view mirrors and its projected
oncoming object.
backup path based on the steering wheel position.
Rear Cross Path View Deactivation

WARNING!
Pressing the Rear Cross Path soft key will The system can be deactivated under the following
give the driver a wider angle view of the conditions: Drivers must be careful when backing up even
rear camera system. The Top View will be when using the Surround View Camera. Always
 The speed of the vehicle is greater than 8 mph
disabled when this is selected. check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure
(13 km/h).
to check for pedestrians, animals, other
Front View Plus Top View  The vehicle is shifted into PARK. vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before
The Front View will show you what is  The vehicle is in any gear other than REVERSE backing up. You are responsible for the safety of
immediately in front of the vehicle and is and the “X” button is pressed. your surroundings and must continue to pay
always paired with the Top View of the attention while backing up. Failure to do so can
vehicle.  The camera delay system is turned off manually
result in serious injury or death.
through Uconnect Settings Ú page 193.
Front Cross Path View
Front And Rear Camera Washers
Pressing the Front Cross Path soft key
will give the driver a wider angle view of When the front windshield washer is activated by CAUTION!
the front camera system. The Top View pulling the windshield wiper/washer lever  To avoid vehicle damage, Surround View
will be disabled when this is selected. rearward, the front camera is also washed. should only be used as a parking aid. The
Backup Camera View When the rear window washer is activated by Surround View camera is unable to view every
pushing the windshield wiper/washer lever obstacle or object in your drive path.
Pressing the Backup Camera soft key will forward, the rear backup camera and digital
provide a full screen rear view with Zoom  To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
rearview mirror (if equipped) cameras are also
View. driven slowly when using Surround View to be
washed. For more information, see Ú page 63.
able to stop in time when an obstacle is seen.
NOTE: It is recommended that the driver look
NOTE:
 If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance frequently over his/her shoulder when using
If the Rear View Camera view was selected through
builds up on the camera lenses, clean the Surround View.
the Surround View Camera menu, exiting out of the
Rear View screen will return to the Surround View lenses, rinse with water, and dry with a soft
Camera menu. If the Backup Camera was cloth. Do not cover the lenses.
manually activated through the Controls menu of  If a malfunction with the system has occurred,
the Uconnect system, exiting out of the display see an authorized dealer.
screen will return to the Controls menu.
ZOOM VIEW NOTE: NOTE:

 If the vehicle is in DRIVE, NEUTRAL, or REVERSE,  In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent
When the Rear View Camera image is being
and speed is greater than or equal to 8 mph the fuel door from opening. If this occurs,
displayed, and the vehicle speed is below 8 mph
(13 km/h), Zoom View is unavailable and the lightly push around the perimeter of the fuel
(13 km/h) while in any gear selector position,
icon will appear grey. door to break the ice build-up.
Zoom View is available.
 While in Zoom View, the guidelines will not be  There is no fuel filler cap. Two flapper doors
By pressing the “magnifying glass” icon
visible. inside the pipe seal the system.
in the upper left of the display screen, the
image will zoom in to two times the 2. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe –
standard view. REFUELING THE VEHICLE the nozzle opens and holds the flapper doors
while refueling.
Pressing the icon a second time will 1. Open the fuel filler door by pushing near the 4
return the view to the standard Backup right outer edge of the fuel door near the
Camera display. center to unlatch. Then use a finger to rotate
fuel door to full open.
When Zoom View is selected while the vehicle is in
REVERSE, then shifted to DRIVE, the camera delay
view will display the standard Backup Camera
view. If the vehicle is then returned to REVERSE
gear from DRIVE, the Zoom View selection will
automatically resume.
Shifting to NEUTRAL from any gear will maintain
the selected view (Zoom or Standard) as long as
the vehicle is below 8 mph (13 km/h). Fuel Filler
If the vehicle is in PARK, Zoom View is available 3. Fill the vehicle with fuel – when the fuel nozzle
until the gear selector is placed in DRIVE or “clicks” or shuts off the fuel tank is full.
REVERSE and speeds are at or above 8 mph Fuel Filler Door
(13 km/h). 4. Wait five seconds before removing the fuel
nozzle to allow fuel to drain from nozzle.
5. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel

door. Engage the fuel door latch by pushing on
VEHICLE LOADING TIRE SIZE
the right outer edge near the center. The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label
GROSS V EHICLE WEIGHT RATING represents the actual tire size on your vehicle.
(GVWR) Replacement tires must be equal to the load
WARNING! capacity of this tire size.
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your
 Never have any smoking materials lit in or
near the vehicle when the fuel door is open or
vehicle including driver, passengers, vehicle, RIM S IZE
options and cargo. The label also specifies
the tank is being filled. maximum capacities of front and rear axle systems This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire
(GAWR). Total load must be limited so GVWR and size listed.
 Never add fuel when the engine is running.
This is in violation of most state and federal front and rear GAWR are not exceeded. I NFLATION P RESSURE
fire regulations and may cause the Malfunc-
tion Indicator Light to turn on.
PAYLOAD This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable vehicle for all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
 A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. load weight a truck can carry, including the weight CURB W EIGHT
You could be burned. Always place fuel of the driver, all passengers, options and cargo.
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total
containers on the ground while filling. GROSS AXLE WEIGHT RATING (GAWR) weight of the vehicle with all fluids, including
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the vehicle fuel, at full capacity conditions, and with no
front and rear axles. The load must be distributed occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle. The
CAUTION!
in the cargo area so that the GAWR of each axle is front and rear curb weight values are determined
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top not exceeded. by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale
off” the fuel tank after filling. before any occupants or cargo are added.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components
in the system with the lowest load carrying capacity LOADING
(axle, springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or
suspension components sometimes specified by The actual total weight and the weight of the front
purchasers for increased durability does not and rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be
necessarily increase the vehicle's GVWR. determined by weighing it when it is loaded and
ready for operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a

commercial scale to ensure that the GVWR has not
TRAILER TOWING The recommended way to measure GTW is to put
your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The
been exceeded. The weight on the front and rear of In this section you will find safety tips and entire weight of the trailer must be supported by
the vehicle should then be determined separately information on limits to the type of towing you can the scale.
to be sure that the load is properly distributed over reasonably do with your vehicle. Before towing a
the front and rear axle. Weighing the vehicle may trailer, carefully review this information to tow your WARNING!
show that the GAWR of either the front or rear axles load as efficiently and safely as possible.
If the gross trailer weight is 5,000 lb (2,267 kg)
has been exceeded but the total load is within the To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty or more, it is recommended to use a
specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted from coverage, follow the requirements and weight-distributing hitch to ensure stable
front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the recommendations in this manual concerning handling of your vehicle. If you use a standard
specified weight limitations are met. Store the vehicles used for trailer towing. 4
weight-carrying hitch, you could lose control of
heavier items down low and be sure that the
your vehicle and cause a collision.
weight is distributed equally. Stow all loose items COMMON T OWING D EFINITIONS
securely before driving.
The following trailer towing related definitions will
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse assist you in understanding the following
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles information: The GCWR is the total allowable weight of your
and the way the brakes operate. vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
CAUTION!
vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, cargo The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the and tongue weight. The total load must be limited and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front
GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do not
so that you do not exceed the GVWR Ú page 176.
you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or it can exceed either front or rear GAWR Ú page 176.
change the way your vehicle handles. This could Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
cause you to lose control. Overloading can The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight WARNING!
shorten the life of your vehicle. of all cargo, consumables and equipment
It is important that you do not exceed the
(permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the
maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous
trailer in its "loaded and ready for operation"
driving condition can result if either rating is
condition.
exceeded. You could lose control of the vehicle
and have a collision.
Tongue Weight (TW) Weight-Distributing Hitch RECOMMENDED DISTRIBUTION HITCH

The TW is the downward force exerted on the hitch A weight-distributing system works by applying ADJUSTMENT
ball by the trailer. You must consider this as part of leverage through spring (load) bars. They are 1. Verify that the vehicle is at the normal ride
the load on your vehicle. typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer height.
tongue weight to the tow vehicle's front axle and
Trailer Frontal Area NOTE:
the trailer axle(s). When used in accordance with
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied The vehicle must remain in the engine run position
the manufacturer's directions, it provides for a
by the maximum width of the front of a trailer. with all doors closed while attaching a trailer for
more level ride, offering more consistent steering
proper leveling of the air suspension system.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) and brake control thereby enhancing towing
safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway 2. Position the vehicle to be ready to connect to
The TSC can be a mechanical telescoping link that the trailer (do not connect the trailer).
control also dampens sway caused by traffic and
can be installed between the hitch receiver and the
crosswinds and contributes positively to tow 3. For vehicles equipped with Quadra-Lift air
trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable
vehicle and trailer stability. Trailer Sway Control suspension, use the touchscreen radio
friction associated with the telescoping motion to
(TSC) and a weight-distributing (load equalizing) settings to enable Tire/Jack mode. Tire/Jack
dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions
hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue mode will be canceled and the procedure must
while traveling.
Weights (TW) and may be required depending on be restarted if the vehicle is driven at speeds
The electronic TSC (if equipped) recognizes a vehicle and trailer configuration/loading to comply above 5mph (8 km/h). When towing, the
swaying trailer and automatically applies individual with Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) automatic Entry/Exit mode may be disabled
wheel brakes and/or reduces engine power to requirements. through Uconnect to prevent vehicle and
attempt to eliminate the trailer sway. trailer movement when the gear selector is
Weight-Carrying Hitch WARNING! moved to PARK.
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue  An improperly adjusted weight-distributing
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch hitch system may reduce handling, stability,
ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle. braking performance, and could result in a
These kinds of hitches are used to tow small and collision.
medium sized trailers.  Weight-distributing systems may not be
compatible with surge brake couplers. Consult
with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a
reputable Recreational Vehicle dealer for
additional information.
4. Measure the height from the top of the front 6. Measure the height from the top of the front
Measurement
wheel opening on the fender to ground; this is wheel opening on the fender to the ground; Example Height (mm)
height H1. this is height H2. Example
7. Install and adjust the tension in the weight H1 925
distributing bars per the manufacturer’s H2 946
recommendations so that the height of the
H2-H1 21
front fender is approximately (H2-H1)/2+H1
(about 1/2 the difference between H2 and H1 (H2-H1)/2 10.5
above Normal Ride Height [H1]). (H2-H1)/2 + H1 935.5
8. Use the touchscreen radio settings and switch
off Tire/Jack mode. Make sure the truck 4
returns to Normal Ride Height. Perform a
TRAILER HITCH CLASSIFICATION
visual inspection of the trailer and The following chart provides the industry standard
weight-distributing hitch to confirm the for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch
Measuring Height (H)
manufacturers’ recommendations have been class can tow and should be used to assist you in
5. Attach the trailer to the vehicle without the met. selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended
weight distribution bars connected. 9. The vehicle can now be driven. towing condition.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions

Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lb (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lb (1,587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 6,000 lb (2,722 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lb (4,535 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
TRAILER TOWING WEIGHTS (M AXIMUM T RAILER W EIGHT RATINGS)

Engine Model GCWR Frontal Area Maximum GTW Maximum Trailer TW (See Note)
RWD Light Duty 9,000 lb 40 sq ft 3,500 lb
3.6L 350 lb (159 kg)
Cooling (4,082 kg) (3.72 sq m) (1,588 kg)
11,700 lb 40 sq ft 6,200 lb
3.6L RWD 620 lb (281 kg)
(5,307 kg) (3.72 sq m) (2,812 kg)
AWD Light Duty 9,000 lb 40 sq ft 3,500 lb
3.6L 350 lb (159 kg)
Cooling (4,082 kg) (3.72 sq m) (1,588 kg)
11,700 lb 40 sq ft 6,200 lb
3.6L AWD 620 lb (281 kg)
(5,307 kg) (3.72 sq m) (2,812 kg)
13,100 lb 60 sq ft 7,200 lb
5.7L AWD 720 lb (327 kg)
(5,942 kg) (5.57 sq m) (3,266 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
NOTE:
 The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and should never exceed the weight referenced on the
Tire and Loading Information placard Ú page 341. The addition of passengers and cargo may require reducing trailer tongue weight and Gross Trailer Weight
(GTW). Redistributing cargo (to the trailer) may be necessary to avoid exceeding Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) of 3,900 lb (1,769 kg).
 Vehicles not factory equipped with trailer tow package are limited to 3,500 lb (350 lb tongue weight).
TRAILER HITCH RECEIVER COVER To reinstall the cover after towing repeat the
CAUTION!
procedure in reverse order.
REMOVAL — I F EQUIPPED Always load a trailer with 60% of the weight in
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be equipped with a trailer hitch Be sure to engage all tabs of the hitch receiver the front of the trailer. This places 10% of the
receiver cover, this must be removed to access the cover in the fascia/bumper prior to installation. GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle. Loads
trailer hitch receiver. This cover is located at the balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear
bottom center of the rear fascia/bumper. TRAILER AND TONGUE W EIGHT can cause the trailer to sway severely side to
1. Turn the two locking retainers located at the side which will cause loss of control of the
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight
bottom of the hitch receiver cover a quarter vehicle and trailer. Failure to load trailers heavier
stamped on your fascia/bumper or trailer hitch.
turn counterclockwise and pull bottom of the in front is the cause of many trailer collisions.
hitch receiver cover outward (towards you). 4
2. Pull the bottom of the cover outward (towards Consider the following items when computing the
you) then downwards to disengage the tabs weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
located at the top of the hitch receiver cover to  The tongue weight of the trailer.
remove.  The weight of any other type of cargo or equip-
ment put in or on your vehicle.
 The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE:
Remember that everything put into or on the trailer
Weight Distribution adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options
must be considered as part of the total load on
your vehicle. Refer to the “Tire And Loading Infor-
mation” placard for the maximum combined
weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle.
Hitch Receiver Cover
1 — Hitch Receiver Cover
2 — Locking Retainers
TOWING REQUIREMENTS WARNING! WARNING!

To promote proper break-in of the new vehicle  When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not  GAWR
drivetrain components, the following guidelines overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading
are recommended.  Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch
can cause a loss of control, poor performance
utilized.
or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmis-
CAUTION! sion, steering, suspension, chassis structure
 Do not tow a trailer at all during the first or tires. Towing Requirements — Tires
500 miles (805 km) the new vehicle is driven.  Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a
 Safety chains must always be used between
The engine, axle or other parts could be compact spare tire.
your vehicle and trailer. Always connect the
damaged.
chains to the hook retainers of the vehicle  Do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h) when
 Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that hitch. Cross the chains under the trailer towing while using a full size spare tire.
a trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph tongue and allow enough slack for turning  Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to
(80 km/h) and do not make starts at full corners. the safe and satisfactory operation of your
throttle. This helps the engine and other parts vehicle.
 Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on
of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.
a grade. When parking, apply the parking  Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation
brake on the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle pressures before trailer usage.
Perform the maintenance listed in the Scheduled transmission in PARK (P). For four-wheel drive
 Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire
Servicing Ú page 301. When towing a trailer, vehicles, make sure the transfer case is not in
damage before towing a trailer.
never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings. N (NEUTRAL). Always, block or "chock" the
trailer wheels.  Replacing tires with a higher load carrying
WARNING! capacity will not increase the vehicle's GVWR
 GCWR must not be exceeded. and GAWR limits.
 Make certain that the load is secured in the
 Total weight must be distributed between the  For further information Ú page 341.
trailer and will not shift during travel. When
tow vehicle and the trailer such that the
trailering cargo that is not fully secured,
following four ratings are not exceeded:
dynamic load shifts can occur that may be
difficult for the driver to control. You could lose  GVWR
control of your vehicle and have a collision.
 GTW
(Continued) (Continued)
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes NOTE:

CAUTION!
 Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system  Disconnect trailer wiring connector from the
or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lb (453 kg) vehicle before launching a boat (or any other
the trailer. This could cause inadequate braking loaded, it should have its own brakes and they device plugged into vehicle’s electrical connect)
and possible personal injury. should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do into water.
this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear,
 An electronically actuated trailer brake  Be sure to reconnect once clear from water
higher brake pedal effort, and longer stopping
controller is required when towing a trailer with area.
distances.
electronically actuated brakes. When towing a
trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated
brake system, an electronic brake controller is Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights
not required. And Wiring 4
 Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers Whenever pulling a trailer, regardless of the trailer
over 1,000 lb (453 kg) and required for trailers size, stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are
in excess of 2,000 lb (907 kg). required for motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and
WARNING!
seven-pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved
 Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle's trailer harness and connector.
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your NOTE: Four-Pin Connector
brake system and cause it to fail. You might Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s wiring
not have brakes when you need them and 1 — Ground
harness.
could have an accident. 2 — Park
The electrical connections are all complete to the
 Towing any trailer will increase your stopping 3 — Left Stop/Turn
vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer
distance. When towing, you should allow for connector. Refer to the following illustrations. 4 — Right Stop/Turn
additional space between your vehicle and the
vehicle in front of you. Failure to do so could
result in an accident.
TOWING TIPS NOTE:

Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle
Before towing, practice turning, stopping, and under heavy loading conditions, will improve
backing up the trailer in an area located away performance and extend transmission life by
from heavy traffic. If the vehicle is equipped reducing excessive shifting and heat build-up. This
with Quadra-Lift air suspension, the automatic action will also provide better engine braking.
Entry/Exit mode may be disabled through
Uconnect to prevent vehicle and trailer movement Cruise Control — If Equipped
when the gear selector is moved to PARK.  Do not use on hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
Automatic Transmission  When using the Cruise Control, if you experience

Seven-Pin Connector speed drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h),
Select the DRIVE (D) range when towing. The
disengage until you can get back to cruising
1 — Backup Lamps transmission controls include a drive strategy to
speed.
avoid frequent shifting when towing. However, if
2 — Running Lamps  Use Cruise Control in flat terrain and with light
frequent shifting does occur while in DRIVE, you
3 — Left Stop/Turn can use the AutoStick shift control to manually loads to maximize fuel efficiency.
4 — Ground select a lower gear.
5 — Battery
6 — Right Stop/Turn
7 — Electric Brakes
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME)

TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND A NOTHER V EHICLE
Four-Wheel Drive Models Four-Wheel Drive Models
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground Two-Wheel Drive Models
Without 4WD LOW Range With 4WD LOW Range
See Instructions
 Transmission in PARK
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED  Transfer case in N
(NEUTRAL) 4
 Tow in forward direction
Front NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow
Rear OK NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK OK OK
NOTE:
 When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional details.
 Vehicles equipped with Quadra-Lift must be placed in Transport Mode before tying them down (from the body) on a trailer or flatbed truck Ú page 131. If the
vehicle cannot be placed in Transport mode (for example, engine will not run), tie-downs should be fastened over the tires using specific straps (not to the
body). Failure to follow these instructions may cause fault codes to be set and/or cause loss of proper tie-down tension.
RECREATIONAL TOWING — TWO WHEEL CAUTION! RECREATIONAL TOWING —

DRIVE MODELS Towing with the rear wheels on the ground will
QUADRA–TRAC II WITH 4WD LOW
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the cause severe transmission damage. Damage RANGE
drivetrain will result. from improper towing is not covered under the
The transfer case must be shifted into N
Recreational towing (for two-wheel drive models) is New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
(NEUTRAL) and the transmission must be in PARK
allowed ONLY if the rear wheels are OFF the (P) for recreational towing. The N (NEUTRAL)
ground. This may be accomplished using a tow RECREATIONAL TOWING — selection button is adjacent to the transfer case
dolly or vehicle trailer. If using a tow dolly, follow selector switch. Shifts into and out of transfer case
this procedure: Q UADRA-T RAC I (S INGLE-S PEED N (NEUTRAL) can take place with the selector
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, T RANSFER C ASE WITHOUT 4WD LOW switch in any mode position.
following the dolly manufacturer's RANGE) F OUR-W HEEL DRIVE MODELS
instructions. CAUTION!
Recreational towing is not allowed. These models
NOTE:  DO NOT dolly tow any 4WD vehicle. Towing
do not have a N (NEUTRAL) position in the transfer
If vehicle is equipped with Quadra-Lift air with only one set of wheels on the ground
case.
suspension, ensure the vehicle is set to Normal (front or rear) will cause severe transmission
Ride Height. NOTE: and/or transfer case damage. Tow with all
This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or vehicle four wheels either ON the ground, or OFF the
2. Drive the rear wheels onto the tow dolly.
trailer provided all four wheels are OFF the ground. ground (using a vehicle trailer).
3. Firmly apply the parking brake. Shift the
transmission into PARK. CAUTION!  Tow only in a forward direction. Towing this
vehicle backwards can cause severe damage
4. Turn the ignition OFF. Towing this vehicle in violation of the above to the transfer case.
5. Properly secure the rear wheels to the dolly, requirements can cause severe transmission
and/or transfer case damage. Damage from  The transmission must be in PARK for recre-
following the dolly manufacturer’s
instructions. improper towing is not covered under the New ational towing.
Vehicle Limited Warranty. (Continued)
6. Install a suitable clamping device, designed for
towing, to secure the front wheels in the
straight position.
 The ignition must be in the ON/RUN position

CAUTION! CAUTION! for a shift to take place and for the position
 Before recreational towing, perform the proce- It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain indicator lights to be operable. If the ignition
dure outlined under “Shifting into N that the transfer case is fully in N (NEUTRAL) is not in the ON/RUN position, the shift will
(NEUTRAL)” to be certain that the transfer before recreational towing to prevent damage to not take place and no position indicator
case is fully in N (NEUTRAL). Otherwise, internal parts. lights will be on or flashing.
internal damage will result.  A flashing N (NEUTRAL) position indicator
 Towing this vehicle in violation of the above Use the following procedure to prepare your light indicates that shift requirements have
requirements can cause severe transmission vehicle for recreational towing: not been met.
and/or transfer case damage. Damage from 1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop on level  If the vehicle is equipped with Quadra-Lift
improper towing is not covered under the New ground, with the engine running. air suspension, the engine should be 4
Vehicle Limited Warranty. started and left running for a minimum of
2. Press and hold the brake pedal.
60 seconds (with all the doors closed) at
 Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on tow 3. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL. least once every 24 hours. This process
bar on your vehicle. The bumper face bar will
4. If vehicle is equipped with Quadra-Lift air allows the air suspension to adjust the
be damaged.
suspension, ensure the vehicle is set to vehicle’s ride height to compensate for
Normal Ride Height. temperature effects.
Shifting Into Transfer Case N (NEUTRAL) 5. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, push
NOTE:
and hold the recessed transfer case N
WARNING!  Steps 1 through 4 are requirements that
(NEUTRAL) button (located by the selector
must be met before pushing the N
You or others could be injured or killed if you switch) for more than four seconds. The light
(NEUTRAL) button, and must continue to be
leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer behind the N symbol will blink, indicating shift
met until the shift has been completed. If
case in the N (NEUTRAL) position without first in progress. The light will stop blinking (stay on
any of these requirements are not met
fully engaging the parking brake. The transfer solid) when the shift to N (NEUTRAL) is
before pushing the N (NEUTRAL) button or
case N (NEUTRAL) position disengages both the complete. A “FOUR WHEEL DRIVE SYSTEM IN
are no longer met during the shift, then the
front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain NEUTRAL” message will appear in the
N (NEUTRAL) indicator light will flash
and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the instrument cluster.
continuously until all requirements are met
transmission is in PARK. The parking brake or until the N (NEUTRAL) button is released.
should always be applied when the driver is not
in the vehicle.
14. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a  A flashing N (NEUTRAL) position indicator
suitable tow bar. light indicates that shift requirements have
15. Release the parking brake. not been met.
Shifting Out Of Transfer Case N (NEUTRAL) 5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
Use the following procedure to prepare your 6. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, push
vehicle for normal usage: and hold the recessed transfer case N
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leaving (NEUTRAL) button (located by the selector
it connected to the tow vehicle. switch) for more than four seconds.
N (NEUTRAL) Button 2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Start the engine.
6. After the shift is completed and the N
(NEUTRAL) light stays on, release the N NOTE:
(NEUTRAL) button.  Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that
7. Shift the transmission into REVERSE or DRIVE. must be met before pushing the N
(NEUTRAL) button, and must continue to be
8. Release the brake pedal for five seconds and
met until the shift has been completed. If
ensure that there is no vehicle movement.
any of these requirements are not met
9. Press and hold the brake pedal. Shift the before pushing the N (NEUTRAL) button or
transmission back into NEUTRAL. are no longer met during the shift, the N
10. Firmly apply the parking brake. (NEUTRAL) indicator light will flash continu- N (NEUTRAL) Button
11. With the transmission and transfer case in N ously until all requirements are met or until
7. When the N (NEUTRAL) indicator light turns off,
(NEUTRAL), push and hold the ENGINE the N (NEUTRAL) button is released.
release the N (NEUTRAL) button. After the N
START/STOP button until the engine turns off.  The ignition must be in the ON/RUN position (NEUTRAL) button has been released, the
12. Place the transmission gear selector in PARK. for a shift to take place and for the position transfer case will always shift to 4WD HI.
Release the brake pedal. indicator lights to be operable. If the ignition
8. Shift the transmission into PARK. Turn the
is not in the ON/RUN position, the shift will
13. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button twice engine off.
not take place and no position indicator
(without pressing the brake pedal), to turn the lights will be on or flashing. 9. Release the brake pedal.
ignition to the off mode.
10. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle. OFF-R OAD D RIVING TIPS WARNING!
11. Start the engine.
Quadra-Lift — If Equipped Do not drive in 4WD LOW range on dry
When off-roading, it is recommended that the pavement; driveline damage may result. 4WD
13. Release the parking brake. lowest useable vehicle height that will clear the LOW range locks front and rear drivelines
14. Shift the transmission into REVERSE or DRIVE, current obstacle or terrain be selected. The vehicle together and does not allow for differential
release the brake pedal, and check that the height should then be raised as required by the action between the front to rear driveshafts.
vehicle operates normally. changes in terrain. Driving in 4WD LOW on pavement will cause
driveline binding; use only on wet or slippery
The Selec-Terrain switch will automatically change
DRIVING TIPS the vehicle to the optimized height based on the
surfaces.
Selec-Terrain switch position. The vehicle height 4
ON-ROAD D RIVING T IPS can be changed from the default height for each Driving Through Water
Selec-Terrain mode by normal use of the air
Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
suspension switches Ú page 128. water, there are a number of precautions that
narrower track to make them capable of
performing in a wide variety of off-road When To Use 4WD LOW Range — must be considered before entering the water.
applications. Specific design characteristics give If Equipped NOTE:
them a higher center of gravity than conventional Your vehicle is capable of water fording in up to
When off-road driving, shift to 4WD LOW for
passenger cars. 24 inches (61 cm) with air suspension or
additional traction. This range should be limited to
An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a extreme situations such as deep snow, mud, or 21 inches (53 cm) without air suspension, of water
better view of the road, allowing you to anticipate sand where additional low speed pulling power is while crossing small rivers or streams. To maintain
problems. They are not designed for cornering at needed. Vehicle speeds in excess of 25 mph optimal performance of your vehicle's heating and
the same speeds as conventional passenger cars (40 km/h) should be avoided when in 4WD LOW ventilation system it is recommended to switch the
any more than low-slung sports cars are designed range. system into recirculation mode during water
to perform satisfactorily in off-road conditions. fording. Be sure to avoid lowering the vehicle in
Avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers. As with water, ensure that the easy exit entry setting is
other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this turned off in Uconnect settings.
vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or
vehicle rollover.
Standing Water Hill Climbing

CAUTION!
Avoid driving in standing water deeper than NOTE:
When driving through water, do not exceed 24 inches (61 cm) with air suspension or Before attempting to climb a hill, determine the
5 mph (8 km/h). Always check water depth 21 inches (53 cm) without air suspension, and conditions at the crest and/or on the other side.
before entering as a precaution, and check all reduce speed appropriately to minimize wave
fluids afterward. Driving through water may Before climbing a steep hill, shift the transmission
effects. Maximum speed is 5 mph (8 km/h).
cause damage that may not be covered by the to a lower gear and shift the transfer case to 4WD
Maintenance LOW. Use FIRST gear and 4WD LOW for very steep
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
After driving through deep water, inspect your hills.
vehicle fluids and lubricants (engine oil, If you stall or begin to lose forward motion while
Driving through water more than a few inches/ transmission oil, axle, transfer case) to ensure the climbing a steep hill, allow your vehicle to come to
centimeters deep will require extra caution to fluids have not been contaminated. Contaminated a stop and immediately apply the brakes. Restart
ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle. fluid (milky, foamy in appearance) should be the engine, and shift into REVERSE (R). Back slowly
If you must drive through water, try to determine flushed/changed as soon as possible to prevent down the hill, allowing the compression braking of
the depth and the bottom condition (and location component damage. the engine to help regulate your speed. If the
of any obstacles) prior to entering. Proceed with
Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand brakes are required to control vehicle speed, apply
caution and maintain a steady controlled speed
them lightly and avoid locking or skidding the tires.
less than 5 mph (8 km/h) in deep water to In heavy snow, when pulling a load, or for
minimize wave effects. additional control at slower speeds, shift the WARNING!
Flowing Water transmission to a low gear and shift the transfer
case to 4WD LOW if necessary Ú page 128. Only If the engine stalls, you lose forward motion, or
If the water is swift flowing and rising (as in storm cannot make it to the top of a steep hill or grade,
run-off), avoid crossing until the water level shift into a lower gear to maintain forward motion.
Over-revving the engine can spin the wheels and never attempt to turn around. To do so may
recedes and/or the flow rate is reduced. If you result in tipping and rolling the vehicle. Always
must cross flowing water avoid depths in excess of traction will be lost.
back carefully straight down a hill in REVERSE
9 inches (23 cm). The flowing water can erode the Avoid abrupt downshifts on icy or slippery roads,
gear. Never back down a hill in NEUTRAL using
streambed, causing your vehicle to sink into because engine braking may cause skidding and
only the brake.
deeper water. Determine exit point(s) that are loss of control.
downstream of your entry point to allow for drifting.
Remember, never drive diagonally across a hill. After Driving Off-Road  After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or
Always drive straight up or down. similar dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan,
Off-road operation puts more stress on your
If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest brake rotors, wheels, brake linings, and axle
vehicle than does most on-road driving. After going
of a hill, ease off the accelerator and maintain yokes inspected and cleaned as soon as
off-road, it is always a good idea to check for
forward motion by turning the front wheels slowly. possible.
damage. That way you can get any problems taken
This may provide a fresh “bite” into the surface and care of right away and have your vehicle ready
will usually provide traction to complete the climb. WARNING!
when you need it.
Traction Downhill  Completely inspect the underbody of your Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may
vehicle. Check tires, body structure, steering, cause excessive wear or unpredictable braking.
When descending mountains or hills, use Hill You might not have full braking power when you
Descent Control or Selec-Speed Control to avoid suspension, and exhaust system for damage.
need it to prevent a collision. If you have been 4
repeated heavy braking.  Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and operating your vehicle in dirty conditions, get
If not equipped with Hill Descent Control or clean as required. your brakes checked and cleaned as necessary.
Selec-Speed Control use the following procedure:  Check threaded fasteners for looseness, partic-
Shift the transmission into a low gear, and the ularly on the chassis, drivetrain components,
 If you experience unusual vibration after driving
transfer case into 4WD LOW range. Let the vehicle steering, and suspension. Retighten them, if
in mud, slush or similar conditions, check the
go slowly down the hill with all four wheels turning required, and torque to the values specified in
wheels for impacted material. Impacted mate-
against engine compression drag. This will permit the Service Manual.
rial can cause a wheel imbalance and freeing
you to control the vehicle speed and direction.  Check for accumulations of plants or brush. the wheels of it will correct the situation.
When descending mountains or hills, repeated These things could be a fire hazard. They might
braking can cause brake fade with loss of braking hide damage to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle
control. Avoid repeated heavy braking by pinion seals, and propeller shafts.
downshifting the transmission whenever possible.
192
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS and performance of your systems or to reduce the
potential risk of unauthorized and unlawful access
NOTE:
 FCA US LLC or your dealer may contact you
For detailed information about your Uconnect 5/ to your vehicle systems. directly regarding software updates.
5 NAV With 8.4-inch Display or Uconnect 5/5 NAV The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to
With 10.1-inch Display system, refer to your  To help further improve vehicle security and
your vehicle systems may still exist, even if the minimize the potential risk of a security breach,
Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement. most recent version of vehicle software (such as vehicle owners should:
NOTE: Uconnect software) is installed.
Uconnect screen images are for illustration  Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com
purposes only and may not reflect exact software WARNING! (US Residents) or www.driveuconnect.ca
for your vehicle. (Canadian Residents) to learn about avail-
 It is not possible to know or to predict all of the able Uconnect software updates.
possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems
CYBERSECURITY are breached. It may be possible that vehicle  Only connect and use trusted media
systems, including safety related systems, devices (e.g. personal mobile phones,
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may USBs, CDs).
be equipped with both wired and wireless could be impaired or a loss of vehicle control
networks. These networks allow your vehicle to could occur that may result in an accident Privacy of any wireless and wired communications
send and receive information. This information involving serious injury or death. cannot be assured. Third parties may unlawfully
allows systems and features in your vehicle to intercept information and private communications
 ONLY insert media (e.g., USB or CD) into your
function properly. without your consent. For further information, refer
vehicle if it came from a trusted source. Media to “Data Collection & Privacy” in your Uconnect
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security of unknown origin could possibly contain mali-
Owner’s Manual Supplement or Ú page 113.
features to reduce the risk of unauthorized and cious software, and if installed in your vehicle,
unlawful access to vehicle systems and wireless it may increase the possibility for vehicle
communications. Vehicle software technology systems to be breached.
continues to evolve over time and FCA US LLC,
 As always, if you experience unusual vehicle
working with its suppliers, evaluates and takes
behavior, take your vehicle to the nearest
appropriate steps as needed. Similar to a
authorized dealer immediately.
computer or other devices, your vehicle may
require software updates to improve the usability
MULTIMEDIA 193
UCONNECT SETTINGS CUSTOMER PROGRAMMABLE F EATURES Press the Vehicle button, then press the Settings
tab on the top of the touchscreen. In this menu, the
The Uconnect system uses a combination of Uconnect system allows you to access all of the
buttons on the touchscreen and buttons on the available programmable features.
faceplate located on the center of the instrument
NOTE:
panel. These buttons allow you to access and
change the customer programmable features.  Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a
Many features can vary by vehicle. time.
Buttons on the faceplate are located below and/or  Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature
beside the Uconnect system in the center of the settings may vary.
instrument panel. In addition, there is a Scroll/ When making a selection, press the button on the
Enter control knob located on the right side. Turn touchscreen to enter the desired menu. Once in
the control knob to scroll through menus and the desired menu, press and release the preferred
change settings. Push the center of the control setting option until a check mark appears next to 5
knob one or more times to select or change a Uconnect 5/5 NAV With 10.1-inch Display the setting, showing that setting has been
setting. selected. Once the setting is complete, press the
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen Vehicle button to exit to the screen. Pressing the
Your Uconnect system may also have Screen Off
and Mute buttons on the faceplate. 2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate Up or Down Arrow button on the right side of the
screen will allow you to toggle up or down through
Push the Screen Off button on the faceplate to turn the available settings.
off the Uconnect screen. Push the button again or
tap the screen to turn the screen on.
Press the Back Arrow button to exit out of a Menu
or certain option on the Uconnect system.
Push and hold the Power button on the radio’s
faceplate for a minimum of 15 seconds to reset
the radio.
194 MULTIMEDIA
My Profile
When the My Profile button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s profiles.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description

This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system. The available
Language
languages are English, Français, and Español.
This setting will adjust the display for the radio to “Auto” or “Manual”.
Display Mode
“Manual” allows for more customization with the radio display.
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are on. To
Display Brightness Headlights On access this setting, Display Mode must be set to “Manual”. The “+” setting will
increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are off. To
Display Brightness Headlights Off access this setting, Display Mode must be set to “Manual”. The “+” setting will
Set Theme This setting will allow you to change the display theme.
This setting will allow you to change the units. The available options are
“Speed” (MPH or km/h), “Distance” (mi or km), “Fuel Consumption” (MPG
Units [US], MPG [UK], L/100 km, or km/L), “Pressure” (psi, kPa, or bar),
“Temperature” (°C or °F), “Power” (HP [US], Gal HP [UK], or kW), and “Torque”
(lb-ft or Nm) units of measurement independently.
Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off.
Show Main Category Bar Labels This setting will allow the main category bar labels to be shown on or off.
MULTIMEDIA 195

This setting will determine the behavior when the Off-Road feature is
Auto Launch with Off-Road+ activated. The options are “Off”, “Forward Camera” (if equipped), and “Off
Road Pages”.
Navigation Next Turn Pop-Ups Displayed in Cluster This setting will display Navigation prompts in the Instrument Cluster Display.
This setting will display smartphone notifications and messages in the
Phone Pop-Ups Displayed In Cluster
Instrument Cluster Display.
Massage Pop-Up Displayed With Button Press This setting will activate or deactivate the massage feature pop-ups.
This setting will allow you to set the time format (AM/PM). Sync Time With GPS
must be “Off” for this setting to be available. The “12 hrs” setting will set the
Time Format
time to a 12-hour format. The “24 hrs” setting will set the time to a 24-hour
format.
5
This setting will allow you to change the voice options for the radio to “Male”
Voice Options
or “Female”.
This setting will allow you to set the system “Wake Up” word. The available
Wake Up Word
options are “Off”, “Hey, Uconnect”, and “Hey, Jeep®”.
This setting will allow Voice Barge-in, which is a feature that will allow you to
Voice Barge-in interrupt the help message or system prompts by speaking, to be turned on or
off.
Show Command List This setting will allow the Command List to be shown on or off.
This setting will redirect to the list of Navigation settings. Refer to the Owner’s
Navigation Settings
Manual Supplement for further information.
This setting will redirect to a new menu that will allow you to change the
Ambient Color Personalization
ambient lighting color in the cabin.
196 MULTIMEDIA

This setting will activate the vehicle’s comfort system and heated seats or
heated steering wheel when the vehicle is remote started or ignition is
started. The “Off” setting will not activate the comfort systems. The “Remote
Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Heated Steering Wheel
Start” setting will only activate the comfort systems when using Remote Start.
The “All Start” setting will activate the comfort systems whenever the vehicle
is started.
This setting will keep certain electrical features running after the engine is
Radio Power Off turned off. When any door is opened, the electronics will deactivate. The
available settings are “0 sec”, “45 sec”, “5 min”, and “10 min”.
This setting will allow you to determine if the radio shuts off when any of the
Radio Off With Door
doors are opened.
This setting will open the submenu, containing the audio settings
Audio Settings
Ú page 213.
This setting will allow you to favorite app drawer pop-ups with “On” and “Off”
App Drawer Favoriting Pop-ups
options.
This setting will allow you to unfavorite app drawer pop-ups with “On” and
App Drawer Unfavoritings Pop-ups
“Off” options.
This setting will allow you to have pop-up notifications for new text messages.
New Text Message Pop-ups
Setting options are “On” and “Off”.
This setting will allow you to have pop-up notifications for missed calls. Setting
Missed Calls Message
options are “On” and “Off”.
MULTIMEDIA 197

This setting will allow you to have pop-up notifications for Navigation. Setting
Navigation Pop-ups
Reset App Drawer to Default Order This setting will reset the app drawer to its factory default layout.
This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their factory
Restore Settings to Default
default.
More Profile Options This setting will give access to more profile options.
Display
When the Display button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display the options related to the theme (if equipped), brightness, and color of the
touchscreen. The available settings are: 5
NOTE:

This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system. The available
Language
languages are English, Français, and Español.
This setting will allow you to set the brightness manually or have the system
set it automatically. The “Auto” setting has the system automatically adjust
Display Mode
the display brightness. The “Manual” setting will allow the user to adjust the
brightness of the display.
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are on. To
Display Brightness With Headlights ON access this setting, Display Mode must be set to Manual. The “+” setting will
198 MULTIMEDIA

This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are off. To
Display Brightness With Headlights OFF access this setting, Display Mode must be set to Manual. The “+” setting will
Set Theme This setting will allow you to change the display theme.
This setting will allow you to change the units. The available options are
“Speed” (MPH or km/h), “Distance” (mi or km), “Fuel Consumption” (MPG
Units [US], MPG [UK], L/100 km, or km/L), “Pressure” (psi, kPa, or bar),
“Temperature” (°C or °F), “Power” (HP [US], Gal HP [UK], or kW), and “Torque”
(lb-ft or Nm) units of measurement independently.
Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off.
This setting will allow you to turn the bottom main category bar labels
Show Main Category Bar Labels
on or off.
Navigation Next Turn Pop-ups Displayed in Cluster This setting will display Navigation prompts in the Instrument Cluster Display.
This setting will display smartphone notifications and messages in the
Phone Pop-ups Displayed In Cluster
Instrument Cluster Display.
This setting will enable the Ready To Drive pop-ups in the Instrument Cluster
Ready To Drive Pop-ups
Display.
This setting will determine the behavior when the Off-Road feature is
Auto Launch with Off-Road+ activated. The options are “Off”, “Forward Camera” (if equipped), and
“Off-Road”.
Massage Pop-Up Displayed With Button Press This setting will activate or deactivate the massage feature pop-ups.
MULTIMEDIA 199
Safety & Driving Assistance

When the Safety & Driving Assistance button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s safety settings. These
options will differ depending on the features equipped on the vehicle. The settings may display in list form or within subfolders on the screen. To access a
subfolder, select the desired folder; the available options related to that feature will then display on the screen.
NOTE:

This setting will change the distance at which the Forward Collision Warning
(FCW) alert sounds. The “Medium” setting will have the FCW system signal
when an object is in view, and the possibility of a collision is detected. The 5
Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity
“Near” setting will have the FCW system signal when the object is closer to the
vehicle. The “Far” setting will have the FCW system signal when an object is at
a far distance from the vehicle.
This setting will turn the Forward Collision Warning system on or off. The “Off”
setting will deactivate the FCW system. The “Warning Only” setting will provide
Forward Collision Warning only an audible chime when a collision is detected. The “Warning + Active
Braking” setting will provide an audible chime and apply some brake pressure
when a collision is detected.
This setting will turn the Pedestrian Emergency Braking system on or off. This
Pedestrian Emergency Braking
setting is located in Automatic Emergency Braking.
This setting will turn the Active Driving Assist Steering Wheel Vibration
Active Driving Assist Steering Wheel Vibration
on or off.
Traffic Sign Assist This setting will turn Traffic Sign Assist on or off.
This setting will allow you to set the warning type related to the traffic sign.
Traffic Sign Assist Warning
The available options are “Off”, “Visual”, and “Visual + Chime”.
200 MULTIMEDIA

This setting will allow you to set if the system will warn you that the speed limit
New Speed Zone Indication has changed in an area. The available options are “Off”, “Visual”, and “Visual
+ Chime”.
This setting will alert the driver of a lane departure and slightly turn the
Active Lane Management steering wheel to avoid the departure. The available options are “Vibration
Only”, “Steering Assist Only”, and “Vibration + Steering Assist”.
This setting will change the strength of the steering wheel feedback during a
Active Lane Management Strength
lane departure. The available settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
This setting will turn the Night Vision Video Warning and green/gray cluster
Night Vision Video Warning
indicator light on or off.
This setting will change the type of ParkSense alert when a close object is
ParkSense
detected and provide both an audible chime and a visual display.
This setting adjusts the volume of the Front ParkSense system. The available
Front ParkSense Volume
settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
This setting adjusts the volume of the Rear ParkSense system. The available
Rear ParkSense Volume
settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
Rear ParkSense Braking Assist This setting will turn the Rear ParkSense Braking Assist on or off.
Side Distance Warning This setting will turn the Side Distance Warning on or off.
This setting will monitor the driver’s driving habits and warn you of any
Drowsy Driver Detection changes, indicating that the driver may be drowsy. The available options are
“On” and “Off”.
MULTIMEDIA 201

This setting will change the type of alert provided when an object is detected
in a vehicle’s blind spot. The “Off” setting will turn off Blind Spot Alert. The
Blind Spot Alert “Lights” setting will activate the Blind Spot Alert lights on the outside mirrors.
The “Lights & Chime” setting will activate the lights on the outside mirrors and
an audible chime.
This setting will change the Electric Power Steering Default. The available
options are “Comfort” for a lower effort steering experience, “Normal” for the
Electric Power Steering Default
standard effort steering experience, and “Sport” for a higher effort steering
experience.
Paddle Shifters This setting will turn the Paddle Shifters on or off.
Hill Start Assist This setting will turn the Hill Start Assist system on or off. 5
Clock & Date

When the Clock & Date button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different options related to the vehicle’s internal clock.
NOTE:

This setting will sync the time to the GPS receiver in the system. The system
Sync Time With GPS
will control the time when driving into a different time zone.
This setting will allow you to set the time format (AM/PM). Sync Time With GPS
must be off for this setting to be available. The “12 hrs” setting will set the
Time Format
time to a 12-hour format. The “24 hrs” setting will set the time to a 24-hour
format.
202 MULTIMEDIA

This setting will allow you to set the hours and minutes. Sync Time With GPS
Set Time must be off for this setting to be available. The “+” setting will increase the
hours and minutes. The “-” setting will decrease the hours and minutes.
This setting will allow you to set the day, month and year. Using “+” or “-”, you
Set Date
can scroll through the available days, months, and years.
Phone/Bluetooth®
When the Phone/Bluetooth® button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to Bluetooth® connectivity from an external audio
device or smartphone. The list of paired audio devices or smartphones can be accessed from this menu.
NOTE:

Device Manager This setting will open the Device Manager main screen.
This setting will open the Do Not Disturb All settings menu. The available
Do Not Disturb All
This setting will enable or disable two active phones with the vehicle. The
Enable Two Active Phones
setting options are “On” and “Off”.
This setting will activate phone message pop-ups in the Instrument Cluster
Phone Pop-Ups Displayed In Cluster
Display.
MULTIMEDIA 203
Voice
When the Voice button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s Voice Recognition feature.
NOTE:

This setting will allow you to change the system’s voice to either “Male” or
Voice Options
“Female”.
This setting will allow you to set the system’s “Wake Up” word. The available
Wake Up Word
options are “Off”, “Hey, Uconnect”, and “Hey, Jeep®”.
This setting allows you to respond to a Voice Response before the statement 5
Voice Barge-In
is completed by the system. The available options are “On” and “Off”.
This setting will allow you to turn the Command List on or off. The “Always”
setting will always show the Command List. The “With Help” setting will show
Show Command List
the Command List and provide a brief description of what the command does.
The “Never” setting will turn the Command List off.
Navigation — If Equipped
When the Navigation button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s built-in Navigation system. These settings can
change which icons display on the map, how “time to arrival is calculated”, and route types.
For more information on Navigation and settings, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
204 MULTIMEDIA
Camera
When the Camera button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s camera features.
NOTE:

This setting will add a timed delay to the Surround View Camera when shifting
Surround View Camera Delay
out of REVERSE.
Surround View Camera Guidelines This setting will turn the Surround View Camera Guidelines on or off.
This setting will add a timed delay to the ParkView Backup Camera when
ParkView Backup Camera Delay
shifting out of REVERSE.
ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines This setting will turn the ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines on or off.
Forward Facing Camera Guidelines This setting will turn the Forward Facing Camera Guidelines on or off.
MULTIMEDIA 205
Mirrors & Wipers

When the Mirrors & Wipers button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s mirrors and wipers.
NOTE:

This setting will tilt the outside side-view mirrors when the ignition is in the
ON/RUN position and the transmission gear selector is in the REVERSE
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse position. The mirrors will move back to their previous position when the
transmission is shifted out of REVERSE. The available settings are “On” and
“Off”. 5
This setting will automatically fold and unfold the side-view mirrors when the
Auto Folding Side Mirrors
vehicle is turned on and off. The available options are “On” and “Off”.
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers This setting will turn the Rain Sensing Auto Wipers on or off.
Headlights With Wipers This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated.
206 MULTIMEDIA
Lights
When the Lights button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s exterior and interior lights.
NOTE:
When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned on or off. This feature is only allowed by law in the country of
the vehicle purchased.
NOTE:

This setting will redirect to a new menu that will allow you to change the
Ambient Color Personalization
ambient lighting color in the cabin.
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the headlights
Headlight Off Delay to shut off after the vehicle is turned off. The available settings are “0 sec”,
“30 sec”, “60 sec”, and “90 sec”.
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the headlights
to shut off after the vehicle is unlocked. “Greeting Lights” must be selected
Headlight Illumination On Approach and “Headlight Illumination on Approach” must be selected above 0 seconds
for the feature to be enabled. The available settings are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60
sec”, and “90 sec”.
MULTIMEDIA 207

Proximity Detection is a system which activates specific interior and exterior
lights as the vehicle is approached with a valid key fob. This feature provides
an increased sense of welcome and security as the user enters the vehicle in
Proximity Wake-Up the dark. This setting will turn the Proximity Wake-Up on or off.
NOTE:
For the exterior lighting to be activated, Headlight Illumination On Approach
must be set to a value other than zero.
When the “Greeting Lights” feature is selected, it enables “Headlight
Illumination On Approach”. When “Headlight Illumination On Approach” is
selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights
Greeting Lights remain on after the doors are unlocked with the key fob. “Greeting Lights” 5
must be selected and “Headlight Illumination On Approach” must be selected
above zero seconds for the feature to be enabled. The available settings are
“On” and “Off”.
Auto Dim High Beams This setting will allow you to turn the Auto Dim High Beams on or off.
Daytime Running Lights This setting will allow you to turn the Daytime Running Lights on or off.
When this setting is selected, if the steering wheel rotation angle is large or
Cornering Lights the turn signal indicators are on, a light (incorporated in the fog light) will turn
on, on the relevant side to improve visibility at night.
This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock
Flash Lights With Lock
button is pushed on the key fob on or off.
Headlights with Wipers This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated.
208 MULTIMEDIA
Brakes
When the Brakes button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display a setting related to the vehicle’s brake system.
NOTE:

Auto Park Brake This setting will turn the Auto Park Brake on or off.
This setting will allow you to set the brakes for service. When the setting is
Brake Service
selected, a pop-up will display with “Yes” and “No”.
Doors & Locks

When the Doors & Locks button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to locking and unlocking the vehicle’s doors.
NOTE:
The Auto Door Locks feature default condition is enabled. When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 12 mph
(20 km/h). The Auto Door Locks feature can be enabled or disabled by an authorized dealer per written request of the customer. Please see an authorized
dealer for service.
NOTE:

This setting will unlock the doors when any of the doors are opened from the
Auto Unlock On Exit
inside.
This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock
Flash Lights With Lock
button is pushed on the key fob on or off.
MULTIMEDIA 209

This setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed on the key
fob. The “Off” setting will not sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed.
Sound Horn With Lock The “1st Press” setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed
once. The “2nd Press” setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is
pushed twice.
This setting will sound the horn when the remote start is activated from the
Sound Horn With Remote Start
key fob.
This setting will change how many pushes of the Unlock button on the key fob
are needed to unlock all the doors. The “Driver Door” setting will only unlock
Remote Door Unlock, Door Lock/1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
the driver door on the first push on the Unlock button. The “All Doors” setting
will unlock all doors with only one push of the Unlock button. 5
This setting will allow you to turn the Passive Entry feature (Keyless Enter ‘n
Passive Entry
Go™) on or off.
This setting will recall preset radio stations and driver seat position that have
Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob
been linked to the key fob.
This setting will chime an audible alert when the power liftgate is raising or
Power Liftgate Alert
lowering. Selectable options are “On” and “Off”.
This setting will use hands-free technology to automatically open or close the
Hands-Free Power Liftgate
power liftgate. Selectable options are “On” and “Off”.
210 MULTIMEDIA
Seats & Comfort

When Seats & Comfort button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s comfort systems when remote start has
been activated or the vehicle has been started.
NOTE:

This setting will automatically move the driver seat rearward when the engine
Easy Exit Seats
is shut off. The available settings are “On” and “Off”.
This setting will activate the vehicle’s comfort systems and heated seats or
heated steering wheel when the vehicle is remote started or ignition is
Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Heated Steering Wheel With Vehicle started. The “Off” setting will not activate the comfort systems. The “Remote
Start Start” setting will only activate the comfort systems when using Remote Start.
The “All Start” setting will activate the comfort systems whenever the vehicle
is started.
MULTIMEDIA 211
Key Off Options

When the Key Off Options button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to vehicle shutoff. These settings will only activate
when the ignition is set to OFF.
NOTE:

This setting will sound the horn when the Lower button is pressed on the key
Sound Horn With Lower
fob.
This setting will flash the lights when the Lower button is pressed on the key
Flash Lights With Lower
fob. 5
Easy Exit Seat This setting adjusts the seats to make exiting the vehicle easier.
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time the headlights remain on
Headlight Off Delay after the vehicle has been turned off. The available settings are “0 sec”, “30
sec”, “60 sec”, and “90 sec”.
Auto Entry/Exit Suspension This setting will turn the Auto Entry/Exit Suspension system on or off.
This setting will keep the radio on for the selected amount of time after
Radio Off Delay vehicle shut off. The available options are “0 sec”, “45 sec”, “5 min”, and
“10 min”.
This setting will keep the radio on when a door is opened or until the Radio Off
Radio Off With Door
Delay time is reached. The available settings are “On” and “Off”.
This setting will allow you to control window function while the vehicle is off.
Windows With Key Fob
The available options are “On” and “Off”.
212 MULTIMEDIA
Suspension
When the Suspension button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display settings related to the vehicle’s air suspension.
NOTE:

Auto Entry/Exit Suspension This setting will turn the Auto Entry/Exit Suspension system on or off.
This setting will display suspension messages in the Instrument Cluster
Display Suspension Messages Display. The “All” setting will display all available messages. The “Warnings
Only” setting will only display warning messages.
This setting will disable the air suspension system to assist it changing a
Tire Jack Mode
spare tire.
This setting will allow you to set the auxiliary suspension mode. The available
options are “Off”, “Transport Mode”, and “Wheel Alignment Mode”. In
Auxiliary Mode Transport Mode, the vehicle will not auto level when being transported by
another vehicle. In Wheel Alignment Mode, the vehicle will not auto level when
a wheel alignment is being performed.
MULTIMEDIA 213
Audio
When the Audio button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s sound system. These settings can change the audio
location within the vehicle, adjust the bass or treble levels, and auto-play settings from an audio device or smartphone.
NOTE:

This setting will adjust audio levels from specific speakers in the front/back
Balance/Fade and left/right of the vehicle. The Speaker icon can be moved to set audio
location.
Equalizer This setting will adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” ranges of the audio. 5
This setting will adjust audio volume as speeds increase. At a higher setting,
Speed Adjusted Volume the volume will increase more as the vehicle speeds up. The available settings
are “Off”, “1”, “2”, and “3”.
Surround Sound This setting will turn the Surround Sound system on or off.
This setting will tune the audio levels from a device connected through the
AUX Volume Offset
AUX port. The available settings are “+” and “-”.
Auto Play This setting will automatically begin playing audio from a connected device.
214 MULTIMEDIA

This setting will automatically turn the radio on when the vehicle is started.
Auto-On Radio The available settings are “Off”, “On”, and “Recall Last”. With Recall Last, the
system resumes the previous task before vehicle shut off.
This setting will keep the radio on when a door is opened or until the Radio Off
Radio off With Door
Delay time is reached. The available settings are “On” and “Off”.
This setting will allow you to set the audio volume levels for each option
Volume Adjustment
(Media, Phone, Navigation, etc.). You can set the volume between 0 and 38.
Notifications
When the Notifications button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to Notifications for the system.
NOTE:

App Drawer Favoriting Pop-Ups This setting turns the App Favorited pop-up on or off.
App Drawer Unfavoriting Pop-Ups This setting turns the App Unfavorited pop-up on or off.
This setting turns receiving/storing a pop-up for new text messages of any
New Text Message Pop-Ups
connected phone on or off.
This setting turns receiving/storing a pop-up for missed calls of any connected
Missed Calls Message
phone on or off.
Navigation Pop-Ups This setting turns receiving/storing predictive Navigation Pop-Ups on or off.
MULTIMEDIA 215
SiriusXM® Setup
NOTE:
A subscription to SiriusXM® satellite radio is required for these settings to be functional.
When the SiriusXM® Setup button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to SiriusXM® satellite radio. These settings can be
used to skip specific radio channels and restart favorite songs from the beginning.
NOTE:

This setting will redirect you to the SiriusXM® settings menu within the
SiriusXM® Account, Profile, And Settings
SiriusXM® menu. 5
This setting will skip over content labeled as explicit. The available settings
Block Explicit
are “On” and “Off”.
Software Updates
When the Software Updates button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display the setting related to updating the Uconnect software.
NOTE:

This setting will allow software updates to happen over Wi-Fi. Selectable
Software Downloads over Wi-Fi
options for the setting are “On” and “Off”.
216 MULTIMEDIA
Reset
When the Reset button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to resetting the Uconnect system back to its default settings.
These settings can clear personal data and reset selected settings from other menus.
NOTE:

Restart Radio This setting will reboot the radio.
This setting will return the apps drawer to the default order. The available
Reset Apps Drawer To Default Order options are “Yes” and “Cancel”. The X button can also be pressed to cancel
the screen.
This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their factory
Restore Settings to Default
default.
This setting will display a pop-up that gives you the option to clear all personal
Clear Personal Data
data from the system, including Bluetooth® devices and presets.
This setting will allow you to reset the vehicle’s Wi-Fi password for smartphone
Reset Wi-Fi Password For Projection projection. The available options are “Yes” and “Cancel”. The X button can
also be pressed to cancel the screen.
Factory Reset This setting will restore the radio to its factory default settings.
MULTIMEDIA 217
3RD PARTY APPS To launch the app, begin playing audio and follow
these steps:
The McIntosh app will allow you to perform the
following when listening to music.
If equipped, your vehicle may contain some 3rd 1. Press the Apps button. NOTE:
party apps, which will further enhance your
2. Press the McIntosh app. The seek feature will not work while using Blue-
Uconnect system.
tooth®.
McIntosh
McIntosh is a 3rd party app that complements your
Uconnect system’s media player. For the app to be
effective, there must be audio playback in the
Uconnect media player. McIntosh can control the
playback of audio as well as display the output
level decibel meters.
5
McIntosh
Skip Backward Press to skip backward. Press and hold to fast rewind.
Play/Pause Press to play/pause the track.
Skip Forward Press to skip forward. Press and hold to fast forward.
Press to repeat track. Press again to repeat playlist. Press again to turn off
Repeat
(works only with a USB device).
Press to change channel down. Press and hold to seek channel down. While
Change Channel Down using AM/FM, pressing the channel down will change the frequency by 0.2.
Pressing and holding in AM/FM will seek channels.
Press to change channel up. Press and hold to seek channel up. While using
Change Channel Up AM/FM, pressing the channel up will change the frequency by 0.2. Pressing
and holding in AM/FM will seek channels.
218 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE: OFF-R OAD PAGES S TATUS BAR

You cannot change the audio source within the
app. To do so, press the Media button, and then The Off-Road Pages Status Bar is located along the
press the Sources button. bottom of Off-Road Pages and is present in each of
the five selectable page options. It provides
To exit the app, press any of the buttons on the
continually updating information for the following
Bottom Menu Bar.
items:
For more information on the McIntosh app and its
 Current Transfer Case Status
functionality, please visit https://
www.mcintoshlabs.com.  Current Latitude/Longitude
 Current Altitude of the vehicle
OFF-ROAD PAGES — IF EQUIPPED Off Road Pages Button
Your vehicle may be equipped with Off-Road Off-Road Pages has the following selectable pages:
Pages, which provides the vehicle status while  Vehicle Dynamics
operating on off-road conditions. It supplies  Accessory Gauges
information relating to the vehicle ride height, the
 Pitch/Roll
status of the transfer case, the pitch and roll of the
vehicle, and the active Selec-Terrain mode.  Selec-Terrain
To access Off-Road Pages, press the Off Road  Suspension
button on the touchscreen from the Vehicle menu,
and then press “Launch Off-Road”.
Status Bar
1 — Transfer Case Status
2 — Current Latitude/Longitude
3 — Current Altitude
MULTIMEDIA 219
VEHICLE DYNAMICS ACCESSORY G AUGES PITCH & ROLL

The Vehicle Dynamics page displays information The Accessory Gauges page displays the current The Pitch & Roll page displays the vehicle’s current
concerning the vehicle’s drivetrain. status of the vehicle’s Coolant Temperature, Oil pitch (angle up and down) and roll (angle side to
The following information is displayed: Temperature, Oil Pressure, Transmission side) in degrees. The pitch and roll gauges provide
Temperature, and Battery Voltage. a visualization of the current vehicle angle.
 Steering angle in degrees
 Status of Transfer Case
Accessory Gauges Menu Pitch & Roll Menu
Vehicle Dynamics Menu 1 — Coolant Temperature 1 — Current Pitch

2 — Oil Temperature 2 — Current Roll
1 — Vehicle Dynamics 3 — Oil Pressure
2 — Steering Angle 4 — Transmission Temperature
3 — Front Axle Status 5 — Battery Voltage
220 MULTIMEDIA
SELEC-TERRAIN — IF E QUIPPED  Normal

STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
 Aero
The Selec-Terrain page displays the current The Remote Sound System controls are located on
Selec-Terrain mode through a high resolution  Entry/Exit the rear surface of the steering wheel. Reach
image. Adjusting the Selec-Terrain mode will alter NOTE: behind the wheel to access the switches.
the image on the screen. The vehicle must be in The wheel articulation will be represented by a
the ON/RUN position to display Selec-Terrain yellow color in the Wheel Articulation. If Ride Height
information. is adjusted, the Ride Height indicator on the screen
The selectable modes are as follows: will switch to the appropriate height and the Wheel
Articulation will show the movement and change in
 Rock — Vehicle Must Be In 4WD Low
height.
 Sand/Mud
 Snow
 Auto — Default
 Sport
NOTE: Steering Wheel Audio Controls
While in the Selec-Terrain pages, the Off-Road
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with
Pages Status Bar will also display the current
a push button in the center and controls the
Selec-Terrain mode.
volume and mode of the sound system. Pushing
SUSPENSION the top of the rocker switch increases the volume,
and pushing the bottom of the rocker switch
The Suspension page displays information decreases the volume.
concerning the vehicle’s suspension.
Suspension Menu Pushing the center button makes the radio
The following information is displayed: switch between the various modes available
 Wheel Articulation 1 — Wheel Articulation (AM/FM/SXM or Media, etc.)
2 — Current Ride Height
 Current Ride Height Status
 Off-Road 2
 Off-Road 1
MULTIMEDIA 221
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a

push button in the center. The function of the
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES The internal wireless radio operates within
guidelines found in radio frequency safety
left-hand control is different depending on which Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being standards and recommendations, which reflect
mode you are in. on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy the consensus of the scientific community.
The following describes the left-hand control performance from your radio. This condition may The radio manufacturer believes the internal
operation in each mode. be lessened or eliminated by repositioning the wireless radio is safe for use by consumers. The
mobile phone within the vehicle. This condition is level of energy emitted is far less than the
RADIO OPERATION not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless
does not satisfactorily improve from repositioning devices such as mobile phones. However, the use
Pushing the top of the switch will seek up for the the mobile phone, it is recommended that the
next listenable station, and pushing the bottom of of wireless radios may be restricted in some
volume be turned down or off during mobile phone situations or environments, such as aboard
the switch will seek down for the next listenable operation when not using the Uconnect system.
station. airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you are
The button located in the center of the left-hand REGULATORY AND SAFETY encouraged to ask for authorization before turning
5
on the wireless radio Ú page 372.
control will tune to the next preset station that you I NFORMATION
have programmed in the radio preset button.
US/CANADA
MEDIA M ODE Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
Pushing the top of the switch once goes to the next The radiated output power of the internal wireless
track on the selected media (AUX/USB/ radio is far below the FCC and IC radio frequency
Bluetooth®). Pushing the bottom of the switch exposure limits. Nevertheless, the wireless radio
once goes to the beginning of the current track, or will be used in such a manner that the radio is 8 in
to the beginning of the previous track if it is within (20 cm) or further from the human body.
eight seconds after the current track begins to
play.
222
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES The ABS is designed to function with the Original
Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) tires. Modification WARNING!
ANTI-L OCK BRAKE S YSTEM (ABS) may result in degraded ABS performance.  The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
The ABS provides increased vehicle stability and WARNING! following another vehicle too closely, or hydro-
brake performance under most braking conditions. planing.
 The ABS contains sophisticated electronic
The system automatically prevents wheel lock, and
equipment that may be susceptible to interfer-  The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle
enhances vehicle control during braking.
ence caused by improperly installed or high must never be exploited in a reckless or
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that output radio transmitting equipment. This dangerous manner that could jeopardize the
the ABS is working properly each time the vehicle interference can cause possible loss of user’s safety or the safety of others.
is started and driven. During this self-check, you anti-lock braking capability. Installation of
may hear a slight clicking sound as well as some such equipment should be performed by qual-
related motor noises. ified professionals. Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
The ABS is activated during braking when the Light
 Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
system detects one or more wheels are beginning their effectiveness and may lead to a collision. The yellow ABS Warning Light will turn on when the
to lock. Road conditions such as ice, snow, gravel, Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode and may
bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris, or panic stops Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you stay on for as long as four seconds.
may increase the likelihood of ABS activation(s). need to slow down or stop. If the ABS Warning Light remains on or comes on
You also may experience the following normal while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock portion
 The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of
characteristics when the ABS activates: of the brake system is not functioning and that
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it
 ABS motor noise or clicking sounds (you may service is required. However, the conventional
increase braking or steering efficiency beyond
continue to hear for a short time after the stop) brake system will continue to operate normally if
that afforded by the condition of the vehicle
the ABS Warning Light is on.
 Brake pedal pulsations. brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
 A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the (Continued)
stop.
SAFETY 223
If the ABS Warning Light is on, the brake system System Intervention If the driver accepts the suggestion provided by the
should be serviced as soon as possible to restore system by pushing the “OK” button on the left side
Using feedback obtained from the driver’s steering
the benefits of Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS of the steering wheel, the message will disappear
patterns, any buttons/switches that are pressed,
Warning Light does not come on when the ignition from the display.
and from the front camera, the system implements
is placed in the ON/RUN mode, have the light If the driver does not acknowledge the warning, it
two operating logics:
repaired as soon as possible. will be displayed for 60 seconds and then
 The first operating logic takes the driving style
DROWSY D RIVER D ETECTION (DDD) — disappear.
into account, observing the road and detecting
I F EQUIPPED to what extent the driver can continue driving NOTE:
with few lane crossing events. In the event of a DDD system failure, a dedicated
DDD detects when the driver is feeling fatigued message will appear in the instrument cluster
 The second operating logic measures the time
and warns the driver to pull over and take a break. display.
spent behind the wheel with the vehicle speed
To Activate/Deactivate above 40 mph (60 km/h) and below 110 mph
DDD can be activated and deactivated through the (180 km/h).
Uconnect system by selecting the following in NOTE:
order: If the conditions described above are not detected 6
1. “Driver Assistance” continuously during the entire driving period, the
“Drowsy Driver” message may be displayed later
2. “Drowsy Driver Detection”
than two or three hours. If the driving style indi-
cates that the driver is unable to follow the road
WARNING! trajectory and respect the horizontal lane
markings, the red symbol will appear on the
The DDD system is an aid for driving and does
instrument cluster display to suggest that the
not relieve the driver of the responsibility of DDD Warning Message
driver should stop for a break. An audible signal
driving the vehicle. If you experience fatigue
will also sound.
while driving, pull over safely for a break without
waiting for the DDD to intervene. Only return to
the road when you are in the right physical and
mental condition to prevent endangering
yourself and other drivers.
224 SAFETY
REAR SEAT R EMINDER ALERT (RSRA) Brake Assist System (BAS) Brake System Warning Light
RSRA will consider the presence of an object in the The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s The red Brake System Warning Light will turn on
rear seat when a rear entry/exit door is opened at braking capability during emergency braking when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode
the beginning of each key cycle. To activate, the maneuvers. The system detects an emergency and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
rear door must be open for more than one second braking situation by sensing the rate and amount If the Brake System Warning Light remains on or
and the vehicle must be placed in the ON/RUN of brake application and then applies optimum comes on while driving, it indicates that the brake
position within 10 minutes. When the potential pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce system is not functioning properly and that
presence of an object is determined and/or braking distances. The BAS complements the immediate service is required. If the Brake System
otherwise inferred, a message will appear in the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes Warning Light does not come on when the ignition
instrument cluster display reminding driver to very quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To is placed in the ON/RUN mode, have the light
check the rear seat(s) immediately after key off receive the benefit of the system, you must apply repaired as soon as possible.
accompanied by an alert upon exiting the vehicle. continuous braking pressure during the stopping
sequence (do not “pump” the brakes). Do not Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL (EBC) reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no EBD manages the distribution of the braking
SYSTEM longer desired. Once the brake pedal is released, torque between the front and rear axles by limiting
the BAS is deactivated. braking pressure to the rear axle. This is done to
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced EBC prevent overslip of the rear wheels to avoid vehicle
system. This system includes the Anti-Lock Brake WARNING! instability, and to prevent the rear axle from
System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), entering ABS before the front axle.
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD),
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM), Electronic
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded
Stability Control (ESC), Hill Start Assist (HSA), and
by prevailing road conditions. BAS cannot
Traction Control System (TCS). These systems work
prevent collisions, including those resulting from
together to enhance both vehicle stability and
excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery
control in various driving conditions.
surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of a
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Dynamic BAS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in
Steering Torque (DST), Rain Brake Support (RBS), a reckless or dangerous manner, which could
Ready Alert Braking (RAB), and Trailer Sway jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of
Control (TSC). others.
SAFETY 225
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) Electronic Stability Control (ESC)

WARNING!
ERM anticipates the potential for wheel lift by ESC enhances directional control and stability of
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC  Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot
the speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines corrects for oversteering or understeering of the prevent the natural laws of physics from
that the rate of change of the steering wheel angle vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
and vehicle’s speed are sufficient to potentially wheel(s) to assist in counteracting the above traction afforded by prevailing road condi-
cause wheel lift, it then applies the appropriate conditions. Engine power may also be reduced to tions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, including
brake and may also reduce engine power to lessen help the vehicle maintain the desired path. those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
the chance that wheel lift will occur. ERM can only driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydro-
 Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning more planing. ESC also cannot prevent accidents
reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during than appropriate for the steering wheel position.
severe or evasive driving maneuvers; it cannot resulting from loss of vehicle control due to
prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as  Understeer — when the vehicle is turning less inappropriate driver input for the conditions.
road conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking than appropriate for the steering wheel position. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
objects or other vehicles. ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESC
vehicle path intended by the driver and compares equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a
NOTE: reckless or dangerous manner which could
ERM is disabled any time the ESC is in “Full Off”
it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual 6
path does not match the intended path, ESC jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
mode (if equipped). See Ú page 225 for a others.
applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to
complete explanation of the available ESC modes.
assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer (Continued)
WARNING! condition.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road
located in the instrument cluster will start to flash
conditions and driving conditions, influence the
as soon as the ESC system becomes active. The
chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light also
cannot prevent all wheel lift or rollovers,
flashes when the Traction Control System (TCS) is
especially those that involve leaving the roadway
active. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
or striking objects or other vehicles. The
Light begins to flash during acceleration, ease up
capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle must
on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving
manner which could jeopardize the user's safety
to the prevailing road conditions.
or the safety of others.
226 SAFETY
Partial Off ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light

WARNING!
This mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes And ESC OFF Indicator Light
 Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly stuck. This mode may modify TCS and ESC The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
maintain your vehicle, may change the thresholds for activation, which allows for more Light in the instrument cluster will come
handling characteristics of your vehicle, and wheel spin than normally allowed. on when the ignition is placed in the ON/
may negatively affect the performance of the
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily push RUN mode. It should go out with the
ESC system. Changes to the steering system,
the ESC OFF button and the ESC OFF Indicator engine running. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction
suspension, braking system, tire type and size
Light will illuminate. To turn the ESC on again, Indicator Light comes on continuously with the
or wheel size may adversely affect ESC perfor-
momentarily push the ESC OFF button and the ESC engine running, a malfunction has been detected
mance. Improperly inflated and unevenly worn
OFF Indicator Light will turn off. in the ESC system. If this light remains on after
tires may also degrade ESC performance. Any
NOTE: several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
vehicle modification or poor vehicle mainte-
For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes, the driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater
nance that reduces the effectiveness of the
push and release of the button will toggle the ESC than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer
ESC system can increase the risk of loss of
modes. Multiple attempts may be required to as soon as possible to have the problem
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
return to "ESC On" mode. diagnosed and corrected.
injury and death.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
WARNING! starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and
ESC Operating Modes the ESC system becomes active. The ESC
 When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS function-
Depending upon model and mode of operation, the ality of ESC (except for the limited slip feature Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes
ESC system may have multiple operating modes. described in the TCS section) has been when TCS is active. If the ESC Activation/
ESC On disabled and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during
be illuminated. When in “Partial Off” mode, acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC. as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your
Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC system the engine power reduction feature of TCS is
disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions.
will be in this mode. This mode should be used for
most driving conditions. Alternate ESC modes offered by the ESC system is reduced. The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates the
should only be used for specific reasons as noted customer has elected to have the
 Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when
in the following paragraphs. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) in a
the ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
reduced mode.
SAFETY 227
NOTE: 3. Active (feature is enabled and actively  4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
 The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light controlling vehicle speed).  5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
and the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on  6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
Enabling HDC
momentarily each time the ignition is placed in
the ON/RUN mode. HDC is enabled by pushing the HDC switch, but the  7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)
following conditions must also be met to enable  8th = 5.0 mph (8 km/h)
 Each time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
HDC:
mode, the ESC system will be on even if it was NOTE:
turned off previously.  The driveline is in 4WD Low. During HDC the +/- shifter input is used for HDC
 The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking  The vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h). target speed selection, but will not affect the gear
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the chosen by the transmission. When actively
 The parking brake is released.
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive controlling HDC the transmission will shift appro-
 The driver door is closed. priately for the driver-selected set speed and corre-
following the maneuver that caused the ESC
activation. Activating HDC sponding driving conditions.
Once HDC is enabled it will activate automatically Driver Override
Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped
if driven down a grade of sufficient magnitude. The The driver may override HDC activation with
HDC is intended for low speed off-road 6
set speed for HDC is selectable by the driver, and throttle or brake application at any time.
driving while in 4WD Low. HDC maintains can be adjusted by using the gear shift +/-. The
vehicle speed while descending hills Deactivating HDC
following summarizes the HDC set speeds:
during various driving situations. HDC HDC will be deactivated but remain available if any
controls vehicle speed by actively controlling the HDC Target Set Speeds of the following conditions occur:
brakes.  P = No set speed. HDC may be enabled but will
 The driver overrides HDC set speed with throttle
HDC Has Three States: not activate. or brake application.
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not  R = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
 Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h) but
activate).  N = 1.2 mph (2 km/h) remains below 40 mph (64 km/h).
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but  D = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)  The vehicle is on a downhill grade of insufficient
activation conditions are not met, or driver is  1st = 0.6 mph (1 km/h) magnitude, is on level ground, or is on an uphill
actively overriding with brake or throttle grade.
application).  2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
 The vehicle is shifted to PARK.
 3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)
228 SAFETY
Disabling HDC  The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash when  The gear selection must match vehicle uphill
HDC will be deactivated and disabled if any of the HDC deactivates due to overheated brakes. The direction (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward
following conditions occur: flashing will stop and HDC will activate again gear; vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE (R)
once the brakes have cooled sufficiently. gear).
 The driver pushes the HDC switch.
 HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward
 The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low. WARNING! gears. The system will not activate if the trans-
 The parking brake is applied. HDC is only intended to assist the driver in mission is in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). For vehi-
 The driver door opens. controlling vehicle speed when descending hills. cles equipped with a manual transmission, if
The driver must remain attentive to the driving the clutch is pressed, HSA will remain active.
 The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph
conditions and is responsible for maintaining a
(32 km/h) for greater than 70 seconds. WARNING!
safe vehicle speed.
 The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph
There may be situations where the Hill Start
(64 km/h) (HDC exits immediately).
Hill Start Assist (HSA) Assist (HSA) will not activate and slight rolling
 HDC detects excessive brake temperature. may occur, such as on minor hills or with a
HSA is designed to mitigate roll back from a
Feedback To The Driver loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer. HSA is
complete stop while on an incline. If the driver
not a substitute for active driving involvement. It
The instrument cluster has an HDC icon and the releases the brake while stopped on an incline,
is always the driver’s responsibility to be
HDC switch has an LED icon, which offers feedback HSA will continue to hold the brake pressure for a
attentive to distance to other vehicles, people,
to the driver about the state HDC is in. short period. If the driver does not apply the
and objects, and most importantly brake
 The cluster icon and switch lamp will illuminate throttle before this time expires, the system will
operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle
and remain on solid when HDC is enabled or release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll
under all road conditions. Your complete
activated. This is the normal operating condition down the hill as normal.
attention is always required while driving to
for HDC. The following conditions must be met in order for maintain safe control of your vehicle. Failure to
 The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for HSA to activate: follow these warnings can result in a collision or
several seconds, then extinguish when the  The feature must be enabled. serious personal injury.
driver pushes the HDC switch but enable condi-
 The vehicle must be stopped.
tions are not met.
 The parking brake must be off.
 The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for
several seconds, then extinguish when HDC  The driver door must be closed.
disables due to excess speed.  The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
SAFETY 229
Disabling And Enabling HSA Rain Brake Support (RBS) BLD may remain enabled even if TCS and
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) are in reduced
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To RBS may improve braking performance in wet
modes.
change the current setting, proceed as follows: conditions. It will periodically apply a small amount
 If disabling HSA using your instrument cluster of brake pressure to remove any water buildup on Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
display, see Ú page 92 for further information. the front brake rotors. It functions when the TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an
windshield wipers are in LO or HI speed. When RBS excessively swaying trailer and will take the
 If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings, see is active, there is no notification to the driver and
Ú page 193 for further information. appropriate actions to attempt to stop the sway.
no driver interaction is required. TSC will become active automatically once an
Towing With HSA Ready Alert Braking (RAB) excessively swaying trailer is recognized.
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll RAB may reduce the time required to reach full NOTE:
back while towing a trailer. braking during emergency braking situations. It TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying. Always
anticipates when an emergency braking situation use caution when towing a trailer and follow the
WARNING! may occur by monitoring how fast the throttle is trailer tongue weight recommendations
 If you use a trailer brake controller with your released by the driver. The Electronic Brake Ú page 177.
trailer, the trailer brakes may be activated and Controller (EBC) will prepare the brake system for When TSC is functioning, the ESC Activation/ 6
deactivated with the brake switch. If so, there a panic stop. Malfunction Indicator Light will flash, the engine
may not be enough brake pressure to hold Traction Control System (TCS) power may be reduced and you may feel the
both the vehicle and the trailer on a hill when brakes being applied to individual wheels to
the brake pedal is released. In order to avoid The TCS monitors the amount of wheel spin of
attempt to stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is
rolling down an incline while resuming accel- each of the driven wheels. If wheel spin is
disabled when the ESC system is in the “Partial
eration, manually activate the trailer brake or detected, the TCS may apply brake pressure to the
Off” mode.
apply more vehicle brake pressure prior to spinning wheel(s) and/or reduce engine power to
releasing the brake pedal. provide enhanced acceleration and stability. A WARNING!
feature of the TCS, Brake Limited Differential (BLD)
 HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the functions similarly to a limited slip differential and If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle
parking brake fully when exiting your vehicle. controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one down, stop at the nearest safe location, and
Also, be certain to place the transmission in wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the adjust the trailer load to eliminate trailer sway.
PARK. other, the system will apply the brake of the
 Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
spinning wheel. This will allow more engine power
collision or serious personal injury. to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning.
230 SAFETY
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS The BSM detection zone covers approximately one
lane in width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft
 The BSM system may experience dropouts
(blinking on and off) of the side mirror warning
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) (3.8 m). The zone length starts at the side of the indicator lamps when a motorcycle or any small
vehicle, near the B-pillar, and extends object remains at the side of the vehicle for
BSM system uses two radar sensors, located approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear fascia/ extended periods of time (more than a couple of
inside the rear fascia/bumper, to detect highway bumper of the vehicle. The BSM system monitors seconds).
licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks, the detection zones on both sides of the vehicle The area on the rear fascia/bumper where the
motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones when the vehicle speed reaches approximately radar sensors are located must remain free of
from the rear/front/side of the vehicle. 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert the driver snow, ice, and dirt/road contamination so that the
of vehicles in these areas. BSM system can function properly. Do not block
NOTE: the area of the rear fascia/bumper where the
 The BSM system DOES NOT alert the driver radar sensors are located with foreign objects
about rapidly approaching vehicles (greater (bumper stickers, bicycle racks, etc.).
then 15 mph) that are outside the detection
zones.
 The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT
change if your vehicle is towing a trailer. There-
fore, visually verify the adjacent lane is clear for
both your vehicle and trailer before making a
Rear Detection Zones lane change. If the trailer or other object (i.e.,
bicycle, sports equipment) extends beyond the
When the vehicle is started, the BSM Warning Light side of your vehicle, this may result in random
will momentarily illuminate in both outside false detections on the trailer, and false chimes
rearview mirrors to let the driver know that the when the turn signal is used Ú page 193.
system is operational. The BSM system sensors Sensor Location (Left Side Shown)
operate when the vehicle is in any forward gear.
SAFETY 231
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the Entering From The Side
detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from
light located in the outside mirrors. In addition, either side of the vehicle.
when the turn signal is activated during the alert on
the side of the vehicle corresponding to the alert,
an audible (chime) alert can be heard. During this
audible (chime) alert, the radio volume will be
reduced Ú page 233.
Rear Monitoring
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative
Side Monitoring speed of less than 15 mph (24 km/h) and the
vehicle remains in the blind spot for approximately 6
Entering From The Rear 1.5 seconds, the warning light will be illuminated.
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on If the difference in speed between the two vehicles
either side and enter the rear detection zone with is greater than 15 mph (24 km/h), the warning
BSM Warning Light a relative speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h). light will not illuminate.
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from
three different entry points (Side, Rear, Front)
while driving to see if an alert is necessary. The
BSM system will issue an alert during these types
of zone entries.
232 SAFETY
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that Rear Cross Path (RCP)
are traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle
RCP is intended to aid the driver when backing out
in adjacent lanes Ú page 372. of parking spaces where their vision of oncoming
vehicles may be blocked. Proceed slowly and
cautiously out of the parking space until the rear
end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will
then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an
oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.
Overtaking/Approaching
Opposing Traffic
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid
to help detect objects in the blind spot zones.
The BSM system is not designed to detect RCP Detection Zones
pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. Even if your RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both
vehicle is equipped with the BSM system, always sides of the vehicle, for objects that are moving
Overtaking/Passing check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance over your toward the side of the vehicle with a minimum
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert shoulder, and use your turn signal before speed of approximately 5 mph (8 km/h), to objects
on stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, changing lanes. Failure to do so can result in moving a maximum of approximately 20 mph
walls, foliage, berms, etc. However, occasionally serious injury or death. (32 km/h), such as in parking lot situations.
the system may alert on such objects. This is
normal operation and your vehicle does not require
service.
SAFETY 233
NOTE: Blind Spot Alert Lights Only Blind Spot Alert Off
In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can be When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM When the BSM system is turned off, there will be
obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate no visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or
sensors are blocked by other structures or side view mirror based on a detected object. RCP systems.
vehicles, the system will not be able to alert the However, when the system is operating in Rear
driver. NOTE:
Cross Path (RCP) mode, the system will respond The BSM system will store the current operating
When RCP is on (Blind Spot Lights Only or Blind with both visual and audible alerts when a mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the
Spot Lights/Chimes) and the vehicle is in detected object is present. Whenever an audible vehicle is started, the previously stored mode will
REVERSE, the driver is alerted using both the alert is requested, the radio is muted. be recalled and used.
visual and audible alarms, including reducing the Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
radio volume. FORWARD C OLLISION WARNING (FCW)
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
WARNING! mode, the BSM system will provide a visual alert in WITH MITIGATION
the appropriate side view mirror based on a The FCW with Mitigation system provides the driver
Rear Cross Path (RCP) Detection is not a back up detected object. If the turn signal is then activated,
aid system. It is intended to be used to help a with audible warnings, visual warnings (within the
and it corresponds to an alert present on that side
driver detect a vehicle in a parking lot situation. of the vehicle, an audible chime will also be
instrument cluster display), and may apply a 6
Drivers must be careful when backing up, even limited braking to warn the driver when it detects a
sounded. Whenever a turn signal and detected potential frontal collision. The warnings and limited
when using RCP. Always check carefully behind object are present on the same side at the same
your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to braking are intended to provide the driver with
time, both the visual and audible alerts will be enough time to react, avoid or mitigate the
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, issued. In addition to the audible alert the radio (if
obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. potential collision.
on) will also be muted.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or NOTE:
death. NOTE: FCW monitors the information from the forward
Whenever an audible alert is requested by the looking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake
BSM system, the radio is also muted. Controller (EBC), to calculate the probability of a
Blind Spot Modes When the system is in RCP, the system shall forward collision. When the system determines
Three selectable modes of operation are available respond with both visual and audible alerts when a that a forward collision is probable, the driver will
in the Uconnect system Ú page 193. detected object is present. Whenever an audible be provided with audible and visual warnings and
alert is requested, the radio is also muted. Turn/ may provide a brake jerk warning. If the driver does
hazard signal status is ignored; the RCP state not take action based upon these progressive
always requests the chime.
234 SAFETY
warnings, then the system will provide a limited When the system determines a collision with the
level of active braking to help slow the vehicle and vehicle in front of you is no longer probable, the WARNING!
mitigate the potential forward collision. If the driver warning message will be deactivated Ú page 372. Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended
reacts to the warnings by braking and the system NOTE: to avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW
determines that the driver intends to avoid the detect every type of potential collision. The driver
collision by braking but has not applied sufficient  The minimum speed for FCW activation is
has the responsibility to avoid a collision by
brake force, the system will compensate and 3 mph (5 km/h).
controlling the vehicle via braking and steering.
provide additional brake force as required.  The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects Failure to follow this warning could lead to
If a Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation event other than vehicles, such as guard rails or sign serious injury or death.
begins at a speed below 39 mph (62 km/h), the posts based on the course prediction. This is
system may provide maximum braking to mitigate expected and is a part of normal FCW activation
and functionality. FCW Braking Status And Sensitivity
the potential forward collision. If the Forward
Collision Warning with Mitigation event stops the  It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent The FCW Sensitivity and Active Braking status are
vehicle completely, the system will hold the vehicle such misuse of the system, after four Active programmable through the Uconnect system
at a standstill for two seconds and then release the Braking events within an ignition cycle, the Ú page 193.
brakes. Active Braking portion of FCW will be deacti- NOTE:
vated until the next ignition cycle.  The default sensitivity of FCW is the “Medium”
 The FCW system is intended for on-road use setting and the system status is “Warning &
only. If the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW Braking”. This allows the system to warn the
system should be deactivated to prevent unnec- driver of a possible collision with the vehicle in
essary warnings to the surroundings. If the front using audible/visual warnings and it
vehicle enters 4WD Low, the FCW system will be applies autonomous braking.
automatically deactivated.  Changing the FCW status to the “Far” setting
allows the system to warn the driver of a
possible collision with the vehicle in front using
an audible/visual warning when the latter is at a
farther distance than the “Medium” setting. This
FCW Message
provides the most reaction time to avoid a
possible collision.
SAFETY 235
 Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting FCW Limited Warning
allows the system to warn the driver of a
If the instrument cluster displays “Automatic
possible collision with the vehicle in front when
Emergency Braking (AEB) Limited Service
the distance between the vehicle in the front is
Required” or “Limited Functionality Clean Front
much closer. This setting provides less reaction
Windshield” momentarily, there may be a
time than the “Far” and “Medium” settings,
condition that limits FCW functionality. Although
which allows for a more dynamic driving experi-
the vehicle is still drivable under normal
ence.
conditions, the active braking may not be fully
NOTE: available. Once the condition that limited the
 Changing the FCW status to “Only Warning” system performance is no longer present, the
prevents the system from providing limited system will return to its full performance state. If PEB Message
active braking, or additional brake support if the the problem persists, see an authorized dealer.
If a PEB event begins at a speed below 39 mph
driver is not braking adequately in the event of Service FCW Warning (62 km/h), the system may provide maximum
a potential frontal collision, but maintains the braking to mitigate the potential collision with a
audible and visual warnings. If the system turns off, the instrument cluster
displays “AEB Unavailable Service Required”. AEB pedestrian/cyclist. If the PEB event stops the
 Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the vehicle completely, the system will hold the vehicle
6
Unavailable Service Required indicates there is an
system from providing autonomous braking, or internal system fault. Although the vehicle is still at a standstill for two seconds and then release the
additional brake support if the driver is not drivable under normal conditions, have the system brakes. When the system determines a collision
braking adequately in the event of a potential checked by an authorized dealer. with the pedestrian/cyclist in front of you is no
frontal collision. longer probable, the warning message will be
Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB) — deactivated.
 The system will retain the last setting selected
by the driver after ignition shut down. If Equipped The minimum speed for PEB activation is 3 mph
PEB is a subsystem of the Forward Collision (5 km/h).
 FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as
Warning (FCW) system which provides the driver
overhead objects, ground reflections, objects
with audible warnings and visual warnings, in the
not in the path of the vehicle, stationary objects
instrument cluster display. It may apply limited
that are far away, oncoming traffic, or leading
automatic braking when it detects a potential
vehicles with the same or higher rate of speed.
frontal collision with a pedestrian.
 FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the unavail-
able screens.
236 SAFETY
NOTE: The tire pressure will vary with temperature by

WARNING! The PEB system will retain the last setting selected about 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This
Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB) is not by the driver after ignition shut down. The system means that when the outside temperature
intended to avoid a collision on its own, nor can will not reset to the default setting when the decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire
PEB detect every type of potential collision with vehicle is restarted. pressure should always be set based on cold
a pedestrian. The driver has the responsibility to Intersection Collision Assist (ICA) — inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle via pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for
If Equipped at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile
braking and steering. Failure to follow this
warning could lead to serious injury or death. ICA uses three front radar sensors located in the (1.6 km) after a three-hour period. The tire
front fascia/bumper, to detect oncoming vehicles pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven
from the front or side when driving through an — this is normal and there should be no
Turning PEB On Or Off intersection. When the system determines that a adjustment for this increased pressure.
NOTE: collision is probable when turning across For information on how to properly inflate the
The default status of PEB is “On.” This allows the oncoming traffic, the system will attempt to
vehicle’s tires, see Ú page 341.
system to warn you of a possible frontal collision mitigate a possible collision by decelerating the
with the pedestrian. vehicle. When the system determines that a The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure
The PEB button is located in the Uconnect display collision with a crossing vehicle is probable, the if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure
system may apply additional braking to warning threshold for any reason, including low
in the Control settings Ú page 193.
supplement the driver braking input to attempt to temperature effects, or natural pressure loss
To turn the PEB system off, push the Pedestrian mitigate a possible collision. The system will also through the tire.
Emergency Braking button. provide audible warnings and visual warnings The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low
To turn the PEB system back on, push the Warning (shown in the instrument cluster). If the driver tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and
Active Braking button. determines acceleration is needed to avoid a will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above
Changing the PEB status to “Off” deactivates the collision, when the accelerator is pressed ICA will recommended cold tire pressure. Once the low tire
system, so no warning or active braking will be cancel. pressure warning has been illuminated, the tire
available in case of a possible frontal collision with pressure must be increased to the recommended
the pedestrian/cyclist.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM cold tire pressure in order for the TPMS Warning
(TPMS) Light to be turned off.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure
based on the vehicle recommended cold tire
pressure Ú page 372.
SAFETY 237
NOTE: NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need
CAUTION!
 The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire
to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa)  The TPMS has been optimized for the original care and maintenance, or to provide warning of
above the recommended cold placard pressure in equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures a tire failure or condition.
order to turn the TPMS Warning Light off. and warnings have been established for the
 The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure
The system will automatically update and the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesir-
gauge while adjusting your tire pressure, unless
TPMS Warning Light will extinguish once the able system operation or sensor damage may
equipped with Tire Fill Alert.
updated tire pressures have been received. The result when using replacement equipment
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.  Driving on a significantly underinflated tire
above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this The TPMS sensor is not designed for use on causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire
information. aftermarket wheels and may contribute to a failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel effi-
poor overall system performance or sensor ciency and tire tread life, and may affect the
For example, your vehicle has a recommended vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
damage. Customers are encouraged to use
cold (parked for more than three hours) tire
OEM wheels to ensure proper TPMS feature  The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
pressure of 33 psi (227 kPa). If the ambient
operation. maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility
temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the measured tire
pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a temperature drop  Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the
to maintain correct tire pressure using an accu- 6
to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) rate tire gauge, even if underinflation has not
approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire pressure sensor to become inoperable. After using an reached the level to trigger illumination of the
is sufficiently low enough to turn on the TPMS aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended TPMS Warning Light.
Warning Light. Driving the vehicle may cause the that you take your vehicle to an authorized  Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire
tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi dealership to have your sensor function pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual
(193 kPa), but the TPMS Warning Light will still be checked. tire pressure in the tire.
on. In this situation, the TPMS Warning Light will The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) uses
 After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
turn off only after the tires have been inflated to wireless technology with wheel rim-mounted
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
the vehicle’s recommended cold tire pressure electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels.
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
value. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the
valve stem, which could damage the Tire Pres-
sure Monitoring System sensor. valve stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the
receiver module.
238 SAFETY
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Low Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four
Pressure Warnings active road tire(s), you should stop as soon as
possible, and inflate the low tire(s) that is in a
The TPMS Warning Light will illuminate in different color on the graphic display to the
the instrument cluster, and an audible vehicle’s recommended cold tire pressure
chime will be activated, when one or displayed in the “Inflate to XX” message.
more of the four active road tire
pressures are low. In addition, the instrument NOTE:
cluster will display an "Inflate to XX" message and When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need
a graphic display of the pressure value(s) with the to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa)
low tire(s) in a different color Ú page 92. above the recommended cold placard pressure in
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Display order to turn the TPMS Warning Light off.
NOTE:
NOTE: The system will automatically update, the graphic
Your system can be set to display pressure units in
display of the pressure value(s) will return to its
It is particularly important for you to regularly check PSI, BAR, or kPa.
original color and the TPMS Warning Light will
the tire pressure in all of your tires and to maintain
extinguish once the updated tire pressure(s) have
the proper pressure.
been received. The system will automatically
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) update the graphic display of the pressure value(s)
consists of the following components: and will return to its original color. The TPMS
 Receiver module Warning Light will extinguish once the updated tire
 Four Tire Pressure Monitoring System sensors pressure(s) have been received in the case when
the ignition is ON. In the case when the ignition is
 Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System
OFF, the ignition on the vehicle has to be turned ON
messages, which display in the instrument and may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
cluster, and a graphic displaying tire pressures above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this
 TPMS Warning Light information for the pressure value(s) to be
Low Tire Pressure Monitoring System Display updated.
SAFETY 239
Service TPMS Warning NOTE: display dashes (--) in place of the pressure value.
Only vehicles equipped with a full size matching Once you repair or replace the original road tire,
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light
spare (i.e., matching with a road wheel) come with and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the spare
will flash on and off for 75 seconds, and remain on
a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor tire, the TPMS will update automatically.
solid when a system fault is detected. The system
fault will also sound a chime. The instrument mounted in the spare tire. In either option of having In addition, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
cluster display will display a “SERVICE TPM a full size spare equipped or not, the tire pressure Warning Light will turn off and the graphic in the
SYSTEM” message for a minimum of five seconds. is not monitored or displayed on the cluster for the instrument cluster display will display a new
This message is then followed by a graphic display, corresponding spare tire location. If you install the pressure value instead of dashes (--), as long as no
with “--“ in place of the pressure value(s), spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning
indicating which Tire Pressure Monitoring System below the low-pressure warning limit, upon the limit in any of the four active road tires. The vehicle
sensor(s) is not being received. next ignition switch cycle, the Tire Pressure Moni- may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
toring System Warning Light will remain on, a 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will chime will sound, and the instrument cluster this information.
repeat, providing the system fault still exists. If the display will still display a pressure value in the
system fault no longer exists, the Tire Pressure different color graphic display and an “Inflate to TPMS Deactivation — If Equipped
Monitoring System Warning Light will no longer XX” message will be displayed. After driving the The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) can
flash, the "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message will be deactivated by replacing all four wheel and tire
6
vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
not be present, and a pressure value will be (24 km/h), the Tire Pressure Monitoring System assemblies (road tires) with wheel and tire
displayed instead of dashes. A system fault can Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds assemblies that do not have TPMS sensors, such
occur by any of the following: and then remain on solid. In addition, the as when installing winter wheel and tire
 Jamming due to electronic devices or driving instrument cluster display will display a “SERVICE assemblies on your vehicle.
next to facilities emitting the same Radio TPM SYSTEM" message for five seconds and then To deactivate the TPMS, first, replace all four wheel
Frequencies as the TPMS sensors. display dashes (--) in place of the pressure value. and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires not
 Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime equipped with Tire Pressure Monitoring System
housings. will sound, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for 20 minutes
Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime,
 Using tire chains on the vehicle. and then remain on solid, and the instrument the TPMS Warning Light will flash on and off for
 Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS cluster display will display a "SERVICE TPM 75 seconds and then remain on. The instrument
sensors. SYSTEM" message for five seconds and then cluster will display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM”
message and then display dashes (--) in place of
the pressure values.
240 SAFETY
Beginning with the next ignition cycle, the TPMS NOTE: Operation:
will no longer chime or display the “SERVICE TPM  Only one tire can be filled at a time when using  The horn will chirp once to let the user know
SYSTEM” message in the instrument cluster but the Tire Fill Alert system. when to stop filling the tire, when it reaches
dashes (--) will remain in place of the pressure recommended pressure.
 The Tire Fill Alert feature cannot be entered if an
values.
existing TPMS fault is set to “active” or if the  The horn will chirp three times if the tire is over-
To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel and system is in deactivation mode (if equipped). filled and will continue to chirp every five
tire assemblies (road tires) with tires equipped with seconds if the user continues to inflate the tire.
TPMS sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for up to The system will be activated when the system
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS detects an increase in tire pressure while filling the  The horn will chirp once again when enough air
will chime, the TPMS Warning Light will flash on tire. The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode with is let out to reach proper inflation level.
and off for 75 seconds and then turn off. The the transmission in PARK for vehicles equipped  The horn will also chirp three times if the tire is
instrument cluster will display the “SERVICE TPM with an automatic transmission. For vehicles then underinflated and will continue to chirp
SYSTEM” message and then display pressure equipped with a manual transmission, the parking every five seconds if the user continues to
values in place of the dashes. On the next ignition brake must be applied. deflate the tire.
cycle the "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message will no NOTE: Selectable Tire Fill Alert (STFA) —
longer be displayed as long as no system fault It is not required to have the engine running to
exists. enter Tire Fill Alert mode. If Equipped
The hazard lamps will come on to confirm the The Selectable Tire Fill Alert (STFA) system is an
Tire Fill Alert optional feature that is included as part of the
vehicle is in Tire Fill Alert mode. If the hazard lamps
This feature notifies the user when the placard tire do not come on while inflating the tire, the Tire normal Tire Fill Alert system. The system is
pressure is attained while inflating or deflating the Pressure Monitoring System sensor may be in an designed to allow you to select a pressure to inflate
tire. inoperative position, preventing the TPMS sensor or deflate the vehicle's front and rear axle tires to,
The customer may choose to disable or enable the signal from being received. In this case, the vehicle and to provide feedback while inflating or deflating
Tire Fill Alert feature in the apps menu of the may need to be moved slightly forward or the vehicle's tires.
Uconnect system. backward.
When Tire Fill Alert mode is entered, the tire
pressure display screen will be displayed in the
instrument cluster.
SAFETY 241
In the Selectable Tire Fill Alert application, which is When Tire Fill Alert mode is entered, the tire OCCUPANT R ESTRAINT S YSTEMS
located in the apps menu of the Uconnect system, pressure screen will be displayed in the instrument
you will be able to select a pressure setting for both cluster. If the hazard lamps do not come on while FEATURES
the front and rear axle tire pressures by scrolling inflating or deflating the tire, the Tire Pressure  Seat Belt Systems
through a pressure range from ≥15 psi to XX in 1 Monitoring System sensor may be in an
 Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
psi increments for each axle setting. inoperative position, preventing the TPMS sensor
signal from being received. In this case, the vehicle  Child Restraints
XX = the vehicle's cold placard pressure values for
the front and rear axles as shown on the vehicle may need to be moved slightly forward or Some of the safety features described in this
placard pressure label. backward. section may be standard equipment on some
Horn chirps will indicate STFA status as tires are models, or may be optional equipment on others. If
You may also store pressure values chosen for
inflated/deflated. The horn will chirp under the you are not sure, ask an authorized dealer.
each axle in the Uconnect system application as
following STFA states:
preset pressure values. Up to two sets of preset I MPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
pressure values can be stored in the Uconnect 1. The horn will chirp once when the selected
system for the front and rear axle. Once you select pressure is reached to let you know when to Please pay close attention to the information in
the tire pressures for the front and rear axles that stop inflating or deflating the tire. this section. It tells you how to use your restraint
you want to inflate or deflate to, you can begin 2. The horn will chirp three times if the tire is
system properly, to keep you and your passengers 6
inflating or deflating one tire at a time. as safe as possible.
overinflated or over-deflated.
NOTE: Here are some simple steps you can take to
3. The horn will chirp once again when enough air minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
The STFA system will only support inflating or is added or removed to reach proper selected
deflating one tire at a time. pressure level. 1. Children 12 years old and under should
The system will be activated when the TPMS always ride buckled up in the rear seat of a
vehicle with a rear seat.
receiver module detects a change in tire pressure.
The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode, with the
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS 2. A child who is not big enough to wear the
transmission in PARK in vehicles with an automatic Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle seat belt properly must be secured in
transmission, and in NEUTRAL with the parking vehicle are the restraint systems: the appropriate child restraint or
brake engaged in vehicles with a manual belt-positioning booster seat in a rear seating
transmission. The hazard lamps will come on to position Ú page 262.
confirm the vehicle is in Tire Fill Alert mode.
242 SAFETY
3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
rear-facing child restraint) must ride in the WARNING!
(BeltAlert)
front passenger seat, move the seat as far  Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
back as possible and use the proper child Driver And Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
restraint Ú page 262. front air bag can cause death or serious injury BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind
to a child 12 years or younger, including a the driver and outboard front seat
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt
child in a rear-facing child restraint. passenger (if equipped with outboard
behind them or under their arm.
front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle
5. You should read the instructions provided with  Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the their seat belts. The BeltAlert feature is active
your child restraint to make sure that you are front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing whenever the ignition switch is in the START or
using it properly. child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle ON/RUN position.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and does not have a rear seat, do not transport a
rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle. Initial Indication
shoulder belts properly.
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch
7. The driver and front passenger seats should is first in the START or ON/RUN position, a chime
be moved back as far as practical to allow the SEAT BELT S YSTEMS will signal for a few seconds. If the driver or
front air bags room to inflate. outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver,
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your even on short trips. Someone on the road may be outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment a poor driver and could cause a collision that unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in the
occurs, the side air bags will inflate forcefully includes you. This can happen far away from home START or ON/RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder
into the space between occupants and the or on your own street. Light will turn on and remain on until both outboard
door and occupants could be injured. front seat belts are buckled. The outboard front
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when an
they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a
modified to accommodate a disabled person, outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
collision. Some of the worst injuries happen when
see Ú page 369 for customer service contact people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts
information. reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of
injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle.
Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all
times.
SAFETY 243
BeltAlert Warning Sequence The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not
active when the outboard front passenger seat is WARNING!
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when
the vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered when an  Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
speed range and the driver or outboard front seat animal or other items are placed on the outboard more severe injuries in a collision. The air
passenger is unbuckled (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
front passenger seat BeltAlert) (the outboard front (if equipped). It is recommended that pets be properly. In some collisions, the air bags won’t
passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even
outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied). The harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat though you have air bags.
BeltAlert warning sequence starts by blinking the belts, and cargo is properly stowed.
 In a collision, you and your passengers can
Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an suffer much greater injuries if you are not
intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not properly buckled up. You can strike the inte-
sequence has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder recommend deactivating BeltAlert. rior of your vehicle or other passengers, or you
Light will remain on until the seat belts are NOTE: can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always be
buckled. The BeltAlert warning sequence may If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or sure you and others in your vehicle are
repeat based on vehicle speed until the driver and outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with buckled up properly.
occupied outboard front seat passenger seat belts outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is 6
are buckled. The driver should instruct all  It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside
unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
occupants to buckle their seat belts. on and remain on until the driver and outboard riding in these areas are more likely to be seri-
Change Of Status front seat passenger seat belts are buckled. ously injured or killed.
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if Lap/Shoulder Belts
 Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
equipped with outboard front passenger seat All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped
BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while the vehicle that is not equipped with seats and
with lap/shoulder belts. seat belts.
vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert warning sequence
will begin until the seat belts are buckled again. The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during (Continued)
very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows
the shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely
with you under normal conditions. However, in a
collision the seat belt will lock and reduce your risk
of striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown
out of the vehicle.
244 SAFETY

 Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat  A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk  A seat belt that is worn under your arm is
and using a seat belt properly. Occupants, of injury in a collision. The seat belt forces dangerous. Your body could strike the inside
including the driver, should always wear their won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, surfaces of the vehicle in a collision,
seat belts whether or not an air bag is also but across your abdomen. Always wear the lap increasing head and neck injury. A seat belt
provided at their seating position to minimize part of your seat belt as low as possible and worn under the arm can cause internal inju-
the risk of severe injury or death in the event keep it snug. ries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder bones.
of a crash. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that
 A twisted seat belt may not protect you prop-
your strongest bones will take the force in a
 Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make erly. In a collision, it could even cut into you.
collision.
your injuries in a collision much worse. You Be sure the seat belt is flat against your body,
might suffer internal injuries, or you could without twists. If you can’t straighten a seat  A shoulder belt placed behind you will not
even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these belt in your vehicle, take it to an authorized protect you from injury during a collision. You
instructions to wear your seat belt safely and dealer immediately and have it fixed. are more likely to hit your head in a collision if
to keep your passengers safe, too. you do not wear your shoulder belt. The lap
 A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong
and shoulder belt are meant to be used
 Two people should never be belted into a buckle will not protect you properly. The lap
together.
single seat belt. People belted together can portion could ride too high on your body,
crash into one another in a collision, hurting possibly causing internal injuries. Always  A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
one another badly. Never use a lap/shoulder buckle your seat belt into the buckle nearest collision and leave you with no protection.
belt or a lap belt for more than one person, no you. Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
matter what their size. checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
 A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
Damaged parts must be replaced immedi-
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too
ately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat
far forward, increasing the possibility of injury.
belt system. If your vehicle is involved in a
Wear your seat belt snugly.
collision, or if you have questions regarding
(Continued) seat belt or retractor conditions, take your
vehicle to an authorized FCA dealer or autho-
rized FCA Certified Collision Care Program
facility for inspection.
SAFETY 245
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder
and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back
is comfortable and not resting on your neck.
and adjust the seat.
The retractor will withdraw any slack in the
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of shoulder belt.
the front seat, and next to your arm in the rear
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button
seat (for vehicles equipped with a rear seat).
on the buckle. The seat belt will automatically
Grab the latch plate and pull out the seat belt.
retract to its stowed position. If necessary,
Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as
slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow
necessary to allow the seat belt to go around
the seat belt to retract fully.
your lap.
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies
low across your hips, below your abdomen. To Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted
remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on lap/shoulder belt.
the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is 1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to
too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap the anchor point. 6
belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding 2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above
under the seat belt in a collision. the latch plate, grab and twist the seat belt
webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that
begins immediately above the latch plate.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate 3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded
webbing. The folded webbing must enter the
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert slot at the top of the latch plate.
the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a 4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it
“click.” clears the folded webbing and the seat belt is
no longer twisted.
Positioning The Lap Belt

246 SAFETY
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage NOTE: Seat Belt Extender — If Equipped
In the driver and outboard front passenger seats, The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even
the top of the shoulder belt can be adjusted equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature when the webbing is fully extended and the
upward or downward to position the seat belt away allows the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if
from your neck. Push or squeeze the anchorage in the upward position without pushing or equipped) is in its lowest position, an authorized
button to release the anchorage, and move it up or squeezing the release button. To verify the dealer can provide you with a Seat Belt Extender.
down to the position that serves you best. shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull downward The Seat Belt Extender should be used only if the
on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked existing seat belt is not long enough. When the
into position. Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different
occupant, it must be removed.
WARNING!
 Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make WARNING!
your injuries in a collision much worse. You
 ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
might suffer internal injuries, or you could
required in order to properly fit the original
even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these
seat belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt
instructions to wear your seat belt safely and
Extender if, when worn, the distance between
to keep your passengers safe, too.
the front edge of the Seat Belt Extender
 Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder buckle and the center of the occupant’s body
Adjustable Upper Anchorage and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is LESS than 6 inches.
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will is comfortable and not resting on your neck.
 Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed
prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower The retractor will withdraw any slack in the
can increase the risk of serious injury or death
position, and if you are taller than average, you will shoulder belt.
in a collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender
prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a higher  Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce when the lap belt is not long enough and only
position. After you release the anchorage button, the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash. use in the recommended seating positions.
try to move it up or down to make sure that it is Remove and store the Seat Belt Extender
locked in position.  Always make all seat belt height adjustments
when not needed.
when the vehicle is stationary.
SAFETY 247
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women Seat Belt Pretensioner Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped (ALR)
with pretensioning devices that are designed to The seat belts in the passenger seating positions
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking
collision. These devices may improve the Retractor (ALR) which is used to secure a child
performance of the seat belt by removing slack restraint system Ú page 271.
from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners
work for all size occupants, including those in child The figure below illustrates the locking feature for
restraints. each seating position.
NOTE:
These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
must be worn snugly and positioned properly.
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant
pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the
an accident is reduced for the mother and the pretensioners are single use items. A deployed
6
unborn child if they are wearing a seat belt. pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be
Position the lap belt snug and low below the replaced immediately.
abdomen and across the strong bones of the hips. Energy Management Feature
Place the shoulder belt across the chest and away Captain’s Chairs Second Row (6 Passenger)
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped
from the neck. Never place the shoulder belt Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
with an Energy Management feature that may help
behind the back or under the arm.
further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a
collision. The seat belt system has a retractor
assembly that is designed to release webbing in a
controlled manner.
248 SAFETY
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is 3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt
automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This
retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. indicates the seat belt is now in the Automatic
Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child Locking Mode.
restraint is installed in a seating position that has
a seat belt with this feature. Children 12 years old How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
and under should always be properly restrained in Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and
the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat. allow it to retract completely to disengage the
Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle
WARNING! sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
60/40 Second Row (7 Passenger)  Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations front of an air bag. A deploying passenger WARNING!
front air bag can cause death or serious injury  The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
to a child 12 years or younger, including a switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
If the passenger seating position is equipped with child in a rear-facing child restraint. feature or any other seat belt function is not
an ALR and is being used for normal usage, only working properly when checked according to
 Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to the procedures in the Service Manual.
comfortably wrap around the occupant’s front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the ALR child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle  Failure to replace the seat belt assembly
is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the does not have a rear seat, do not transport a could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
 Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to
completely in this case and then carefully pull out restrain occupants who are wearing the seat
only the amount of webbing necessary to How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode belt or children who are using booster seats.
comfortably wrap around the occupant’s 1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder The locked mode is only used to install
mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle belt. rear-facing or forward-facing child restraints
until you hear a "click”. that have a harness for restraining the child.
2. Grab the shoulder portion and pull downward
until the entire seat belt is extracted.
SAFETY 249
Third Row Stow Clip — If Equipped SUPPLEMENTAL R ESTRAINT S YSTEMS  Front and Side Impact Sensors
Your vehicle may be equipped with a stow clip on (SRS)  Seat Belt Pretensioners
the lower trim behind the third row. This clip is used  Seat Track Position Sensors
to hold the seat belt out of the path of the power Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some  Occupant Classification System
folding third row seat. Only place the seat belt
webbing in this clip while folding and opening the models, or may be optional equipment on others. If Air Bag Warning Light
seat. Do not leave the webbing behind the clip you are not sure, ask an authorized dealer.
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
when using the belt to restrain an occupant. The air bag system must be ready to protect you in monitors the readiness of the electronic
a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller parts of the air bag system whenever the
(ORC) monitors the internal circuits and ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN
interconnecting wiring associated with the position. If the ignition switch is in the OFF position
electrical Air Bag System Components. Your or in the ACC position, the air bag system is not on
vehicle may be equipped with the following Air Bag and the air bags will not inflate.
System Components:
The ORC contains a backup power supply system
Air Bag System Components that may deploy the air bag system even if the
battery loses power or it becomes disconnected
6
 Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
prior to deployment.
 Air Bag Warning Light
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
 Steering Wheel and Column instrument panel for approximately four to eight
Third Row Stow Clip
 Instrument Panel seconds for a self-check when the ignition switch is
 Knee Impact Bolsters
first in the ON/RUN position. After the self-check,
WARNING!
the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC
Do not place the seat belt webbing behind the  Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it
third row stow clip when using the seat belt to  Seat Belt Buckle Switch turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either
restrain an occupant. The seat belt will not be  Supplemental Side Air Bags momentarily or continuously. A single chime will
positioned properly on the occupant and they sound to alert you if the light comes on again after
could be more seriously injured in an accident  Supplemental Knee Air Bags initial startup.
as a result.
250 SAFETY
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will Front Air Bags
illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag Warning WARNING!
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder
Light if a malfunction is detected that could affect Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your belts for both the driver and front passenger. The
the air bag system. The diagnostics also record the instrument panel could mean you won’t have the front air bags are a supplement to the seat belt
nature of the malfunction. While the air bag system air bag system to protect you in a collision. If the restraint systems. The driver front air bag is
is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the light does not come on as a bulb check when the mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
following occurs, have an authorized dealer ignition is first turned on, stays on after you start passenger front air bag is mounted in the
service the air bag system immediately. the vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have instrument panel, above the glove compartment.
 The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on an authorized dealer service the air bag system The words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are
during the four to eight seconds when the igni- immediately. embossed on the air bag covers.
tion switch is first in the ON/RUN position.
 The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
four to eight-second interval. If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is
 The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermit- detected, which could affect the
tently or remains on while driving. Supplemental Restraint System (SRS),
NOTE: the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will
If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine illuminate on the instrument panel. The
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will stay on until
Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In the fault is cleared. In addition, a single chime will
this condition the air bags may not be ready to sound to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag
inflate for your protection. Have an authorized Warning Light has come on and a fault has been
detected. If the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light Front Air Bag/Knee Bolster Locations
dealer service the air bag system immediately.
comes on intermittently or remains on while driving 1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
have an authorized dealer service the vehicle 2 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental
immediately Ú page 104. Driver Knee Air Bag
3 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemen-
tal Passenger Knee Air Bag
SAFETY 251
information from the front impact sensors (if

WARNING! equipped) or other system components. WARNING!
 Being too close to the steering wheel or instru- The first stage inflator is triggered immediately  No objects should be placed over or near the
ment panel during front air bag deployment during an impact that requires air bag deployment. air bag on the instrument panel or steering
could cause serious injury, including death. Air A low energy output is used in less severe wheel because any such objects could cause
bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfort- collisions. A higher energy output is used for more harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe
ably extending your arms to reach the steering severe collisions. enough to cause the air bag to inflate.
wheel or instrument panel.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or  Do not put anything on or around the air bag
 Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front passenger seat belt buckle switch that covers or attempt to open them manually. You
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger detects whether the driver or front passenger seat may damage the air bags and you could be
front air bag can cause death or serious injury belt is buckled. The seat belt buckle switch may injured because the air bags may no longer be
to a child 12 years or younger, including a adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air functional. The protective covers for the air
child in a rear-facing child restraint. Bags. bag cushions are designed to open only when
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or the air bags are inflating.
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing front passenger seat track position sensors that  Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front
6
child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle more severe injuries in a collision. The air
does not have a rear seat, do not transport a Air Bags based upon seat position. bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle. This vehicle is equipped with a right front properly. In some collisions, air bags won’t
passenger Occupant Classification System (“OCS”) deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts even
that is designed to provide Passenger Advanced though you have air bags.
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag
Front Air Bag output appropriate to the occupant’s
Features seated weight input, as determined by the OCS.
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system
provides output appropriate to the severity and
type of collision as determined by the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC), which may receive
252 SAFETY
Front Air Bag Operation When the Occupant Restraints Controller (ORC) Occupant Classification Module (OCM) And Sensor
detects a collision requiring the front air bags, it The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional
signals the inflator units. A large quantity of located underneath the front passenger seat. The
protection by supplementing the seat belts. Front
non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the front air Sensor is located beneath the passenger seat
air bags are not expected to reduce the risk of
bags. cushion foam. Any weight on the seat will be
injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The front
air bags will not deploy in all frontal collisions, The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper sensed by the Sensor. The OCM uses input from
including some that may produce substantial passenger side of the instrument panel separate the Sensor to determine the front passenger’s
vehicle damage — for example, some pole and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to most probable classification. The OCM
collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset their full size. The front air bags fully inflate in less communicates this information to the ORC. The
collisions. time than it takes to blink your eyes. The front air ORC may reduce the inflation rate of the Passenger
bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain Advanced Front Air Bag deployment based on
On the other hand, depending on the type and
the driver and front passenger. occupant classification. In order for the OCS to
location of impact, front air bags may deploy in
operate as designed, it is important for the front
crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but Occupant Classification System (OCS) —
passenger to be seated properly and properly
that produce a severe initial deceleration. Front Passenger Seat wearing the seat belt.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle The OCS is part of a Federally regulated safety The OCS will NOT prevent deployment of the
deceleration over time, vehicle speed and damage system for this vehicle. It is designed to provide Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. The OCS may
by themselves are not good indicators of whether Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag output reduce the inflation rate of the Passenger
or not an air bag should have deployed. appropriate to the occupant’s seated weight, as Advanced Front Air Bag if the OCS estimates that:
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all determined by the OCS.
 The front passenger seat is unoccupied or has
collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in The Occupant Classification System (OCS) consists
position, away from an inflating air bag. very light objects on it; or
of the following:
 The front passenger seat is occupied by a small
 Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) passenger, including a child; or
 Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and  The front passenger seat is occupied by a
Sensor located in the front passenger seat rear-facing child restraint; or
 Air Bag Warning Light  The front passenger is not properly seated or his
or her weight is taken off of the seat for a period
of time.
SAFETY 253
Front Passenger Seat Occupant Status Front Passenger Air Bag Output
Rear-facing child restraint Reduced-power deployment
Child, including a child in a forward-facing child restraint or booster seat* Reduced-power deployment OR full-power deployment
Properly seated adult Full-power deployment OR reduced-power deployment
Unoccupied seat Reduced-power deployment
* It is possible for a child to be classified as an The OCS determines the front passenger’s most
adult, allowing a full-power Passenger Advanced probable classification. The OCS estimates the
Front Air Bag deployment. Never allow children to seated weight on the front passenger seat and
ride in the front passenger seat and never install a where that weight is located. The OCS
child restraint system, including a rear-facing child communicates the classification status to the ORC.
restraint, in the front passenger seat. The ORC uses the classification to determine
whether the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
WARNING! inflation rate should be adjusted. 6
 Never place a rear-facing child restraint in In order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger important for the front passenger to be seated
front air bag can cause death or serious injury properly and properly wearing the seat belt. Seated Properly
to a child 12 years or younger, including a Properly seated passengers are:
Lighter Weight Passengers (Including Small Adults)
child in a rear-facing child restraint.  Sitting upright
When a lighter weight passenger, including a small
 Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the  Facing forward adult, occupies the front passenger seat, the OCS
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing  Sitting in the center of the seat with their feet may reduce the inflation rate of the Passenger
child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle comfortably on or near the floor Advanced Front Air Bag. This does not mean that
does not have a rear seat, do not transport a the OCS is working improperly.
rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.  Sitting with their back against the seatback and
the seatback in an upright position
 Children 12 years or younger should always
ride buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle
with a rear seat.
254 SAFETY
Do not decrease OR increase the front passenger’s Examples of improper front passenger seating
seated weight on the front passenger seat include:
The front passenger’s seated weight must be  The front passenger’s weight is transferred to
properly positioned on the front passenger seat. another part of the vehicle (like the door, arm
Failure to do so may result in serious injury or rest or instrument panel).
death. The OCS determines the most probable  The front passenger leans forward, sideways, or
classification of the occupant that it detects. The turns to face the rear of the vehicle.
OCS will detect the front passenger’s decreased or
increased seated weight, which may result in an  The front passenger’s seatback is not in the full
adjusted inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced upright position.
Front Air Bag in a collision. This does not mean that  The front passenger carries or holds an object Not Seated Properly
the OCS is working improperly. Decreasing the while seated (e.g., backpack, box, etc.).
front passenger’s seated weight on the front  Objects are lodged under the front passenger
passenger seat may result in a reduced-power seat.
deployment of the Passenger Advanced Front Air
 Objects are lodged between the front passenger
Bag. Increasing the front passenger’s seated
weight on the front passenger seat may result in a seat and center console.
full-power deployment of the Passenger Advanced  Accessories that may change the seated weight
Front Air Bag. on the front passenger seat are attached to the
front passenger seat.
 Anything that may decrease or increase the
front passenger’s seated weight.
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most Not Seated Properly
probable classification. If an occupant in the front
passenger seat is seated improperly, the occupant
may provide an output signal to the OCS that is
different from the occupant’s properly seated
weight input, for example:
SAFETY 255
WARNING! The Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument

panel will turn on whenever the OCS is unable to
 If a child restraint system, child, small teen- classify the front passenger seat status. A
ager or adult in the front passenger seat is malfunction in the OCS may affect the operation of
seated improperly, the occupant may provide the air bag system.
an output signal to the OCS that is different
from the occupant’s properly seated weight If the Air Bag Warning Light does not come on,
input. This may result in serious injury or death or stays on after you start the vehicle, or it comes
in a collision. on as you drive, take the vehicle to an authorized
dealer for service immediately.
 Always wear your seat belt and sit properly,
Not Seated Properly The passenger seat assembly contains critical OCS
with the seatback in an upright position, your
components that may affect the Passenger
back against the seatback, sitting upright,
Advanced Front Air Bag inflation. In order for the
facing forward, in the center of the seat, with
OCS to properly classify the seated weight of a
your feet comfortably on or near the floor.
front seat passenger, the OCS components must
 Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g., back- function as designed. Do not make any 6
packs, boxes, etc.) while seated in the front modifications to the front passenger seat
passenger seat. Holding an object may components, assembly, or to the seat cover. If the
provide an output signal to the OCS that is seat, trim cover, or cushion needs service for any
different than the occupant’s properly seated reason, take the vehicle to an authorized dealer.
weight input, which may result in serious injury Only FCA US LLC approved seat accessories may
or death in a collision. be used.
Not Seated Properly  Placing an object on the floor under the front
passenger seat may prevent the OCS from
working properly, which may result in serious
injury or death in a collision. Do not place any
objects on the floor under the front passenger
seat.
256 SAFETY
The following requirements must be strictly

followed: WARNING! WARNING!
 Do not modify the front passenger seat  Unapproved modifications or service proce-  Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee
assembly or components in any way. dures to the passenger seat assembly, its impact bolsters in any way.
related components, seat cover or cushion
 Do not use prior or future model year seat  Do not mount any accessories to the knee
may inadvertently change the air bag deploy-
covers or cushions not designated by FCA US impact bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos,
ment in case of a frontal collision. This could
LLC for the specific model being repaired. citizen band radios, etc.
result in death or serious injury to the front
Always use the correct seat cover and cushion
passenger if the vehicle is involved in a colli-
specified for the vehicle.
sion. A modified vehicle may not comply with Supplemental Driver And Front Passenger
 Do not replace the seat cover or cushion with an required Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan- Knee Air Bags
aftermarket seat cover or cushion. dards (FMVSS) and/or Canadian Motor
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental
 Do not add a secondary seat cover or mat. Vehicle Safety Standards (CMVSS).
Driver Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument
 At no time should any Supplemental Restraint  If it is necessary to modify the air bag system panel below the steering column and a
System (SRS) component or SRS related for persons with disabilities, contact an autho- Supplemental Passenger Knee Air Bag mounted in
component or fastener be modified or replaced rized dealer. the instrument panel below the glove
with any part except those which are approved compartment. The Supplemental Knee Air Bags
by FCA US LLC. provide enhanced protection during a frontal
Knee Impact Bolsters impact by working together with the seat belts,
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees pretensioners, and front air bags.
of the driver and front passenger, and position the
front occupants for improved interaction with the Supplemental Side Air Bags
front air bags. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental
Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs).
SAFETY 257
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs) SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and other
are located in the outboard side of the front seats. WARNING! injuries to front and rear seat outboard occupants
The SABs are marked with “SRS AIRBAG” or Do not use accessory seat covers or place in certain side impacts, in addition to the injury
“AIRBAG” on a label or on the seat trim on the objects between you and the Side Air Bags; the reduction potential provided by the seat belts and
outboard side of the seats. performance could be adversely affected and/or body structure.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant objects could be pushed into you, causing The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side
injury during certain side impacts, in addition to serious injury. windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside
the injury reduction potential provided by the seat edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the
belts and body structure. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains window. The SABICs inflate with enough force to
(SABICs) injure occupants if they are not belted and seated
properly, or if items are positioned in the area
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side
where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an even
Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
(SABICs) are located above the side windows. The
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through
trim covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” 6
side windows in certain side impact events.
or “AIRBAG.”
WARNING!
 Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage or
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label other cargo up high enough to block the
deployment of the SABICs. The trim covering
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the above the side windows where the SABIC and
outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover. The its deployment path are located should
inflating SAB deploys through the seat seam into remain free from any obstructions.
the space between the occupant and the door. The (Continued)
SAB moves at a very high speed and with such a
high force that it could injure occupants if they are
not seated properly, or if items are positioned in Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
the area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an Label Location
even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
258 SAFETY
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side

WARNING! collisions, including some collisions at certain WARNING!
 In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do angles, or some side collisions that do not impact  Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
not install any accessory items in your vehicle the area of the passenger compartment. The Side against the door or window. Sit upright in the
which could alter the roof. Do not add an after- Air Bags may deploy during angled or offset frontal center of the seat.
market sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add collisions where the front air bags deploy.
 Being too close to the Side Air Bags during
roof racks that require permanent attach- Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt deployment could cause you to be severely
ments (bolts or screws) for installation on the restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time injured or killed.
vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the than it takes to blink your eyes.
vehicle for any reason.  Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead
WARNING! to more severe injuries in a collision. The Side
Air Bags work with your seat belt to restrain
Side Impacts  Occupants, including children, who are up you properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in against or very close to Side Air Bags can be won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt
certain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint seriously injured or killed. Occupants, even though you have Side Air Bags.
Controller (ORC) determines whether the including children, should never lean on or
deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular sleep against the door, side windows, or area
impact event is appropriate, based on the severity where the side air bags inflate, even if they are NOTE:
and type of collision. The side impact sensors aid in an infant or child restraint. Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
the ORC in determining the appropriate response trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
 Seat belts (and child restraints where appro-
to impact events. The system is calibrated to Rollover Events
priate) are necessary for your protection in all
deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact side of the Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners are
collisions. They also help keep you in position,
vehicle during impacts that require Side Air Bag designed to activate in certain rollover events. The
away from an inflating Side Air Bag. To get the
occupant protection. In side impacts, the Side Air Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
best protection from the Side Air Bags, occu-
Bags deploy independently; a left side impact whether deployment in a particular rollover event
pants must wear their seat belts properly and
deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right-side is appropriate, based on the severity and type of
sit upright with their backs against the seats.
impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle collision. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good
Children must be properly restrained in a child
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags and seat
restraint or booster seat that is appropriate for
or not Side Air Bags should have deployed. belt pretensioners should have deployed.
the size of the child.
SAFETY 259
The Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners will  Seat Belt Buckle Switch  As the air bags deflate, you may see some
not deploy in all rollover events. The rollover  Supplemental Side Air Bags smoke-like particles. The particles are a normal
sensing system determines if a rollover event may by-product of the process that generates the
be in progress and whether deployment is  Supplemental Knee Air Bags non-toxic gas used for air bag inflation. These
appropriate. In the event the vehicle experiences a  Front and Side Impact Sensors airborne particles may irritate the skin, eyes,
rollover or near rollover event, and deployment is  Seat Belt Pretensioners nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation,
appropriate, the rollover sensing system will deploy rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat
 Seat Track Position Sensors
the side air bags and seat belt pretensioners on irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
both sides of the vehicle.  Occupant Classification System continues, see your doctor. If these particles
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or If A Deployment Occurs settle on your clothing, follow the garment
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
The front air bags are designed to deflate
side windows in certain rollover or side impact immediately after deployment. Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have
events. deployed. If you are involved in another collision,
NOTE: the air bags will not be in place to protect you.
Air Bag System Components Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all colli-
NOTE: sions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the air bag system.
WARNING! 6
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners
the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring If you do have a collision which deploys the air
cannot protect you in another collision. Have the
associated with electrical Air Bag System Compo- bags, any or all of the following may occur:
air bags, seat belt pretensioners, and the seat
nents listed below:  The air bag material may sometimes cause belt retractor assemblies replaced by an
 Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) abrasions and/or skin reddening to the occu- authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the
pants as the air bags deploy and unfold. The Occupant Restraint Controller System serviced
 Air Bag Warning Light
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or as well.
 Steering Wheel and Column those you might get sliding along a carpet or
 Instrument Panel gymnasium floor. They are not caused by
 Knee Impact Bolsters
contact with chemicals. They are not permanent
and normally heal quickly. However, if you
 Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags haven’t healed significantly within a few days, or
if you have any blistering, see your doctor imme-
diately.
260 SAFETY
NOTE: Your vehicle may also be designed to perform any If there are no fuel leaks or damage to the vehicle
 Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior of these other functions in response to the electrical devices (e.g. headlights) after an
trim, but they will open during air bag deploy- Enhanced Accident Response System: accident, reset the system by following the
ment.  Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the HVAC procedure described below. If you have any doubt,
Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Circulation Door contact an authorized dealer.
 After any collision, the vehicle should be taken
to an authorized dealer immediately.  Cut off battery power to the: Enhanced Accident Response System
Enhanced Accident Response System  Engine
Reset Procedure
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response
In the event of an impact, if the communication  Electric Motor (if equipped)
System functions after an event, the ignition switch
network remains intact, and the power remains  Electric power steering must be changed from ignition START or ON/RUN
intact, depending on the nature of the event, the
 Brake booster to ignition OFF. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) will determine
 Electric park brake
leaks in the engine compartment and on the
whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response
ground near the engine compartment and fuel
System perform the following functions:  Automatic transmission gear selector tank before resetting the system and starting the
 Cut off fuel to the engine (if equipped)  Horn engine.
 Cut off battery power to the electric motor (if  Front wiper After an accident, if the vehicle will not start after
equipped) performing the reset procedure, the vehicle must
 Headlamp washer pump (if equipped)
 Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has be towed to an authorized dealer to be inspected
power
NOTE: and to have the Enhanced Accident Response
After an accident, remember to cycle the ignition to System reset.
 Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position and remove the key
long as the battery has power or for 15 minutes from the ignition switch to avoid draining the
from the intervention of the Enhanced Accident battery. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in
Response System the engine compartment and on the ground near
 Unlock the power door locks the engine compartment and fuel tank before
resetting the system and starting the engine.
SAFETY 261
Maintaining Your Air Bag System Event Data Recorder (EDR)

WARNING!
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
WARNING!  Do not attempt to modify any part of your air recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to
 Modifications to any part of the air bag system
bag system. The air bag may inflate acciden- record, in certain crash or near crash-like
could cause it to fail when you need it. You tally or may not function properly if modifica- situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting
could be injured if the air bag system is not tions are made. Take your vehicle to an a road obstacle, data that will assist in
there to protect you. Do not modify the compo- authorized dealer for any air bag system understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed.
nents or wiring, including adding any kind of service. If your seat, including your trim cover The EDR is designed to record data related to
badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short
trim cover or the upper passenger side of the (including removal or loosening/tightening of period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
instrument panel. Do not modify the front seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to an The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such
fascia/bumper, vehicle body structure, or add authorized dealer. Only manufacturer data as:
aftermarket side steps or running boards. approved seat accessories may be used. If it is
 How various systems in your vehicle were
necessary to modify the air bag system for
 It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the persons with disabilities, contact an autho- operating;
air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone rized dealer.  Whether or not the driver and passenger safety
who works on your vehicle that it has an air
6
belts were buckled/fastened;
bag system.  How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
(Continued) accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
 How fast the vehicle was traveling.
262 SAFETY
These data can help provide a better CHILD R ESTRAINTS There are different sizes and types of restraints for
understanding of the circumstances in which children from newborn size to the child almost
crashes and injuries occur. Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at large enough for an adult safety belt. Always check
all times, including babies and children. Every the child seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you
NOTE: state in the United States, and every Canadian
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a have the correct seat for your child. Carefully read
province, requires that small children ride in and follow all the instructions and warnings in the
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are proper restraint systems. This is the law, and you
recorded by the EDR under normal driving condi- child restraint Owner’s Manual and on all the
can be prosecuted for ignoring it. labels attached to the child restraint.
tions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender,
age, and crash location) are recorded. However, Children 12 years or younger should ride properly Before buying any restraint system, make sure that
other parties, such as law enforcement, could buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable
combine the EDR data with the type of personally crash statistics, children are safer when properly Safety Standards. You should also make sure that
identifying data routinely acquired during a crash restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front. you can install it in the vehicle where you will use it.
investigation. NOTE:
WARNING!
To read data recorded by an EDR, special  For additional information, refer to
equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or In a collision, an unrestrained child can become http://www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-care-
the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle a projectile inside the vehicle. The force required
givers or call: 1–888–327–4236
manufacturer, other parties, such as law to hold even an infant on your lap could become
enforcement, that have the special equipment, so great that you could not hold the child, no  Canadian residents should refer to Transport
can read the information if they have access to the matter how strong you are. The child and others Canada’s website for additional information:
vehicle or the EDR. could be badly injured or killed. Any child riding http://www.tc.gc.ca/en/services/road/
in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for child-car-seat-safety.html
the child’s size.
SAFETY 263
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles

Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Children who are two years old or younger and who Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child
Infants and Toddlers have not reached the height or weight limits of their Restraint, facing rearward in a rear seat of the
child restraint vehicle
Children who are at least two years old or who have Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point
Small Children outgrown the height or weight limit of their Harness, facing forward in a rear seat of the
rear-facing child restraint vehicle
Children who have outgrown their forward-facing
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat
Larger Children child restraint, but are too small to properly fit the
belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
vehicle’s seat belt
Children 12 years old or younger, who have
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the
Children Too Large for Child Restraints outgrown the height or weight limit of their booster
vehicle
seat 6
Infant And Child Restraints The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth WARNING!
Safety experts recommend that children ride
until they reach the weight or height limit of the  Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two years
infant carrier. Convertible child seats can be used front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
old or until they reach either the height or weight
either rear-facing or forward-facing in the vehicle. front air bag can cause death or serious injury
limit of their rear-facing child restraint. Two types of
Convertible child seats often have a higher weight to a child 12 years or younger, including a
child restraints can be used rear-facing: infant
limit in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers child in a rear-facing child restraint.
carriers and convertible child seats.
do, so they can be used rear-facing by children who
have outgrown their infant carrier but are still less
than at least two years old. Children should remain front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
rear-facing until they reach the highest weight or child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle
height allowed by their convertible child seat. does not have a rear seat, do not transport a
rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
264 SAFETY
Older Children And Child Restraints Children Too Large For Booster Seats
WARNING!
Children who are two years old or who have Children who are large enough to wear the
outgrown their rear-facing convertible child seat  Improper installation can lead to failure of an shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are long
can ride forward-facing in the vehicle. infant or child restraint. It could come loose in enough to bend over the front of the seat when
Forward-facing child seats and convertible child a collision. The child could be badly injured or their back is against the seatback, should use the
seats used in the forward-facing direction are for killed. Follow the child restraint manufac- seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step test
children who are over two years old or who have turer’s directions exactly when installing an to decide whether the child can use the vehicle’s
outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of infant or child restraint. seat belt alone:
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children  After a child restraint is installed in the 1. Can the child sit all the way back against the
should remain in a forward-facing child seat with a vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat forward back of the vehicle seat?
harness for as long as possible, up to the highest or rearward because it can loosen the child
weight or height allowed by the child seat. 2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over
restraint attachments. Remove the child the front of the vehicle seat while the child is
All children whose weight or height is above the restraint before adjusting the vehicle seat still sitting all the way back?
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a position. When the vehicle seat has been
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s adjusted, reinstall the child restraint. 3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s
seat belts fit properly. If the child cannot sit with shoulder between the neck and arm?
 When your child restraint is not in use, secure
knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while 4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible,
it in the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH
the child’s back is against the seatback, they touching the child’s thighs and not the
anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do
should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The stomach?
not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden
child and belt-positioning booster seat are held in stop or accident, it could strike the occupants 5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole
the vehicle by the seat belt. or seatbacks and cause serious personal trip?
injury.
SAFETY 265
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move
then the child still needs to use a booster seat in the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use WARNING!
this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/shoulder a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt
belt, check seat belt fit periodically and make sure correctly. under an arm or behind their back. In a crash,
the seat belt buckle is latched. A child’s squirming the shoulder belt will not protect a child properly,
or slouching can move the belt out of position. If which may result in serious injury or death. A
child must always wear both the lap and
shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly.
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Combined Weight of Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
Restraint Type the Child + Child LATCH – Lower Anchors LATCH – Lower Anchors Seat Belt + Top Tether
Restraint Seat Belt Only
Only + Top Tether Anchor Anchor
Rear-Facing Child Up to 65 lbs 6
X X
Restraint (29.5 kg)
Rear-Facing Child More than 65 lbs
X
Restraint (29.5 kg)
Forward-Facing Child Up to 65 lbs
X X
Restraint (29.5 kg)
Forward-Facing Child More than 65 lbs
X
Restraint (29.5 kg)
266 SAFETY
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren LATCH Positions For Installing Child
(LATCH) Restraint System Restraints In This Vehicle
60/40 Second Row LATCH Positions (7 Passenger)

LATCH Label Lower Anchorage Symbol
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint (2 Anchorages Per Seating Position)
Captain’s Chairs Second Row LATCH Positions
anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
(6 Passenger)
Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The
LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points for Lower Anchorage Symbol
installing LATCH-equipped child seats. There are (2 Anchorages Per Seating Position)
two lower anchorages located at the back of the Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one
top tether anchorage located behind the seating
position. These anchorages are used to install
LATCH-equipped child seats without using the
vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating positions may
have a top tether anchorage but no lower
anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat
belt must be used with the top tether anchorage to
install the child restraint. Please see the following
table for more information.
SAFETY 267
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH

Use the LATCH anchorage system until the
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of combined weight of the child and the child restraint
the child restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage 65 lbs (29.5 kg) is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether
system to attach the child restraint? anchor instead of the LATCH system once the
combined weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH
anchorage system to attach a rear-facing or
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be forward-facing child restraint.
used together to attach a rear-facing or No Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH
forward-facing child restraint? anchorages if allowed by the booster seat
manufacturer. See your booster seat owner’s
manual for more information.
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more
child restraints. If the center position does not have 6
Can two child restraints be attached using a dedicated LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat
No
common lower LATCH anchorage? belt to install a child seat in the center position
next to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in
an outboard position.
The child seat may touch the back of the front
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of passenger seat if the child restraint manufacturer
Yes
the front passenger seat? also allows contact. See your child restraint
owner’s manual for more information.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? No
268 SAFETY
Locating The LATCH Anchorages

The lower anchorages are round bars
that are found at the rear of the seat
cushion where it meets the seatback.
The anchorages are under a flap with the
anchorage symbols on it. Pull the top of the flap
away from the seatback to access the lower
anchorages.
Seven Passenger Second Row Lower Anchorages Six Passenger Top Tether Strap Anchorage
(Captain's Chair)
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
Six And Seven Passenger Vehicles: 2nd
Row Upper Tether Anchorage Locations
There are tether strap anchorages behind each

rear seating position located on the back of the
Six Passenger Second Row Lower Anchorages seat.
Seven Passenger Top Tether Strap Anchorage

(2nd Row Bench)
SAFETY 269
Six And Seven Passenger Vehicles: 3rd Row Upper Center Seat LATCH
Tether Anchorage Locations
Six Passenger Second Row Seating:
There are tether strap anchorages behind each
rear seating position located on the back of the WARNING!
seat. To access them, pull the carpeted floor panel
This vehicle does not have a center seating
away from the seat back, this will expose the top
position. Do not use the center lower LATCH
tether strap anchorages.
anchorages to install a child seat in the center of
the back seat.
Tether Anchorages (3rd Row Bench) Seven Passenger Second Row Seating:
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be If a child restraint installed in the center position
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each blocks the seat belt webbing or buckle for the
side. Each will have a hook or connector to attach outboard position, do not use that outboard
to the lower anchorage and a way to tighten the position. If a child seat in the center position blocks
connection to the anchorage. Forward-facing child the outboard LATCH anchors or seat belt, do not 6
restraints and some rear-facing child restraints will install a child seat in that outboard position.
also be equipped with a tether strap. The tether
Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To Access Top Tether WARNING!
strap will have a hook at the end to attach to the
Anchorage (3rd Row Bench) top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap Never use the same lower anchorage to attach
after it is attached to the anchorage. more than one child restraint. For typical
installation instructions, see Ú page 270.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint

manufacturer when installing your child restraint.
Not all child restraint systems will be installed as
described here.
270 SAFETY
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child 3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the
Restraint child restraint to the lower anchorages in the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it
selected seating position. behind the child restraint, route the seat belt
If the selected seating position has a Switchable through the child restraint belt path and then
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow 4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect
it to the top tether anchorage. See buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all
the seat belt, following the instructions below. See children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not
Ú page 271 to check what type of seat belt each Ú page 273 for directions to attach a tether
anchor. toys and that they should not play with them.
seating position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and 5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child WARNING!
on the tether strap of the child seat so that restraint rearward and downward into the
seat. Remove slack in the straps according to  Improper installation of a child restraint to the
you can more easily attach the hooks or
the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions. LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the
connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
restraint. The child could be badly injured or
2. Place the child seat between the lower 6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly
killed. Follow the child restraint manufac-
anchorages for that seating position. If the by pulling back and forth on the child seat at
turer’s directions exactly when installing an
second row seat can be reclined, you may the belt path. It should not move more than
infant or child restraint.
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.
 Child restraint anchorages are designed to
(if adjustable) to get a better fit. If the rear seat
can be moved forward and rearward in the How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR withstand only those loads imposed by
vehicle, you may wish to move it to its (ALR) Seat Belt: correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no
rear-most position to make room for the child circumstances are they to be used for adult
When using the LATCH attaching system to install seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other
seat. You may also move the front seat forward a child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not
to allow more room for the child seat. items or equipment to the vehicle.
being used by other occupants or being used to
secure child restraints. An unused belt could injure
a child if they play with it and accidentally lock the
seat belt retractor. Before installing a child
restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat
belt behind the child restraint and out of the child’s
SAFETY 271
Installing Child Restraints Using The Refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” description
Vehicle Seat Belt on Ú page 247 for additional information on ALR.
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured Please see the table below and the following
in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion sections for more information.
of a lap/shoulder belt. Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing
Child Restraints In This Vehicle
WARNING!
 Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure of
the restraint. The child could be badly injured 60/40 Second Row (7 Passenger)
or killed. Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
 Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint. Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
6
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions
are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Captain’s Chairs Second Row (6 Passenger)
Retractor (ALR) that is designed to keep the lap Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
portion of the seat belt tight around the child
restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
clip. The ALR retractor can be “switched” into a Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
locked mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the
retractor and then letting the webbing retract back
into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make
a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor.
272 SAFETY
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of Always use the tether anchor when using the seat
the child restraint) for using the Tether Anchor with belt to install a forward facing child restraint, up to
Weight limit of the Child Restraint
the seat belt to attach a forward facing child the recommended weight limit of the child
restraint? restraint.
Contact between the front passenger seat and the
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of
Yes child restraint is allowed, if the child restraint
the front passenger seat?
manufacturer also allows contact.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? No
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position
No
belt against the belt path of the child restraint? with an ALR retractor.
Installing A Child Restraint With A 1. Place the child seat in the center of the 3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor seating position. If the second row seat can hear a “click.”
be reclined, you may recline the seat and/or 4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion
(ALR): raise the head restraint (if adjustable) to get a tight against the child seat.
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may 5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder
of a lap/shoulder belt. wish to move it to its rear-most position to part of the belt until you have pulled all the
make room for the child seat. You may also seat belt webbing out of the retractor. Then,
WARNING! move the front seat forward to allow more allow the webbing to retract back into the
room for the child seat. retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will hear
 Improper installation or failure to properly a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is
secure a child restraint can lead to failure of 2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the now in the Automatic Locking mode.
the restraint. The child could be badly injured retractor to pass it through the belt path of the
or killed. child restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in
the belt path.
 Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
SAFETY 273
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it Installing Child Restraints Using The Top 2. To access the top tether strap anchorages
is locked, you should not be able to pull out any Tether Anchorage behind the rear seat, pull the carpeted floor
webbing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat panel away from the seat back, this will expose
step 5. WARNING! the top tether strap anchorages.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car
tighten the lap portion around the child
seat to any location in front of the car seat,
restraint while you push the child restraint
including the seat frame or a tether anchorage.
rearward and downward into the vehicle seat.
Only attach the tether strap of a rear-facing car
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and seat to the tether anchorage that is approved for
the seating position has a top tether that seating position, located behind the top of
anchorage, connect the tether strap to the the vehicle seat. See Ú page 266 for the
anchorage and tighten the tether strap. See location of approved tether anchorages in your
Ú page 273 for directions to attach a tether vehicle.
anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To Access Top Tether
by pulling back and forth on the child seat at
6
Strap Anchorage (3rd Row Bench)
the belt path. It should not move more than
1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check

the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
1. Look behind the seating position where you
plan to install the child restraint to find the
tether anchorage. You may need to move the
seat forward to provide better access to the
tether anchorage. If there is no top tether
anchorage for that seating position, move the
child restraint to another position in the
vehicle if one is available. Third Row Top Tether Strap Anchorage
(Located On Seatback)
274 SAFETY
3. Route the tether strap to provide the most 6. Remove slack in the tether strap according to
direct path for the strap between the anchor the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
and the child seat. If your vehicle is equipped
with adjustable rear head restraints, raise the
WARNING!
head restraint, and where possible, route the
tether strap under the head restraint and  The top tether anchorages are not visible until
between the two posts. If not possible, lower the gap panel is folded down. Do not use the
the head restraint and pass the tether strap visible cargo tie down hooks, located on the
around the outboard side of the head restraint. floor behind the seats, to attach a child
4. For the center seating position, route the restraint tether anchor.
tether strap over the seatback and headrest Captain’s Chair Top Tether Strap Mounting  An incorrectly anchored tether strap could
then attach the hook to the tether anchor lead to increased head motion and possible
located on the back of the seat. injury to the child. Use only the anchorage
5. Attach the tether strap hook of the child position directly behind the child seat to
restraint to the top tether anchorage as shown secure a child restraint top tether strap.
in the diagram.  If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear
seat, make sure the tether strap does not slip
into the opening between the seatbacks as
you remove slack in the strap.
Third Row Seating Top Tether Strap Mounting
Second Row Bench Seat Top Tether Strap Mounting

(7 Passenger Seating)
SAFETY 275
SAFETY TIPS Pets should be restrained in the rear seat

(if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that
chime when a fault with the Air Bag System has
been detected. It will stay on until the fault is
TRANSPORTING P ASSENGERS are secured by seat belts. removed. If the light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving, have an authorized
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO SAFETY CHECKS Y OU S HOULD M AKE dealer service the vehicle immediately
AREA. I NSIDE THE VEHICLE Ú page 241.
WARNING! Seat Belts Defroster
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and
for cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts place the blower control on high speed. You should
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up
must be replaced immediately. Do not be able to feel the air directed against the
may cause serious injury or death.
disassemble or modify the system. windshield. See an authorized dealer for service if
 It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo your defroster is inoperable.
If your vehicle is involved in a collision, or if you
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a colli-
have questions regarding the seat belt or retractor Floor Mat Safety Information
sion, people riding in these areas are more
conditions, take your vehicle to an authorized FCA Always use floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.
likely to be seriously injured or killed.
dealer or authorized FCA Certified Collision Care Only use a floor mat that does not interfere with the 6
 Do not allow people to ride in any area of your Program facility for inspection. operation of the accelerator, brake or clutch
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and pedals. Only use a floor mat that is securely
Air Bag Warning Light
seat belts. attached using the floor mat fasteners so it cannot
The Air Bag Warning Light will turn on for
 Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat slip out of position and interfere with the
four to eight seconds as a bulb check
and using a seat belt properly. accelerator, brake or clutch pedals or impair safe
when the ignition switch is first placed in
operation of your vehicle in other ways.
the ON/RUN position. If the light is either
TRANSPORTING P ETS not on during starting, stays on, or turns on while
driving, have the system inspected at an
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm authorized dealer as soon as possible. After the
your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown about bulb check, this light will illuminate with a single
and possibly injured, or injure a passenger during
panic braking or in a collision.
276 SAFETY

An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or  ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the  If the vehicle carpet has been removed and
stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat driver’s side floor area. To check for interfer- re-installed, always properly attach carpet to
fasteners may cause your floor mat to interfere ence, with the vehicle properly parked with the the floor and check the floor mat fasteners are
with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals and engine off, fully depress the accelerator, the secure to the vehicle carpet. Fully depress
cause a loss of vehicle control. To prevent brake, and the clutch pedal (if present) to each pedal to check for interference with the
SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH: check for interference. If your floor mat inter- accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals then
feres with the operation of any pedal, or is not re-install the floor mats.
 ALWAYS securely attach your floor
secure to the floor, remove the floor mat from
mat using the floor mat fasteners.  It is recommended to only use mild soap and
the vehicle and place the floor mat in your
DO NOT install your floor mat upside water to clean your floor mats. After cleaning,
trunk.
down or turn your floor mat over. always check your floor mat has been properly
Lightly pull to confirm mat is secured using the  ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on installed and is secured to your vehicle using
floor mat fasteners on a regular basis. the passenger’s side floor area. the floor mat fasteners by lightly pulling mat.
 ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING  ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide
FLOOR MAT FROM THE VEHICLE into the driver’s side floor area when the PERIODIC S AFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD
before installing any other floor mat. vehicle is moving. Objects can become
NEVER install or stack an additional trapped under accelerator, brake, or clutch
MAKE OUTSIDE T HE V EHICLE
floor mat on top of an existing floor mat. pedals and could cause a loss of vehicle Tires
control.
 ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven
vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat that cannot  NEVER place any objects under the floor mat wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or
be properly attached and secured to your (e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects could other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall.
vehicle. If a floor mat needs to be replaced, change the position of the floor mat and may Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks. Inspect
only use a FCA approved floor mat for the cause interference with the accelerator, sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges. Check the
specific make, model, and year of your brake, or clutch pedals. lug nut/bolt torque for tightness. Check the tires
vehicle. (Continued) (including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
(Continued)
SAFETY 277
Lights
WARNING!
CARBON M ONOXIDE W ARNINGS
Have someone observe the operation of brake
lights and exterior lights while you work the  If you are required to drive with the trunk/lift- WARNING!
controls. Check turn signal and high beam gate/rear doors open, make sure that all
windows are closed and the climate control Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is
indicator lights on the instrument panel.
BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOT deadly. Follow the precautions below to prevent
Door Latches use the recirculation mode. carbon monoxide poisoning:
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.  Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain
 If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with
Fluid Leaks the engine running, adjust your heating or carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless
cooling controls to force outside air into the gas, which can kill. Never run the engine in a
Check area under the vehicle after overnight
vehicle. Set the blower at high speed. closed area, such as a garage, and never sit in
parking for fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks.
a parked vehicle with the engine running for
Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel or
an extended period. If the vehicle is stopped in
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should The best protection against carbon monoxide entry an open area with the engine running for more
be located and corrected immediately. into the vehicle body is a properly maintained than a short period, adjust the ventilation
engine exhaust system.
EXHAUST GAS system to force fresh, outside air into the 6
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the vehicle.
exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be
WARNING!  Guard against carbon monoxide with proper
detected inside the vehicle, or when the underside
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain or rear of the vehicle is damaged, have an maintenance. Have the exhaust system
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and authorized dealer inspect the complete exhaust inspected every time the vehicle is raised.
odorless. Breathing it can make you system and adjacent body areas for broken, Have any abnormal conditions repaired
unconscious and can eventually poison you. To damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side
avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety tips: Open seams or loose connections could permit windows fully open.
exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger
 Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust
confined areas any longer than needed to
system each time the vehicle is raised for
move your vehicle in or out of the area.
lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
(Continued)
278
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS When you must leave the vehicle to seek
assistance, the Hazard Warning Flashers will
If equipped, the overhead console contains an
ASSIST and SOS button.
The Hazard Warning Flashers button is located on continue to operate even though the ignition is
the switch bank just above the radio screen. placed in the OFF position. WARNING!
NOTE: ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
With extended use, the Hazard Warning Flashers the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on
may discharge the battery. the steering wheel. You have full responsibility
and assume all risks related to the use of the
ASSIST AND SOS SYSTEM— IF EQUIPPED features and applications in this vehicle. Only
use the features and applications when it is safe
to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
NOTE:
Hazard Warning Flashers Button  Your vehicle may be transmitting data as autho-
rized by the subscriber Ú page 372.
Push the button to turn on the Hazard Warning
Flashers. When the button is activated, all  The ASSIST and SOS buttons will only function
directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn if you are connected to an operable LTE
oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push the button (voice/data) or 4G (data) network, which comes
a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning as a built-in function. Other Uconnect services
Assist And SOS Buttons
Flashers. will only be operable if you are connected to an
1 — ASSIST Button operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network.
This is an emergency warning system and it should
not be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it 2 — SOS Button
when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a
safety hazard for other motorists.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 279
ASSIST Call 2. The LED light located within the ASSIST and NOTE:
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically SOS buttons on the overhead console will turn  Once a connection is made between the
connect you to any one of the following support green once a connection to a SOS operator has vehicle’s SOS Call system and the SOS oper-
centers: been made. ator, the SOS operator may be able to open
 Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or 3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a a voice connection with the vehicle to deter-
need a tow, just push the ASSIST button and you SOS operator is made, the SOS Call system mine if additional assistance is needed.
will be connected to a representative for assis- may transmit the following important vehicle Once the SOS operator opens a voice
tance. Roadside Assistance will know what information to a SOS operator: connection with the vehicle’s SOS Call
vehicle you’re driving and its location. Additional  Indication that the occupant placed a SOS
system, the operator should be able to
fees may apply for roadside assistance. Call speak with you or other vehicle occupants
and hear sounds occurring in the vehicle.
 Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all  The vehicle brand The vehicle’s SOS Call system will attempt
other vehicle issues.  The last known GPS coordinates of the to remain connected with the SOS operator
 Uconnect Customer Care - Total support for vehicle until the SOS operator terminates the
Radio, Phone and NAV issues. 4. You should be able to speak with the SOS connection.
SOS Call operator through the vehicle audio system to 5. The SOS operator may attempt to contact
1. Push the SOS Call button on the overhead determine if additional assistance is needed. appropriate emergency responders and
provide them with important vehicle
console.
WARNING! information and GPS coordinates.
7
NOTE:
In case the SOS Call button is pushed in error, ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
there will be a 10 second delay before the SOS Call the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on WARNING!
system initiates a call to a SOS operator. To cancel the steering wheel. You have full responsibility
 If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger
the SOS Call connection, push the SOS call button and assume all risks related to the use of the
(e.g., fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road
on the overhead console or press the cancellation features and applications in this vehicle. Only
conditions or location), do not wait for voice
button on the Device Screen. Termination of the use the features and applications when it is safe
contact from an Emergency Services Agent. All
SOS Call will turn off the green LED light on the to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
occupants should exit the vehicle immediately
overhead console. accident involving serious injury or death.
and move to a safe location.
(Continued)
280 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
SOS Call System Limitations

WARNING! WARNING!
Vehicles sold in Mexico DO NOT have SOS Call
 Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s system capabilities.  The Occupant Restraint Control module turns
operable network and GPS antennas. You on the air bag Warning Light on the instrument
SOS or other emergency line operators in Mexico
could prevent operable network and GPS panel if a malfunction in any part of the
may not answer or respond to SOS system calls.
signal reception, which can prevent your system is detected. If the Air Bag Warning
vehicle from placing an emergency call. An If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction, any Light is illuminated, have an authorized dealer
operable network and GPS signal reception is of the following may occur at the time the service the Occupant Restraint Control system
required for the SOS Call system to function malfunction is detected, and at the beginning of immediately.
properly. each ignition cycle:
 The overhead console lights located within the Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional,
 The SOS Call system is embedded into the
vehicle’s electrical system. Do not add after- ASSIST and SOS buttons will continuously illumi- factors beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent
market electrical equipment to the vehicle’s nate red. or stop the SOS Call system operation. These
electrical system. This may prevent your  The Device Screen will display the following include, but are not limited to, the following
vehicle from sending a signal to initiate an message “Vehicle device requires service. factors:
emergency call. To avoid interference that can Please contact an authorized dealer.”  The ignition is in the OFF position
cause the SOS Call system to fail, never add  An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle  The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact
aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way mobile device requires service. Please contact an
radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your  The SOS Call system software and/or hardware
authorized dealer.”
vehicle’s electrical system or modify the are damaged during a crash
antennas on your vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING!  The vehicle battery loses power or becomes
LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR ANY REASON disconnected during a vehicle crash
(INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER AN ACCI-  Ignoring the overhead console light could
mean you will not have SOS Call services. If  LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network and/or
DENT), THE UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND
the overhead console light is illuminated, have Global Positioning Satellite signals are unavail-
SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT
an authorized dealer service the SOS Call able or obstructed
OPERATE.
system immediately.  Equipment malfunction at the SOS operator
 Modifications to any part of the SOS Call facility
(Continued)
system could cause the air bag system to fail
 Operator error by the SOS operator
when you need it. You could be injured if the
air bag system is not there to help protect you.
 LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network conges- NOTE:

tion Changes or modifications not expressly approved WARNING!
 Weather by the party responsible for compliance could void  Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous.
the user's authority to operate the equipment. The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on
 Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or
you. You could be crushed. Never put any part
tunnels CAUTION! of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack.
WARNING! To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take
never spray any cleaning solution directly onto it to a service center where it can be raised on
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth a lift.
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on and wipe the mirror clean.  Never start or run the engine while the vehicle
the steering wheel. You have full responsibility
and assume all risks related to the use of the is on a jack.
features and applications in this vehicle. Only Automatic SOS — If Equipped  The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
use the features and applications when it is safe Automatic SOS is a hands-free safety service that changing tires only. The jack should not be
to do so. Failure to do so may result in an can immediately connect you with help in the event used to lift the vehicle for service purposes.
accident involving serious injury or death. that your vehicle’s airbags deploy. Please refer to The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level
your provided radio supplement for complete surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas.
NOTE: information.
NOTE: 7
 Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING If your vehicle is equipped with an air suspension
antennas. You could prevent LTE (voice/data) or system, there is a feature which allows the auto-
WARNING! matic leveling to be disabled before changing a
4G (data) and GPS signal reception, which can
prevent your vehicle from placing an emergency  Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of tire. This feature can be activated through the
call. An operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far Uconnect system Ú page 133.
network connection and a GPS signal is enough off the road to avoid the danger of NOTE:
required for the SOS Call system to function being hit when operating the jack or changing Before changing a tire or using the jack please
properly. the wheel. disable the hands free lift gate, This feature can be
(Continued) disabled through the Uconnect system
Ú page 208.
PREPARATIONS FOR J ACKING

1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface as far
from the edge of the roadway as possible.
Avoid icy or slippery areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of
the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far
enough off the road to avoid being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel. Wheel Blocked Load Floor Handle
NOTE: 2. Access the jack and tool storage.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers. Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when
3. Apply the parking brake. the vehicle is being raised or lifted.
4. Place the gear selector into PARK (P). J ACK L OCATION
5. Turn OFF the ignition.
The scissor-type jack and tire changing tools are
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel located in the rear cargo area, under the load floor.
diagonally opposite the jacking position. For
example, if changing the driver’s front tire, NOTE:
block the passenger’s rear wheel.
Jack Locations vary depending on vehicle trim
level.
1. Locate and lift up on the load floor handle. Jack Storage Location (Without Air Suspension)
4. Release the Velcro straps and pull outward or

up on the jack and tools to remove.
Jack Storage Location (With Air Suspension) Jack And Tools

3. Remove the jack storage cover. To remove,
firmly press the two side tabs and lift up.
SPARE T IRE S TOWAGE
Jack Removal (Equipped With Air Suspension)
The spare tire is stowed under the rear of the
vehicle by means of a cable winch mechanism. To
remove or stow the spare, use the jack handle/lug
wrench connected to the square socket extension
to rotate the “spare tire drive” nut. The nut is 7
located under a plastic cover at the center-rear of
the cargo floor area, just inside the liftgate
opening.
Jack Storage Cover Tabs Jack Removal (Equipped Without Air Suspension)
Spare Tire Location Jack And Tools Winch Nut Plug

1 — Jack Tool 3. Fit the jack handle extension over the winch
CAUTION! drive nut. Use the lug wrench handle and
2 — Lug Nut Wrench
The winch mechanism is designed for use with 3 — Tow Eye (If Equipped) extension to completely lower the spare tire.
the jack wrench extension tool only. Use of air Keep turning the handle counterclockwise
4 — Jack Handle Extension
wrench or power tool may damage the winch. until the winch stops.
5 — Fuel Funnel
6 — Scissor Jack
SPARE T IRE R EMOVAL
Remove the spare tire before attempting to jack up 2. Locate and remove plug from the storage
the vehicle. The spare tire is stowed underneath compartment floor to expose the winch access
the rear cargo area on the outside of the vehicle. hole.
1. Assemble the jacking tools.
Winch Drive Nut Location

6. Slide the retainer up the steel extension tube

and winch cable. Rotate the retainer and push WARNING!
it through the hole in the wheel.  Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel
to be raised.
 Never start or run the engine with the vehicle
on a jack.
 Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is
on a jack.
 Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a
Wrench Rotation jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle,
4. Slide the tire out from under the vehicle and take it to a service center where it can be
rotate it vertically behind the rear fascia/ raised on a lift.
bumper. Releasing The Retainer  Only use the jack in the positions indicated
5. Pull the metal retainer toward you to release it. and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
J ACKING INSTRUCTIONS  If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
WARNING! 7
 To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to securely stowed, spares must be stowed with
help prevent personal injury or damage to your the valve stem facing the ground.
vehicle:
 Always park on a firm, level surface as far from
the edge of the roadway as possible before
raising the vehicle.
 Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
Spare Tire Retainer
 Apply the parking brake firmly and set the
transmission in PARK.
(Continued)
NOTE:
Placement for the front and rear jacking locations
are critical. See below images for proper jacking
locations.
Jack Warning Label Jack And Tool Assembly

2. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug nuts,
CAUTION! using the lug wrench by turning them counter-
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on clockwise, one turn, while the wheel is still on
locations other than those indicated in the the ground. Jacking Locations
Jacking Instructions for this vehicle.
1. Assemble the jack and jacking tools.
Loosen Lug Nuts

3. For the front axle, place the jack on the body

flange just behind the front tire as indicated by
the triangular lift point symbol on the sill
molding. Do not raise the vehicle until you are
sure the jack is fully engaged.
Front Jacking Location Rear Lifting Point

4. For a rear tire, place the jack in the slot on the
rear tie-down bracket, just forward of the rear
tire (as indicated by the triangular lift point
symbol on the sill molding). Do not raise the
Front Lifting Point vehicle until you are sure the jack is fully
engaged.
NOTE: 7
The jack must be placed straight on with handle CAUTION!
facing outwards.
Do NOT raise the vehicle by the body side sill
molding. Be sure the jack is placed in the proper
engagement location on the inside of the panel. Rear Jacking Location
Damage of the vehicle may occur if the
procedure is not properly followed.
5. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw

clockwise. Raise the vehicle only until the tire
just clears the surface and enough clearance
is obtained to install the spare tire. Minimum
tire lift provides maximum stability.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can
make the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the
jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle
only enough to remove the tire. Mounting Spare Tire Tighten Lug Nuts
10. Position the wheel behind the rear fascia/
6. Remove the lug nuts and wheel. WARNING! bumper facing outward. Push the end of the
7. Position the spare wheel/tire on the vehicle To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the winch’s cable, spring and steel sleeve through
and install the lug nuts with the cone-shaped jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the the back of the road wheel. Making sure the
end toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the nuts. vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this valve stem is facing the ground when the
warning may result in serious injury. wheel is stowed.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve 8. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw
stem facing outward. The vehicle could be counterclockwise, and remove the jack and
damaged if the inflatable spare tire is mounted wheel blocks.
incorrectly. 9. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on
the wrench while at the end of the handle for
increased leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a
star pattern until each nut has been tightened
twice. For correct lug nut torque Ú page 362.
If in doubt about the correct tightness, have
them checked with a torque wrench by an Installing Winch
authorized dealer or at a service station.
11. Slide the road wheel on the ground until it is 12. Lower the jack to the fully closed position.
directly under the winch and between the rear 13. Return the Jack and tools back into the jack
fascia/bumper and exhaust system heat storage bin. Reinstall the jack storage cover by
shields. Raise the tire by turning the lug firmly pushing down until the two side clips
wrench on the winch extension clockwise until lock into position.
it clicks/ratchets three times to make sure the
cable is tight. 14. After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut
torque with a torque wrench to ensure that all
lug nuts are properly seated against the wheel.
15. Have the aluminum road wheel and tire
repaired as soon as possible and properly
Road Wheel Installed In Spare Location
secure the spare tire, jack and tool kit.
NOTE:
Double check to ensure the tire is snug against the NOTE:
underbody of the vehicle. Damage to the winch Do not drive with the spare tire installed for more
cable may result if the vehicle is driven with the tire than 50 miles (80 km) at a max speed of 50 mph
loose. (80 km/h).
Winch Wrench Rotation WARNING! 7

A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision
CAUTION! or hard stop could endanger the occupants of
the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the
The winch mechanism is designed for use with
spare tire in the places provided. Have the
the jack wrench extension tool only. Use of air
deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced
wrench or power tool may damage the winch.
immediately.
JUMP STARTING PREPARATIONS FOR J UMP START See below steps to prepare for jump starting:
1. Apply the parking brake, shift the automatic
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be The battery in your vehicle is located under the
transmission into PARK (P) and turn the
jump started using a set of jumper cables and a driver's front seat. There are remote terminals
ignition OFF.
battery in another vehicle, or by using a portable located under the hood to assist in jump starting.
battery booster pack. Jump starting can be 2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all electrical
dangerous if done improperly, so please follow the accessories.
procedures in this section carefully. 3. If using another vehicle to jump start the
battery, park the vehicle within the jumper
WARNING! cables’ reach, apply the parking brake and
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is make sure the ignition is OFF.
frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause
personal injury.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
CAUTION! could establish a ground connection and
Jump Starting Posts
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or personal injury could result.
any other booster source with a system voltage Remote Positive (+) Post
greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, (Covered With Protective Cap)
NOTE:
starter motor, alternator or electrical system may Remote Negative (-) Post
Be sure that the disconnected cable ends do not
occur. touch each other, or either vehicle, until properly
NOTE: connected for jump starting.
NOTE: The remote battery posts are viewed by standing
When using a portable battery booster pack, follow on the right side of the vehicle looking over the
the manufacturer's operating instructions and fender. The positive battery post may be covered
precautions. with a protective cap. Lift up on the cap to gain
access to the positive battery post. Do not jump off
fuses. Only jump directly off positive post which
has a positive (+) symbol on or around the post.
NOTE: 5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the

WARNING! Make sure at all times that unused ends of jumper booster battery, let the engine idle a few
 Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan cables are not contacting each other or either minutes, and then start the engine in the
whenever the hood is raised. It can start vehicle while making connections. vehicle with the discharged battery.
anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can be Connecting The Jumper Cables
injured by moving fan blades. CAUTION!
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper
 Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, cable to the remote positive (+) post of the Do not run the booster vehicle engine above
watch bands and bracelets that could make discharged vehicle. 2,000 RPM since it provides no charging benefit,
an inadvertent electrical contact. You could be wastes fuel, and can damage booster vehicle
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+)
seriously injured. engine.
jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the
 Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn booster battery.
your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas 3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper 6. Once the engine is started, follow the discon-
which is flammable and explosive. Keep open cable to the negative (-) post of the booster necting procedure below.
flames or sparks away from the battery. battery.
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-)
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper
J UMP S TARTING P ROCEDURE jumper cable to the remote negative (-) post
cable from the remote negative (-) post of the
(exposed metallic/unpainted post of the
discharge vehicle) located directly in front of
discharged vehicle. 7
WARNING!
the underhood fuse box. 2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-)
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure jumper cable from the negative (-) post of the
could result in personal injury or property WARNING! booster battery.
damage due to battery explosion. 3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative
(-) post of the discharged battery. The resulting cable from the positive (+) post of the booster
electrical spark could cause the battery to battery.
CAUTION!
explode and could result in personal injury.
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster
vehicle or the discharged vehicle.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) NOTE: See below steps for refueling:
jumper cable from the remote positive (+) post In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the fuel 1. Retrieve funnel from the spare tire storage
of the discharged vehicle. door from opening. If this occurs, lightly push on area.
5. Reinstall the protective cover over the remote the fuel door to break the ice buildup. Re-release
2. Insert funnel into same filler pipe opening as
positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle. the fuel door by pushing on the rear outer edge
the fuel nozzle.
near the center to unlatch. Do not pry on the door.
If frequent jump starting is required to start your
vehicle have the battery and charging system
tested at an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power
outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery,
even when not in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.).
Eventually, if plugged in long enough without
engine operation, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life Inserting Funnel
and/or prevent the engine from starting. Refueling Funnel
3. Ensure funnel is inserted fully to hold flapper
CAUTION! doors open.
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY – IF EQUIPPED To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top 4. Pour fuel into funnel opening.
The vehicle is equipped with a refueling funnel off” the fuel tank after filling. 5. Remove funnel from filler pipe, clean off prior
Ú page 282 for a Cap-Less Fuel System. If to putting back in the spare tire storage area.
refueling is necessary, while using an approved Emergency Gas Can Refueling: 6. Close the fuel door making sure the latch is
gas can, please insert the refueling funnel into the engaged by pushing on the rear outer edge
filler neck opening. Most gas cans will not open the flapper doors. A
funnel is provided to allow emergency refueling near the center.
with a gas can.
NOTE:
WARNING! There are steps that you can take to slow down an
CAUTION!
 Never have any smoking materials lit in or impending overheat condition: Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
near the vehicle when the fuel door is open or  If your Air Conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
the tank is being filled. A/C system adds heat to the engine cooling HOT (H), pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the
system and turning the A/C off can help remove vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until
 Never add fuel when the engine is running.
this heat. the pointer drops back into the normal range. If
This is in violation of most state and federal
the pointer remains on HOT (H), and you hear
fire regulations and may cause the Malfunc-  You can also turn the temperature control to
continuous chimes, turn the engine off
tion Indicator Light to turn on. maximum heat, the mode control to floor and
immediately and call for service.
the blower control to high. This allows the heater
 A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a
core to act as a supplement to the radiator and
portable container that is inside of a vehicle.
You could be burned. Always place fuel
aids in removing heat from the engine cooling
system.
MANUAL PARK RELEASE
containers on the ground while filling.
WARNING!
WARNING!
You should be seated in the driver’s seat with
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS You or others can be badly burned by hot engine your foot firmly placed on the brake pedal to
If the vehicle is overheating, it will need to be coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. maintain control of the vehicle before activating
serviced by an authorized dealer. If you see or hear steam coming from under the the Manual Park Release. If possible, you should 7
hood, do not open the hood until the radiator apply the parking brake. Activating the Manual
In any of the following situations, you can reduce has had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling
the potential for overheating by taking the Park Release will allow your vehicle to roll away if
system pressure cap when the radiator or it is not secured or properly connected to a tow
appropriate action. coolant bottle is hot. vehicle. Activating the Manual Park Release on
 On the highways — slow down. an unsecured vehicle could lead to serious
 In city traffic — while stopped, place the trans- injury or death for those in or around the vehicle.
mission in NEUTRAL (N), but do not increase the
engine idle speed while preventing vehicle
To move the vehicle in cases where the
motion with the brakes.
transmission will not shift out of PARK (P) (such as
a depleted battery), a Manual Park Release is
available.
Follow These Steps To Activate The Manual Park 5. Pull the lock plug out as far as it will go, then
Release: release it. The transmission should now be in
1. Apply firm pressure to the brake pedal while NEUTRAL (N), allowing the vehicle to be
seated in the driver’s seat. moved.
2. Apply the parking brake, if possible. NOTE:
When the lever is locked in the released position,
3. Using a flathead screwdriver or similar tool,
the lock plug and tether will remain outside of the
remove the Manual Park Release access
trim panel and the access cover cannot be rein-
cover, which is to the lower left of the steering
stalled.
column.
6. Release the parking brake only when the
NOTE: Manual Park Release Location vehicle is securely connected to a tow vehicle.
Insert the flathead screwdriver or similar tool in the
lower notch of the access cover and gently rotate 4. Remove the orange lock plug by turning it a
To Reset The Manual Park Release:
clockwise. quarter turn counterclockwise.
1. Apply firm pressure to the brake pedal while
seated in the driver’s seat.
2. Pull the lock plug out again, then release it.
3. Allow the tether to retract with the lever back
to its original position.
4. Verify that the transmission is in PARK (P).
5. Confirm that the tether has retracted fully,
then firmly push the orange lock plug back
to the locking position within the housing.
Re-install the access cover. If the access
Locked — Unlocked Position cover cannot be re-installed, repeat
Manual Park Release Access Cover
steps 1 through 4.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE WARNING! CAUTION!

If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces  When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting
snow, it can often be moved using a rocking generated by excessive wheel speeds may between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the
motion. Turn the steering wheel right and left to cause damage, or even failure, of the axle and wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or
clear the area around the front wheels. Push and tires. A tire could explode and injure someone. drivetrain damage may result.
hold the lock button on the gear selector. Then, Do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster than
shift back and forth between DRIVE (D) and  Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too
30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30
REVERSE (R) while gently pressing the accelerator. fast may lead to transmission overheating and
seconds continuously without stopping when
failure. It can also damage the tires. Do not
NOTE: you are stuck and do not let anyone near a
spin the wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h)
Shifts between DRIVE (D) and REVERSE (R) spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
while in gear (no transmission shifting
can only be achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph occurring).
(8 km/h) or less. Whenever the transmission
remains in NEUTRAL (N) for more than two CAUTION!
seconds, you must press the brake pedal to  Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
engage DRIVE (D) or REVERSE (R). lead to transmission overheating and failure. This section describes procedures for towing a
Use the least amount of accelerator pedal Allow the engine to idle with the transmission disabled vehicle using a commercial towing
pressure that will maintain the rocking motion in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every
without spinning the wheels or racing the engine.
service. 7
five rocking-motion cycles. This will minimize
If the transmission and drivetrain are operable,
NOTE: overheating and reduce the risk of transmis-
disabled 4x4 vehicles may also be towed as
Push the ESC OFF button to place the Electronic sion failure during prolonged efforts to free a
described on Ú page 185.
Stability Control (ESC) system in “Partial OFF” stuck vehicle.
mode, before rocking the vehicle Ú page 225. (Continued)
Once the vehicle has been freed, push the ESC OFF
button again to restore “ESC On” mode.
All-Wheel Drive Models

Rear-Wheel Drive All-Wheel Drive Models With Two-Speed
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground With Single-Speed
Models Transfer Case
Transfer Case
If Transmission Is
Operable:
 Transmission in Detailed Instructions Ú page 185
NEUTRAL  Transmission in PARK
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED
 30 mph (48 km/h)  Transfer case in NEUTRAL (N)
max speed  Tow in forward direction
 30 miles (48 km) max
distance
If Transmission Is
Operable:
 Transmission in
NEUTRAL
Front NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow  30 mph (48 km/h)
max speed
 30 miles (48 km) max
distance
Rear OK NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD OK BEST METHOD
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other equipment designed for this purpose, following
equipment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main structural members of the vehicle,
not to fascia/bumpers or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding vehicles under tow must be observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode, not the ACC mode.
If the vehicle's battery is discharged, instructions  The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph ALL WHEEL DRIVE MODELS
on shifting the automatic transmission out of PARK (48 km/h).
(P) in order to move the vehicle Ú page 293. FCA US LLC recommends towing with all wheels
 The towing distance must not exceed 30 miles
OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow
(48 km).
CAUTION! the vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of the
vehicle raised and the opposite end on a towing
 Do not use sling type equipment when towing. CAUTION!
dolly.
Vehicle damage may occur.  Towing faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or If flatbed equipment is not available, and the
 When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck, farther than 30 miles (48 km) with rear transfer case is operable, vehicles with a
do not attach to front or rear suspension wheels on the ground can cause severe trans- two-speed transfer case may be towed (in the
components. If vehicle is equipped with mission damage. Damage from improper forward direction, with ALL wheels on the ground),
Quadra-lift air suspension, secure vehicle only towing is not covered under the New Vehicle IF the transfer case is in NEUTRAL (N) and the
with tire/wheel straps (no suspension compo- Limited Warranty. transmission is in PARK Ú page 185.
nents or body) to prevent air suspension from
Vehicles equipped with a single-speed transfer
adjusting during towing against securement If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle case have no NEUTRAL (N) position, and therefore
straps and causing damage. Damage to your must be towed faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or must be towed will all four wheels OFF the ground.
vehicle may result from improper towing. farther than 30 miles (48 km), tow with the rear
wheels OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to CAUTION!
REAR WHEEL DRIVE MODELS tow the vehicle on a flatbed, or with the front 7
wheels raised and the rear wheels on a towing  Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used (if
FCA US LLC recommends towing your vehicle with dolly, or (when using a suitable steering wheel the remaining wheels are on the ground).
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed. stabilizer to hold the front wheels in the straight Internal damage to the transmission or
position) with the rear wheels raised and the front transfer case will occur if a front or rear wheel
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the lift is used when towing.
transmission is operable, the vehicle may be towed wheels ON the ground.
(with rear wheels on the ground) under the  Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
following conditions: requirements can cause severe transmission
and/or transfer case damage. Damage from
 The transmission must be in NEUTRAL (N). For
improper towing is not covered under the New
instructions on shifting the transmission to
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
NEUTRAL (N) when the engine is off
Ú page 293.
EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS — NOTE: TOW EYE USAGE — I F EQUIPPED

For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use
I F EQUIPPED both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of Your vehicle may come equipped with a front tow
If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks, there damage to the vehicle. eye that can be used to move a disabled vehicle.
will be two mounted on the front of the vehicle and When using a the tow eye, follow the precautions
one in the rear. The rear tow hook will be located below.
on the driver's side of the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to rescue
a vehicle stranded off-road. Do not use tow
hooks for tow truck hookup or highway towing.
You could damage your vehicle.
Rear Tow Hook
WARNING! Tow Eye

 Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck vehicle. Tow Eye Usage Precautions
Chains may break, causing serious injury or
death. CAUTION!
 Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow  The tow eye must only be used for roadside
hooks. Tow straps may become disengaged, emergencies. Use with an appropriate device
causing serious injury. in accordance with highway code (a rigid bar
Front Tow Hooks or rope) to maneuver the vehicle in prepara-
tion for transport via a tow truck.
 The tow eye must not be used to move
the vehicle off the road or where there are
obstacles.
(Continued)
To install the tow eye, open the door using the

CAUTION! WARNING! vehicle key or a small screwdriver. Thread the tow
 Do not use the tow eyes for tow truck hookup Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow eye into the receptacle, making sure it is fully
or highway towing. eyes. tightened.
 Do not use the tow eye to free a stuck vehicle  Do not use a chain with a tow eye. Chains may The tow eye must be securely seated to the
Ú page 295. break, causing serious injury or death. attaching bracket through the lower front fascia/
bumper. If the tow eye is not securely seated to the
 Damage to your vehicle may occur if these  Do not use a tow strap with a tow eye. Tow attaching bracket, the vehicle should not be
guidelines are not followed Ú page 295. straps may break or become disengaged, moved.
causing serious injury or death.
 Failure to follow proper tow eye usage may
cause components to break resulting in
Tow Eye Installation

The front tow eye receptacle is located behind a
door on the passenger’s side of the fascia/
bumper. 7
Front Tow Eye Access Door

Tow Eye Warning Label
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM

(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced
Accident Response System.
This feature is a communication network that
takes effect in the event of an impact Ú page 260.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)

Front Tow Eye Installed Rear Tow Eye Access Door This vehicle is equipped with an event data
The rear tow eye receptacle is located behind a recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to
door on the driver’s side of the rear fascia/bumper. record data that will assist in understanding how a
vehicle’s systems performed under certain crash
To install the tow eye, open the door using the or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
vehicle key or a small screwdriver. Thread the tow deployment or hitting a road obstacle Ú page 261.
eye into the receptacle, making sure it is fully
tightened.
The tow eye must be securely seated to the
attaching bracket through the lower front fascia/
bumper. If the tow eye is not securely seated to the
attaching bracket, the vehicle should not be
moved. Rear Tow Eye Installed
301
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

SCHEDULED SERVICING NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
 Check engine oil level
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km),
change indicator system. The oil change indicator  Check windshield washer fluid level
12 months or 350 hours of engine run time,
system will remind you that it is time to take your whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine  Check the tire inflation pressures and look for
vehicle in for scheduled maintenance. run or idle time is generally only a concern for fleet unusual wear or damage
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil customers.  Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir,
change indicator message will illuminate. This brake master cylinder and fill as needed.
means that service is required for your vehicle.  Check function of all interior and exterior lights
Operating conditions such as frequent short-trips,
trailer tow, extremely hot or cold ambient
temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will influence
when the “Oil Change Required” message is
displayed. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as
possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
An authorized dealer will reset the oil change
indicator message after completing the scheduled
oil change. 8
302 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE P LAN
Refer to the Maintenance Plan for the required maintenance intervals.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:

 Change oil and filter.
 Rotate the tires at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
 Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.
 Inspect the CV/Universal joints.
 Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and parking brake.
 Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
 Inspect exhaust system.
 Inspect engine air cleaner filter if using in dusty or off-road conditions. Replace engine air cleaner filter, as necessary.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 303
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
Mileage or time passed (whichever
comes first)
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
Or Kilometers:
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends,
X X X X X X X
and replace if necessary.
Inspect the front and rear axle fluid,
change if using your vehicle for police,
X X X X X X X
taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer
towing.
Inspect the brake linings, parking brake
X X X X X X X
function. 8
Inspect transfer case fluid. X X X X
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air cleaner filter. X X X X X
Replace the cabin air filter. X X X X X X X
Replace spark plugs.1 X
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
Mileage or time passed (whichever
comes first)
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
Or Kilometers:
Flush and replace the engine coolant at

10 years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) X X
whichever comes first.
Replace accessory drive belt. X
Inspect accessory drive belt tensioner
X
and pulley, replace if necessary.
Change transfer case fluid. X X
Replace PCV valve. X
1. The spark plug change interval is based on mileage for domestic and kilometers for international market, yearly intervals do not apply.
WARNING!
 You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have
any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
 Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance. This could
cause an accident.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
3.6L E NGINE
1 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap 5 — Engine Oil Filter Access

2 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 6 — Engine Oil Fill
3 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap 7 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Access
4 — Engine Oil Dipstick 8 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
5.7L E NGINE
1 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap 5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Access

2 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 6 — Engine Oil Dipstick
3 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap 7 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
4 — Engine Oil Fill
CHECKING OIL L EVEL ADDING W ASHER FLUID MAINTENANCE-F REE BATTERY

To ensure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil The instrument cluster display will indicate when Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free
must be maintained at the correct level. Check the the washer fluid level is low. When the sensor battery. Water will never have to be added, and
oil level at regular intervals, such as every fuel detects a low fluid level, the windshield will light on periodic maintenance is not required.
stop. The best time to check the engine oil level is the vehicle graphic outline and the “WASHER
about five minutes after a fully warmed up engine FLUID LOW” message will be displayed. WARNING!
is shut off. The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and  Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground the rear window washer is shared. The fluid can burn or even blind you. Do not allow
will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. reservoir is located in the engine compartment, be battery fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or
There are four possible dipstick types: sure to check the fluid level at regular intervals. Fill clothing. Do not lean over a battery when
the reservoir with windshield washer solvent only attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes or
 Crosshatched zone. (not radiator antifreeze). When refilling the washer on skin, flush the area immediately with large
 Crosshatched zone marked SAFE. fluid reservoir, take some washer fluid and apply it amounts of water. Refer to Jump Starting
 Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the low to a cloth or towel and wipe clean the wiper blades, Procedure Ú page 291.
end of the range and MAX at the high end of the this will help blade performance. To prevent
freeze-up of your windshield washer system in cold  Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
range. flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not
weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
 Crosshatched zone marked with dimples at the use a booster battery or any other booster
exceeds the temperature range of your climate.
MIN and the MAX ends of the range. This rating information can be found on most source with an output greater than 12 Volts.
NOTE: washer fluid containers. Do not allow cable clamps to touch each
Always maintain the oil level within the crosshatch other. 8
markings on the dipstick. WARNING!  Battery posts, terminals, and related accesso-
Adding 1 quart (1 liter) of oil when the reading is at Commercially available windshield washer ries contain lead and lead compounds. Wash
the low end of the dipstick range will raise the oil solvents are flammable. They could ignite and hands after handling.
level to the high end of the range marking. burn you. Care must be exercised when filling or
NOTE: working around the washer solution.
Always maintain the oil level within the crosshatch
markings on the dipstick.
CAUTION! VEHICLE MAINTENANCE NOTE:

Hemi engines at times can tick right after startup
 It is essential when replacing the cables on An authorized dealer has the qualified service and then quiet down after approximately 30
the battery that the positive cable is attached personnel, special tools, and equipment to seconds. This is normal and will not harm the
to the positive post and the negative cable is perform all service operations in an expert engine. This characteristic can be caused by short
attached to the negative post. Battery posts manner. Service Manuals are available which drive cycles. For example, if the vehicle is started
are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and include detailed service information for your then shut off after driving a short distance. Upon
are identified on the battery case. Cable vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before restarting, you may experience a ticking sound.
clamps should be tight on the terminal posts attempting any procedure yourself. Other causes could be if the vehicle is unused for
and free of corrosion. NOTE: an extended period of time, incorrect oil, extended
Intentional tampering with emissions control oil changes or extended idling. If the engine
 If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is
systems may void your warranty and could result in continues to tick or if the Malfunction Indicator
in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery
civil penalties being assessed against you. Light (MIL) comes on, see the nearest authorized
cables before connecting the charger to the
dealer.
battery. Do not use a “fast charger” to provide
WARNING! American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine
starting voltage.
You can be badly injured working on or around a Oil Identification Symbol
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which This symbol means that the oil has been
PRESSURE WASHING you have the knowledge and the proper certified by the API. The manufacturer
Cleaning the engine compartment with a high equipment. If you have any doubt about your only recommends API Certified engine
pressure washer is not recommended. ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle oils.
to a competent mechanic.
This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W-20, 0W-30,
CAUTION!
5W-30 and 10W-30 engine oils.
Precautions have been taken to safeguard all ENGINE OIL
parts and connections however, the pressures CAUTION!
generated by these machines is such that Engine Oil Selection
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as
complete protection against water ingress Use only the manufacturer's recommended fluid the chemicals can damage your engine. Such
cannot be guaranteed. Ú page 367. damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
Synthetic Engine Oils Engine Oil Filter Selection Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection and
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the A full-flow type disposable oil filter should be used Replacement
recommended oil quality requirements are met, for replacement. The quality of replacement filters Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal
and the recommended maintenance intervals for varies considerably. Only high quality Mopar®
filters should be used. 1. With a suitable tool, fully loosen fasteners on
oil and filter changes are followed.
the engine air cleaner filter cover.
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the ENGINE AIR CLEANER F ILTER 2. Lift the engine air cleaner filter cover to access
engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE
For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 302. the engine air cleaner filter.
viscosity grade number should not be used.
Materials Added To Engine Oil WARNING!
The manufacturer strongly recommends against
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
the addition of any additives (other than leak
etc.) can provide a measure of protection in the
detection dyes) to the engine oil. Engine oil is an
case of engine backfire. Do not remove the air
engineered product and its performance may be
induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless
impaired by supplemental additives.
such removal is necessary for repair or
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the
Filters engine compartment before starting the vehicle
with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine
etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
oil and oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil
serious personal injury.
filters, indiscriminately discarded, can present a
1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover 8
problem to the environment. Contact an
authorized dealer, service station or governmental Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection 2 — Fasteners
agency for advice on how and where used oil and The quality of replacement engine air cleaner
oil filters can be safely discarded in your area. filters varies considerably. Only high quality 3. Remove the engine air cleaner filter from the
Mopar® filters should be used. housing assembly.
ENGINE OIL FILTER
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new
filter at every engine oil change.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling —

WARNING!
NOTE: R–1234yf
Inspect and clean the housing assembly if dirt or  Use only refrigerants and compressor lubri-
R–1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a
debris is present before replacing the engine air cants approved by the manufacturer for your
Hydrofluoroolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the
cleaner filter. air conditioning system. Some unapproved
Environmental Protection Agency and is an
refrigerants are flammable and can explode,
1. Install the engine air cleaner filter into the ozone-friendly substance with a low
injuring you. Other unapproved refrigerants or
housing assembly with the engine air cleaner global-warming potential. The manufacturer
lubricants can cause the system to fail,
filter inspection surface facing downward. recommends that air conditioning service be
requiring costly repairs. Refer to Warranty
2. Install the engine air cleaner filter cover onto performed by an authorized dealer using recovery
Information Book, for further warranty infor-
the housing assembly locating tabs. and recycling equipment.
mation.
3. Tighten the fasteners on the engine air cleaner NOTE:
 The air conditioning system contains refrig-
filter assembly. Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG
erant under high pressure. To avoid risk of compressor oil, and refrigerants.
personal injury or damage to the system,
AIR CONDITIONER M AINTENANCE adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines Cabin Air Filter Replacement
For best possible performance, your air conditioner to be disconnected should be done by an For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 302.
should be checked and serviced by an authorized experienced technician.
dealer at the start of each warm season. This WARNING!
service should include cleaning of the condenser Do not remove the cabin air filter while the
fins and a performance test. Drive belt tension CAUTION!
vehicle is running, or while the ignition is in the
should also be checked at this time. Do not use chemical flushes in your air ON/RUN mode. With the cabin air filter removed
conditioning system as the chemicals can and the blower operating, the blower can
damage your air conditioning components. Such contact hands and may propel dirt and debris
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle into your eyes, resulting in personal injury.
Limited Warranty.
The cabin air filter is located in the fresh air inlet NOTE:
behind the glove compartment. Perform the When disengaging the glove compartment door
following procedure to replace the filter: from its hinges, there will be some resistance.
1. Open the glove compartment and remove all 4. With the glove compartment door loose,
contents. remove the glove compartment tension tether
2. There is a glove compartment travel stop on and tether clip by sliding the clip toward the
the right side of the glove compartment door, face of the glove compartment door and lifting
partially close the glove compartment door the clip out of glove compartment door.
and pull the travel stop toward you to release
the glove compartment travel stop.
Cabin Air Filter Cover
1 — Retaining Tabs
6. Remove the cabin air filter by pulling it straight

out of the housing.
7. Install the cabin air filter with the arrow on the
filter pointing toward the floor. When installing
the filter cover, make sure the retaining tabs
Right Side Of Glove Compartment fully engage into the HVAC housing.
1 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether 8
Glove Compartment CAUTION!
2 — Glove Compartment Door
1 — Glove Compartment Travel Stop The cabin air filter is identified with an arrow to
2 — Glove Compartment Door indicate airflow direction through the filter.
5. Squeeze the retaining tabs together that
Failure to properly install the filter will result in
secures the cabin air filter cover to the HVAC
the need to replace it more often.
3. Pull the right hand side of the glove housing. Unhinge the filter cover on the right
compartment door toward the rear of the side to fully remove the cover.
vehicle to disengage the glove compartment
door from its hinges.
8. Reinstall the glove compartment door on the When inspecting accessory drive belts, small  Belt broken (note: identify and correct problem
door hinge and reattach the tension tether by cracks that run across ribbed surface of belt from before new belt is installed)
inserting the tether clip in the glove rib to rib, are considered normal. These are not a  Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or rumble
compartment and sliding the clip away from reason to replace belt. However, cracks running is heard or felt while drive belt is in operation)
the face of the glove compartment door. along a rib (not across) are not normal. Any belt
with cracks running along a rib must be replaced. Some conditions can be caused by a faulty
9. Push the door to the near closed position to component such as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys
reengage the glove compartment travel stops. Also have the belt replaced if it has excessive wear,
frayed cords or severe glazing. should be carefully inspected for damage and
NOTE: proper alignment.
Ensure the glove compartment door hinges and Belt replacement on some models requires the
glove compartment travel stops are fully engaged. use of special tools, we recommend having your
vehicle serviced at an authorized dealer.
ACCESSORY D RIVE BELT INSPECTION
BODY LUBRICATION
WARNING! Locks and all body pivot points, including such
 Do not attempt to inspect an accessory drive items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and
belt with vehicle running. rollers, liftgate, tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and
hood hinges, should be lubricated periodically with
 When working near the radiator cooling fan, a lithium-based grease, such as Mopar® Spray
disconnect the fan motor lead. The fan is Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt) White Lube to ensure quiet, easy operation and to
temperature controlled and can start at any protect against rust and wear. Prior to the
time regardless of ignition mode. You could be Conditions that would require replacement:
application of any lubricant, the parts concerned
injured by the moving fan blades.  Rib chunking (one or more ribs has separated should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit;
 You can be badly injured working on or around from belt body) after lubricating excess oil and grease should be
a motor vehicle. Only do service work for which  Rib or belt wear removed. Particular attention should also be given
you have the knowledge and the proper equip- to hood latching components to ensure proper
 Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between two
ment. If you have any doubt about your ability function. When performing other underhood
ribs)
to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a services, the hood latch, release mechanism and
competent mechanic.  Belt slips safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
 “Groove jumping" (belt does not maintain
correct position on pulley)
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated The wiper blades and wiper arms should be
twice a year, preferably in the Autumn and Spring. inspected periodically, not just when wiper
Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant, performance problems are experienced. This
such as Mopar® Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly inspection should include the following points:
into the lock cylinder.  Wear or uneven edges
WINDSHIELD WIPER B LADES  Foreign material
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the  Hardening or cracking
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth  Deformation or fatigue
and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged, replace
accumulations of salt or road film. the affected wiper arm or blade with a new unit. Do Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Locked Position
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long not attempt to repair a wiper arm or blade that is 1 — Wiper
periods may cause deterioration of the wiper damaged.
blades. Always use washer fluid when using the 2 — Release Tab
Front Wiper Blade Removal/Installation 3 — Wiper Arm
wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice CAUTION!
from the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of 2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper
contact with petroleum products such as engine Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back arm, flip up the release tab on the wiper blade
oil, gasoline, etc. against the glass without the wiper blade in and while holding the wiper arm with one
place or the glass may be damaged. hand, slide the wiper blade down towards the
NOTE: 8
base of the wiper arm.
Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending
on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor 1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade off
performance of blades may be present with chat- of the glass, until the wiper arm is in the full
tering, marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of up position.
these conditions are present, clean the wiper
blades or replace as necessary.
4. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on the

wiper arm and rotate the wiper blade until it is
flush against the wiper arm. Fold down the
latch release tab and snap it into its locked
position. Latch engagement will be
accompanied by an audible click.
5. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass.
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation

1. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass.
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Unlocked Position Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper Blade 1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Release Tab 2 — Release Tab
3 — Wiper Arm 3 — Wiper Arm
3. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove the 4. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass.
wiper blade from the wiper arm by holding the
wiper arm with one hand and separating the Installing The Front Wipers
wiper blade from the wiper arm with the other 1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the
hand (move the wiper blade toward the right wiper arm is in the full up position.
side of the vehicle to separate the wiper blade Wiper Blade In Folded Out Position
2. Position the wiper blade near the hook on the
from the wiper arm).
tip of the wiper arm with the wiper release tab 1 — Wiper Blade
open and the blade side of the wiper facing up 2 — Wiper Arm
and away from the windshield.
3. Insert the hook on the tip of the arm through
the opening in the wiper blade under the
release tab.
2. To remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm, 4. Gently lower the tip of the wiper arm onto the
grab the bottom end of the wiper blade glass. WARNING!
nearest to wiper arm with your left hand. With  Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
your right hand, hold the wiper arm as you pull Installing The Rear Wiper Carbon Monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
the wiper blade away from the wiper arm past 1. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass. odorless. Breathing it can make you uncon-
its stop (far enough to unsnap the wiper blade scious and can eventually poison you. To
2. Insert the wiper blade pivot pin into the
pivot from the receptacle on the end of the avoid breathing CO Ú page 275.
opening on the end of the wiper arm. Grab the
wiper arm).
bottom end of the wiper arm with one hand,  A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you
NOTE: and press the wiper blade flush with the wiper park over materials that can burn. Such mate-
Resistance will be accompanied by an audible arm until it snaps into place. rials might be grass or leaves coming into
snap. 3. Lower the wiper blade onto the glass. contact with your exhaust system. Do not park
3. Still grabbing the bottom end of the wiper or operate your vehicle in areas where your
blade, move the wiper blade upward and away EXHAUST SYSTEM exhaust system can contact anything that can
from the wiper arm to disengage. burn.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry
into the vehicle body is a properly maintained
engine exhaust system. CAUTION!
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust
 The catalytic converter requires the use of
system; or if the exhaust fumes can be detected
unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will
inside the vehicle; or when the underside or rear of
destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an
the vehicle is damaged; have an authorized 8
emissions control device and may seriously
technician inspect the complete exhaust system
reduce engine performance and cause
and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged,
serious damage to the engine.
deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes (Continued)
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm to seep into the passenger compartment. In
addition, have the exhaust system inspected each
1 — Wiper Blade
time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil
2 — Wiper Arm change. Replace as required.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter

CAUTION! damage: WARNING!
 Damage to the catalytic converter can result if  Do not interrupt the ignition when the transmis-  When working near the radiator cooling fan,
your vehicle is not kept in proper operating sion is in gear and the vehicle is in motion. disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the igni-
condition. In the event of engine malfunction, tion to the OFF position. The fan is tempera-
 Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or
particularly involving engine misfire or other ture controlled and can start at any time the
towing the vehicle.
apparent loss of performance, have your ignition is in the ON position.
vehicle serviced promptly. Continued opera-  Do not idle the engine with any ignition compo-
tion of your vehicle with a severe malfunction nents disconnected or removed, such as when
diagnostic testing, or for prolonged periods Engine Coolant Checks
could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter during very rough idle or malfunctioning oper- Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection
and vehicle. ating conditions. every 12 months (before the onset of freezing
weather, where applicable). If the engine coolant is
COOLING SYSTEM dirty, the system should be drained, flushed, and
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic refilled with fresh Organic Additive Technology
converter will not require maintenance. However, it WARNING! (OAT) coolant (conforming to MS.90032) by an
is important to keep the engine properly tuned to authorized dealer. Check the front of the A/C
ensure proper catalyst operation and prevent  You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your condenser for any accumulation of bugs, leaves,
possible catalyst damage. etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a
radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from
NOTE: under the hood, do not open the hood until the garden hose vertically down the face of the
Intentional tampering with emissions control radiator has had time to cool. Never open a condenser.
systems can result in civil penalties being cooling system pressure cap when the radi- Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle
assessed against you. ator or coolant bottle is hot. rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the
In unusual situations involving grossly connection at the coolant recovery bottle and
malfunctioning engine operation, a scorching odor  Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away
radiator. Inspect the entire system for leaks. DO
may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst from the radiator cooling fan when the hood is
NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP
overheating. If this occurs, stop the vehicle, turn off raised. The fan starts automatically and may
WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
the engine and allow it to cool. Service, including a start at any time, whether the engine is
tune-up to manufacturer's specifications, should running or not.
be obtained immediately. (Continued)
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill gency, the cooling system will need to be Please review these recommendations for using
drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant
NOTE: coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an autho- that meets the requirements of the manufacturer
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant rized dealer as soon as possible. Material Standard MS.90032. When adding
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly engine coolant:
could lead to severe internal engine damage. If any  Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant is needed to be added to the system coolant products. Do not use additional rust  We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/
please contact an authorized dealer. inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km)
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant Formula OAT that meets the requirements of the
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
and may plug the radiator. manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032.
contains visible sediment, have an authorized
dealer clean and flush with Organic Additive  This vehicle has not been designed for use with  Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine
Technology (OAT) coolant (conforming to propylene glycol-based engine coolant. Use of coolant that meets the requirements of the
MS.90032). propylene glycol-based engine coolant is not manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032
recommended. and distilled water. Use higher concentrations
For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 302.
 Some vehicles require special tools to add (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below
Selection Of Coolant coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems −34°F (−37°C) are anticipated. Please contact
Refer to Engine Fluids And Lubricants properly could lead to severe internal engine an authorized dealer for assistance.
Ú page 367. damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to  Use only high purity water such as distilled or
NOTE: the system please contact an authorized dealer. deionized water when mixing the water/engine
coolant solution. The use of lower quality water
 Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than Adding Coolant
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) Your vehicle has been built with an improved in the engine cooling system. 8
engine coolant, may result in engine damage engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to
and may decrease corrosion protection. OAT MS.90032) that allows extended maintenance
engine coolant is different and should not be intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can
mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology be used up to 10 years or 150,000 miles
(HOAT) engine coolant or any “globally compat- (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent
ible” coolant. If a non-OAT engine coolant is reducing this extended maintenance period, it is
introduced into the cooling system in an emer- important that you use the same engine coolant
(OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) throughout
the life of your vehicle.
NOTE: Coolant Level

WARNING!
 It is the owner's responsibility to maintain the The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method
proper level of protection against freezing  Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never for determining that the coolant level is adequate.
according to the temperatures occurring in the add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the With the engine off and cold, the level of the engine
area where the vehicle is operated. engine is overheated. Do not loosen or coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle should be
remove the cap to cool an overheated engine. between the ranges indicated on the bottle.
 Some vehicles require special tools to add
Heat causes pressure to build up in the
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems The radiator normally remains completely full, so
cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury,
properly could lead to severe internal engine there is no need to remove the radiator/coolant
do not remove the pressure cap while the
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to pressure cap unless checking for engine coolant
system is hot or under pressure.
the system, please contact a local authorized freeze point or replacing coolant. Advise your
dealer.  Do not use a pressure cap other than the one service attendant of this. As long as the engine
 Mixing engine coolant types is not recom- specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant
mended and can result in cooling system engine damage may result. bottle need only be checked once a month.
damage. If HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in When additional engine coolant is needed to
an emergency, have a authorized dealer drain, Disposal Of Used Coolant maintain the proper level, only OAT coolant that
flush, and refill with OAT coolant (conforming to meets the requirements of the manufacturer
Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze) is
MS.90032) as soon as possible. Material Standard MS.90032 should be added to
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal.
Cooling System Pressure Cap Check with your local authorities to determine the the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of disposal rules for your community. To prevent Cooling System Notes
engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that ingestion by animals or children, do not store
NOTE:
engine coolant will return to the radiator from ethylene glycol-based coolant in open containers
When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/kilo-
the coolant expansion bottle/recovery tank or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground,
meters of operation, you may observe vapor
(if equipped). clean up any ground spills immediately. If ingested
coming from the front of the engine compartment.
by a child or pet, seek emergency assistance
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there This is normally a result of moisture from rain,
immediately.
is any accumulation of foreign material on the snow, or high humidity accumulating on the
sealing surfaces. radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat
opens, allowing hot engine coolant (antifreeze) to
enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment BRAKE SYSTEM WARNING!

shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the
vehicle may be safely driven. The vapor will soon In order to ensure brake system performance, all  Use only manufacturer's recommended brake
dissipate. brake system components should be inspected fluid Ú page 368. Using the wrong type of
periodically. For the proper maintenance intervals brake fluid can severely damage your brake
 Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
Ú page 302. system and/or impair its performance. The
 Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator
proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is
and in the coolant expansion bottle. If engine WARNING! also identified on the original factory installed
coolant needs to be added, the contents of the
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.
coolant expansion bottle must also be protected
against freezing. possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting  To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
or riding on the brake pedal can result in moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that
 If frequent engine coolant additions are abnormally high brake temperatures, excessive
required, the cooling system should be pressure has been in a tightly closed container. Keep
lining wear, and possible brake damage. You the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at
tested for leaks. would not have your full braking capacity in an all times. Brake fluid in a open container
 Maintain engine coolant concentration at a emergency. absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to lower boiling point. This may cause it to boil
MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corro- unexpectedly during hard or prolonged
sion protection of your engine which contains
Fluid Level Check — Brake Master Cylinder
braking, resulting in sudden brake failure. This
aluminum components. The fluid level of the master cylinder should be
could result in a collision.
checked whenever the vehicle is serviced, or
 Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle
immediately if the brake system warning light is on.  Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result
overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
If necessary, add fluid to bring level within the in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts,
8
 Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your designated marks on the side of the reservoir of causing the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake
vehicle is equipped with air conditioning, keep the brake master cylinder. Be sure to clean the top fluid can also damage painted and vinyl
the front of the condenser clean. of the master cylinder area before removing cap. surfaces, care should be taken to avoid its
 Do not change the thermostat for Summer or With disc brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall contact with these surfaces.
Winter operation. If replacement is ever neces- as the brake pads wear. Brake fluid level should be (Continued)
sary, install ONLY the correct type thermostat. checked when pads are replaced. If the brake fluid
Other designs may result in unsatisfactory is abnormally low, check the system for leaks.
engine cooling performance, poor gas mileage,
and increased emissions.
Fluid Level Check Fluid And Filter Changes

WARNING!
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not Under normal operating conditions, the fluid
 Do not allow petroleum-based fluid to contam- require adjustment under normal operating installed at the factory will provide satisfactory
inate the brake fluid. Brake seal components conditions. Routine fluid level checks are not lubrication for the life of the vehicle.
could be damaged, causing partial or required; therefore the transmission has no
complete brake failure. This could result in a Routine fluid and filter changes are not required.
dipstick. An authorized dealer can check your However, change the fluid and filter if the fluid
collision. transmission fluid level using special service tools. becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the
If you notice fluid leakage or transmission transmission is disassembled for any reason.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION malfunction, visit an authorized dealer
Selection Of Lubricant
immediately to have the transmission fluid level
Special Additives checked. Operating the vehicle with an improper It is important to use the proper transmission fluid
The manufacturer strongly recommends against fluid level can cause severe transmission damage. to ensure optimum transmission performance and
using any special additives in the transmission. life. Use only the manufacturer's specified
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an CAUTION! transmission fluid Ú page 368. It is important to
engineered product and its performance may be If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an maintain the transmission fluid at the correct level
impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do authorized dealer immediately. Severe using the recommended fluid.
not add any fluid additives to the transmission. transmission damage may occur. An authorized NOTE:
Avoid using transmission sealers as they may dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid No chemical flushes should be used in any trans-
adversely affect seals. level accurately. mission; only the approved lubricant should be
used.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your CAUTION!
transmission as the chemicals can damage your Using a transmission fluid other than the
transmission components. Such damage is not manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. deterioration in transmission shift quality and/or
torque converter shudder.
FRONT/REAR A XLE F LUID Rear Axle Fluid Level Check Adding Fluid
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are The rear axle oil level needs to be no lower than Add fluid at the filler hole, until it runs out of the
not required. When the vehicle is serviced for other 1/8 inch (3 mm) below the bottom of the fill hole. hole, when the vehicle is in a level position.
reasons the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly The rear axle fill and drain plugs should be Drain
should be inspected. If gear oil leakage is tightened to 22 to 29 ft lb (30 to 40 N·m).
First remove fill plug, then remove drain plug.
suspected inspect the fluid level. Recommended tightening torque for drain and fill
CAUTION!
Front Axle Fluid Level Check plugs is 15 to 25 ft lb (20 to 34 N·m).
The front axle oil level needs to be no lower than Do not overtighten the plugs as it could damage
1/8 inch (3 mm) below the bottom of the fill hole. them and cause them to leak. CAUTION!
The front axle fill and drain plugs should be When installing plugs, do not overtighten. You
tightened to 22 to 29 ft lb (30 to 40 N·m). Selection Of Lubricant could damage them and cause them to leak.
Use only the manufacturer's recommended fluid
CAUTION! Ú page 368. Selection Of Lubricant
Do not overtighten the plugs as it could damage
them and cause them to leak.
TRANSFER C ASE Use only the manufacturer's recommended fluid
Ú page 368.
Fluid Level Check
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are
not required. When the vehicle is serviced for other
reasons the exterior surfaces of the transfer case 8
assembly should be inspected. If oil leakage is
suspected inspect the fluid level.
FUSES The fuses protect electrical systems against Underhood Fuses

excessive current.
The Power Distribution Center (PDC) is located on
General Information When a device does not work, you must check the the passenger side of the engine compartment,
fuse element inside the blade fuse for a break/ behind the headlamp. This center contains
WARNING!
melt. cartridge fuses, micro fuses, relays, and circuit
 When replacing a blown fuse, always use an Also, please be aware that when using power breakers. A description of each fuse and
appropriate replacement fuse with the same outlets for extended periods of time with the component may be stamped on the inside cover,
amp rating as the original fuse. Never replace engine off may result in vehicle battery discharge. otherwise the cavity number of each fuse is
a fuse with another fuse of higher amp rating. stamped on the inside cover that corresponds to
Never replace a blown fuse with metal wires or the following chart.
any other material. Do not place a fuse inside
a circuit breaker cavity or vice versa. Failure to
use proper fuses may result in serious
personal injury, fire and/or property damage.
 Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the
ignition is off and that all the other services
are switched off and/or disengaged.
 If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an
authorized dealer.
Blade Fuses
 If a general protection fuse for safety systems
(air bag system, braking system), power unit 1 — Fuse Element Power Distribution Center
systems (engine system, transmission 2 — Blade Fuse with a good/functional fuse
element NOTE:
system) or steering system blows, contact an
Fuses for safety systems must be serviced by an
authorized dealer. 3 — Blade fuse with a bad/not functional fuse
authorized dealer.
element (blown fuse)
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description

* If Equipped
F02 – – Spare
F03 500 Amp Gray – Starter
F04 250 Amp Gray – Alternator
F05 – – Spare
F06 Shunt – Aux Battery Input
F07 100 Amp Gray – Rad Fan
F08 80 Amp Gray – Electrical Power Steering Module (EPS) #1
F09 80 Amp Gray – Electrical Power Steering Module (EPS) #2
F10 80 Amp Gray – Feed to IPDC
F11 150 Amp Gray – PCR Fuse*
F12 – – Not Populated
F13 40 Amp Green – Starter #1 & #2
F14 – 10 Amp Red GNMM / VPMS*
8
F15 – 10 Amp Red MOD ECM*
F16 – 15 Amp Blue Cluster
F17A – 10 Amp Red EPS
F17B – – Not Populated
F18 30 Amp Pink – Headlamp Washer
F19 30 Amp Pink – BSM Valves #2*

* If Equipped
F23A – 10 Amp Red ECM / EPS / SLM / GPF
F23B – 10 Amp Red IAIR SUSPENSION / ELSD RR
F26 50 Amp Red – BSM Motor #2*
F27 30 Amp Pink – Rear Defroster (EBL)
F36 50 Amp Red – BCM Feed #1
F37 30 Amp Pink – DTCM

* If Equipped
F40 – 5 Amp Tan Intelligent Battery Sensor #1 (IBS #1)
F41 – 20 Amp Yellow Central ADAS Decision (CADM) MAP*
F43 – 10 Amp Red Engine Control Module (ECM) Gas Engine
F45 – 15 Amp Blue Front Axle Disconnect
F48 – 10 Amp Red CVPAM
F51 – 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Pump Motor / FPCM
8
F54 – 20 Amp Yellow Headlamp LT

* If Equipped
F63 – 20 Amp Yellow Camera Washer Front
F64 – 15 Amp Blue Smart Bar Control Module (ASBS)
ACT Grille Shutter / ACT Grille Shutter Lower / ACT Rear Axle
F65 – 15 Amp Blue
Coolant Valve / Active Air Dam
F66 – 20 Amp Yellow Horns
DTCM / Smart Bar Control Module (ASBS) Wake Up /
F67 – 10 Amp Red
Switchable Engine Mount / BSM #2
F68 – 20 Amp Yellow Headlamp RT
F70 – 20 Amp Yellow IGN Coil / IGN Capacitors 3.6L
F77 – 20 Amp Yellow TCM SBW
F78 – 20 Amp Yellow ECM

* If Equipped
F79 – 10 Amp Red Fuel Door / MOD ELCM / Fuel Injectors* (5.7L Only)
F80 20 Amp Blue – ECM (Gas)
F81 40 Amp Green – BCM Feed #4
F83 40 Amp Green – LTR Coolant Pump* (6.2L)
F85 – 10 Amp Red PCR Relay Coil #1*
F86 50 Amp Red – BSM Valves #1
F88 50 Amp Red – BSM Motor #1
8
F92 20 Amp Blue – Front De-Icer (Windshield)
F94 – 10 Amp Red AC Compressor Clutch / Electric AC Compressor
F98A – – Not Populated

* If Equipped
F103 30 Amp Pink – Frt Wiper
F105B – 15 Amp Blue LTR Coolant Pump (2.0 Gas)
CAUTION!
 When installing the power distribution center cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow
water to get into the power distribution center and possibly result in an electrical system failure.
 When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
Rear Power Distribution Center

The Rear Power Distribution Center is located underneath the passenger seat. This center contains cartridge fuses, micro fuses, relays, and circuit breakers. The
following chart corresponds to the fuses inside.
NOTE:
Fuses for safety systems must be serviced by an authorized dealer.

* If Equipped
F03 Shunt – Aux Battery Input (Dual Battery ESS Vehicle Only)
F05 150 Amp Gray – Underhood Battery Feed (Single Battery 5.7 Only)
F06 – – Spare
F07 – – Spare
F08 – – Spare
F09 – – Spare
F10 – – Spare
F11 50 Amp Red – Mod BCM Feed #2
F12 – – Spare 8
F13 – – Spare
F14 – – Spare
F15A – – Spare
Hands Free Liftgate / Rear Window Switches / MOD HVAC
F15B – 10 Amp Red
Cntrl Frt
F16 – – Spare
F17 40 Amp Green – Mod BCM Feed #3

* If Equipped
F18 30 Amp Pink – Power Liftgate Module
F19A – 10 Amp Red L2+ Driver Alert Lighting Module
F19B – – Spare
F20A – 15 Amp Blue Central ASAS Decision Module (CADM) - LO
F20B – – Spare
F21A – – Spare
F21B – – Spare
F22 – – Spare
F23 – 10 Amp Red Media Hub #2 (RR) / #3 (LR)
F24 – – Spare
F25 30 Amp Pink – Mod Door MUX Passenger
F26 20 Amp Blue – Headrest Dump 3rd Row (LT & RT)*
F27 – – Spare
F28 30 Amp Pink – MOD Memory / Power Seat (Passenger Frt)
F29A – 10 Amp Red MOD ICS Switch Bank Rear (Frt Console)
F29B – – Spare
F30 30 Amp Pink – MOD Memory / Power Seat (Driver Frt)
F31 – – Spare
F32 – – Spare
F33 – – Spare

* If Equipped
F34 30 Amp Pink – MOD Door MUX Driver
F35 25 Amp Clear – Trailer Tow Module #2
F36A – 10 Amp Red Intelligent Event Base Lighting Module
F36B – 10 Amp Red Port Pwr USB Console (USB CH Only) / Port UCI Dual USB Rear
F37 25 Amp Clear – Trailer Tow Module #1
F38 – – Spare
F39 – – Spare
F40 – 30 Amp Green Mod Audio Amplifier #1A
F41 – – Spare
F42A – – Spare
Rear Entertainment Screens 1 (Res1) / (Res2) / Media Hub
F42B – 10 Amp Red #2 RR Wake Up / Media Hub #3 lR Wake Up / APO
Illumination / 2nd - 3rd Row Seat Switches-Illumination
F43 – – Spare 8
F44A – 20 Amp Yellow 12 Volt Power Outlet Cargo Area (Ign)
F44B – 20 Amp Yellow 12 Volt Power Outlet Cargo Area (Battery)
F45 – 20 Amp Yellow MOD CRSM (Heated Seat RR RT)
F46 30 Amp Pink – WL75 Folding Seat Module 3rd Row Feed #1*
F47 – – Spare
F48 – – Spare
F49 – – Spare

* If Equipped
Seat Massage Driver Mod (SSMD) / Seat Massage Passenger
F50 – 15 Amp Blue
Mod (SSMP)*
F51 – 30 Amp Green MOD IAir Suspension (Valves)
F52 – 20 Amp Yellow MOD CRSM (Heat Seat RR LT)*
F53 30 Amp Pink – Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Rear #1 *
F54 – – Spare
F55 30 Amp Pink – MOD Inverter
F56 30 Amp Pink – WL75 Folding Seat Module 3rd Row Feed #2*
F57 – – Spare
3rd Row Additional USB charge (Only LT - RT) / Port Pwr USB
F58 – 15 Amp Blue
Console UBS (CH Only)
F59 – – Spare
F60 – – Spare
F61 – – Spare
F62 – 20 Amp Yellow Module Seat Heater Frt (Driver)*
F63 30 Amp Pink – Assy Trailer Tow Receptacle B+
F64 – – Spare
F65 – – Spare
F66 20 Amp Blue – MOD Door MUX Passenger Rear - Smart Motor
F67 – 30 Amp Green MOD Audio Amplifier #1B
F68 – – Spare

* If Equipped
F69 – 20 Amp Yellow L2+ Central ADAS Decision Module (CADM) MID*
Video Routing Module (VRM) / Port Power - USB IP (USB Ch
F70 – 10 Amp Red
Only)
F71 – – Spare
F72 – – Spare
F73 – – Spare
F74 – 5 Amp Tan L2+ Intelligent Battery Sensor (IBS) - 2*
F75 – – Spare
F76 – – Spare
F77 – – Spare
F78 50 Amp Red – MOD IAir Suspension
F79 – – Spare
F80 – – Spare
8

* If Equipped
F81 – 20 Amp Yellow Module Seat Heater Frt (PASS)*
F82 – 10 Amp Red SW Seat Heater (RR RT - RR LT)*
F83 – – Spare
F84 – – Spare
F85 – – Spare
F86 – 15 Amp Blue Lumbar Support Driver - Passenger SW*
F87 – – Spare
F88 20 Amp Blue – MOD Door MUX Driver Rear - Smart Motor
CAUTION!
Interior Power Distribution Center NOTE:

The Interior Power Distribution Center is located Fuses for safety systems must be serviced by an
underneath the steering column on the driver’s authorized dealer.
side of the vehicle. This center contains cartridge
fuses, micro fuses, relays, and circuit breakers.
Fuse numbers are labeled next to each fuse cavity,
fuse descriptions correspond with the following
chart.
Interior PDC Location

* If Equipped
F01 – – Spare
F02 25 Amp Clear – MTR Sunshade Sunroof Dual Pane / MTR sunroof single Pane
F03 – 15 Amp Blue MOD Seat Heater Frt (Steering Wheel) *
F04 – 10 Amp Red Night Vision Module / Driver Monitoring Camera (DMC)
F05 – – Spare 8
F06 – – Spare
F07 – – Spare
Automatic Gearbox Shifter Module (AGSM) / Steering Column
F08 – 15 Amp Blue
Lock
F09 – – Spare
F10 40 Amp Green – HVAC Blower Motor
F11 – – Spare

* If Equipped
F12 – 20 Amp Yellow Assy Cigar Lighter
Assy Mirror Inside Rearview / Digital TV (DTV) - China - Japan /
F13 – 10 Amp Red Sunroof Single - Dual Pane / Port UC1 Dual USB RR / Interior
Monitoring Camera
F14 – – Spare
F15A – – Spare
F15B – – Spare
F16 – 10 Amp Red MOD ORC
F17 – – Spare
F18 – – Spare
F19 – – Spare
Overhead Console Assy (OHC) W/Sunshade / Intrusion
F20 – 10 Amp Red Module / Intrusion Sensor / Siren / Heads Up Display (HUD) /
Digital TV (DTV) China - Japan
F21 30 Amp Pink – Trailer Tow Electric Brake - After market
F22 – – Spare
F23 – – Spare
F24 – – Spare
F25 – – Spare
F26 – – Spare
F27 – – Spare

* If Equipped
F28 – – Spare
F29 – – Spare
F30 – – Spare
F31 – – Spare
MOD ICS Switch Bank / SW Bank Upper / SW EPB / Aux
F32 – 15 Amp Blue
Switch Bank Module (ASBM)
Transfer case SW / Humidity Rain Light Sensor (HRLS) /
F33 – 15 Amp Blue
Suspension SW*
F34 – – Spare
F35 – 10 Amp Red IRCAM Heater
F36 – – Spare
F37 – – Spare
F38 – – Spare
F39 – – Spare 8
F40 – – Spare
F41A – 10 Amp Red MOD Occupant Class / Steering Column Lock
F41B – 10 Amp Red Spare
Parktronics System MOD (PTS) / MOD Haptic Lane Feedback /
F42A – 10 Amp Red
Trailer Tow Module
F42B – 10 Amp Red MOD HVAC Control / Frt ERC Motor Ctrl / RR ERC Motor Ctrl
F43A – – Spare

* If Equipped
F43B – – Spare
F44 – 15 Amp Blue MOD Cluster CCN / MOD SGW (Cybersecurity)
F45 – – Spare
F46 – – Spare
F47A – – Spare
F47B – – Spare
F48A – – Spare
F48B – – Spare
F49 – 7.5 Amp Brown MOD RF HUB / Module Ignition (MD KIN)
Telematics Box Module (TBM) / MOD Front Passenger Display
F50A – 10 Amp Red
Module (FPDM) / MOD DCSD*
F50B – 10 Amp Red Port Diagnostics 1 & 2
F51A – – Spare
F51B – – Spare
F52 – – Spare
F53 – 20 Amp Yellow MOD CMCM (Radio)
F54A – – Spare
F54B – – Spare
F55 – – Spare
F56 – – Spare

* If Equipped
F57 – – Spare
F58 – – Spare
F59 – – Spare
F60 – – Spare
F61 – – Spare
F62A – – Spare
F62B – – Spare
Media HUB #1 Frt / Port UC1 Dual USB Frt / Wireless
F63A – 15 Amp Blue
Charging Pad MOD (WCPM) - High/Premium Only
F63B – 15 Amp Blue Spare
F64A – 10 Amp Red MOD ORC
F64B – 10 Amp Red Steering Column Control Module (SCCM)
F65 – 5 Amp Tan MOD SGW (Cybersecurity)
F66 – – Spare 8
CB1 – – Spare
CB2 – – Spare
CB3 – – Spare
CB4 – – Spare
CB5 – – Spare
CB6 – – Spare
CAUTION!
BULB R EPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs
Interior Bulbs
NOTE:
The Interior lights are LED, for replacement of any LED lamps, see an authorized dealer.
Exterior Bulbs
NOTE:
The exterior lights are LED, for replacement of any LED lamps, see an authorized dealer.
TIRES 1 — US DOT Safety Standards Code  LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on
US design standards. The size designation for
(TIN) LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric tires
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
2 — Size Designation except for the letters “LT” that are molded into
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the the sidewall preceding the size designation.
3 — Service Description
following information: Tire Markings, Tire Example: LT235/85R16.
Identification Numbers, Tire Terminology and 4 — Maximum Load
 Temporary spare tires are designed for tempo-
Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire Loading. 5 — Maximum Pressure rary emergency use only. Temporary high pres-
Tire Markings 6 — Treadwear, Traction and Tempera- sure compact spare tires have the letter “T” or
ture Grades “S” molded into the sidewall preceding the size
designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
 High flotation tire sizing is based on US design
NOTE:
standards and it begins with the tire diameter
 P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on US molded into the sidewall.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
“P” molded into the sidewall preceding the size
designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
 European — Metric tire sizing is based on Euro-
pean design standards. Tires designed to this
standard have the tire size molded into the side-
Tire Markings wall beginning with the section width. The letter 8
"P" is absent from this tire size designation.
Example: 215/65R15 96H.
TIRE SIZING CHART
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on US design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on US design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
 Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
 "R" means radial construction, or
 "D" means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
 A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
 A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
 The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading,
road conditions, and posted speed limits)
EXAMPLE:
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
 XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
 LL = Light load tire or
 C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
Tire Identification Number (TIN)

The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including
the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is
not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
8
 This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the US Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
 03 means the 3rd week
EXAMPLE:
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
 01 means the year 2001
 Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could
represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Tire Terminology And Definitions

Term Definition
B-pillar The vehicle B-pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or kPa
(kilopascals).
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
Maximum Inflation Pressure
this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
placard.
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the
Tire Placard
original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure This placard tells you important information about
the:
NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on 1. Number of people that can be carried in the
the driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the vehicle.
driver's side door. 2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including 3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
the spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear,
inflate to the recommended pressure for your
and spare tires.
vehicle.
Example Tire Placard Location (B-pillar) Loading
Tire And Loading Information Placard The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not
exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your
vehicle. You will not exceed the tire's load carrying
capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions,
tire size, and cold tire inflation pressures specified
on the Tire and Loading Information placard in
Ú page 176.
NOTE:
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, Gross
Example Tire Placard Location (Door) Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear 8
axles must not be exceeded.
For further information on GAWR, vehicle loading,
Tire And Loading Information Placard and trailer towing, refer Ú page 176.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of (4) The resulting figure equals the Metric Example For Load Limit
your vehicle, locate the statement “The combined available amount of cargo and luggage For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and
weight of occupants and cargo should never
load capacity. For example, if “XXX” there will be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle,
exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the Tire and Loading the amount of available cargo and luggage load
Information placard. The combined weight of amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will
capacity is 295 kg (635-340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as
occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer tongue be five 150 lb passengers in your
shown in step 4.
weight (if applicable) should never exceed the vehicle, the amount of available cargo
weight referenced here. and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. NOTE:
(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)  If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from
Steps For Determining Correct Load your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle.
Limit— (5) Determine the combined weight of The following table shows examples on how to
(1) Locate the statement “The combined luggage and cargo being loaded on the calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing
weight of occupants and cargo should vehicle. That weight may not safely capacities of your vehicle with varying seating
exceed the available cargo and luggage configurations and number and size of occu-
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your pants. This table is for illustration purposes only
vehicle's placard. load capacity calculated in Step 4.
and may not be accurate for the seating and
(2) Determine the combined weight of (6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load carry capacity of your vehicle.
the driver and passengers that will be load from your trailer will be transferred  For the following example, the combined weight
riding in your vehicle. to your vehicle. Consult this manual to of occupants and cargo should never exceed
determine how this reduces the 865 lbs (392 kg).
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the
available cargo and luggage load
driver and passengers from XXX kg or
capacity of your vehicle.
XXX lbs.
8
Safety Both underinflation and overinflation affect the

WARNING! stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. WARNING! sluggish response or over responsiveness in the
Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle steering.
 Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and
handling, and increase your stopping distance. can cause collisions. NOTE:
Use tires of the recommended load capacity for
 Underinflation increases tire flexing and can  Unequal tire pressures from side to side may
your vehicle. Never overload them.
result in overheating and tire failure. cause erratic and unpredictable steering
response.
TIRES — G ENERAL I NFORMATION  Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to cushion
 Unequal tire pressure from side to side may
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes
cause the vehicle to drift left or right.
Tire Pressure can cause damage that result in tire failure.
Fuel Economy
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the  Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect
safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling
Four primary areas are affected by improper tire resulting in loss of vehicle control. resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.
pressure: Tread Wear
 Unequal tire pressures can cause steering
 Safety problems. You could lose control of your Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause
 Fuel Economy vehicle. abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life,
resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
 Tread Wear  Unequal tire pressures from one side of the
vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
 Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
drift to the right or left. Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable
ride. Overinflation produces a jarring and
 Always drive with each tire inflated to the
uncomfortable ride.
recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
Tire Inflation Pressures after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The cold required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to
tire inflation pressure must not exceed the an authorized tire dealer or original equipment
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire vehicle dealer for recommended safe operating
the driver's side B-pillar or rear edge of the driver's
sidewall. speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
side door.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a
NOTE: WARNING!
wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire
The recommended pressures may be different for
pressures vary with temperature changes. High speed driving with your vehicle under
the front and rear axles.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi maximum load is dangerous. The added strain
At least once a month:
(7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. on your tires could cause them to fail. You could
 Check and adjust tire pressure with a good Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure have a serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle
quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not inside a garage, especially in the Winter. loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous
make a visual judgment when determining speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).
proper inflation. Tires may look properly inflated Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C)
even when they are underinflated. and the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then
the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased Radial Ply Tires
 Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for
damage. every 12°F (7°C) for this outside temperature WARNING!
condition.
CAUTION! Combining radial ply tires with other types of
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, (13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce handle poorly. The instability could cause a
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
collision. Always use radial ply tires in sets of 8
will be too low. four. Never combine them with other types of
valve stem, which could damage the valve stem. tires.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are
speeds and within posted speed limits. Where
always “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire
speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle
inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure
can be driven at high speeds, maintaining correct
after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
tire inflation pressure is very important. Increased
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)
tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be
Tire Repair is changed after driving with underinflated tire Tread Wear Indicators
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if condition, please replace the TPMS sensor as it is
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment
it meets the following criteria: not designed to be reused when driven under run
tires to help you in determining when your tires
flat mode 14 psi (96 kPa) condition.
 The tire has not been driven on when flat. should be replaced.
NOTE:
 The damage is only on the tread section of your
TPMS sensor must be replaced after driving the
tire (sidewall damage is not repairable). vehicle on a flat tire condition.
 The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an inch It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at
(6 mm). full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs run flat mode.
and additional information. See the Tire Pressure Monitoring System section
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have for more information Ú page 236.
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced
Tire Spinning
immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical
size and service description (Load Index and When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions,
Speed Symbol). Replace the tire pressure sensor do not spin your vehicle's wheels above 30 mph Tire Tread
as well as it is not designed to be reused. (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds
1 — Worn Tire
continuously without stopping.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped 2 — New Tire
For further information Ú page 295.
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive
50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a WARNING! These indicators are molded into the bottom of the
rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss of tread grooves. They will appear as bands when the
inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode. A Run Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces tread depth becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm).
Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation pressure is generated by excessive wheel speeds may When the tread is worn to the tread wear
of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a Run Flat tire cause tire damage or failure. A tire could indicators, the tire should be replaced.
reaches the run flat mode it has limited driving explode and injure someone. Do not spin your
vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) For further information Ú page 351.
capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately.
A Run Flat tire is not repairable. When a run flat tire for more than 30 seconds continuously when
you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a
spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
Life Of Tire Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as It is recommended you contact an authorized tire
little exposure to light as possible. Protect tires dealer or original equipment dealer with any
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline. questions you may have on tire specifications or
factors including, but not limited to:
capability. Failure to use equivalent replacement
 Driving style Replacement Tires
tires may adversely affect the safety, handling, and
 Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pres- The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of ride of your vehicle.
sures can cause uneven wear patterns to many characteristics. They should be inspected
develop across the tire tread. These abnormal regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation WARNING!
wear patterns will reduce tread life, resulting in pressures. The manufacturer strongly
recommends that you use tires equivalent to the  Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or
the need for earlier tire replacement. speed rating other than that specified for your
originals in size, quality and performance when
 Distance driven vehicle. Some combinations of unapproved
replacement is needed Ú page 350. Refer to the
 Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V Tire and Loading Information placard or the tires and wheels may change suspension
or higher, and Summer tires typically have a Vehicle Certification Label for the size designation dimensions and performance characteristics,
reduced tread life. Rotation of these tires per of your tire. The Load Index and Speed Symbol for resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
the vehicle scheduled maintenance is highly your tire will be found on the original equipment braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpre-
recommended. tire sidewall. dictable handling and stress to steering and
suspension components. You could lose
See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the “Tire control and have a collision resulting in
WARNING!
Safety Information” section of this manual for serious injury or death. Use only the tire and
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after more information relating to the Load Index and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for
six years, regardless of the remaining tread. Speed Symbol of a tire.
Failure to follow this warning can result in
your vehicle. 8
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or
sudden tire failure. You could lose control and  Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can
have a collision resulting in serious injury or capacity, other than what was originally
seriously affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever
death. equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with a
replace a wheel, make sure that the wheel’s
smaller load index could result in tire over-
specifications match those of the original wheels.
loading and failure. You could lose control and
NOTE: have a collision.
Wheel valve stem must be replaced as well when
installing new tires due to wear and tear in existing  Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
tires. adequate speed capability can result in
sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Summer tires do not contain the all season authorized tire dealer for recommended safe
CAUTION! designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on the operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation
Replacing original tires with tires of a different tire sidewall. Use Summer tires only in sets of four; pressures.
size may result in false speedometer and failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and While studded tires improve performance on ice,
odometer readings. handling of your vehicle. skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces
may be poorer than that of non-studded tires.
WARNING! Some states prohibit studded tires; therefore, local
TIRE TYPES laws should be checked before using these tire
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions.
All Season Tires — If Equipped You could lose vehicle control, resulting in types.
severe injury or death. Driving too fast for
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons
conditions also creates the possibility of loss of
SPARE T IRES — IF E QUIPPED
(Spring, Summer, Autumn, and Winter). Traction
levels may vary between different all season tires. vehicle control. NOTE:
All season tires can be identified by the M+S, M&S, For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead
M/S or MS designation on the tire sidewall. Use all Snow Tires of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in
season tires only in sets of four; failure to do so “In Case Of Emergency” for further information.
Some areas of the country require the use of snow
may adversely affect the safety and handling of
tires during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified CAUTION!
your vehicle.
by a “mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire
Summer Or Three Season Tires — sidewall. Because of the reduced ground clearance, do
not take your vehicle through an automatic car
If Equipped If you need snow tires, select tires wash with a compact or limited use temporary
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry equivalent in size and type to the original spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in equipment tires. Use snow tires only in result.
snow or on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with sets of four; failure to do so may
Summer tires, be aware these tires are not adversely affect the safety and handling of your
designed for Winter or cold driving conditions. vehicle. For restrictions when towing with a spare tire
Install Winter tires on your vehicle when ambient designated for temporary emergency use
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than
temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if roads Ú page 182.
what was originally equipped with your vehicle and
are covered with ice or snow. For more should not be operated at sustained speeds over
information, contact an authorized dealer. 75 mph (120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph
(120 km/h) refer to original equipment or an
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire Since this tire has limited tread life, the original Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped
And Wheel — If Equipped equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced)
The collapsible spare is for temporary emergency
and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and use only. You can identify if your vehicle is
opportunity.
wheel equivalent in look and function to the equipped with a collapsible spare by looking at the
original equipment tire and wheel found on the Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a spare tire description on the Tire and Loading
front or rear axle of your vehicle. This spare tire conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, Information Placard located on the driver’s side
may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle. If since the wheel is designed specifically for the door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
your vehicle has this option, refer to an authorized compact spare tire. Do not install more than one
Collapsible spare tire description
tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any
example: 165/80-17 101P.
pattern. given time.
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped WARNING! equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced)
The compact spare is for temporary emergency and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first
Compact and collapsible spares are for opportunity.
use only. You can identify if your vehicle is temporary emergency use only. With these
equipped with a compact spare by looking at the spares, do not drive more than 50 mph Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is
spare tire description on the Tire and Loading (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited properly installed to the vehicle. Inflate the
Information Placard located on the driver’s side tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread collapsible tire using the electric air pump before
door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire lowering the vehicle.
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
letter “T” or “S” preceding the size designation. warnings, which apply to your spare. Failure to conventional tire on the collapsible spare wheel,
Example: T145/80D18 103M. do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of since the wheel is designed specifically for the 8
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire vehicle control. collapsible spare tire.
WARNING!
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped WHEEL A ND WHEEL TRIM CARE
The limited use spare tire is for temporary All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum
Compact and Collapsible spares are for emergency use only. This tire is identified by a label
temporary emergency use only. With these and chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned
located on the limited use spare wheel. This label regularly using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to
spares, do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/ contains the driving limitations for this spare. This
h). Temporary use spares have limited tread life. maintain their luster and to prevent corrosion.
tire may look like the original equipped tire on the Wash wheels with the same soap solution
When the tread is worn to the tread wear front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not.
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to recommended for the body of the vehicle and
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects remember to always wash when the surfaces are
be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as your
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could not hot to the touch.
original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration
control. at the first opportunity. caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium
chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other road
WARNING! chemicals used to melt ice or control dust on dirt
Full Size Spare — If Equipped roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild soap to
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use Limited use spares are for emergency use only. wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh chemicals or
only. This tire may look like the originally equipped Installation of this limited use spare tire affects a stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s
tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive protective coating that helps keep them from
not. This spare tire may have limited tread life. more than the speed listed on the limited use corroding and tarnishing.
When the tread is worn to the tread wear spare wheel. Keep inflated to the cold tire
indicators, the temporary use full size spare tire inflation pressures listed on your Tire and CAUTION!
needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as Loading Information Placard located on the
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the Avoid products or automatic car washes that use
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original acidic solutions or strong alkaline additives or
at the first opportunity. equipment tire at the first opportunity and harsh brushes. Many aftermarket wheel
reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could cleaners and automatic car washes may
result in loss of vehicle control. damage the wheel's protective finish. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar®
Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including NOTE: SNOW TRACTION D EVICES
excessive brake dust, care must be taken in the If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an
selection of tire and wheel cleaning chemicals and extended period after cleaning the wheels with Use of traction devices require sufficient
equipment to prevent damage to the wheels. wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply the tire-to-body clearance. Due to limited clearance,
Mopar® Wheel Treatment or Mopar® Chrome brakes to remove the water droplets from the the following snow traction devices are
Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or brake components. recommended. Follow these recommendations to
select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for This activity will remove the red rust on the brake guard against damage:
aluminum or chrome wheels. rotors and prevent vehicle vibration when braking.  Snow traction device must be of proper size for
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or Low the tire, as recommended by the snow traction
CAUTION! Gloss Clear Coat Wheels device manufacturer.
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle  No other tire sizes are recommended for use
brush, metal polishes or oven cleaner. These CAUTION! with the snow traction device.
products may damage the wheel's protective If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty  Please follow the table below for the recom-
finish. Such damage is not covered by the New wheels, DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives, mended tire size, axle and snow traction device:
Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap, or polishing compounds. They will permanently
Mopar® Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is damage this finish and such damage is not
recommended. covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
HAND WASH ONLY USING MILD SOAP AND
WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular
basis; this is all that is required to maintain this
finish. 8
Snow Traction Device (maximum

4x2
Axle Tire/Wheel Size projection beyond tire profile or
Trim Level
equivalent)
P245/70R17
LAREDO
265/60R18
S Class
LIMITED 265/60R18
Rear
OVERLAND 265/50R20
265/50R20 20” - S Class
SUMMIT
275/45R21XL 21” - 12mm
Snow Traction Device (maximum

4x4
Axle Tire/Wheel Size projection beyond tire profile or
Trim Level
equivalent)
P245/70R17
LAREDO
265/60R18
TRAILHAWK 265/60R18 S Class
LIMITED Rear 265/60R18
OVERLAND 265/50R20
265/50R20 20” - S Class
SUMMIT
275/45R21XL 21” - 12mm
Refer to the Ú page 302 for the proper

WARNING! CAUTION! maintenance intervals. More frequent rotation is
Using tires of different size and type  Observe the traction device manufacturer’s permissible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or
(M+S, Snow) between front and rear axles can instructions on the method of installation, unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation
cause unpredictable handling. You could lose operating speed, and conditions for use. being performed.
control and have a collision. Always use the suggested operating speed of NOTE:
the device manufacturer’s if it is less than The premium Tire Pressure Monitoring System will
30 mph (48 km/h). automatically locate the pressure values displayed
CAUTION! in the correct vehicle position following a tire
 Do not use traction devices on a compact
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe spare tire. rotation.
the following precautions: The suggested rotation method is the “rearward
cross” shown in the following diagram.
 Because of restricted traction device clear- TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
ance between tires and other suspension
components, it is important that only traction The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle
devices in good condition are used. Broken operate at different loads and perform different
devices can cause serious damage. Stop the steering, handling, and braking functions. For
vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could these reasons, they wear at unequal rates.
indicate device breakage. Remove the These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of
damaged parts of the device before further tires. The benefits of rotation are especially
use. worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as
those on On/Off-Road type tires. Rotation will 8
 Install device as tightly as possible and then
increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow,
retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
 Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h). smooth, quiet ride. Tire Rotation (Rearward Cross)
 Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and

large bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
 Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry
pavement.
(Continued)
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION variations in driving habits, service Sustained high temperature can cause
practices, and differences in road the material of the tire to degenerate
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES characteristics and climate. and reduce tire life, and excessive
The following tire grading categories TRACTION G RADES temperature can lead to sudden tire
were established by the National failure. The grade C corresponds to a
Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The Traction grades, from highest to level of performance, which all
The specific grade rating assigned by the lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades passenger vehicle tires must meet
tire's manufacturer in each category is represent the tire's ability to stop on wet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
shown on the sidewall of the tires on pavement, as measured under Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
your vehicle. controlled conditions on specified represent higher levels of performance
government test surfaces of asphalt and on the laboratory test wheel, than the
All passenger vehicle tires must conform
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor minimum required by law.
to Federal safety requirements in
traction performance.
addition to these grades. WARNING!
TREADWEAR WARNING! The temperature grade for this tire is
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based established for a tire that is properly inflated and
The Treadwear grade is a comparative not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation,
on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and
rating, based on the wear rate of the tire does not include acceleration, cornering, or excessive loading, either separately or in
when tested under controlled conditions hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics. combination, can cause heat buildup and
on a specified government test course. possible tire failure.
For example, a tire graded 150 would
TEMPERATURE G RADES
wear one and one-half times as well on
the government course as a tire graded The Temperature grades are A (the
100. The relative performance of tires highest), B, and C, representing the tire's
depends upon the actual conditions of resistance to the generation of heat and
their use, however, and may depart its ability to dissipate heat, when tested
significantly from the norm due to under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
STORING THE VEHICLE The following maintenance recommendations will

enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the
Do not use abrasive cleaning components,
solvents, steel wool or other aggressive material to
If you are storing your vehicle for more than three corrosion resistance built into your vehicle. clean the lenses.
weeks, we recommend that you take the following
steps to minimize the drain on your vehicle's
What Causes Corrosion? PRESERVING T HE BODYWORK
battery: Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal
of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle. Washing
 Disconnect the negative cable from battery.
 Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your
The most common causes are:
 Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of vehicle in the shade using Mopar® Car Wash, or
service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more,  Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation a mild car wash soap, and rinse the panels
run the air conditioning system at idle for about  Stone and gravel impact completely with water.
five minutes in the fresh air and high blower
 Insects, tree sap and tar  If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have
setting. This will ensure adequate system lubri-
 Salt in the air near seacoast localities
accumulated on your vehicle, use Mopar®
cation to minimize the possibility of compressor
Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove.
damage when the system is started again.  Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants
 Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as Mopar®
BODYWORK BODY AND UNDERBODY M AINTENANCE Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to
protect your paint finish. Use precautions to not
Cleaning Headlights scratch the paint.
PROTECTION FROM ATMOSPHERIC
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights  Avoid using abrasive compounds and power
AGENTS and fog lights that are lighter and less susceptible buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to to stone breakage than glass headlights. the paint finish. 8
geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and
make roads passable in snow and ice and those therefore different lens cleaning procedures must CAUTION!
that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during be followed.
 Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning mate-
other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses rials such as steel wool or scouring powder
your vehicle. Outside parking, which exposes your and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry that will scratch metal and painted surfaces.
vehicle to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap
which the vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold  Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
solution followed by rinsing.
weather and other extreme conditions will have an (8,274 kPa) can result in damage or removal
adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody of paint and decals.
protection.
Special Care INTERIORS WARNING!

 If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you
drive near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage SEATS AND FABRIC PARTS A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
at least once a month. collision and leave you with no protection.
Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
 It is important that the drain holes in the lower and carpeting. checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
edges of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
kept clear and open. WARNING! Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt
 If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning system. If your vehicle is involved in a collision,
paint, touch them up immediately. purposes. Many are potentially flammable, and or if you have questions regarding seat belt or
 If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or if used in closed areas they may cause retractor conditions, take your vehicle to an
similar cause that destroys the paint and protec- respiratory harm. authorized FCA dealer or authorized FCA
tive coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon Certified Collision Care Program facility for
as possible. inspection.
Seat Belt Maintenance
 If you carry special cargo such as chemicals,
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the PLASTIC A ND C OATED PARTS
materials are well packaged and sealed.
fabric. Sun damage can also weaken the fabric. Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
 If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads,
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution
consider mud or stone shields behind each CAUTION!
or lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from
wheel.
the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.  Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repel-
 Use Mopar® Touch Up Paint on scratches as
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or lents, suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the
soon as possible. An authorized dealer has plastic, painted, or decorated surfaces of the
if the buckles do not work properly.
touch up paint to match the color of your interior may cause permanent damage. Wipe
vehicle. away immediately.
 Damage caused by these type of products
may not be covered by your New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster NOTE: GLASS SURFACES

Lenses If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to
show any foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular
The lenses in front of the instruments in this transfer more so than darker colors. The leather is basis with Mopar® Glass Cleaner, or any
vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When cleaning designed for easy cleaning, and the manufacturer commercial household-type glass cleaner. Never
the lenses, care must be taken to avoid scratching recommends Mopar® total care leather cleaner use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution when
the plastic. applied on a cloth to clean the leather seats as cleaning the inside rear window equipped with
Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution needed. electric defrosters or windows equipped with radio
may be used, but do not use high alcohol content antennas. Do not use scrapers or other sharp
or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean CAUTION! instruments that may scratch the elements.
with a clean damp cloth. Dry with a soft cloth. When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or
on the towel or cloth that you are using. Do not
LEATHER S URFACES Ketone based cleaning products to clean leather
spray cleaner directly on the mirror.
upholstery, as damage to the upholstery may
Mopar® Total Clean is specifically recommended result.
for leather upholstery.
The leather upholstery can be best preserved by
regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small
particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage
the leather upholstery and should be removed
promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn soils can be
removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar® Total 8
Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your
leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not
use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents,
detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean
your leather upholstery.
362
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) increased pedal travel during application, greater
pedal force required to slow or stop, and potential
**Use only authorized dealer recommended lug
nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil
The VIN is found on a label located on the left front activation of the Brake Warning Light. before tightening.
corner of the instrument panel pad, visible from In the event power assist is lost for any reason the Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to
outside of the vehicle through the windshield. brakes will still function. However, the effort mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or
required to brake the vehicle will be much greater loose particles.
than that required with the power system
operating.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS

Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to
ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to the
vehicle. Any time a wheel has been removed and
reinstalled on the vehicle, the lug nuts/bolts
should be torqued using a properly calibrated
Windshield VIN Label Location torque wrench using a six sided (hex) deep wall
socket.
NOTE: Wheel Mounting Surface
It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN. TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until
each nut/bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure
BRAKE SYSTEM Lug Nut/Bolt
Torque
**Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
Lug Nut/Bolt
Socket Size that the socket is fully engaged on the lug nut/bolt
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake (do not insert it half way).
130 Ft-Lb
systems. If either of the two hydraulic systems M14 x 1.50 22 mm NOTE:
(176 N·m)
loses normal capability, the remaining system will If in doubt about the correct tightness, have them
still function. However, there will be some loss of checked with a torque wrench by an authorized
overall braking effectiveness. You may notice dealer or service station.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 363
After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt

torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are
FUEL REQUIREMENTS 5.7L E NGINE
properly tightened. While operating on gasoline with the required Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends greater
octane number, hearing a light knocking sound than 15% in this engine.
from the engine is not a cause for concern. This engine is designed to meet all
However, if the engine is heard making a heavy emissions regulations and provide
knocking sound, see a dealer immediately. Use of satisfactory fuel economy and
gasoline with an octane number lower than performance when using high-quality
recommended octane can cause engine failure unleaded gasoline having an octane range of 87 to
and may void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. 89 as specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The use of
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as 89 octane plus gasoline is recommended for
hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you optimum performance and fuel economy.
experience these symptoms, try another brand of
gasoline before considering service for the vehicle.
REFORMULATED G ASOLINE
Torque Patterns Many areas of the country require the use of
3.6L E NGINE cleaner burning gasoline referred to as
WARNING! Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends greater “reformulated gasoline”. Reformulated gasoline
than 15% in this engine. contains oxygenates and are specifically blended
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air
jack, do not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully until This engine is designed to meet all
quality.
the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow emissions regulations and provide
this warning may result in personal injury. optimum fuel economy and performance The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended.
when using high quality unleaded regular Properly blended reformulated gasoline will
gasoline having a posted octane number of 87 as provide improved performance and durability of
engine and fuel system components.
9
specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The use of
higher octane premium gasoline is not required, as
it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline
in these engines.
364 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
MATERIALS ADDED TO FUEL GASOLINE/OXYGENATE BLENDS DO N OT U SE E-85 IN N ON-FLEX F UEL

Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with VEHICLES
octane rating, gasolines that contain detergents, oxygenates such as ethanol. Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with
corrosion and stability additives are gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Use
recommended. Using gasolines that have these CAUTION! of gasoline with higher ethanol content may void
additives will help improve fuel economy, reduce the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing methanol,
emissions, and maintain vehicle performance.
or gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with
Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline (E-15). Use of these blends may result in starting E-85 fuel, the engine will have some or all of these
contains a higher level of detergents to and drivability problems, damage critical fuel symptoms:
further aide in minimizing engine and system components, cause emissions to exceed
fuel system deposits. When available,  Operate in a lean mode.
the applicable standard, and/or cause the
the usage of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is Malfunction Indicator Light to illuminate. Please  OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on.
recommended. Visit www.toptiergas.com for a list observe pump labels as they should clearly  Poor engine performance.
of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers. communicate if a fuel contains greater than
 Poor cold start and cold drivability.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents 15% ethanol (E-15).
 Increased risk for fuel system component
should be avoided. Many of these materials
intended for gum and varnish removal may contain corrosion.
Problems that result from using gasoline
active solvents or similar ingredients. These can containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15) or
harm fuel system gasket and diaphragm materials. gasoline containing methanol are not the
responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or
not be covered under New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
CNG AND LP F UEL SYSTEM The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated
CAUTION!
on the gasoline pump; therefore, you should ask
MODIFICATIONS your gasoline retailer whether the gasoline  The use of fuel additives, which are now being
Modifications that allow the engine to run on contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal and sold as octane enhancers, is not recom-
Compressed Natural Gas (CNG) or Liquid Propane California reformulated gasoline. mended. Most of these products contain high
(LP) may result in damage to the engine, concentrations of methanol. Fuel system
emissions, and fuel system components. Problems
FUEL S YSTEM CAUTIONS damage or vehicle performance problems
that result from running CNG or LP are not the resulting from the use of such fuels or addi-
responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or CAUTION! tives is not the responsibility of the manufac-
not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited Follow these guidelines to maintain your turer and may void or not be covered under
Warranty. vehicle’s performance: the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
METHYLCYCLOPENTADIENYL  The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by
Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can impair NOTE:
MANGANESE TRICARBONYL (MMT) I N Intentional tampering with the emissions control
engine performance and damage the emis-
GASOLINE sions control system. system can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive  An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
that is blended into some gasoline to increase malfunctions can cause the catalytic
octane. Gasoline blended with MMT provides no converter to overheat. If you notice a pungent
performance advantage beyond gasoline of the burning odor or some light smoke, your engine
same octane number without MMT. Gasoline may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may
blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and require immediate service. Contact an autho-
reduces emissions system performance in some rized dealer for service assistance.
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that
(Continued) 9
gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle.
FLUID CAPACITIES
US Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
All Engines 23 Gallons 87.0 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
3.6L Engine 5 Quarts 4.7 Liters
5.7L Engine 7 Quarts 6.6 Liters
Cooling System *
3.6L Engine – Without Trailer Tow Package 11 Quarts 10.4 Liters
3.6L Engine – With Trailer Tow Package 11.6 Quarts 10.9 Liters
5.7L Engine 14.8 Quarts 14 Liters
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS

Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
Engine Coolant (240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) meeting the
requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032.
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 0W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the
requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard MS-6395 such as
Engine Oil – 3.6L Engine
Mopar®, Pennzoil, Shell Helix or equivalent. Refer to your engine oil filler cap
for correct SAE grade.
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the
requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard MS-6395 such as
Engine Oil – 5.7L Engine
Mopar®, Pennzoil, Shell Helix or equivalent. Refer to your engine oil filler cap
for correct SAE grade.
We recommend you use a Mopar® Engine Oil Filter. If a Mopar® Engine Oil
Engine Oil Filter Filter is unavailable, only use filters that meet or exceed SAE/USCAR-36 Filter
Performance Requirements.
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Engine 87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method , 0-15% Ethanol (Do not use E-85).
89 Octane Recommended - 87 Octane Acceptable (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15%
Fuel Selection – 5.7L Engine
Ethanol (Do not use E-85).
9
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS

Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Use only Mopar® ZF 8 & 9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid or
Automatic Transmission equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or
performance of your transmission.
Transfer Case – 3.6L Engine We recommend you use Shell Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Transfer Case – 5.7L Engine We recommend you use Mopar® ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Axle Differential (Front-Rear) We recommend you use Mopar® GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-85.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use Mopar® DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703.
369
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE Any communication to FCA US LLC's customer
center should include the following information:
FOR YOUR VEHICLE FCA US LLC and its authorized dealers are vitally  Owner's name and address
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be
 Owner's telephone number (home, mobile, and
PREPARE F OR T HE APPOINTMENT happy with our products and services.
office)
All work to be performed may not be covered by the Warranty service must be done by an authorized
dealer. We strongly recommend that you take the  Authorized dealer name
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the
service manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle to an authorized dealer. They know your  Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
vehicle's service history. This can often provide a vehicle the best, and are most concerned that you  Vehicle delivery date and mileage
clue to the current problem. get prompt and high quality service. FCA US LLC's
authorized dealers have the facilities, FCA US LLC CUSTOMER CENTER
PREPARE A L IST factory-trained technicians, special tools, and the
latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed P.O. Box 21–8004
Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or the correctly and in a timely manner. Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
specific work you want done. If you've had an
accident or work done that is not on your This is why you should always talk to an authorized Phone: (877) 426-5337
dealer’s service manager first. If for some reason
maintenance log, let the service advisor know.
you are still not satisfied, talk to the general
FCA C ANADA INC. C USTOMER CENTER
BE R EASONABLE WITH REQUESTS manager or owner of the authorized dealer. They P.O. Box 1621
want to know if you need assistance. If an
If you list a number of items and you must have Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
authorized dealer is unable to resolve the concern,
your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983
you may contact FCA US LLC's Customer
situation with the service advisor and list the items French
Assistance center.
in order of priority. At many authorized dealers, you 10
may obtain a rental vehicle (additional charges
may apply). If you need a rental, it is advisable to
make these arrangements when you call for an
appointment.
370 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
MEXICO Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that FCA US LLC is not responsible for any service
require assistance can use the special needs relay contract you may have purchased from another
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240 service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY manufacturer. If you require service after FCA US
Sante Fe C.P. 05109 teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice callers, LLC New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please
dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a Bell Relay refer to the contract documents, and contact the
Mexico, D. F.
Service operator. person listed in those documents.
In Mexico City: (800) 505-1300
SERVICE CONTRACT We appreciate that you have made a major
Outside Mexico City: +(52) 55 50817568 investment when you purchased the vehicle. An
You may have purchased a service contract for a authorized dealer has also made a major
PUERTO R ICO AND US VIRGIN ISLANDS vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of investment in facilities, tools, and training to
FCA Caribbean LLC unexpected repairs after FCA US LLC's New Vehicle ensure that you are absolutely delighted with the
P.O. Box 191857 Limited Warranty expires. The Mopar® Vehicle ownership experience.
Protection plans are the ONLY vehicle extended
San Juan 00919-1857 protection plans authorized, endorsed and backed WARNING!
Phone: (877) 426-5337 by FCA US LLC to provide additional protection
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines
Fax: (787) 782-3345 beyond your vehicle’s warranty. If you purchased a
only), some of its constituents, and certain
Mopar® Vehicle Protection Plan, you will receive
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE FOR THE Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in
known to the State of California to cause cancer
HEARING O R S PEECH I MPAIRED the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In
date. If you have any questions about the service
(TDD/TTY) contract, call FCA US LLC’s Service Contract
addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and
certain products of component wear contain, or
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, National Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922
emit, chemicals known to the State of California
FCA US LLC has installed special Telecommu- (Canadian residents, call (800) 465-2001
to cause cancer and birth defects, or other
nication Devices for the Deaf (TDD) equipment at English / (800) 387-9983 French).
reproductive harm.
its customer center. Any hearing or speech
impaired customer, who has access to a TDD or a
conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the United
States, can communicate with FCA US LLC by
dialing 1-800-380-2479.
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 371
WARRANTY INFORMATION REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at
See the Warranty Information for the terms and
provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to
I N T HE 50 U NITED STATES AND 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
this vehicle and market. Refer to WASHINGTON, D.C. 1-800-424-9153); or go to http://
www.mopar.com/om for further information. www.safercar.gov; or write to:
If you believe that your vehicle has a Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey
See the Warranty Information for the terms and defect that could cause a crash or cause
provisions of FCA Canada Inc. warranties Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington,
injury or death, you should immediately D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other
applicable to this vehicle and market. Refer to
www.owners.mopar.ca/en/ for further inform the National Highway Traffic information about motor vehicle safety
information. Safety Administration (NHTSA) in from http://www.safercar.gov.
For French, refer to www.owners.mopar.ca/fr for
addition to notifying FCA US LLC.
further information. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it I N C ANADA
Use this QR code to access your may open an investigation, and if it finds If you believe that your vehicle has a
digital experience. that a safety defect exists in a group of safety defect, you should contact the
vehicles, it may order a recall and Customer Service Department
remedy campaign. However, NHTSA immediately. Canadian customers who
cannot become involved in individual wish to report a safety defect to the
problems between you, an authorized Canadian government should contact
MOPAR® PARTS dealer or FCA US LLC. Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect
Mopar® original equipment parts & accessories Investigations and Recalls at
and factory filled fluids are available from an 1-800-333-0510 or go to
authorized dealer. They are recommended for your wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/
vehicle to keep it operating at its best and maintain PCDB-BDPP.
its original condition. 10
372 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To access your Owner's Information online, visit

www.mopar.com/om (US) or
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic Development
To order the following manuals, you may use either www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada). applicables aux appareils radio exempts de
the website or the phone numbers listed below. licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux
Or
Service Manuals conditions suivantes:
Call Tech Authority toll free at:
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide a 1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage,
 1-800-890-4038 (US) et
complete working knowledge of the vehicle,
system, and/or components and is written in Owner's Manuals, Radio Manuals and Warranty 2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
straightforward language with illustrations, Information Books can be ordered through brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
diagrams, and charts. Archway at: brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals  1-800-387-1143 (Canada) le fonctionnement.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with
diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations. These GENERAL INFORMATION La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
manuals make it easy to find and fix problems on The following regulatory statement applies to all
computer-controlled vehicle systems and features. 1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
They show exactly how to find and correct cause interferencia perjudicial y
vehicle:
problems, using step-by-step troubleshooting and 2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules
drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests and cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
and with Innovation, Science and Economic
a complete list of all tools and equipment. pueda causar su operación no deseada.
Development Canada license-exempt RSS
To order a hard copy of your Service or Diagnostic standard(s). Operation is subject to the following NOTE:
Procedure manuals, visit: two conditions: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
www.techauthority.com (US and Canada). 1. This device may not cause harmful by the party responsible for compliance could void
Owner's Manuals interference, and the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
These Owner's Manuals have been prepared 2. This device must accept any interference
with the assistance of service and engineering received, including interference that may
specialists to acquaint you with specific cause undesired operation.
FCA vehicles.
373
INDEX
A Redundant Air Bag Warning Light............. 250 Alterations/Modifications
About Your Brakes .........................................362 Side Air Bags ............................................ 256 Vehicle .........................................................11
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection .....................312 Transporting Pets ..................................... 275 Ambient Light
Active Driving Assist System ..........................147 Air Bag Light......................................... 249, 275 Multicolor.....................................................60
Active Lane Management Air Cleaner, Engine Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) .................. 317, 366
System...............................108, 111, 112, 163 (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) ............................. 309 Disposal .................................................... 318
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)..... 109, 111, 136 Air Conditioner Maintenance ........................ 310 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .............. 107, 222
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ...............317 Air Conditioner Refrigerant ........................... 310 Anti-Lock Warning Light ................................ 107
Adding Fuel ....................................................175 Air Conditioner System ................................. 310 Apps .............................................................. 217
Additives, Fuel ...............................................364 Air Conditioning................................................64 Arming System
Adjust Max .............................................................64 Security Alarm .............................................24
Down ........................................................... 39 Rear.............................................................68 Assist, Hill Start ............................................. 228
Forward ....................................................... 39 Air Conditioning Filter ..............................71, 309 Audio Systems (Radio) ........................... 99, 192
Rearward..................................................... 39 Air Conditioning System ...................................69 Auto Down Power Windows ..............................78
Up................................................................ 39 Air Conditioning, Operating Tips .......................70 Auto Hold ............................................. 111, 121
Air Bag ...........................................................104 Air Filter ........................................................ 309 Automatic Folding Mirrors ................................50
Air Bag Operation ......................................252 Air Pressure Automatic Headlights .......................................57
Air Bag Warning Light ...................... 249, 252 Tires ......................................................... 349 Automatic High Beams.....................................56
Driver Knee Air Bag ...................................256 Alarm Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ..............69
Enhanced Accident Response ......... 260, 300 Arm The System ................................... 24, 25 Automatic Transmission....................... 115, 123
Event Data Recorder (EDR) .......................300 Disarm The System .....................................24 Adding Fluid .............................................. 320
Front Air Bag .............................................252 Rearm The System ......................................25 Fluid And Filter Change............................. 320
If Deployment Occurs ................................259 Security Alarm .......................................... 107 Fluid Change............................................. 320
Knee Impact Bolsters ................................256 Alarm System Fluid Level Check...................................... 320
Maintaining Your Air Bag System ..............261 Security Alarm .............................................24 Fluid Type ........................................ 320, 368 11
Maintenance .............................................261 Special Additives ...................................... 320
374
Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode ...126 Brake/Transmission Interlock ...................... 123 Child Restraints
AutoPark ........................................................116 Bulb Replacement ........................................ 340 Booster Seats ........................................... 264
Autostick........................................................126 Bulbs, Light ................................................... 277 Child Seat Installation............................... 272
Operation ..................................................126 How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt ..... 270
AUX Cord.......................................................... 73 C Infant And Child Restraints ....................... 263
Auxiliary Driving Systems ...............................230 Camera, Front ............................................... 168 Locating The LATCH Anchorages .............. 268
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) .......... 75 Camera, Night Vision .................................... 169 Lower Anchors And Tethers For
Auxiliary Power Outlet ...................................... 75 Camera, Rear ....................................... 166, 172 Children ................................................ 266
Axle Fluid .......................................................368 Camera, Rear Washer................................... 166 Older Children And Child Restraints.......... 264
Camera, Surround View ................................ 172 Seating Positions ...................................... 265
B Capacities, Fluid ........................................... 366 Child Safety Locks ............................................29
Battery ................................................. 105, 307 Caps, Filler Clean Air Gasoline ......................................... 363
Charging System Light...............................105 Oil (Engine) ............................................... 305 Cleaning
Keyless Key Fob Replacement .................... 17 Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ..................... 318 Wheels ...................................................... 354
Battery Saver Feature ...................................... 59 Car Washes................................................... 359 Climate Control ................................................63
Belts, Seat .....................................................275 Carbon Monoxide Warning............................ 277 Automatic ....................................................63
Body Mechanism Lubrication ........................312 Care And Maintenance ................................. 359 Rear .............................................................66
Bodywork .......................................................359 Cargo Area Storage ..........................................86 CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications ........ 365
B-Pillar Location.............................................345 Cargo Compartment ........................................86 Cold Weather Operation ................................ 118
Brake Assist System ......................................224 Cargo Tie-Downs ..............................................87 Compact Spare Tire ...................................... 353
Brake Control System, Electronic ..................224 Cellular Phone .............................................. 221 Contract, Service ........................................... 370
Brake Fluid .......................................... 319, 368 Chains, Tire ................................................... 355 Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ............ 318
Brake System ...................................... 319, 362 Charging Cooling System ............................................. 316
Anti-Lock (ABS) ..........................................362 Wireless.......................................................76 Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ...................... 317
Fluid Check ...............................................319 Chart, Tire Sizing ........................................... 342 Coolant Level ............................................ 318
Master Cylinder .........................................319 Check Engine Light Cooling Capacity ....................................... 366
Parking ......................................................119 (Malfunction Indicator Light) ......................... 114 Disposal Of Used Coolant ......................... 318
Warning Light ............................................104 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ................. 275 Drain, Flush, And Refill ............................. 317
Checks, Safety .............................................. 275 Inspection ........................................ 316, 318
Child Restraint .............................................. 262 Points To Remember ................................ 318
375
Pressure Cap .............................................318 Driver’s Seat Back Tilt ......................................34 Break-In Recommendations ..................... 118
Radiator Cap .............................................318 Driving .......................................................... 189 Checking Oil Level .................................... 307
Selection Of Coolant Tips........................................................... 189 Compartment .................................. 305, 306
(Antifreeze) ........................ 317, 366, 367 Drowsiness Detected .................................... 223 Compartment Identification ............. 305, 306
Corrosion Protection ......................................359 Coolant (Antifreeze) .................................. 105
Cruise Control (Speed Control) ......................136 E Cooling...................................................... 316
Cruise Light ......................................... 111, 112 Electric Brake Control System....................... 224 Exhaust Gas Caution ................................ 277
Customer Assistance .....................................369 Anti-Lock Brake System ............................ 222 Fails To Start............................................. 117
Customer Programmable Features................193 Electronic Roll Mitigation ................. 225, 229 Flooded, Starting ...................................... 117
Cybersecurity .................................................192 Electric Parking Brake................................... 119 Fuel Requirements .......................... 363, 366
Electric Power Steering ................................. 105 Jump Starting ........................................... 290
D Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) .........75 Oil .................................................... 308, 366
Daytime Running Lights ................................... 56 Electronic Park Brake ................................... 107 Oil Filler Cap ............................................. 305
Defroster, Windshield ....................................275 Electronic Stability Control Oil Filter .................................................... 309
De-Icer, Remote Start ...................................... 23 (ESC) ........................................... 107, 108, 225 Oil Selection............................308, 366, 367
De-Icer, Windshield.......................................... 63 Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light...... 105 Oil Synthetic.............................................. 309
Diagnostic System, Onboard .........................113 Emergency Braking ....................................... 235 Oil Temperature ........................................ 106
Dipsticks Emergency Gas Can Refueling ...................... 292 Overheating .............................................. 293
Oil (Engine) ................................................307 Emergency, In Case Of Starting ..................................................... 115
Disabled Vehicle Towing ................................295 Freeing Vehicle When Stuck ..................... 295 Enhanced Accident Response
Disposal Hazard Warning Flasher ........................... 278 Feature ................................................ 260, 300
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) .......................318 Jacking ..................................................... 281 Ethanol.......................................................... 364
Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel Jump Starting ........................................... 290 Exhaust Gas Cautions ................................... 277
Vehicles .........................................................364 Emission Control System Maintenance ........ 114 Exhaust System ................................... 277, 315
Door Ajar........................................................105 Engine........................................................... 305 Extend, Seats ...................................................40
Door Locks ............................................... 25, 29 Air Cleaner ................................................ 309 Exterior Lights ............................... 55, 277, 340
Child-Protection Door Lock — Rear Doors .... 29 Block Heater ............................................. 118
Doors ............................................................... 25 11
376
F Front View Camera ....................................... 168 H

FamCam System ...........................................169 Fuel ............................................................... 363 Hands-Free Liftgate .........................................85
Filters Additives ................................................... 364 Hazard Warning Flashers .............................. 278
Air Cleaner.................................................309 Clean Air ................................................... 363 Head Restraints ...............................................44
Air Conditioning .........................71, 309, 310 Ethanol ..................................................... 364 Headlights ........................................................55
Engine Oil ..................................................309 Gasoline ................................................... 363 Automatic ....................................................57
Engine Oil Disposal ...................................309 Materials Added ....................................... 364 Cleaning.................................................... 359
Flashers .........................................................278 Methanol .................................................. 364 Delay ...........................................................58
Hazard Warning.........................................278 Octane Rating........................................... 363 High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ..........56
Turn Signals .................................... 112, 277 Requirements .................................. 363, 366 Leveling .......................................................59
Flash-To-Pass .................................................. 57 Specifications ........................................... 367 Lights On Reminder .....................................58
Flooded Engine Starting ................................117 Tank Capacity ........................................... 366 On With Wipers ............................................57
Fluid Capacities .............................................366 Fuel Saver Technology .................................. 134 Passing ........................................................57
Fluid Leaks ....................................................277 Fuel System Cautions ................................... 365 Switch ..........................................................55
Fluid Level Checks Fueling .......................................................... 175 Heated Mirrors .................................................50
Brake ........................................................319 Fuses ............................................................ 322 Heated Seats ...................................................43
Engine Oil ..................................................307 Heated Steering Wheel ....................................31
Fluids And Lubricants ....................................368 G Heater, Engine Block..................................... 118
Fog Lights ...............................................58, 111 Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) .....................50 High Beam .................................................... 113
Fold-Flat Seats ................................................. 34 Gasoline, (Fuel) ............................................. 363 Hill Descent Control ............................. 112, 227
Forward Collision Warning .......... 109, 111, 233 Gasoline, Clean Air........................................ 363 Hill Descent Control Indicator ....................... 227
Four Wheel Drive ............... 109, 110, 128, 130 Gasoline, Reformulated ................................ 363 Hill Start Assist .............................................. 228
Operation ..................................................128 Gear Ranges ................................................. 124 Hitches
Shifting ......................................................110 Glass Cleaning .............................................. 361 Trailer Towing ........................................... 179
System ......................................................128 Gross Axle Weight Rating .............................. 177 Hold ’N Go ..................................................... 121
Four Wheel Drive Operation...........................128 Gross Combination Weight Rating ................ 177 HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) .....................50
Four-Way Hazard Flasher ...............................278 Gross Trailer Weight ..................................... 177 Hood
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle .................................295 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ......................... 177 Closing ...................................................... 106
Front And Rear ParkSense System ................151 GVWR............................................................ 176 Opening .................................................... 106
Front Axle (Differential) ..................................321 Hood Release...................................................82
377
I Interior Monitoring Camera ........................... 169 L

Ignition ............................................................ 20 Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) ..................61 Lane Change Assist..........................................59
Key Fob Battery Low Or Dead...................... 20 Intersection Collision Assist .......................... 236 Lane Management System ........................... 163
Key Fob Not Detected ................................. 20 Inverter Lap/Shoulder Belts ....................................... 243
Keyless Ignition ........................................... 20 Power ..........................................................76 Latches ......................................................... 277
Keyless Push Button ................................... 20 iPod/USB/MP3 Control ....................................73 Lead Free Gasoline ....................................... 363
Push Button Ignition .................................... 20 Leaks, Fluid ................................................... 277
Switch ......................................................... 20 J Life Of Tires ................................................... 351
Ignition Park Interlock ....................................123 Jack Location ................................................ 282 Liftgate ................................................... 83, 106
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) .................................. 20 Jack Operation .............................................. 285 Adjustable Height ........................................84
Inside Rearview Mirror ............................47, 278 Jacking And Tire Changing Instructions ........ 282 Closing .........................................................84
Instrument Cluster ............................. 89, 91, 92 Jacking Instructions ...................................... 285 Hands-Free ..................................................85
Audio ........................................................... 99 Jump Starting ............................................... 290 Opening .......................................................83
Descriptions ..............................................112 Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer .......................63
Display ................................................. 92, 93 K Light Bulbs .................................................... 277
Display And Messages ................................ 95 Key Fob Lights ............................................................ 277
Drive ............................................................ 97 Arm The System ..........................................24 4WD Low .................................................. 110
Home .......................................................... 96 Disarm The System .....................................24 Active Lane Management .......108, 111, 112
Menu Items ................................................. 96 Programming Additional Key Fobs ...............19 Adaptive Cruise Control ................... 111, 112
Navigation ................................................... 98 Key Fob Battery Service Air Bag ....................................104, 249, 275
Off Road ...................................................... 98 (Remote Keyless Entry) ....................................17 Air Suspension Active ............................... 110
Settings ....................................................... 99 Key Fob Programming Air Suspension Aerodynamic Height ......... 110
Trip .............................................................. 98 (Remote Keyless Entry) ....................................19 Air Suspension EntryExit ........................... 110
Vehicle Info ................................................. 97 Keyless Enter 'n Go™ .................................... 115 Air Suspension Off-Road 1 ........................ 110
Instrument Cluster Display Passive Entry ...............................................26 Air Suspension Off-Road 2 ........................ 111
Messages .................................................... 99 Passive Entry Programming .........................26 Ambient .......................................................60
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ....................361 Keys .................................................................16 Ambient, Mutlicolor......................................60
Interior And Instrument Lights ......................... 59 Replacement ...............................................19 Anti-Lock Brake System ............................ 107 11
Interior Appearance Care...............................360 Sentry (Immobilizer) ....................................20 Auto HOLD ................................................ 111
Interior Lights .................................................. 59 Auto HOLD Fault ....................................... 111
378
Automatic Headlights .................................. 57 Low Fuel ................................................... 108 White ........................................................ 112
Battery Charge ..........................................105 Low Washer Fluid ..................................... 108 Yellow .............................................. 107, 110
Blue ...........................................................113 Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine)....... 108 Load Shed Battery Saver Mode..................... 102
Brake Assist Warning ................................226 NEUTRAL .................................................. 111 Load Shed Battery Saver On ......................... 102
Brake Warning ..........................................104 Night Vision Active .................................... 111 Load Shed Electrical Load Reduction ........... 102
Bulb Replacement .....................................340 Night Vision Suppressed .......................... 113 Load Shed Intelligent Battery Sensor ............ 102
Cruise .............................................. 111, 112 Oil Pressure .............................................. 106 Loading Vehicle ............................................. 176
Daytime Running......................................... 56 Oil Temperature........................................ 106 Tires .......................................................... 345
Dimmer Switch ............................................ 60 Park ....................................................57, 111 Locks
Dimmer Switch, Headlight ........................... 55 Passing ........................................................57 Child Protection ...........................................29
Door Open .................................................105 Reading .......................................................59 Manual ........................................................25
Electric Power Steering .............................105 Rear Seat Belt Reminder ................. 106, 112 Power Door ..................................................26
Electronic Park Brake ................................107 Rear Seat Unoccupied .............................. 112 Low Fuel........................................................ 108
Electronic Stability Control .............. 107, 108 Red ........................................................... 104 Lubrication, Body .......................................... 312
Electronic Throttle Control .........................105 Seat Belt Reminder .................................. 106 Lug Nuts/Bolts .............................................. 362
Engine Coolant Temperature.....................105 Security Alarm .......................................... 107 Luggage Carrier ................................................87
Exterior ...............................................55, 277 SelecSpeed Control .................................. 113
Fog .....................................................58, 111 Service ..................................................... 340 M
Forward Collision Warning .........................111 Service 4WD ............................................. 109 Maintenance .............................................80, 82
Gray ...........................................................113 Service Adaptive Cruise ............................ 109 Maintenance Free Battery ............................ 307
Green ........................................................111 Service Forward Collision ......................... 109 Maintenance Schedule ................................. 301
Hazard Warning Flasher ............................278 Service StopStart System ......................... 109 Malfunction Indicator Light
Headlights On With Wipers.......................... 57 Sport Mode............................................... 112 (Check Engine) ..................................... 108, 114
High Beam ................................................113 StopStart .................................................. 112 Manual
High Beam/Low Beam Select ..................... 56 Tire Pressure Monitoring System .............. 109 Park Release ............................................ 293
Hill Descent Control Indicator.......... 112, 227 Traction Control ........................................ 226 Service ...................................................... 372
Hood Open ................................................106 Transmission Temperature....................... 107 Massage
Interior ........................................................ 59 Turn Signals ............................. 59, 112, 277 Seats ...........................................................42
Liftgate Open.............................................106 Vanity Mirror ................................................48 McIntosh ....................................................... 217
Lights On Reminder..................................... 58
379
Memory Feature (Memory Seats) .................... 32 O Operating Precautions .................................. 113

Memory Seat ................................................... 32 Occupant Restraints ..................................... 241 Operator Manual
Memory Seats And Radio ................................ 32 Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ..................... 363 Owner's Manual ........................................ 372
Methanol .......................................................364 Off Road Pages ............................................. 218 Outside Rearview Mirrors .................................49
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Accessory Gauges .................................... 219 Overheating, Engine ...................................... 293
Tricarbonyl (MMT) In Gasoline .......................365 Pitch And Roll ........................................... 219
Mirrors ............................................................. 47 Selec Terrain ............................................ 220 P
Automatic Dimming Rearview ..................... 47 Status Bar ................................................ 218 Paint Care ..................................................... 359
Digital Rearview .......................................... 47 Suspension............................................... 220 Parking Brake ............................................... 119
Exterior Folding ........................................... 49 Vehicle Dynamics ..................................... 219 ParkSense
Heated ........................................................ 50 Off-Road Driving (Off-Pavement) ......................98 Front And Rear.......................................... 151
Outside ........................................................ 49 Oil Change Indicator ........................................95 ParkSense Active Park Assist ........................ 158
Power .......................................................... 49 Reset ...........................................................95 ParkSense System, Rear ............................... 151
Power Folding.............................................. 49 Oil Filter, Change .......................................... 309 Passive Entry....................................................26
Rearview ............................................47, 278 Oil Filter, Selection ........................................ 309 Pedestrian Warning System .......................... 235
Tilt Side Mirrors ........................................... 50 Oil Pressure Light .......................................... 106 Pets ............................................................... 275
Vanity .......................................................... 48 Oil, Engine ..................................................... 308 Pinch Protection ........................................80, 82
Modifications/Alterations Capacity.................................................... 366 Placard, Tire And Loading Information .......... 345
Vehicle ........................................................ 11 Checking................................................... 307 Power
Monitor, Tire Pressure System.......................236 Dipstick .................................................... 307 Brakes ...................................................... 362
Mopar Parts ...................................................371 Disposal ................................................... 309 Distribution Center (Fuses) .....322, 329, 335
Multi-Function Control Lever............................ 56 Filter ......................................................... 309 Door Locks...................................................26
Filter Disposal........................................... 309 Inverter ........................................................76
N Identification Logo .................................... 308 Mirrors .........................................................49
Navigation ....................................................... 98 Materials Added To .................................. 309 Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet).................75
Neutral ..........................................................111 Pressure Warning Light ............................ 106 Seats ...........................................................39
New Vehicle Break-In Period..........................118 Recommendation ............................ 308, 366 Steering .................................................... 134
Night Vision ......................................... 111, 113 Synthetic .................................................. 309 Sunroof .................................................79, 80 11
Night Vision Camera ......................................169 Viscosity ................................................... 366 Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column ................30
Onboard Diagnostic System.......................... 113 Windows ......................................................77
380
Power Seats Rear Axle (Differential) .................................. 321 Roll Over Warning ............................................10
Down ........................................................... 39 Rear Camera........................................ 166, 172 Roof Luggage Rack ..........................................87
Forward ....................................................... 39 Rear Camera, Washer................................... 166 Rotation, Tires ............................................... 357
Rearward..................................................... 39 Rear Cross Path ............................................ 232
Up................................................................ 39 Rear ParkSense System ............................... 151 S
Power Seats, Third Row ................................... 41 Rear Seat Reminder ..................................... 224 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle ........................ 275
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts...................247 Rear Wiper/Washer .........................................63 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ...................... 276
Preparation For Jacking .................................282 Reclining Front Seats .......................................35 Safety Defects, Reporting ............................. 371
Pressure Washing ..........................................308 Recreational Towing ..................................... 185 Safety Information, Tire................................. 341
Pretensioners Reformulated Gasoline ................................. 363 Safety Tips .................................................... 275
Seat Belts..................................................247 Refrigerant .................................................... 310 Safety, Exhaust Gas ...................................... 277
Profile ............................................................194 Release, Hood .................................................82 Schedule, Maintenance ................................ 301
Programmable Features ................................193 Reminder, Seat Belt ...................................... 242 Seat Belts ............................................ 242, 275
Remote Control Adjustable Shoulder Belt .......................... 246
Q Starting System ...........................................21 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage ..... 246
Quadra-Lift .................................. 110, 111, 131 Remote Keyless Entry ......................................16 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt
Quadra-Trac ...................................................128 Arm The Alarm .............................................24 Anchorage ............................................ 246
Disarm The Alarm ........................................24 Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) ........... 247
R Programming Additional Key Fobs ...............19 Child Restraints ........................................ 262
Radial Ply Tires ..............................................349 Remote Sound System (Radio) Control ......... 220 Energy Management Feature ................... 247
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) ............318 Remote Starting Extender ................................................... 246
Radio Exit Remote Start Mode ..............................23 Front Seat ...............................242, 243, 245
Off Road Pages .........................................218 Remote Starting System ..................................21 Inspection ................................................. 275
Settings .....................................................193 Replacement Bulbs ...................................... 340 Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation .................... 245
Sound Setting............................................213 Replacement Keys ...........................................19 Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ................... 245
Radio Operation ............................................221 Replacement Tires ........................................ 351 Lap/Shoulder Belts................................... 243
Radio Remote Controls..................................220 Reporting Safety Defects .............................. 371 Operating Instructions .............................. 245
Rain Sensitive Wiper System ........................... 62 Restraints, Child ........................................... 262 Pregnant Women ...................................... 247
Rear Air Conditioning ....................................... 68 Restraints, Head ..............................................44 Pretensioners ........................................... 247
Rear Seat.................................................. 243
381
Reminder ............................... 106, 112, 242 Service Manuals ........................................... 372 Steering Wheel Audio Controls...................... 220
Seat Belt Extender ....................................246 Settings ..................................................99, 193 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System
Seat Belt Pretensioner ..............................247 Shift Paddles ................................................ 126 Controls ........................................................ 220
Seat Belt Reminder ...................................112 Shifting ......................................................... 122 Stop/Start ...................................109, 112, 135
Untwisting Procedure ................................245 Automatic Transmission .................. 122, 123 Storage ............................................................72
Seat Belts Maintenance ................................360 Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N) ............................. 187 Cargo Area ...................................................86
Seats ................................................. 34, 39, 43 Shifting Out Of NEUTRAL (N) ......................... 188 Storage, Vehicle ............................................ 359
Adjustment ........................................... 34, 39 Shoulder Belts .............................................. 243 Storing Your Vehicle ...................................... 359
Bolster Adjustment...................................... 40 Side Distance Warning ................................. 157 Sun Roof ............................................79, 80, 82
Easy Entry ................................................... 41 Signals, Turn ........................................ 112, 277 Opening .......................................................79
Extend ......................................................... 40 Snow Chains (Tire Chains) ............................ 355 Sun Visor ..........................................................48
Heated ........................................................ 43 Snow Tires .................................................... 352 Sunglasses Storage .........................................72
Massage...................................................... 42 Spare Tires ........................283, 352, 353, 354 Sunshade Operation ..........................73, 80, 81
Memory ....................................................... 32 Speed Control Surround View Camera ................................. 172
Rear Folding ................................................ 34 Accel/Decel (ACC Only) ............................. 140 Sway Control, Trailer ..................................... 229
Reclining ..................................................... 35 Sport Mode ................................................... 127 Symbol Glossary...............................................11
Seatback Release ....................................... 34 Starting ...................................................21, 115 Synthetic Engine Oil ...................................... 309
Tilting .......................................................... 34 Button .........................................................20 System, Remote Starting .................................21
Vented ......................................................... 44 Cold Weather ............................................ 118
Ventilated .................................................... 44 Engine Block Heater ................................. 118 T
Second Row USB ............................................. 74 Engine Fails To Start................................. 117 Telescoping Steering Column ...........................30
Security Alarm ........................................24, 107 Remote ........................................................21 Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) .............69
Arm The System .......................................... 24 Starting And Operating.................................. 115 Third Party Apps ............................................ 217
Disarm The System ..................................... 24 Starting Procedures ...................................... 115 Third Row USB .................................................74
Selec-Speed Control ......................................113 Steering ...........................................................30 Tie Down Hooks, Cargo ....................................87
Selec-Terrain .................................................130 Power ....................................................... 134 Tilt Steering Column .........................................30
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) .................................. 20 Tilt Column ..................................................30 Tire And Loading Information Placard ........... 345
Sentry Key Replacement ................................. 19 Wheel, Heated .............................................31 Tire Identification Number (TIN) .................... 343 11
Service Assistance .........................................369 Wheel, Tilt....................................................30 Tire Markings ................................................ 341
Service Contract ............................................370 Wheel, Voice Recognition ............................31 Tire Safety Information.................................. 341
382
Tire Terminology And Definitions ...................344 To Open Hood ..................................................82 Trailer Weight ................................................ 180
Tires..........................276, 348, 352, 353, 358 Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight ............. 178, 181 Transfer Case ................................................ 321
Aging (Life Of Tires) ...................................351 Towing ................................................. 177, 295 Fluid.......................................................... 368
Air Pressure ...............................................348 Disabled Vehicle ....................................... 295 Maintenance ............................................ 321
Chains .......................................................355 Guide ........................................................ 180 Transmission................................................. 123
Changing ...................................................281 Recreational ............................................. 185 Automatic ........................................ 123, 320
Compact Spare .........................................353 Weight ...................................................... 180 Fluid.......................................................... 368
General Information ............... 348, 352, 353 Towing Behind A Motorhome ........................ 185 Maintenance ............................................ 320
High Speed ................................................349 Towing Eyes .................................................. 298 Shifting ..................................................... 122
Inflation Pressure ......................................349 Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Temperature ............................................. 107
Life Of Tires ...............................................351 Vehicle .......................................................... 185 Transporting Pets .......................................... 275
Load Capacity............................................345 Traction Control ............................................ 229 Tread Wear Indicators ................................... 350
Pressure Monitoring System Traffic Sign Assist System ............................. 145 Trip Computer ..................................................98
(TPMS) ........................................ 109, 236 TrailCam System ........................................... 168 Turn Signals .................................................. 112
Quality Grading..........................................358 Trailer Frontal Area ....................................... 178
Radial ........................................................349 Trailer Sway Control (TSC) .................... 178, 229 U
Replacement .............................................351 Trailer Towing ............................................... 177 Uconnect (Radio) .......................................... 192
Rotation ....................................................357 Hitch Cover Removal ................................ 181 Uconnect 5/5 NAV ........................................ 192
Run Flat.....................................................350 Hitches ..................................................... 179 Uconnect Settings ......................................... 193
Safety .............................................. 341, 348 Minimum Requirements ........................... 182 Customer Programmable Features .......26, 29
Sizes..........................................................342 Tips........................................................... 184 Passive Entry Programming ..................26, 29
Snow Tires .................................................352 Trailer And Tongue Weight........................ 181 Uniform Tire Quality Grades .......................... 358
Spare Tires ....................283, 352, 353, 354 Weight-Carrying Hitch ............................... 178 Universal Garage Door Opener
Spinning ....................................................350 Weight-Distributing Hitch .......................... 178 (Homelink®) — If Equipped b
.......................51
Trailer Towing ............................................182 Wiring ....................................................... 183 Unleaded Gasoline ........................................ 363
Tread Wear Indicators ...............................350
Types .........................................................352
Wheel Nut Torque .....................................362
383
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ....................245 W Windshield Defroster .................................... 275

USB Warning Flashers, Hazard ............................. 278 Windshield DeIcer ............................................63
Second Row ................................................ 74 Warning Lights Windshield Washers .............................. 61, 307
Third Row .................................................... 74 (Instrument Cluster Descriptions) ................. 104 Fluid.......................................................... 307
USB Port .......................................................... 73 Warning Lights And Messages ...................... 104 Windshield Wiper Blades .............................. 313
Warnings, Roll Over .........................................10 Windshield Wipers ...........................................61
V Warranty Information .................................... 371 Wipers Blade Replacement ........................... 313
Vanity Mirrors .................................................. 48 Washers, Windshield .................... 61, 108, 307 Wipers, Intermittent .........................................61
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ...............362 Washing Vehicle ........................................... 359 Wipers, Rain Sensitive .....................................62
Vehicle Loading ................................... 176, 345 Wheel And Wheel Tire Care .......................... 354 Wireless Charging Pad .....................................76
Vehicle Maintenance .....................................308 Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim ........................... 354
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations .................... 11 Wind Buffeting .................................................79
Vehicle Security Alarm ..................................... 24 Window Fogging ...............................................71
Vehicle Settings .............................................193 Window Lockout Switch ...................................79
Vehicle Storage .............................................359 Windows ..........................................................77
Voice Command .............................................. 31 Power ..........................................................77
Voice Recognition System (VR) ........................ 31 Reset Auto-Up..............................................78
11
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control,
vehicle. This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on resulting in an accident and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device
this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the or feature that may take their attention off the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios,
right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting
obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured. while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself unable to devote your full
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. attention to vehicle operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of
used in substitution therefore. cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Jeep® brand vehicle and to provide a convenient
Navigation/Uconnect manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover. reference source for common questions.
U.S. Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit mopar.com/om (U.S.), owners.mopar.ca
Booklet by calling 1-877-426-5337 or by contacting your dealer. Replacement kits can be purchased by visiting www.techauthority.com. (Canada) or your local Jeep® brand dealer.
Canadian Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the
Warranty Booklet or purchase a replacement kit by calling 1-800-387-1143 or by contacting your dealer.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a rideshare, a friend
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, or use public transportation.
phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust,
do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area WARNING
and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired
information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle. when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
2021 GRAND CHEROKEE L
Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing what
steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you’ll find the app an important extension of
your Jeep® brand vehicle. Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly
202 1 G RA N D C H E R O K E E L
to the App Store® or Google Play® Store and enter the search keyword “JEEP” (U.S. residents only). OW NE R’ S M ANUAL
U. S. Canada
DOWNLOAD THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL,

RADIO AND WARRANTY BOOKS
mopar.com/om owners.mopar.ca
©2021 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés. Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC. Jeep est une Fifth Edition
marque déposée de FCA US LLC. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google. 21_WL_OM_EN_USC

P126094 21 WL Om en Usc Digital

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

P126094 21 WL Om en Usc Digital

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

P126094 21 WL Om en Usc Digital

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2021 GRAND CHEROKEE L

DOWNLOAD THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL,

2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ................................................................................. 16 2

3 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ....................................................... 89 3

4 STARTING AND OPERATING ................................................................................................ 115 4

5 MULTIMEDIA ............................................................................................................................... 192 5

6 SAFETY ........................................................................................................................................ 222 6

INTRODUCTION DOORS.....................................................................25 SEATS .................................................................... 34

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR STARTING AND OPERATING Quadra-Trac II Operating Instructions/

FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE ..............................295 VEHICLE MAINTENANCE..................................... 308 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION

FUEL REQUIREMENTS ........................................363 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE WARRANTY INFORMATION................................371

SYMBOLS KEY ROLLOVER WARNING

Rollover Warning Label

VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS Red Warning Lights

Air Bag Warning Light Liftgate Open Warning Light

Brake Warning Light Night Vision Animal Detected Warning Light

Red Warning Lights Yellow Warning Lights

Oil Temperature Warning Light Electronic Park Brake Warning Light

Vehicle Security Warning Light Active Lane Management Warning Light

Yellow Warning Lights Yellow Warning Lights

Low Fuel Warning Light Service Stop/Start System Warning Light 1

Night Vision Animal Detected Warning Light

4WD Low Indicator Light

Yellow Indicator Lights Green Indicator Lights

Auto HOLD! Fault Indicator Light Front Fog Indicator Light

NEUTRAL Indicator Light Night Vision Active Indicator Light

Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light

Green Indicator Lights White Indicator Lights

Turn Signal Indicator Lights Active Lane Management Indicator Light 1

Rear Seat Unoccupied Indicator Light

Gray Indicator Lights

Night Vision Suppressed Indicator Light

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17

18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

2. Hold the key fob with the button side facing

Emergency Key Removal Key Fob Battery Location

Pry Apart Key Fob Halves

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19

NOTE: NOTE:  Only key fobs that are programmed to the

20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

SENTRY KEY If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21

22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: NOTE:  Liftgate closed

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23

24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25

26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Rear Passenger Power Door Locks

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27

28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29

To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate NOTE: CHILD-P ROTECTION DOOR LOCK

AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS —

30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: STEERING WHEEL WARNING!

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31

Use the four-way control to adjust the steering